Trust - Digital Lifestyle Accessories - Bluetooth 4.0 Adapter - Farnell Element 14 - Revenir à l'accueil
![[TXT]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/icons/text.gif){kind=icon}
Farnell-MULTICOMP-Ra..> 22-Jul-2014 12:35 5.9M
Farnell-RASPBERRY-PI..> 22-Jul-2014 12:35 5.9M
Farnell-Dremel-Exper..> 22-Jul-2014 12:34 1.6M
Farnell-STM32F103x8-..> 22-Jul-2014 12:33 1.6M
Farnell-BD6xxx-PDF.htm 22-Jul-2014 12:33 1.6M
Farnell-L78S-STMicro..> 22-Jul-2014 12:32 1.6M
Farnell-RaspiCam-Doc..> 22-Jul-2014 12:32 1.6M
Farnell-SB520-SB5100..> 22-Jul-2014 12:32 1.6M
Farnell-iServer-Micr..> 22-Jul-2014 12:32 1.6M
Farnell-LUMINARY-MIC..> 22-Jul-2014 12:31 3.6M
Farnell-TEXAS-INSTRU..> 22-Jul-2014 12:31 2.4M
Farnell-TEXAS-INSTRU..> 22-Jul-2014 12:30 4.6M
Farnell-CLASS 1-or-2..> 22-Jul-2014 12:30 4.7M
Farnell-TEXAS-INSTRU..> 22-Jul-2014 12:29 4.8M
Farnell-Evaluating-t..> 22-Jul-2014 12:28 4.9M
Farnell-LM3S6952-Mic..> 22-Jul-2014 12:27 5.9M
Farnell-Keyboard-Mou..> 22-Jul-2014 12:27 5.9M
Farnell-Full-Datashe..> 15-Jul-2014 17:08 951K
Farnell-pmbta13_pmbt..> 15-Jul-2014 17:06 959K
Farnell-EE-SPX303N-4..> 15-Jul-2014 17:06 969K
Farnell-Datasheet-NX..> 15-Jul-2014 17:06 1.0M
Farnell-Datasheet-Fa..> 15-Jul-2014 17:05 1.0M
Farnell-MIDAS-un-tra..> 15-Jul-2014 17:05 1.0M
Farnell-SERIAL-TFT-M..> 15-Jul-2014 17:05 1.0M
Farnell-MCOC1-Farnel..> 15-Jul-2014 17:05 1.0M
Farnell-TMR-2-series..> 15-Jul-2014 16:48 787K
Farnell-DC-DC-Conver..> 15-Jul-2014 16:48 781K
Farnell-Full-Datashe..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47 803K
Farnell-TMLM-Series-..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47 810K
Farnell-TEL-5-Series..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47 814K
Farnell-TXL-series-t..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47 829K
Farnell-TEP-150WI-Se..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47 837K
Farnell-AC-DC-Power-..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47 845K
Farnell-TIS-Instruct..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47 845K
Farnell-TOS-tracopow..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47 852K
Farnell-TCL-DC-traco..> 15-Jul-2014 16:46 858K
Farnell-TIS-series-t..> 15-Jul-2014 16:46 875K
Farnell-TMR-2-Series..> 15-Jul-2014 16:46 897K
Farnell-TMR-3-WI-Ser..> 15-Jul-2014 16:46 939K
Farnell-TEN-8-WI-Ser..> 15-Jul-2014 16:46 939K
Farnell-Full-Datashe..> 15-Jul-2014 16:46 947K
Farnell-HIP4081A-Int..> 07-Jul-2014 19:47 1.0M
Farnell-ISL6251-ISL6..> 07-Jul-2014 19:47 1.1M
Farnell-DG411-DG412-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:47 1.0M
Farnell-3367-ARALDIT..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46 1.2M
Farnell-ICM7228-Inte..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46 1.1M
Farnell-Data-Sheet-K..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46 1.2M
Farnell-Silica-Gel-M..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46 1.2M
Farnell-TKC2-Dusters..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46 1.2M
Farnell-CRC-HANDCLEA..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46 1.2M
Farnell-760G-French-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:45 1.2M
Farnell-Decapant-KF-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:45 1.2M
Farnell-1734-ARALDIT..> 07-Jul-2014 19:45 1.2M
Farnell-Araldite-Fus..> 07-Jul-2014 19:45 1.2M
Farnell-fiche-de-don..> 07-Jul-2014 19:44 1.4M
Farnell-safety-data-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:44 1.4M
Farnell-A-4-Hardener..> 07-Jul-2014 19:44 1.4M
Farnell-CC-Debugger-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:44 1.5M
Farnell-MSP430-Hardw..> 07-Jul-2014 19:43 1.8M
Farnell-SmartRF06-Ev..> 07-Jul-2014 19:43 1.6M
Farnell-CC2531-USB-H..> 07-Jul-2014 19:43 1.8M
Farnell-Alimentation..> 07-Jul-2014 19:43 1.8M
Farnell-BK889B-PONT-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:42 1.8M
Farnell-User-Guide-M..> 07-Jul-2014 19:41 2.0M
Farnell-T672-3000-Se..> 07-Jul-2014 19:41 2.0M
Farnell-0050375063-D..> 18-Jul-2014 17:03 2.5M
Farnell-Mini-Fit-Jr-..> 18-Jul-2014 17:03 2.5M
Farnell-43031-0002-M..> 18-Jul-2014 17:03 2.5M
Farnell-0433751001-D..> 18-Jul-2014 17:02 2.5M
Farnell-Cube-3D-Prin..> 18-Jul-2014 17:02 2.5M
Farnell-MTX-Compact-..> 18-Jul-2014 17:01 2.5M
Farnell-MTX-3250-MTX..> 18-Jul-2014 17:01 2.5M
Farnell-ATtiny26-L-A..> 18-Jul-2014 17:00 2.6M
Farnell-MCP3421-Micr..> 18-Jul-2014 17:00 1.2M
Farnell-LM19-Texas-I..> 18-Jul-2014 17:00 1.2M
Farnell-Data-Sheet-S..> 18-Jul-2014 17:00 1.2M
Farnell-LMH6518-Texa..> 18-Jul-2014 16:59 1.3M
Farnell-AD7719-Low-V..> 18-Jul-2014 16:59 1.4M
Farnell-DAC8143-Data..> 18-Jul-2014 16:59 1.5M
Farnell-BGA7124-400-..> 18-Jul-2014 16:59 1.5M
Farnell-SICK-OPTIC-E..> 18-Jul-2014 16:58 1.5M
Farnell-LT3757-Linea..> 18-Jul-2014 16:58 1.6M
Farnell-LT1961-Linea..> 18-Jul-2014 16:58 1.6M
Farnell-PIC18F2420-2..> 18-Jul-2014 16:57 2.5M
Farnell-DS3231-DS-PD..> 18-Jul-2014 16:57 2.5M
Farnell-RDS-80-PDF.htm 18-Jul-2014 16:57 1.3M
Farnell-AD8300-Data-..> 18-Jul-2014 16:56 1.3M
Farnell-LT6233-Linea..> 18-Jul-2014 16:56 1.3M
Farnell-MAX1365-MAX1..> 18-Jul-2014 16:56 1.4M
Farnell-XPSAF5130-PD..> 18-Jul-2014 16:56 1.4M
Farnell-DP83846A-DsP..> 18-Jul-2014 16:55 1.5M
Farnell-Dremel-Exper..> 18-Jul-2014 16:55 1.6M
Farnell-MCOC1-Farnel..> 16-Jul-2014 09:04 1.0M
Farnell-SL3S1203_121..> 16-Jul-2014 09:04 1.1M
Farnell-PN512-Full-N..> 16-Jul-2014 09:03 1.4M
Farnell-SL3S4011_402..> 16-Jul-2014 09:03 1.1M
Farnell-LPC408x-7x 3..> 16-Jul-2014 09:03 1.6M
Farnell-PCF8574-PCF8..> 16-Jul-2014 09:03 1.7M
Farnell-LPC81xM-32-b..> 16-Jul-2014 09:02 2.0M
Farnell-LPC1769-68-6..> 16-Jul-2014 09:02 1.9M
Farnell-Download-dat..> 16-Jul-2014 09:02 2.2M
Farnell-LPC3220-30-4..> 16-Jul-2014 09:02 2.2M
Farnell-LPC11U3x-32-..> 16-Jul-2014 09:01 2.4M
Farnell-SL3ICS1002-1..> 16-Jul-2014 09:01 2.5M
Farnell-T672-3000-Se..> 08-Jul-2014 18:59 2.0M
Farnell-tesa®pack63..> 08-Jul-2014 18:56 2.0M
Farnell-Encodeur-USB..> 08-Jul-2014 18:56 2.0M
Farnell-CC2530ZDK-Us..> 08-Jul-2014 18:55 2.1M
Farnell-2020-Manuel-..> 08-Jul-2014 18:55 2.1M
Farnell-Synchronous-..> 08-Jul-2014 18:54 2.1M
Farnell-Arithmetic-L..> 08-Jul-2014 18:54 2.1M
Farnell-NA555-NE555-..> 08-Jul-2014 18:53 2.2M
Farnell-4-Bit-Magnit..> 08-Jul-2014 18:53 2.2M
Farnell-LM555-Timer-..> 08-Jul-2014 18:53 2.2M
Farnell-L293d-Texas-..> 08-Jul-2014 18:53 2.2M
Farnell-SN54HC244-SN..> 08-Jul-2014 18:52 2.3M
Farnell-MAX232-MAX23..> 08-Jul-2014 18:52 2.3M
Farnell-High-precisi..> 08-Jul-2014 18:51 2.3M
Farnell-SMU-Instrume..> 08-Jul-2014 18:51 2.3M
Farnell-900-Series-B..> 08-Jul-2014 18:50 2.3M
Farnell-BA-Series-Oh..> 08-Jul-2014 18:50 2.3M
Farnell-UTS-Series-S..> 08-Jul-2014 18:49 2.5M
Farnell-270-Series-O..> 08-Jul-2014 18:49 2.3M
Farnell-UTS-Series-S..> 08-Jul-2014 18:49 2.8M
Farnell-Tiva-C-Serie..> 08-Jul-2014 18:49 2.6M
Farnell-UTO-Souriau-..> 08-Jul-2014 18:48 2.8M
Farnell-Clipper-Seri..> 08-Jul-2014 18:48 2.8M
Farnell-SOURIAU-Cont..> 08-Jul-2014 18:47 3.0M
Farnell-851-Series-P..> 08-Jul-2014 18:47 3.0M
Farnell-SL59830-Inte..> 06-Jul-2014 10:07 1.0M
Farnell-ALF1210-PDF.htm 06-Jul-2014 10:06 4.0M
Farnell-AD7171-16-Bi..> 06-Jul-2014 10:06 1.0M
Farnell-Low-Noise-24..> 06-Jul-2014 10:05 1.0M
Farnell-ESCON-Featur..> 06-Jul-2014 10:05 938K
Farnell-74LCX573-Fai..> 06-Jul-2014 10:05 1.9M
Farnell-1N4148WS-Fai..> 06-Jul-2014 10:04 1.9M
Farnell-FAN6756-Fair..> 06-Jul-2014 10:04 850K
Farnell-Datasheet-Fa..> 06-Jul-2014 10:04 861K
Farnell-ES1F-ES1J-fi..> 06-Jul-2014 10:04 867K
Farnell-QRE1113-Fair..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03 879K
Farnell-2N7002DW-Fai..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03 886K
Farnell-FDC2512-Fair..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03 886K
Farnell-FDV301N-Digi..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03 886K
Farnell-S1A-Fairchil..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03 896K
Farnell-BAV99-Fairch..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03 896K
Farnell-74AC00-74ACT..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03 911K
Farnell-NaPiOn-Panas..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02 911K
Farnell-LQ-RELAYS-AL..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02 924K
Farnell-ev-relays-ae..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02 926K
Farnell-ESCON-Featur..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02 931K
Farnell-Amplifier-In..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02 940K
Farnell-Serial-File-..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02 941K
Farnell-Both-the-Del..> 06-Jul-2014 10:01 948K
Farnell-Videk-PDF.htm 06-Jul-2014 10:01 948K
Farnell-EPCOS-173438..> 04-Jul-2014 10:43 3.3M
Farnell-Sensorless-C..> 04-Jul-2014 10:42 3.3M
Farnell-197.31-KB-Te..> 04-Jul-2014 10:42 3.3M
Farnell-PIC12F609-61..> 04-Jul-2014 10:41 3.7M
Farnell-PADO-semi-au..> 04-Jul-2014 10:41 3.7M
Farnell-03-iec-runds..> 04-Jul-2014 10:40 3.7M
Farnell-ACC-Silicone..> 04-Jul-2014 10:40 3.7M
Farnell-Series-TDS10..> 04-Jul-2014 10:39 4.0M
Farnell-03-iec-runds..> 04-Jul-2014 10:40 3.7M
Farnell-0430300011-D..> 14-Jun-2014 18:13 2.0M
Farnell-06-6544-8-PD..> 26-Mar-2014 17:56 2.7M
Farnell-3M-Polyimide..> 21-Mar-2014 08:09 3.9M
Farnell-3M-VolitionT..> 25-Mar-2014 08:18 3.3M
Farnell-10BQ060-PDF.htm 14-Jun-2014 09:50 2.4M
Farnell-10TPB47M-End..> 14-Jun-2014 18:16 3.4M
Farnell-12mm-Size-In..> 14-Jun-2014 09:50 2.4M
Farnell-24AA024-24LC..> 23-Jun-2014 10:26 3.1M
Farnell-50A-High-Pow..> 20-Mar-2014 17:31 2.9M
Farnell-197.31-KB-Te..> 04-Jul-2014 10:42 3.3M
Farnell-1907-2006-PD..> 26-Mar-2014 17:56 2.7M
Farnell-5910-PDF.htm 25-Mar-2014 08:15 3.0M
Farnell-6517b-Electr..> 29-Mar-2014 11:12 3.3M
Farnell-A-True-Syste..> 29-Mar-2014 11:13 3.3M
Farnell-ACC-Silicone..> 04-Jul-2014 10:40 3.7M
Farnell-AD524-PDF.htm 20-Mar-2014 17:33 2.8M
Farnell-ADL6507-PDF.htm 14-Jun-2014 18:19 3.4M
Farnell-ADSP-21362-A..> 20-Mar-2014 17:34 2.8M
Farnell-ALF1210-PDF.htm 04-Jul-2014 10:39 4.0M
Farnell-ALF1225-12-V..> 01-Apr-2014 07:40 3.4M
Farnell-ALF2412-24-V..> 01-Apr-2014 07:39 3.4M
Farnell-AN10361-Phil..> 23-Jun-2014 10:29 2.1M
Farnell-ARADUR-HY-13..> 26-Mar-2014 17:55 2.8M
Farnell-ARALDITE-201..> 21-Mar-2014 08:12 3.7M
Farnell-ARALDITE-CW-..> 26-Mar-2014 17:56 2.7M
Farnell-ATMEL-8-bit-..> 19-Mar-2014 18:04 2.1M
Farnell-ATMEL-8-bit-..> 11-Mar-2014 07:55 2.1M
Farnell-ATmega640-VA..> 14-Jun-2014 09:49 2.5M
Farnell-ATtiny20-PDF..> 25-Mar-2014 08:19 3.6M
Farnell-ATtiny26-L-A..> 13-Jun-2014 18:40 1.8M
Farnell-Alimentation..> 14-Jun-2014 18:24 2.5M
Farnell-Alimentation..> 01-Apr-2014 07:42 3.4M
Farnell-Amplificateu..> 29-Mar-2014 11:11 3.3M
Farnell-An-Improved-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:49 2.5M
Farnell-Atmel-ATmega..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03 2.2M
Farnell-Avvertenze-e..> 14-Jun-2014 18:20 3.3M
Farnell-BC846DS-NXP-..> 13-Jun-2014 18:42 1.6M
Farnell-BC847DS-NXP-..> 23-Jun-2014 10:24 3.3M
Farnell-BF545A-BF545..> 23-Jun-2014 10:28 2.1M
Farnell-BK2650A-BK26..> 29-Mar-2014 11:10 3.3M
Farnell-BT151-650R-N..> 13-Jun-2014 18:40 1.7M
Farnell-BTA204-800C-..> 13-Jun-2014 18:42 1.6M
Farnell-BUJD203AX-NX..> 13-Jun-2014 18:41 1.7M
Farnell-BYV29F-600-N..> 13-Jun-2014 18:42 1.6M
Farnell-BYV79E-serie..> 10-Mar-2014 16:19 1.6M
Farnell-BZX384-serie..> 23-Jun-2014 10:29 2.1M
Farnell-Battery-GBA-..> 14-Jun-2014 18:13 2.0M
Farnell-C.A-6150-C.A..> 14-Jun-2014 18:24 2.5M
Farnell-C.A 8332B-C...> 01-Apr-2014 07:40 3.4M
Farnell-CC2560-Bluet..> 29-Mar-2014 11:14 2.8M
Farnell-CD4536B-Type..> 14-Jun-2014 18:13 2.0M
Farnell-CIRRUS-LOGIC..> 10-Mar-2014 17:20 2.1M
Farnell-CS5532-34-BS..> 01-Apr-2014 07:39 3.5M
Farnell-Cannon-ZD-PD..> 11-Mar-2014 08:13 2.8M
Farnell-Ceramic-tran..> 14-Jun-2014 18:19 3.4M
Farnell-Circuit-Note..> 26-Mar-2014 18:00 2.8M
Farnell-Circuit-Note..> 26-Mar-2014 18:00 2.8M
Farnell-Cles-electro..> 21-Mar-2014 08:13 3.9M
Farnell-Conception-d..> 11-Mar-2014 07:49 2.4M
Farnell-Connectors-N..> 14-Jun-2014 18:12 2.1M
Farnell-Construction..> 14-Jun-2014 18:25 2.5M
Farnell-Controle-de-..> 11-Mar-2014 08:16 2.8M
Farnell-Cordless-dri..> 14-Jun-2014 18:13 2.0M
Farnell-Current-Tran..> 26-Mar-2014 17:58 2.7M
Farnell-Current-Tran..> 26-Mar-2014 17:58 2.7M
Farnell-Current-Tran..> 26-Mar-2014 17:59 2.7M
Farnell-Current-Tran..> 26-Mar-2014 17:59 2.7M
Farnell-DC-Fan-type-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:48 2.5M
Farnell-DC-Fan-type-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:51 1.8M
Farnell-Davum-TMC-PD..> 14-Jun-2014 18:27 2.4M
Farnell-De-la-puissa..> 29-Mar-2014 11:10 3.3M
Farnell-Directive-re..> 25-Mar-2014 08:16 3.0M
Farnell-Documentatio..> 14-Jun-2014 18:26 2.5M
Farnell-Download-dat..> 13-Jun-2014 18:40 1.8M
Farnell-ECO-Series-T..> 20-Mar-2014 08:14 2.5M
Farnell-ELMA-PDF.htm 29-Mar-2014 11:13 3.3M
Farnell-EMC1182-PDF.htm 25-Mar-2014 08:17 3.0M
Farnell-EPCOS-173438..> 04-Jul-2014 10:43 3.3M
Farnell-EPCOS-Sample..> 11-Mar-2014 07:53 2.2M
Farnell-ES2333-PDF.htm 11-Mar-2014 08:14 2.8M
Farnell-Ed.081002-DA..> 19-Mar-2014 18:02 2.5M
Farnell-F28069-Picco..> 14-Jun-2014 18:14 2.0M
Farnell-F42202-PDF.htm 19-Mar-2014 18:00 2.5M
Farnell-FDS-ITW-Spra..> 14-Jun-2014 18:22 3.3M
Farnell-FICHE-DE-DON..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17 1.6M
Farnell-Fastrack-Sup..> 23-Jun-2014 10:25 3.3M
Farnell-Ferric-Chlor..> 29-Mar-2014 11:14 2.8M
Farnell-Fiche-de-don..> 14-Jun-2014 09:47 2.5M
Farnell-Fiche-de-don..> 14-Jun-2014 18:26 2.5M
Farnell-Fluke-1730-E..> 14-Jun-2014 18:23 2.5M
Farnell-GALVA-A-FROI..> 26-Mar-2014 17:56 2.7M
Farnell-GALVA-MAT-Re..> 26-Mar-2014 17:57 2.7M
Farnell-GN-RELAYS-AG..> 20-Mar-2014 08:11 2.6M
Farnell-HC49-4H-Crys..> 14-Jun-2014 18:20 3.3M
Farnell-HFE1600-Data..> 14-Jun-2014 18:22 3.3M
Farnell-HI-70300-Sol..> 14-Jun-2014 18:27 2.4M
Farnell-HUNTSMAN-Adv..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17 1.7M
Farnell-Haute-vitess..> 11-Mar-2014 08:17 2.4M
Farnell-IP4252CZ16-8..> 13-Jun-2014 18:41 1.7M
Farnell-Instructions..> 19-Mar-2014 18:01 2.5M
Farnell-KSZ8851SNL-S..> 23-Jun-2014 10:28 2.1M
Farnell-L-efficacite..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52 2.3M
Farnell-LCW-CQ7P.CC-..> 25-Mar-2014 08:19 3.2M
Farnell-LME49725-Pow..> 14-Jun-2014 09:49 2.5M
Farnell-LOCTITE-542-..> 25-Mar-2014 08:15 3.0M
Farnell-LOCTITE-3463..> 25-Mar-2014 08:19 3.0M
Farnell-LUXEON-Guide..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52 2.3M
Farnell-Leaded-Trans..> 23-Jun-2014 10:26 3.2M
Farnell-Les-derniers..> 11-Mar-2014 07:50 2.3M
Farnell-Loctite3455-..> 25-Mar-2014 08:16 3.0M
Farnell-Low-cost-Enc..> 13-Jun-2014 18:42 1.7M
Farnell-Lubrifiant-a..> 26-Mar-2014 18:00 2.7M
Farnell-MC3510-PDF.htm 25-Mar-2014 08:17 3.0M
Farnell-MC21605-PDF.htm 11-Mar-2014 08:14 2.8M
Farnell-MCF532x-7x-E..> 29-Mar-2014 11:14 2.8M
Farnell-MICREL-KSZ88..> 11-Mar-2014 07:54 2.2M
Farnell-MICROCHIP-PI..> 19-Mar-2014 18:02 2.5M
Farnell-MOLEX-39-00-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:19 1.9M
Farnell-MOLEX-43020-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21 1.9M
Farnell-MOLEX-43160-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21 1.9M
Farnell-MOLEX-87439-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21 1.9M
Farnell-MPXV7002-Rev..> 20-Mar-2014 17:33 2.8M
Farnell-MX670-MX675-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:46 2.5M
Farnell-Microchip-MC..> 13-Jun-2014 18:27 1.8M
Farnell-Microship-PI..> 11-Mar-2014 07:53 2.2M
Farnell-Midas-Active..> 14-Jun-2014 18:17 3.4M
Farnell-Midas-MCCOG4..> 14-Jun-2014 18:11 2.1M
Farnell-Miniature-Ci..> 26-Mar-2014 17:55 2.8M
Farnell-Mistral-PDF.htm 14-Jun-2014 18:12 2.1M
Farnell-Molex-83421-..> 14-Jun-2014 18:17 3.4M
Farnell-Molex-COMMER..> 14-Jun-2014 18:16 3.4M
Farnell-Molex-Crimp-..> 10-Mar-2014 16:27 1.7M
Farnell-Multi-Functi..> 20-Mar-2014 17:38 3.0M
Farnell-NTE_SEMICOND..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52 2.3M
Farnell-NXP-74VHC126..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17 1.6M
Farnell-NXP-BT136-60..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52 2.3M
Farnell-NXP-PBSS9110..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21 1.9M
Farnell-NXP-PCA9555 ..> 11-Mar-2014 07:54 2.2M
Farnell-NXP-PMBFJ620..> 10-Mar-2014 16:16 1.7M
Farnell-NXP-PSMN1R7-..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17 1.6M
Farnell-NXP-PSMN7R0-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:19 2.1M
Farnell-NXP-TEA1703T..> 11-Mar-2014 08:15 2.8M
Farnell-Nilï¬-sk-E-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:47 2.5M
Farnell-Novembre-201..> 20-Mar-2014 17:38 3.3M
Farnell-OMRON-Master..> 10-Mar-2014 16:26 1.8M
Farnell-OSLON-SSL-Ce..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03 2.1M
Farnell-OXPCIE958-FB..> 13-Jun-2014 18:40 1.8M
Farnell-PADO-semi-au..> 04-Jul-2014 10:41 3.7M
Farnell-PBSS5160T-60..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03 2.1M
Farnell-PDTA143X-ser..> 20-Mar-2014 08:12 2.6M
Farnell-PDTB123TT-NX..> 13-Jun-2014 18:43 1.5M
Farnell-PESD5V0F1BL-..> 13-Jun-2014 18:43 1.5M
Farnell-PESD9X5.0L-P..> 13-Jun-2014 18:43 1.6M
Farnell-PIC12F609-61..> 04-Jul-2014 10:41 3.7M
Farnell-PIC18F2455-2..> 23-Jun-2014 10:27 3.1M
Farnell-PIC24FJ256GB..> 14-Jun-2014 09:51 2.4M
Farnell-PMBT3906-PNP..> 13-Jun-2014 18:44 1.5M
Farnell-PMBT4403-PNP..> 23-Jun-2014 10:27 3.1M
Farnell-PMEG4002EL-N..> 14-Jun-2014 18:18 3.4M
Farnell-PMEG4010CEH-..> 13-Jun-2014 18:43 1.6M
Farnell-Panasonic-15..> 23-Jun-2014 10:29 2.1M
Farnell-Panasonic-EC..> 20-Mar-2014 17:36 2.6M
Farnell-Panasonic-EZ..> 20-Mar-2014 08:10 2.6M
Farnell-Panasonic-Id..> 20-Mar-2014 17:35 2.6M
Farnell-Panasonic-Ne..> 20-Mar-2014 17:36 2.6M
Farnell-Panasonic-Ra..> 20-Mar-2014 17:37 2.6M
Farnell-Panasonic-TS..> 20-Mar-2014 08:12 2.6M
Farnell-Panasonic-Y3..> 20-Mar-2014 08:11 2.6M
Farnell-Pico-Spox-Wi..> 10-Mar-2014 16:16 1.7M
Farnell-Pompes-Charg..> 24-Apr-2014 20:23 3.3M
Farnell-Ponts-RLC-po..> 14-Jun-2014 18:23 3.3M
Farnell-Portable-Ana..> 29-Mar-2014 11:16 2.8M
Farnell-Premier-Farn..> 21-Mar-2014 08:11 3.8M
Farnell-Produit-3430..> 14-Jun-2014 09:48 2.5M
Farnell-Proskit-SS-3..> 10-Mar-2014 16:26 1.8M
Farnell-Puissance-ut..> 11-Mar-2014 07:49 2.4M
Farnell-Q48-PDF.htm 23-Jun-2014 10:29 2.1M
Farnell-Radial-Lead-..> 20-Mar-2014 08:12 2.6M
Farnell-Realiser-un-..> 11-Mar-2014 07:51 2.3M
Farnell-Reglement-RE..> 21-Mar-2014 08:08 3.9M
Farnell-Repartiteurs..> 14-Jun-2014 18:26 2.5M
Farnell-S-TRI-SWT860..> 21-Mar-2014 08:11 3.8M
Farnell-SB175-Connec..> 11-Mar-2014 08:14 2.8M
Farnell-SMBJ-Transil..> 29-Mar-2014 11:12 3.3M
Farnell-SOT-23-Multi..> 11-Mar-2014 07:51 2.3M
Farnell-SPLC780A1-16..> 14-Jun-2014 18:25 2.5M
Farnell-SSC7102-Micr..> 23-Jun-2014 10:25 3.2M
Farnell-SVPE-series-..> 14-Jun-2014 18:15 2.0M
Farnell-Sensorless-C..> 04-Jul-2014 10:42 3.3M
Farnell-Septembre-20..> 20-Mar-2014 17:46 3.7M
Farnell-Serie-PicoSc..> 19-Mar-2014 18:01 2.5M
Farnell-Serie-Standa..> 14-Jun-2014 18:23 3.3M
Farnell-Series-2600B..> 20-Mar-2014 17:30 3.0M
Farnell-Series-TDS10..> 04-Jul-2014 10:39 4.0M
Farnell-Signal-PCB-R..> 14-Jun-2014 18:11 2.1M
Farnell-Strangkuhlko..> 21-Mar-2014 08:09 3.9M
Farnell-Supercapacit..> 26-Mar-2014 17:57 2.7M
Farnell-TDK-Lambda-H..> 14-Jun-2014 18:21 3.3M
Farnell-TEKTRONIX-DP..> 10-Mar-2014 17:20 2.0M
Farnell-Tektronix-AC..> 13-Jun-2014 18:44 1.5M
Farnell-Telemetres-l..> 20-Mar-2014 17:46 3.7M
Farnell-Termometros-..> 14-Jun-2014 18:14 2.0M
Farnell-The-essentia..> 10-Mar-2014 16:27 1.7M
Farnell-U2270B-PDF.htm 14-Jun-2014 18:15 3.4M
Farnell-USB-Buccanee..> 14-Jun-2014 09:48 2.5M
Farnell-USB1T11A-PDF..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03 2.1M
Farnell-V4N-PDF.htm 14-Jun-2014 18:11 2.1M
Farnell-WetTantalum-..> 11-Mar-2014 08:14 2.8M
Farnell-XPS-AC-Octop..> 14-Jun-2014 18:11 2.1M
Farnell-XPS-MC16-XPS..> 11-Mar-2014 08:15 2.8M
Farnell-YAGEO-DATA-S..> 11-Mar-2014 08:13 2.8M
Farnell-ZigBee-ou-le..> 11-Mar-2014 07:50 2.4M
Farnell-celpac-SUL84..> 21-Mar-2014 08:11 3.8M
Farnell-china_rohs_o..> 21-Mar-2014 10:04 3.9M
Farnell-cree-Xlamp-X..> 20-Mar-2014 17:34 2.8M
Farnell-cree-Xlamp-X..> 20-Mar-2014 17:35 2.7M
Farnell-cree-Xlamp-X..> 20-Mar-2014 17:31 2.9M
Farnell-cree-Xlamp-m..> 20-Mar-2014 17:32 2.9M
Farnell-cree-Xlamp-m..> 20-Mar-2014 17:32 2.9M
Farnell-ir1150s_fr.p..> 29-Mar-2014 11:11 3.3M
Farnell-manual-bus-p..> 10-Mar-2014 16:29 1.9M
Farnell-propose-plus..> 11-Mar-2014 08:19 2.8M
Farnell-techfirst_se..> 21-Mar-2014 08:08 3.9M
Farnell-testo-205-20..> 20-Mar-2014 17:37 3.0M
Farnell-testo-470-Fo..> 20-Mar-2014 17:38 3.0M
Farnell-uC-OS-III-Br..> 10-Mar-2014 17:20 2.0M
Sefram-7866HD.pdf-PD..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46 472K
Sefram-CAT_ENREGISTR..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46 461K
Sefram-CAT_MESUREURS..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46 435K
Sefram-GUIDE_SIMPLIF..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46 481K
Sefram-GUIDE_SIMPLIF..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46 442K
Sefram-GUIDE_SIMPLIF..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46 422K
Sefram-SP270.pdf-PDF..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46 464KTRUST.COM Bluetooth 4.0 USB adapter Ultra small Bluetooth 4.0 USB adapter to wirelessly connect your notebook with your smartphone, tablet or other Bluetooth device Key features Latest Bluetooth® 4.0 technology Low energy mode 15 meter wireless range Ultra small size Compatibel with older Bluetooth versions More information Item number : Product link : EAN-code : Marketing materials : carton/pallet : 18187 www.trust.com/18187 8713439181876 www.trust.com/18187/materials 80/2880 ©2012 Trust Computer Products. All rights reserved. All brand names are registered trademarks of their respective owners. Specifications are subject to change without prior notice. TRUST.COM Bluetooth 4.0 USB adapter Ultra small Bluetooth 4.0 USB adapter to wirelessly connect your notebook with your smartphone, tablet or other Bluetooth device Key features Latest Bluetooth® 4.0 technology Low energy mode 15 meter wireless range Ultra small size Compatibel with older Bluetooth versions More information Item number : Product link : EAN-code : Marketing materials : carton/pallet : 18187 www.trust.com/18187 8713439181876 www.trust.com/18187/materials 80/2880 ©2012 Trust Computer Products. All rights reserved. All brand names are registered trademarks of their respective owners. Specifications are subject to change without prior notice. 1 1 Insert SD card See page 3 for how to prepare the SD card 3 Connect input Plug in a USB keyboard and mouse 2a Connect display Plug in your digital TV or monitor 4 Connect network Connect to your wired network [optional] 5 Power up Plug in the micro USB power supply 2b Connect display If not using HDMI, plug in your analogue TV or display Quick start 1 2b Connect display If not using HDMI, plug in your analogue TV or display Quick start 1 To set up your Raspberry Pi you will need: Item Minimum recommended specification & notes 1 SD card • Minimum size 4Gb; class 4 (the class indicates how fast the card is). • We recommend using branded SD cards as they are more reliable. 2a HDMI to HDMI / DVI lead • HDMI to HDMI lead (for HD TVs and monitors with HDMI input). OR HDMI to DVI lead (for monitors with DVI input). • Leads and adapters are available for few pounds -- there is no need to buy expensive ones! 2b RCA video lead • A standard RCA composite video lead to connect to your analogue display if you are not using the HDMI output. 3 Keyboard and mouse • Any standard USB keyboard and mouse should work. • Keyboards or mice that take a lot of power from the USB ports, however, may need a powered USB hub. This may include some wireless devices. 4 Ethernet (network) cable [optional] • Networking is optional, although it makes updating and getting new software for your Raspberry Pi much easier. 5 Power adapter • A good quality, micro USB power supply that can provide at least 700mA at 5V is essential. • Many mobile phone chargers are suitable—check the label on the plug. • If your supply provides less than 5V then your Raspberry Pi may not work at all, or it may behave erratically. Be wary of very cheap chargers: some are not what they claim to be. • It does not matter if your supply is rated at more than 700mA. 6 Audio lead [optional] • If you are using HDMI then you will get digital audio via this. • If you are using the analogue RCA connection, stereo audio is available from the 3.5mm jack next to the RCA connector. HDMI connector HDMI to DVI lead RCA composite video connector Know your leads: 2 Preparing your SD card for the Raspberry Pi In order to use your Raspberry Pi, you will need to install an Operating System (OS) onto an SD card. An Operating System is the set of basic programs and utilities that allow your computer to run; examples include Windows on a PC or OSX on a Mac. These instructions will guide you through installing a recovery program on your SD card that will allow you to easily install different OS’s and to recover your card if you break it. 1. Insert an SD card that is 4GB or greater in size into your computer 2. Format the SD card so that the Pi can read it a. Windows i. Download the SD Association's Formatting Tool1 from https://www.sdcard.org/downloads/formatter_4/eula_windows/ ii. Install and run the Formatting Tool on your machine iii. Set "FORMAT SIZE ADJUSTMENT" option to "ON" in the "Options" menu iv. Check that the SD card you inserted matches the one selected by the Tool v. Click the “Format” button b. Mac i. Download the SD Association's Formatting Tool from https://www.sdcard.org/downloads/formatter_4/eula_mac/ ii. Install and run the Formatting Tool on your machine iii. Select “Overwrite Format” iv. Check that the SD card you inserted matches the one selected by the Tool v. Click the “Format” button c. Linux i. We recommend using gparted (or the command line version parted) ii. Format the entire disk as FAT 3. Download the New Out Of Box Software (NOOBS) from: downloads.raspberrypi.org/noobs 4. Unzip the downloaded file a. Windows Right click on the file and choose “Extract all” b. Mac Double tap on the file c. Linux Run unzip [downloaded filename] 5. Copy the extracted files onto the SD card that you just formatted 6. Insert the SD card into your Pi and connect the power supply Your Pi will now boot into NOOBS and should display a list of operating systems that you can choose to install. If your display remains blank, you should select the correct output mode for your display by pressing one of the following number keys on your keyboard; 1. HDMI mode this is the default display mode. 2. HDMI safe mode select this mode if you are using the HDMI connector and cannot see anything on screen when the Pi has booted. 3. Composite PAL mode select either this mode or composite NTSC mode if you are using the composite RCA video connector 4. Composite NTSC mode 1Note: The builtin Windows formatting tool will only format the first partition that Windows can read not the entire disk. For this reason we advise using the official SD Card Association Formatting Tool. multipacPRO 19" chassis –O UK 04/2006 Electronics Packaging www.schroff.biz Overview ........... 0 Cabinets ............ 1 Wall mounted cases ............... 2 Accessories for cabinets and wall mounted cases .... 3 Climate control .... 4 Desk-top cases .... 5 Subracks/ 19" chassis ......... 6 Front panels, plug-in units ....... 7 Systems ............ 8 Power supply units ................ 9 Backplanes ....... 10 Connectors, front panel component system ............ 11 Appendix ......... 12 Further important information can be found on the internet under www.schroff.biz 6.76 O 0600200306002001 Standards/certifications Modifications External dimensions in accordance with IEC 602973 Type of protection IP 20 in accordance with IEC 60529 EMC test in accordance with VG 95373 part Note Where finish is identified as being chromated this provides a conductive surface to maintain high levels of EMC shielding effectiveness Special colours Special depths and widths Front Panel Express: customised cut-outs in front panels, rear panels, cover and base plates Base plate with integrated rear panel Customised assembly service Modification examples 06002006 06002007 06002005 Different cut-outs Combined 3 U and 6 U assembly 2 U version with 2 x 3 U assembly For further application examples, see multipac on the Internet 19" chassis –O Electronics Packaging www.schroff.biz UK 04/2006 6.77 O 19" chassis for horizontal board assembly (standardised) and non-standardised components EMC shielding can be retrofitted Versions made of Aluminium or Steel (zinc-plated, AlZn coated) Use of telescopic slides possible Text Text 19" complete chassis 1, 2 U Al front panel, St chassis (AIZn coating) 06002003 Configuration of 19" chassis 19" chassis for non-standardised assembly For the assembly of power supplies with chassis plate, boards... 1 ... 5 U Al front panel, Al extrusion 06002004 19" chassis for standardised assembly, IEC 60297 For the assembly of a connector (EN 60603) or isolated backplanes 1, 2 U Al front panel, Al extrusion 06004002 Overview ....... 6.76 19" complete chassis ......... 6.78 Configuration of 19" chassis ..... 6.79 19" chassis for non-standardised components . . . . . 6.80 (Basic frame, chassis plate, covers, front handles, assembly kit for assembly of telescopic slides) 19" chassis for standardised 19" components .... 6.82 (Basic frame, base plate, internal configuration, front handles, assembly kit for assembly of telescopic slides) Guide rails . . . . . 6.84 6.78 UK 04/2006 Electronics Packaging www.schroff.biz 19" chassis –O 06002003 06002051 h = clearance (height H - 30), w = clearance width = 447 mm O Complete chassis, St (AIZn coated), with Al extrusion front panel Detachable rear panel for easy assembly 19" and ATX power supplies can be assembled in the 1 U version up to a clearance of 40 mm Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Note Further dimensions available on request Use of telescopic slides not possible No EMC version available Internal configuration kits cannot be used 19" complete chassis Item Qty Description 1 1 Front panel, Al extrusion, 2 mm, front anodised, rear etched (at 1 U), colourless chromated front and rear side of the front panel, from 2 U clear chromated 2 1 Base body plain, St, 1mm, (AIZn coated) 3 1 Rear panel, St, 1mm, (AIZn coated) 4 1 Cover plain, St, 1mm, (AIZn coated) 5 1 Assembly kit Height Height H Depth T Order no. U mm mm 1 43.7 220 20860-120 1 43.7 280 20860-121 1 43.7 340 20860-122 2 88.1 280 20860-126 2 88.1 340 20860-127 Front handles For 1 U, Al extrusion, anodised, PU 2 pieces 20860-256 Front handles For 2 U, Al extrusion, anodised, PU 2 pieces 20860-257 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick code = Order no. Electronics Packaging www.schroff.biz UK 04/2006 6.79 19" chassis –O 06002001 Example for standardised configuration 06002004 Basic kit 06002050 Dimensions basic kit O Choose height and depth of the basic kit Choose further components For non-standardised versions (1 ... 5 U) – Chassis plate – Cover – Front handles – EMC gasket – Telescopic slides For standardised versions (1, 2 U) in accordance with IEC 60297 – Support cover for horizontal board assembly – Internal configuration for connector or backplane assembly – Front handles – EMC gasket – Telescopic slides Delivery comprises (basic kit) Note h = clearance height = H - 8.1 mm b = clearance width = 403 mm Non-standardised assembly (1 ... 5 U), see page 6.80 Standardised assembly (1, 2 U), see page 6.82 Configuration of 19" chassis 1 2 3 H b h T Item Qty Description 1 2 (4) Al extrusion (2 pieces from 5 U) 2 1 Rear panel, Al, 2 mm, clear chromated 3 1 Front panel, Al extrusion, 3 mm, front anodised, rear etched (at 1U), front and rear side of the front panel from clear chromated (at 2U) 4 1 Assembly kit and user manual 5 1 EMC gasket profile kit (only at 5 U) 6.80 UK 04/2006 Electronics Packaging www.schroff.biz 19" chassis –O Select – Height and depth of the basic kit (1 ... 5 U) – Chassis plate – Cover plate – Front handles – EMC gasket – Telescopic slides Order Information Note Further dimensions available on request 19" chassis for non-standardised components Basic frame Chassis plate Cover plate, plain perforated 06002004 06002058 06002053 06002053 Frame, Al extrusion, front panel, Al, rear panel, Al, (5 U 2 pieces and with EMC shielding) For heavy components, Al, 2 mm Pushed into basic frame, Al, 1 mm, clear chromated, please order EMC gasket separately Pushed into basic frame, Al, 1 mm, clear chromated, hole diameter 4 mm, degree of perforation 58 % Height Height Width W Depth D U mm HP mm 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 5 43.7 84 220 20860-201 20860-107 30860-501 30860-510 5 43.7 84 280 20860-202 20860-108 30860-502 30860-511 5 43.7 84 340 20860-203 20860-109 30860-503 30860-512 2 88.1 84 220 20860-210 20860-107 30860-501 30860-510 2 88.1 84 280 20860-211 20860-108 30860-502 30860-511 2 88.1 84 340 20860-212 20860-109 30860-503 30860-512 3 132.6 84 280 20860-219 20860-108 30860-502 30860-511 3 132.6 84 340 20860-220 20860-109 30860-503 30860-512 3 132.6 84 400 20860-221 20860-110 30860-504 30860-513 3 132.6 84 460 20860-222 20860-111 30860-505 30860-514 4 177.0 84 280 20860-228 20860-108 30860-502 30860-511 4 177.0 84 340 20860-229 20860-109 30860-503 30860-512 4 177.0 84 400 20860-230 20860-110 30860-504 30860-513 4 177.0 84 460 20860-231 20860-111 30860-505 30860-514 5 221.5 84 460 20860-240 20860-111 30860-505 30860-514 Electronics Packaging www.schroff.biz UK 04/2006 6.81 19" chassis –O Order Information Note Further dimensions available on request 19" chassis for non-standardised components Front handles EMC gasket Telescopic slides assembly kit 06002052 ESA44237 06094004 Al extrusion, anodised To increase EMC shielding; delivery comprises, see page 6.85 For assembly of 19" chassis on telescopic slides, please order telescopic slides separately, see chapter cabinets - accessories Height Height Width W Depth D U mm HP mm PU 2 pieces PU 1 kit PU 1 kit 5 43.7 84 220 20860-256 20860-130 21101-622 5 43.7 84 280 5 43.7 84 340 2 88.1 84 220 2 88.1 84 280 20860-257 2 88.1 84 340 3 132.6 84 280 20860-258 3 132.6 84 340 3 132.6 84 400 3 132.6 84 460 4 177.0 84 280 20860-259 4 177.0 84 340 4 177.0 84 400 4 177.0 84 460 5 221.5 84 460 20860-260 6.82 UK 04/2006 Electronics Packaging www.schroff.biz 19" chassis –O Select - Height and depth of the basic kit (1, 2 U) - Support cover for horizontal board assembly - Internal configuration for connector or backplane assembly - Front handles - EMC gasket - Telescopic slides Order Information Note Further dimensions available on request 19" chassis for standardised 19" components Basic frame Support cover Internal configuration for horizontal board assembly for connector EN 60603 for insulated backplane assembly 06002004 06002053 06003050 06003051 Frame, Al extrusion, front panel, Al, rear panel Al Al, 1 mm, clear chromated Horizontal rail for 3 and 6 U boards Horizontal rails, threaded inserts, insulation strips for 3 and 6 U boards Height Height Width W Depth D U mm HP mm 1 piece 1 piece PU 1 kit PU 1 kit 1 43.7 84 220 20860-201 30860-519 20860-115 20860-116 1 43.7 84 280 20860-202 30860-520 20860-115 20860-116 1 43.7 84 340 20860-203 30860-521 20860-115 20860-116 2 88.1 84 220 20860-210 30860-519 20860-117 20860-118 2 88.1 84 280 20860-211 30860-520 20860-117 20860-118 2 88.1 84 340 20860-212 30860-521 20860-117 20860-118 3 HE / 3 U 6 HE / 6 U 3 HE / 3 U 6 HE / 6 U Electronics Packaging www.schroff.biz UK 04/2006 6.83 19" chassis –O Order Information Note Further dimensions available on request 19" chassis for standardised 19" components Front handles EMC gasket Assembly kit for telescopic slides 06002052 ESA44237 06094004 Al extrusion, anodised To increase EMC shielding; delivery comprises, see page 6.85 For mounting of 19" chassis on telescopic slides, please order telescopic slides separately, see chapter cabinet - accessories Height Height Width W Depth D U mm HP mm PU 2 pieces PU 1 Kit PU 1 Kit 1 43.7 84 220 20860-256 20860-130 21101-622 1 43.7 84 280 1 43.7 84 340 2 88.1 84 220 2 88.1 84 280 20860-257 2 88.1 84 340 6.84 UK 04/2006 Electronics Packaging www.schroff.biz 19" chassis –O For printed board lengths: 100, 160, 220, 280, 340 mm Material: up to 280 mm length PBT UL 94-V-0, > 280 mm length, head piece PBT UL 94-V-0, middle part Al extrusion, strengthened version Guide rails: – Can be plugged into horizontal rails made of Al extrusion – Can be plugged into metal which is 1.5 mm thick Printed board retainer, printed board handle see Accessories Order Information Guide rails Guide rails "accessories" "strengthened accessories" BZA45829 BZA46554 Board length Groove width Colour mm mm PU 2) 10 pieces SPQ 1) 50 pieces SPQ 1) 50 pieces 100 2 red – 64560-082 – 160 2 red 24560-373 64560-005 64560-076 160 2 grey – 64560-055 – 220 2 red 24560-374 64560-006 64560-078 220 2 grey – 64560-166 – 280 2 red/silver 24560-375 – – 280 2 red – – 64560-080 340 2 red/silver 24560-376 – – Accessories Printed board retainer, red, PU 10 pieces 24560-377 Printed board handle, red, PU 10 pieces 24560-378 Identification strips for printed board handle, red, PU 1 sheet = 438 pieces 60817-228 ESD clip, PU 50 pieces 24560-255 Retention screw, PU 100 pieces 24560-141 1) Delivery may be in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ). Please order the ’SPQ’ quantity or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. 2) Order no. comprises one Packaging Unit (PU); multiple items in one pack. Pricing per PU. Electronics Packaging www.schroff.biz UK 04/2006 6.85 19" chassis –O ESA44237 1) with EMC shielding material 2) without EMC shielding material O A high EMC shielding is achieved with the EMC gasketing and cover plates Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Note EMC test report on the Internet EMC gasket kit Item Qty Description 1 1 Seal 2100 mm; silicone / nickel, connection side panel / cover 2 2 Saw tooth 400 mm; stainless steel; connection front panel / cover Description Order no. EMC gasket kit 20860-130 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick code = Order no. Main Catalog 24th Edition | October 2012 Equipment Protection Solutions 04 Desk-top cases . Overview . . . . . 0 Desk-top cases Cabinets . . . . . . 1 Wall mounted cases . . . . . . . . 2 Accessories for cabinets and wall mounted cases 3 Climate control 4 Desk-top cases 5 Subracks/ 19" chassis . . . 6 Front panels, plug-in units . . 7 Systems . . . . . . 8 Power supply units . . . . . . . . . 9 Backplanes . . 10 Connectors, front panel component system . . . . . . 11 Appendix . . . . 12 Downloads und weitere wichtige Informationen finden Sie im Internet unter www.schroff.biz 5.0 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Main Catalogue PROLINE Y The universal case with 19" compatible dimensions e.g. for CompactPCI and VME64x applications - Aluminium case - Height 2 ... 7 U - High EMC shielding i The robust case for 19" compatible or custom electronics assemblies - Aluminium case with aluminium frame front - Height 2 ... 6 U - High EMC shielding 361009005 (12304003 10005004 05802001 06803006 05809001) Desk-top cases Main Catalogue 5.1 E 10/2012 Main Catalogue Accessories b Desk-top or portable case Design alternative to propacPRO - Front and rear frame in aluminium - Aluminium case - Height 2 ... 6 U - For 19" components or individual electronics assemblies J Case to house 19" subracks or 19" chassis - Case with aluminium frame to front and rear - High stability - Height 3 ... 12 U - Identical front and rear - Internal mounting up to 40 kg - Protection class IP 20 36109006 (02004001 02202003 05806006 02992004 05806008) Overview . . . . 5.0 Introduction . . 5.2 ServicePLUS . . 5.4 ratiopacPRO . . 5.6 propacPRO . . . 5.44 compacPRO . . 5.76 comptec . . . . . . 5.100 Accessories Handles . . . . . . . . 5.108 Strap handles . . . 5.111 Tip-up carrying handles . . . . . . . . 5.112 Folding handles 5.113 Tray handles . . . 5.114 Feet . . . . . . . . . . 5.115 ServicePLUS . . 5.4 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.2 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases – Introduction IntroductionMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Desk-top enclosures Our desk-top cases are used to house PCBs (euroboards) or individual components The choice is yours: ratiopacPRO, the universal case with 19" compatible dimensions and high EMC shielding, e.g. for CompactPCI and VME64x applications propacPRO, the robust case with high EMC shielding for 19"-compatible or custom electronics assemblies compacPRO, Desk-top or portable case for unshielded applications 19" cases Our comptec cases are comparable with small cabinets and are used to house 19" components such as subracks, 19" fan trays or 19" front panels All desk-top enclosures have a very low weight owing to the materials used and are also suitable for mobile use Main CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days The most important user domains for desk-top enclosures are: Fitting with euroboards in accordance with IEC 60297 Fitting with individual electrical or mechanical components, e.g.on mounting plates Main CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Practical technology without time-consuming assembly. The modular product platform of these cases allows a wide range of possible uses with only a small number of components. The intelligent design of all components results in an astonishingly quick and easy assembly of the components. With our PRO product platform we offer you full compatibility of all individual components and accessories, also with our europacPRO subracks. Standard desk-top enclosures can also be adapted easily and with little effort for mobile applications. Case types: Desk-top enclosure/19" case 01810002 02202004 Desk-top enclosure, ratiopacPRO 19" case, comptec Applications for desk-top enclosures 02004079 05809004 05809004 Example above: for euroboards, below: for individual installation One product platform and extensive accessories 05806008 05806006 02005003 02005006 5.3 Desk-top cases – Introduction Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 IntroductionMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Supplied in space-saving packs. Simply unpack parts and screw together - done. Depending on the kit chosen the threaded insert, the perforated rail or the EMC gasket is pre-assembled on the horizontal rail. We offer you three forms of delivery: Pre-assembled kit for use with 160 mm deep euroboards, frame fitted, cladding parts and guide rails supplied loose. Pre-assembled kit for individual configuration, frame assembled, cladding parts supplied loose. Ready assembled cases to your specifications. With our ServicePLUS option you can order ready-assembled cases, with drilled holes and cut-outs and individual front panels - if necessary even by express service. Main CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Guide rails form the interface between the mechanics of the case and the electronics assembled (PCBs, plug-in units, frame type plug-in units, drive unit modules, etc.). Robust snap-in fixings on the plastic rails assure that the components are held securely, even when exposed to vibrations. Guide rails can also be screwed on. Main CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Our case product platforms offer standard solutions for achieving electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and to avoid electrostatic interference (ESD) Shielding on the front and rear of the case is effected by front panels with EMC gaskets To prevent electrostatic discharge when inserting PCBs, ESD contacts are clipped into the guide rails. These provide a conductive connection between board and case earth/ground Test reports are available on our website www.schroff.biz for download Forms of delivery for desk-top enclosures 06104001 Flat pack delivery to save space Guide rail 06108084 83 81 79 77 75 73 1 13579 11 EMC and ESD 06108081 Shielding 04503050 Position of the ESD clip 30 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 dB 400 800 1200 1600 2000 Mhz Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.4 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases – ServicePLUS ServicePLUSMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days configuration Simple. Fast. For the product you want. Components can be varied and combined freely Online configuration: www.schroff.co.uk/configuration assembly Assembled by professionals. Double benefit! Fitting of all mechanical, electrical and electronic components by our specialists Professional and reliable, without extra costs Ready for despatch within 10 working days modification Small changes. Large impact. Custom drillings, cut-outs and special colours for off-the-shelf products CAD data are available for you to download and further modify from our website www.schroff.biz Ready for despatch within 10 working days solution Simple. Fast. From one source. Integration and custom developments Flowtherm simulation to calculate heat paths; verification in our own climate lab Special sizes, custom solutions express When fast has to be faster. Delivery time to customer's request ServicePLUS assembly ready for despatch within 10 working days ServicePLUS modification and ServicePLUS solution ready for despatch within 15 working days academy Knowledge. Sharing. Partnerships. Knowledge transfer and partnership Seminars held centrally or at your site. CAD drawings, test reports, user manuals 5.5 Desk-top cases – ServicePLUS Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Text Application examples 01809001 01809003 Application: ratiopacPRO-air case in special colour, shielded board cage, filter mat top and bottom Application: ratiopacPRO-air case with processed front and rear panels 02009001 02009003 Application: compacPRO case, modified Application: compacPRO case with fitted horizontal rail with lip and hinged front panel 02009002 02009004 Application: compacPRO case with fitted horizontal rail with lip and folding front panel Application: compacPRO with tip-up carrying handle and front panel (without visible screws) 02109001 05809005 Application: inpac case with hinged and modified front and rear panels Application: propacPRO, EMC case in special colour with mounting plates for individual construction Desk-top cases –Y Overview . . . . . 0 Cabinets . . . . . . 1 Wall mounted cases . . . . . . . . 2 Accessories for cabinets and wall mounted cases 3 Climate control 4 Desk-top cases 5 Subracks/ 19" chassis . . . 6 Front panels, plug-in units . . 7 Systems . . . . . . 8 Power supply units . . . . . . . . . 9 Backplanes . . 10 Connectors, front panel component system . . . . . . 11 Appendix . . . . 12 Downloads and further important information can be found on the Internet under www.schroff.biz 5.6 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 YMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 06800002 06801005 ratiopacPRO Designed for insertion/extractor handles in accordance with IEC 60297-3-102 and IEEE 1101.10 for CompactPCI and VME64x applications ratiopacPRO air Designed for insertion/extractor handles in accordance with IEC 60297-3-102 and IEEE 1101.10 for CompactPCI and VME64x applications; 1 U extra for ventilation (1/2 U top, 1/2 U bottom) Standards Inner and outer dimensions in accordance with: IEC 60297-3-101 / IEEE 1101.1 IEC 60297-3-102 / IEEE 1101.10/11 Type of protection IP20 in accordance with IEC 60529 Earthing connections in accordance with: DIN EN 50178 / VDE 0160 DIN EN 60950 / VDE 0805 DIN EN 61010-1 / VDE 0411 part 1 DIN EN 61010-1A2 / VDE 0411 part 1/A1 EMC testing in accordance with VG 95373 part 15 06812001 06800015 Case with mounting plate Prepared for CompactPCI and VME64x applications Desk-top cases –Y Main Catalogue 5.7 E 10/2012 YMain Catalogue The universal case with 19" compatible dimensions e.g. for CompactPCI, VME64x and other applications Base level of shielding in basic versions upwards, additional EMC shielding can be retrofitted Symmetrical construction, identical front and rear (identical board cage for ratiopacPRO and ratiopacPRO air) Converts simply from desktop to 19" rack-mounted case and back No visible screws; cladding parts removable without tools ratiopacPRO Case with cover strip, front handles or 19" brackets (height 2 U ... 6 U) Complete case with cover strip and pre-mounted components, with basic shielding (height 3 U, 6 U), additional EMC shielding retrofittable Tower case (width 4 U) ratiopacPRO air ratiopacPRO air with additional 1 U height for ventilation Case with cover strips, front handles or 19" brackets (height 4 U, 5 U, 7 U) Complete case with cover strips and pre-mounted components, with basic shielding (height 4 U, 7 U), additional EMC shielding retrofittable 06800005 06800005 ServicePLUS from page 5.4 e.g. modifications (special colours or sizes) e.g. custom solutions (cut-outs in top cover, base plate or side panels) e.g. assembly service from 1 piece www.schroff.biz/ServicePLUS 30407004 Overview . . . . 5.6 ratiopacPRO Complete cases . 5.8 Dimensions . . . . . 5.9 Cases . . . . . . . . . . 5.10 Tower cases . . . . 5.12 ratiopacPRO air Cases . . . . . . . . . 5.14 Complete cases . 5.13 Dimensions . . . . . 5.16 Radial fan units . 5.17 EMC gasketing . . 5.18 Accessories Front panels . . . . 5.21 Rear panels . . . . . 5.22 Feet . . . . . . . . . . . 5.23 Air filters . . . . . . . 5.23 GND/earthing kit 5.24 Front handles . . . 5.24 19" brackets . . . . 5.25 Cable holder. . . . 5.26 Compartment seals. . . . . . . . . . . 5.26 Strap handles . . . 5.26 Tip-up carrying handles . . . . . . . . 5.27 Assembly kit. . . . 5.28 Fitting position of horizontal rails . . . . . . . . . . . 5.29 Horizontal rails. . 5.31 Threaded inserts, perforated strips, insulation strips . 5.35 Z-rails, perforated rails. . 5.35 Divider plates . . . 5.36 Mounting plates . 5.37 Horizontal board assembly . . . . . . 5.38 Combined mounting . . . . . . 5.39 Guide rails and ESD clips . . . . . . 5.40 ServicePLUS . . 5.4 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.8 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y YMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Desk-top enclosure with pre-configured components, in accordance to IEC 60297-3-101; prepared for 19" components, e.g. plug-in units and euroboards Ventilation slit in base plate Rear panel perforated Delivery comprises (in kit form) Order Information Note Dimension drawings and mounting depths see page 5.9 Components see page 5.18 Front handles and 19" mounting brackets from page 5.24 Guide rails from page 5.40 ratiopacPRO complete cases 06812003 01802050 01808055 01808051 3 U 01808052 6 U ServicePLUS see page 5.4 12 11 15 10 15 11 6, 7, 9 5, 7, 9 4, 7, 8,16 2 3 1 “X” “Y” “Z” 4 9 9 7 7 7 16 8 5 6 “X” “Y” “Z” D - 20 W - 21.4 D W 7.5 H A A- A A D - 20 W - 21.4 D W 7.5 A A- A A H Item Qty Description without EMC with EMC 1 2 2 Side panel, AI, 2 mm, passivated 2 2 2 Side plate, Al, 1 mm, visible surfaces RAL 9006 3 4 4 Cover strip, Al die-cast, RAL 7016, pre-fitted only on EMC version 4 4 4 Horizontal rail, type H-LD, Al, visible surfaces RAL 7016 5 2 2 Horizontal rail, centre (top/bottom), type H-ST, Al 6 1 1 Horizontal rail, centre (on 6 U only), type ST, Al 7 6/8 6/8 3 U/6 U: threaded inserts, St, pre-mounted, for indirect backplane mounting with insulation strips 8 – 4 Perforated strip, Al, 1 mm, pre-fitted 9 4 4 Insulation strip, PBT, UL 94 V-0 10 1 1 Rear panel, perforated, Al, 2.5 mm 11 2 2 Top cover and base plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surfaces conductive, visible surfaces RAL 9006, with GND/earthing connection, base plate with honeycomb grid ventilation 12 4 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, UL 94 V-0, PC black 14 – 1 EMC support profile for side panel, pre-mounted (kit) 15 – 4 EMC contact strip for cover plate, pre-mounted (kit) 16 – 4 EMC contact strip front panel - horizontal rails 17 1 1 GND/earthing kit, assembly kit Height H Width W Depth D Unshielded EMC shielded U HP mm Part no. Part no. 3 28 255.5 24572-001 24572-050 3 42 255.5 24572-002 24572-051 3 42 315.5 24572-003 24572-052 3 63 315.5 24572-004 24572-053 3 84 315.5 24572-005 24572-054 3 84 375.5 24572-006 24572-055 3 84 435.5 24572-007 24572-056 6 42 315.5 24572-015 24572-064 6 63 315.5 24572-016 24572-065 6 84 315.5 24572-017 24572-066 6 84 375.5 24572-018 24572-067 6 84 435.5 24572-019 24572-068 5.9 Desk-top cases –Y Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Text Dimension drawings ratiopacPRO rppr6637 RatiopacPRO with A - bezel; B - front handle; C - 19" mounting bracket; D - 19" mounting bracket with front handle Dimensions table ratiopacPRO Height Width Depth H h w W w1 w2 w D d D1 d2 in U in mm in mm in HP in mm in mm in mm in mm Total depth in mm Useable depth in mm Plug-in depth in mm Board depth in mm 2 88.10 67.90 28 164.42 177.62 198.12 142.82 255.5 235.5 175.5 160 42 235.54 248.74 269.24 213.94 235.5 220 63 342.42 355.42 375.92 320.62 315.5 295.5 175.5 160 84 448.90 462.10 482.60 427.30 235.5 220 3 132.55 112.35 28 164.42 177.62 198.12 142.82 295.5 280 42 235.54 248.74 269.24 213.94 375.5 355.5 175.5 160 63 342.42 355.42 375.92 320.62 235.5 220 84 448.90 462.10 482.60 427.30 295.5 280 4 177.00 156.80 28 164.42 177.62 198.12 142.82 355.5 340 42 235.54 248.74 269.24 213.94 435.5 415.5 175.5 160 63 342.42 355.42 375.92 320.62 235.5 220 84 448.90 462.10 482.60 427.30 295.5 280 5 221.45 201.25 28 164.42 177.62 198.12 142.82 355.5 340 42 235.54 248.74 269.24 213.94 495.5 475.5 175.5 160 63 342.42 355.42 375.92 320.62 235.5 220 84 448.90 462.10 482.60 427.30 295.5 280 6 265.90 245.70 28 164.42 177.62 198.12 142.82 355.5 340 42 235.54 248.74 269.24 213.94 63 342.42 355.42 375.92 320.62 84 448.90 462.10 482.60 427.30 Components mountable in 15 mm depth grid Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.10 Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Desk-top cases –Y YMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Cases for individual assembly with 19" standard components or specific internal mounting, e.g. with mounting plate Unshielded (EMC shielding retrofittable) Symmetrical design, identical front and rear side Four versions: – Bezels – Front handles – 19" mounting brackets – 19" mounting brackets with front handles For board depth 160 mm, 220 mm, 280 mm, and 340 mm (depending on case depth) Delivery comprises (kit) 3a, 3b, 3c or 3d according to selection Note Order information, see following page Order Information RatiopacPRO case 01805050 01805051 01805052 01813051 3a: Bezel 3b: Front handle 3c: 19" mounting bracket 3d: 19" mounting bracket with front handle 01813065 Drawing with front cover strip ServicePLUS see page 5.4 12 11 11 4 2 3a (3b/3c/3d) 1 3 Item Qty Description 1 2 Side panel, AI, 2 mm, chromated 2 2 Side plate, Al, 1 mm, visible surfaces powder-coated, RAL 9006 3 2 Rear trim, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 3a 2 Bezel, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 3b 2 Front handle, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 3c 2 19" mounting bracket, Al diecast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 3d 2 19" mounting bracket with front handle, Al diecast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 4 4 Horizontal rail, type H-LD, Al, visible surfaces powdercoated, RAL 7016 11 2 Top cover and base plate, Al, 1 mm, inner sides conductive, visible surfaces powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing connections, base plate with honeycomb grid ventilation 12 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, UL 94 V-0, PC black 13 1 Fixing materials kit Accessories Earthing kit CU wire, 1.5 mm2, PVC sleeve, green/yellow, 1 kit 24571-380 Al diecast foot with tip-up silver, 1 piece (SPQ 10) 10603-002 Plastic tip-up foot silver, similar to RAL 9006, PU 4 pieces 20603-001 Plastic tip-up foot anthracite, similar to RAL 7016, 4 pieces 20603-002 Stacking aid silver, similar to RAL 9006, PA, UL 94 V-0, PU 4 pieces 20603-004 Stacking aid anthracite, similar to RAL 7016, PA, UL 94 V-0, PU 4 pieces 20603-003 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.11 Desk-top cases –Y Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Note Dimension drawings and mounting depths see page 5.9 Components see page 5.18 RatiopacPRO case Width W Depth D Case height H 2 U HP mm Part no. Part no. Part no. Part no. Part no. Side panel subdivision (1 U-3 U-1 U) (3 U-2 U) Cover strips 28 255.5 24572-500 24571-002 24571-050 24572-117 24572-261 24571-098 28 315.5 24572-503 24571-005 24571-053 24572-120 24572-264 24571-101 42 255.5 24572-510 24571-014 24571-062 24572-129 24572-273 24571-110 42 315.5 24572-513 24571-017 24571-065 24572-132 24572-276 24571-113 42 255.5 24572-514 24571-018 24571-066 24572-133 24572-277 24571-114 63 255.5 24572-520 24571-026 24571-074 24572-141 24572-285 24571-122 63 315.5 24572-523 24571-029 24571-077 24572-144 24572-288 24571-125 63 375.5 24572-524 24571-030 24571-078 24572-145 24572-289 24571-126 84 255.5 24572-530 24571-038 24571-086 24572-153 24572-297 24571-134 84 315.5 24572-533 24571-041 24571-089 24572-156 24572-300 24571-137 84 375.5 24572-534 24571-042 24571-090 24572-157 24572-301 24571-138 84 435.5 24572-535 24571-043 24571-091 24572-158 24572-302 24571-139 RPPR6629 84 495.5 24572-536 24571-044 24571-092 24572-159 24572-303 24571-140 Front handles 28 255.5 – 24571-702 24571-750 24572-213 24572-357 24571-798 28 315.5 – 24571-705 24571-753 24572-216 24572-360 24571-801 42 255.5 – 24571-714 24571-762 24572-225 24572-369 24571-810 42 315.5 – 24571-717 24571-765 24572-228 24572-372 24571-813 42 375.5 – 24571-718 24571-766 24572-229 24572-373 24571-814 63 255.5 – 24571-726 24571-774 24572-237 24572-381 24571-822 63 315.5 – 24571-729 24571-777 24572-240 24572-384 24571-825 63 375.5 – 24571-730 24571-778 24572-241 24572-385 24571-826 84 255.5 – 24571-738 24571-786 24572-249 24572-393 24571-834 84 315.5 – 24571-741 24571-789 24572-252 24572-396 24571-837 84 375.5 – 24571-742 24571-790 24572-253 24572-397 24571-838 84 435.5 – 24571-743 24571-791 24572-254 24572-398 24571-839 01805050 84 495.5 – 24571-744 24571-792 24572-255 24572-399 24571-840 19" mounting brackets 84 255.5 24572-570 24571-438 24571-486 24572-201 24572-345 24571-534 84 315.5 24572-573 24571-441 24571-489 24572-204 24572-348 24571-537 84 375.5 24572-574 24571-442 24571-490 24572-205 24572-349 24571-538 84 435.5 24572-575 24571-443 24571-491 24572-206 24572-350 24571-539 01805052 84 495.5 24572-576 24571-444 24571-492 24572-207 24572-351 24571-540 19" mounting brackets with front handles 84 255.5 24572-620 24572-630 24572-640 – – 24572-660 84 315.5 24572-623 24572-633 24572-643 – – 24572-663 84 375.5 24572-624 24572-634 24572-644 – – 24572-664 84 435.5 24572-625 24572-635 24572-645 – – 24572-665 01813051 84 495.5 24572-626 24572-636 24572-646 – – 24572-666 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.12 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y 06802001 01802054 1) = open space between the horizontal rails 2) = max. mounting depth Y Symmetrical design, identical front and rear side Mounting space 4 U, 84 HP, depth 475 mm Case based on ratiopacPRO Unshielded (EMC shielding retrofittable) Delivery comprises (in kit form) Order Information Note Components see page 5.18 ratiopacPRO tower with 4 U width ServicePLUS see page 5.4 4 4 6 3 5 1 2 3 156,8 475.5 2) 177 495.5 1) 221,5 448.7 462.25 427.3 Item Qty Description 1 2 Base/top cover, Al, 2 mm, passivated 2 4 Horizontal rail, type H-LD, Al, visible surface powdercoated, RAL 7016 3 4 Cover, Al die-cast, RAL 7016 4 2 Lateral cover plate, Al, 1 mm, with GND/earthing connection, visible surfaces powder-coated, internal surface conductive, RAL 9006 5 1 Top cover plate, Al, 1 mm, visible surface powder-coated, RAL 9006 6 2 Case foot with anti-slip protection, Al, powder-coated, RAL 7016 7 1 Assembly kit Width Part no. U 4 24571-395 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.13 Desk-top cases –Yair Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 airY The case has 2 x 1/2 U clearance for ventilation Case with cover strip; with pre-mounted components for euroboards and backplane with insulation strip; no visible screws Symmetrical design, identical front and rear honeycomb grid ventilation in top cover and base plate Available in two versions: – unshielded (EMC shielding retrofittable) – with EMC shielding fitted Delivery comprises (in kit form) Order Information Note Dimension drawings and mounting depths see page 5.16 Components see page 5.18 Front handles and 19" mounting brackets from page 5.24 Guide rails from page 5.40 ratiopacPRO air complete cases 06811001 01802052 01808055 01808053 3 U 01808054 6 U ServicePLUS see page 5.4 12 13 11 15 “X” “Y” “Z” 13 10 6, 7, 9 5, 7, 9 4, 7, 8, 16 2 3 1 15 14 17 11 4 9 9 7 7 7 16 8 5 6 “X” “Y” “Z” D w 7.5 h H A A - A A D w 7.5 A A - A A h H Item Qty Description without EMC with EMC 1 2 2 Side panel, AI, 2 mm, passivated 2 2 2 Side plate, Al, 1 mm, visible surface RAL 9006 3 4 4 Cover, die-cast zinc, RAL 7016, pre-mounted on EMC version only 4 4 4 Horizontal rail, type H-LD, Al, visible surface RAL 7016 5 2 2 Horizontal rail, centre (top/bottom), type H-ST, Al 6 1 1 Horizontal rail, centre (on 6 U only), type ST, Al 7 6/8 6/8 4 U/7 U: threaded inserts, St, pre-mounted, for indirect backplane mounting with insulation strips 8 – 4 Perforated strip, pre-mounted 9 4 4 Insulation strip, PBT, UL 94 V-0 10 1 1 Rear panel, Al, 2.5 mm 11 2 2 Top cover and base plate with honeycomb grid ventilation, Al, 1 mm, internal surface conductive, visible surface RAL 9006, with GND/earthing connection 12 4 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, UL 94 V-0, PC, black 13 2 2 Air filter 14 – 1 EMC support profile for side panel, fitted (kit) 15 – 4 EMC contact strip for cover plate, pre-mounted (kit) 16 – 4 EMC contact strip front panel - horizontal rails 17 1 1 Compartment seal, PE foam, self-adhesive, temperature range -20 °C ... +85 °C 18 1 1 GND/earthing kit, assembly kit Case height H PCB height h Width w Depth D Unshielded EMC shielded U U HP mm Part no. Part no. 4 3 28 255.5 24572-025 24572-074 4 3 42 255.5 24572-026 24572-075 4 3 42 315.5 24572-027 24572-076 4 3 63 315.5 24572-028 24572-077 4 3 84 315.5 24572-029 24572-078 4 3 84 375.5 24572-030 24572-079 4 3 84 435.5 24572-031 24572-080 7 6 42 315.5 24572-040 24572-088 7 6 63 315.5 24572-041 24572-089 7 6 84 315.5 24572-042 24572-090 7 6 84 375.5 24572-043 24572-091 7 6 84 435.5 24572-044 24572-092 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.14 Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Desk-top cases –Yair airY The case has 2 x 1/2 U clearances for ventilation beneath and above the board cage Cases for individual assembly with 19" standard components or specific internal mounting, e.g. with mounting plate Unshielded (EMC shielding retrofittable) Symmetrical design, identical front and rear side For board depth 160 mm, 220 mm, 280 mm, and 340 mm (depending on case depth) Online download of 3D CAD data Four versions: – Bezels – Front handles – 19" mounting brackets – With 19" mounting brackets and front handles Delivery comprises (in kit form) 3a, 3b, 3c or 3d according to selection Note Order information see following page Order Information RatiopacPRO air case 06801005 01805055 01805056 01805057 01813057 3a: Bezel 3b: Front handle 3c: 19" mounting bracket 3d: 19" mounting bracket with front handle 01813066 Drawing with front cover strip ServicePLUS see page 5.4 12 13 11 11 13 4 2 3a (3b/3c/3d) 3 1 Item Qty Description 1 2 Side panel, AI, 2 mm, chromated 2 2 Side plate, Al, 1 mm, visible surfaces powder-coated, RAL 9006 3 2 Rear trim, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 3a 2 Bezel, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 3b 2 Front handle, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 3c 2 19" mounting angle, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 3d 2 19" mounting bracket with front handle, Al diecast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 4 4 Horizontal rail, type H-LD, Al, visible surfaces powdercoated, RAL 7016 11 2 1 Top cover and base plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surfaces conductive,visible surfaces powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing connection, top cover and base plate with ventilation comb 12 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, UL 94 V-0, PC black 13 2 Air filters 14 1 Fixing materials kit Accessories Earthing kit CU wire, 1.5 mm2, PVC sleeve, green/yellow, 1 kit 24571-380 Al diecast foot with tip-up silver, 1 piece (SPQ 10) 10603-002 Plastic tip-up foot silver, similar to RAL 9006, PU 4 pieces 20603-001 Plastic tip-up foot anthracite, similar to RAL 7016, 4 pieces 20603-002 Stacking aid silver, similar to RAL 9006, PA, UL 94 V-0, PU 4 pieces 20603-004 Stacking aid anthracite, similar to RAL 7016, PA, UL 94 V-0, PU 4 pieces 20603-003 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.15 Desk-top cases –Yair Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Note Dimension drawings and mounting depths see page 5.16 Components see page 5.18 RatiopacPRO air case Width W Depth D Case height H 4 U 5 U 7 U PCB height h HP mm Part no. Part no. Part no. Bezels 28 255.5 24571-146 24571-194 24571-242 28 315.5 24571-149 24571-197 24571-245 42 255.5 24571-158 24571-206 24571-254 42 315.5 24571-161 24571-209 24571-257 42 375.5 24571-162 24571-210 24571-258 63 255.5 24571-170 24571-218 24571-266 63 315.5 24571-173 24571-221 24571-269 63 375.5 24571-174 24571-222 24571-270 63 435.5 24571-175 24571-223 24571-271 84 255.5 24571-182 24571-230 24571-278 84 315.5 24571-185 24571-233 24571-281 84 375.5 24571-186 24571-234 24571-282 84 435.5 24571-187 24571-235 24571-283 01805055 84 495.5 24571-188 24571-236 24571-284 Front handles 28 255.5 24571-846 24571-894 24571-942 28 315.5 24571-849 24571-897 24571-945 42 255.5 24571-858 24571-906 24571-954 42 315.5 24571-861 24571-909 24571-957 42 375.5 24571-862 24571-910 24571-958 42 435.5 24571-863 24571-911 24571-959 63 315.5 24571-873 24571-921 24571-969 63 375.5 24571-874 24571-922 24571-970 63 435.5 24571-875 24571-923 24571-971 84 255.5 24571-882 24571-930 24571-978 84 315.5 24571-885 24571-933 24571-981 84 375.5 24571-886 24571-934 24571-982 84 435.5 24571-887 24571-935 24571-983 01805056 84 495.5 24571-888 24571-936 24571-984 19" mounting brackets 84 255.5 24571-582 24571-630 24571-678 84 315.5 24571-585 24571-633 24571-681 84 375.5 24571-586 24571-634 24571-682 84 435.5 24571-587 24571-635 24571-683 01805057 84 495.5 24571-588 24571-636 24571-684 With 19" mounting brackets and front handles 84 255.5 24572-670 – 24572-690 84 315.5 24572-673 – 24572-693 84 375.5 24572-674 – 24572-694 84 435.5 24572-675 – 24572-695 01805057 84 495.5 24572-676 – 24572-696 3 1 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.16 Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Desk-top cases –Yair Text Text RatiopacPRO air dimension drawings 01805058 RatiopacPRO air with A - bezel; B - front handle; C - 19" mounting bracket; D - 19" mounting bracket with front handle Dimensions table RatiopacPRO air Height Width Depth H H W W1 W2 w D d D1 d2 in U in mm in mm in HP in mm in mm in mm in mm Total depth in mm Usable depth in mm Plug-in depth in mm Board depth in mm 4 177.00 112.35 28 164.42 177.62 198.12 142.82 255.5 235.5 175 160 42 235.54 248.74 269.24 213.94 235 220 63 342.42 355.42 375.92 320.62 315.5 295.5 175 160 84 448.90 462.10 482.60 427.30 235 220 5 221.45 156.80 42 235.54 248.74 269.24 213.94 295 280 63 342.42 355.42 375.92 320.62 375.5 355.5 175 160 84 448.90 462.10 482.60 427.30 235 220 7 310.35 245.70 42 235.54 248.74 269.24 213.94 295 280 63 342.42 355.42 375.92 320.62 355 340 84 448.90 462.10 482.60 427.30 435.5 415.5 175 160 235 220 295 280 355 340 495.5 475.5 175 160 235 220 295 280 355 340 Components mountable in 15 mm depth grid 5.17 Desk-top cases –Yair Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 12309050 12309051 Depth D: 129.8 / 189.9 mm for 160 mm / 220 mm euroboards Main Catalogue Only 1/2 U height Ball-bearing radial fans Fan holder in 4 widths and 2 depths Air capacity 36 m³/h (free blowing) per fan Air exhaust via perforation in cover plate No mechanical modification to case necessary Simple mounting No restriction to rear mounting space Delivery comprises (Kit) Order Information Note Further configurations available on request Fans with tacho signal available on request Radial fan unit for ratiopacPRO air D 8 26,5 70 W Item Qty Description 1 1 Fan support, Al, 1.5 mm, with crimp sockets for mounting the fans 2 1-3 Radial fan, ball bearing, 12 VDC; airflow volume (50 Hz) 36 m³/h, free blowing; power consumption 6.7 W; connecting cable 300 mm, without plug (AWG 26); noise level in dB (A): 47.0; max. static pressure in Pa: 190; max. ambient temperature: 60 °C; fan housing and rotor: UL 94 V-0 3 1 Compartment seal, PE foam, UL 94, self-adhesive, temperature range -20 °C ... +85 °C 4 1 Terminal clamp, UL 90 V-0 5 1 Assembly kit Width Width Number of fans Part no. for PCB depth HP mm 160 mm 220 mm 28 146.87 1 24572-404 24572-408 42 218.00 1 24572-405 24572-409 63 324.67 2 24572-406 24572-410 84 431.35 3 24572-407 24572-411 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 3 4 1 2 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.18 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air rppr6639 / -airY For vertical EMC shielding between sub-assemblies and side panel Scope of delivery sufficient for one case Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information RPPR6640 / -airY For horizontal EMC shielding between side panels and cover plates Scope of delivery sufficient for one case Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information EMC sealing front/rear panel to side panel 1 2 Item Qty Description 1 4 EMC support profile, Al extrusion 2 2 EMC sealing (textile), core: foam, sleeve: textile cladding with CuNi coating 3 1 Assembly kit For case height Part no. U 2, 3-air 24571-334 3, 4-air 24571-331 4, 5-air 24571-332 6, 7-air 24571-333 5, 6-air 24571-335 EMC sealing side panel to cover plate Item Qty Description 1 4 Contact strip, stainless steel Depth Part no. mm 255 24571-338 315 24571-339 375 24571-340 435 24571-341 495 24571-342 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.19 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 rppr6739 Main Catalogue The contact strip is clipped onto the horizontal rail and sets up the contact to front panel or rear panel Can be used for rear horizontal rails (H-VT, L-VT) and all front horizontal rails Delivery comprises Order Information / -airY For shielding of two horizontal rails located directly above each other with vertical division of the mounting height Delivery comprises Order Information EMC sealing front/rear panel to horizontal rail Item Qty Description 1 10/100 Stainless steel EMC gasket Width Width Qty/PU Part no. HP mm 28 131.78 10 24560-229 42 202.9 10 24560-231 63 304.8 10 24560-233 84 416.3 10 24560-235 84 416.3 100 24560-236 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. EMC sealing horizontal rail to horizontal rail BPA46548 BZA45877 aza45937 Assembly tool Item Qty Description 1 1 Cover strip, Al, 1 mm 2 2 Contact spring, St, stainless Length Part no. HP 20 24562-520 28 24562-528 40 24562-540 42 24562-542 63 24562-563 84 24562-584 Assembly tool for EMC sealing, St, stainless (horizontal rails),1 piece 24560-271 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.20 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air / -airYMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days No screws required for fixing Special horizontal rails cover the edges of the front panel (top and bottom) and prevent bowing of the front panel Delivery comprises (Kit) Order Information Note To obtain a shielded case, all EMC sealings must be fitted (front panel/rear panel - side panel; side panel - cover plate; front panel/rear panel - horizontal rail; horizontal rail - horizontal rail) EMC sealing see from page 5.18 EMC front/rear panel, slotted, shielded 01811055 01811056 Front panel/horizontal rail H W Item Qty Description 1 1 Full-width front panel, Al, 2.5 mm, front: anodised, rear: colour passivated 2 2 Horizontal rail, front; special for this front panel 3 4 EMC support profile 4 2 Contact strip horizontal rail - front panel 5 3 EMC textile gasket 6 1 Fixing material kit, user manual For case height Height H For case width Width W Part no. U mm HP mm 2, 3-air 84.0 28 141.9 24572-599 2, 3-air 84.0 42 213.2 24572-600 2, 3-air 84.0 63 319.7 24572-601 2, 3-air 84.0 84 426.4 24572-602 3, 4-air 128.4 28 141.9 24572-603 3, 4-air 128.4 42 213.2 24572-604 3, 4-air 128.4 63 319.7 24572-605 3, 4-air 128.4 84 426.4 24572-606 4, 5-air 172.9 28 141.9 24572-607 4, 5-air 172.9 42 213.2 24572-608 4, 5-air 172.9 63 319.7 24572-609 4, 5-air 172.9 84 426.4 24572-610 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.21 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 06801502 / -airY Front panels can also be used as rear panels No screws required for fixing Inserted between side panel and castings such as trim, 19" mounting bracket or handle Delivery comprises Order Information Note Screw-fixed front panels see chapter Front panels, page 7.4 Full-width front panel, slotted, unshielded Item Qty Description 1 1 Front panel, Al, 2.5 mm, front: anodised, rear: colour passivated For case height Height H For case width Width W Part no. U mm HP mm 2, 3-air 84 28 141.9 34571-617 2, 3-air 84 42 213.2 34571-618 2, 3-air 84 63 319.7 34571-619 2, 3-air 84 84 426.4 34571-620 3, 4-air 128.4 28 141.9 34571-605 3, 4-air 128.4 42 213.2 34571-606 3, 4-air 128.4 63 319.7 34571-607 3, 4-air 128.4 84 426.4 34571-608 4, 5-air 172.9 28 141.9 34571-609 4, 5-air 172.9 42 213.2 34571-610 4, 5-air 172.9 63 319.7 34571-611 4, 5-air 172.9 84 426.4 34571-612 5, 6-air 217.3 28 141.9 34571-621 5, 6-air 217.3 42 213.2 34571-622 5, 6-air 217.3 63 319.7 34571-623 5, 6-air 217.3 84 426.4 34571-624 6, 7-air 261.8 28 141.9 34571-613 6, 7-air 261.8 42 213.2 34571-614 6, 7-air 261.8 63 319.7 34571-615 6, 7-air 261.8 84 426.4 34571-616 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.22 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air 01802055 Shieldable 01804050 Unshielded / -airY Two versions: unshielded, Al, 2.5 mm; shieldable, Al extrusion (textile EMC seal, retrofittable) Mounting on horizontal rails (top and bottom) Delivery comprises Order Information Please order textile EMC seals separately Assembly parts see page Chapter 7, Front panels Rear/front panels without perforation see Chapter 7, Front panels Rear panels with fan available on request 04602054 Front panels Delivery comprises Order Information Rear panels with ventilation slots 7,45 7,45 B ø 5,9 x 3,3 W Z W - 2,58 3,2 7,2 25 2,5 3 3 H 3,7 3,7 2,5 Item Qty Description 1 1 Rear panel, Al, 2.5 mm, front: anodised, rear: iridescent green chromated; unshielded or shieldable with EMC seal (textile) Height H Width W B unshielded shieldable U mm HP mm mm Part no. Part no. 2, 3-air 84 28 141.9 – 30849-007 20848-679 2, 3-air 84 42 213 101.6 30849-014 20848-680 2, 3-air 84 63 319.7 157.5 30849-015 20848-681 2, 3-air 84 84 426.4 208.3 30849-016 20848-682 3, 4-air 128.4 28 141.9 – 30849-008 20848-633 3, 4-air 128.4 42 213 101.6 30849-021 20848-634 3, 4-air 128.4 63 319.7 157.5 30849-022 20848-635 3, 4-air 128.4 84 426.4 208.3 30849-023 20848-636 4, 5-air 172.9 28 141.9 – 30849-009 20848-656 4, 5-air 172.9 42 213 101.6 30849-028 20848-657 4, 5-air 172.9 63 319.7 157.5 30849-029 20848-658 4, 5-air 172.9 84 426.4 208.3 30849-030 20848-659 5, 6-air 217.3 28 141.9 – 30849-011 20848-744 5, 6-air 217.3 42 213 101.6 30849-171 20848-745 5, 6-air 217.3 63 319.7 157.5 30849-172 20848-746 5, 6-air 217.3 84 426.4 208.3 30849-173 20848-747 6, 7-air 261.8 28 141.9 – 30849-010 20848-640 6, 7-air 261.8 42 213 101.6 30849-035 20848-641 6, 7-air 261.8 63 319.7 157.5 30849-036 20848-642 6, 7-air 261.8 84 426.4 208.3 30849-037 20848-643 Textile EMC seals Item Qty Description 1 10/100 Textile EMC seal, core: foam, sleeve: textile cladding with CuNi coating Height Height Qty/PU Part no. U mm pieces 2, 3-air 52 10 21101-857 3, 4-air 97 100 21101-854 3, 4-air 97 10 21101-853 4, 5-air 142 10 21101-858 5, 6-air 187 10 21101-978 6, 7-air 232 100 21101-856 6, 7-air 232 10 21101-855 5.23 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 01802075 Tip-up foot 01802076 Stacking aid/design element / -airY Can be used instead of standard feet Carrying capacity: 25 kg per foot Mounting holes in bottom of casing Delivery comprises ((kit)) Order Information Note Tip-up feet are required to mount the stacking aid rppr6658 / -airY Retrofit mounting without reworking and tools Filter replacement without opening the case, IP protection retained Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information To optimise the air supply, tip-up feet must be fitted to the case, see page 5.23 Tip-up feet and stacking aid/design element Item Qty Description 1 4 Foot, PA, UL 94 V-0 2 4 Anti-slip protection, TPE 3 2 Tip-up device, PA, UL 94 V-0 4 1 Assembly kit Description Part no. Tip-up foot, silver, similar to RAL 9006 20603-001 Tip-up foot, anthracite, similar to RAL 7016 20603-002 Stacking aid/design element silver, similar to RAL 9006, PA, UL 94 V-0, PU 4 pieces 20603-004 Stacking aid/design element anthracite, similar to RAL 7016, PA, UL 94 V-0, PU 4 pieces 20603-003 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Air filters for ratiopacPRO air Item Qty Description 1 1 Filter holder, Al, 1 mm, powder-coated, RAL 9006 2 1 Filter mat, synthetic fibre 3 1 Self-adhesive fixings For case width Air filter Replacement filter 1 piece HP Part no. Part no. 28 24571-325 64571-033 42 24571-326 64571-034 63 24571-327 64571-035 84 24571-328 64571-036 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.24 Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air aza43284 / -airY Forms the GND/earthing connections between side panels, base plate, top cover and rear panel Protective GND/earthing connections in accordance with: – DIN EN 50178/VDE 0160 – DIN EN 60950/VDE 0805 – DIN EN 61010-1/VDE 0411 part 1 – DIN EN 61010-1A2/VDE 0411 part 1/A1 VDE tested Order Information Earthing kit Description Part no. GND/earthing kit, Cu wire 1.5 mm2, PVC sleeve, green/yellow 24571-380 5.25 Desk-top cases –Y Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Y For conversion of cases with cover strip, 19" mounting bracket or 19" mounting bracket with front handle Delivery comprises Order Information Y For conversion of cases with cover strip, front handle or 19" mounting bracket with front handle Delivery comprises Order Information YMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days For conversion of cases with cover strip, front handle or 19" mounting bracket Delivery comprises Order Information Front handles for retrofitting RPPR6651 Item Qty Description 1 2 Front handle, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 Front handle for Part no. RatiopacPRO 3 U 24571-301 RatiopacPRO 4 U 24571-302 RatiopacPRO 5 U 24571-993 RatiopacPRO 6 U 24571-303 RatiopacPRO air 3/4 U 24571-304 RatiopacPRO air 4/5 U 24571-305 RatiopacPRO air 6/7 U 24571-306 19" mounting brackets for retrofitting RPPR6652 Qty Description 2 19" mounting bracket, Al diecast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 19" mounting angle Part no. RatiopacPRO 2 U 24571-994 RatiopacPRO 3 U 24571-295 RatiopacPRO 4 U 24571-296 RatiopacPRO 5 U 24571-992 RatiopacPRO 6 U 24571-297 RatiopacPRO air 4 U 24571-298 RatiopacPRO air 5 U 24571-299 RatiopacPRO air 7 U 24571-300 19" mounting bracket with front handle for conversion 01813056 Qty Description 2 19" mounting bracket with front handle, Al diecast, powdercoated, RAL 7016 19" mounting angle Part no. RatiopacPRO 2 U 24572-700 RatiopacPRO 3 U 24572-701 RatiopacPRO 4 U 24572-702 RatiopacPRO 6 U 24572-704 RatiopacPRO air 4 U 24572-705 RatiopacPRO air 7 U 24572-707 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.26 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Delivery comprises Order Information / -airY The air baffle (item 1) closes the space (1/2 U) between the rear horizontal rail and base plate Delivery comprises (in kit form) Order Information Note Fan rear panel available on request Radial fan unit see page 5.17 06801515 / -airY Retrofittable without mechanical modifications to the case Static load-carrying capacity 20 kg per pair Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Cable holder 02908053 02908052 19 9 17 14 26,5 46 20,2 Ø 3 Ø 4,4 Ø4,4 Ø 3 Item Qty Description 1 2 Cable bracket, ABS, UL V-94 0, RAL 7016, detent for cables between 8 mm and 12 mm 2 1 Drilling template, two drilled holes each per bracket are needed in rear panel 3 1 Assembly kit Description Part no. Cable holder 24575-800 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Air baffles for ratiopacPRO air 01805059 Item Qty Description 1 1 Compartment seal, PE foam, UL 94 HF 1 + HF 2, self-adhesive, temperature range: -40 °C ... +85 °C For case width Length Part no. HP mm 42 218.4 20833-351 63 325.1 20833-352 84 431.8 20833-353 Strap handles Item Qty Description 1 1 Handle, steel spring, plastic-sheathed (flexible plastic), RAL 7016 2 1 Side plate, Al, visible surfaces powder-coated, RAL 9006 3 2 Adaptor, Al die-cast 4 1 Assembly kit For case depth For case height 3 U, 4 U air For case height4 HE, 5 Uair mm Part no. Part no. 315 24571-308 24571-314 375 24571-309 24571-315 435 24571-310 24571-316 5.27 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 03/2013 / -airY Retrofittable without mechanical modifications to the case Adjustable in 30° increments Static load-carrying capacity 30 kg Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Note Cannot be used in conjunction with front handles Assembly kit is required for tip-up carrying handle, please order separately Tip-up carrying handles 06803006 RPA43897 For case height For case width A B C D U HP mm mm mm mm 3, 4, 4-air, 5-air 42 283,4 279,4 247,4 115 3, 4, 4-air, 5-air 63 390,1 386,1 354,1 195 3, 4, 4-air, 5-air 84 496,8 492,8 460,8 195 rpa43898 Item Qty Description 1 1 Carrying bar, Al extrusion, powder coated, RAL 9006 2 1 Handle shell, ABS, UL 94 V-0, RAL 7016 3 2 Tip-up protection, ABS, UL 94 V-0, RAL 7016 4 2 Notch device, Al die-cast 5 2 Cover cap, ABS, UL 94 V-0, RAL 7016 For case height For case width For case depth Tip-up carrying handle Assembly kit U HP mm Part no. Part no. 3, 4-air 42 255 24571-320 24571-352 3, 4-air 42 315 24571-320 24571-353 3, 4-air 42 375 24571-320 24571-354 3, 4-air 42 435 24571-320 24571-355 3, 4-air 42 495 24571-320 24571-356 3, 4-air 63 255 24571-321 24571-352 3, 4-air 63 315 24571-321 24571-353 3, 4-air 63 375 24571-321 24571-354 3, 4-air 63 435 24571-321 24571-355 3, 4-air 63 495 24571-321 24571-356 3, 4-air 84 255 24571-322 24571-352 3, 4-air 84 315 24571-322 24571-353 3, 4-air 84 375 24571-322 24571-354 3, 4-air 84 435 24571-322 24571-355 3, 4-air 84 495 24571-322 24571-356 4, 5-air 42 255 24571-320 24571-359 4, 5-air 42 315 24571-320 24571-360 4, 5-air 42 375 24571-320 24571-361 4, 5-air 42 435 24571-320 24571-362 4, 5-air 42 495 24571-320 24571-363 4, 5-air 63 255 24571-321 24571-359 4, 5-air 63 315 24571-321 24571-360 4, 5-air 63 375 24571-321 24571-361 4, 5-air 63 435 24571-321 24571-362 4, 5-air 63 495 24571-321 24571-363 4, 5-air 84 255 24571-322 24571-359 4, 5-air 84 315 24571-322 24571-360 4, 5-air 84 375 24571-322 24571-361 4, 5-air 84 435 24571-322 24571-362 4, 5-air 84 495 24571-322 24571-363 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.28 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air / -airY Order Information Main CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Order Information Order Information Torx panhead screws Description Application Material Dimension Qty/PU Part no. Countersunk screw with Torx For horizontal rail to side panel, with GND/earthing function St, zinc-plated M4 х 14 100 24571-371 AZA45923 Countersunk screw with Torx For horizontal rail to side panel, if guide rail is bolted onto slot 1 St, zinc-plated M4 х 10 100 24571-372 Nut Description Application Material Dimension Qty/PU Part no. AZA45921 Square nut For fixing: parts to side panels, support profiles, mounting plates St, zinc-plated M4 100 24560-140 Assembly tools Description Application Dimension Qty/PU Part no. Torx screwdriver T8 1 64560-026 AZA45925 T20 1 64560-027 aza45938 Assembly tool for horizontal rails Exclusively to fix stainless steel EMC gaskets in horizontal rails – 1 24560-271 aza45937 Assembly tool for front panels For mounting stainless steel EMC contact strips on front panels with lateral slot – 1 24560-270 5.29 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Text Mounting position ratiopacPRO horizontal rails/central rails front rear front rear 2 U 3 U 01805060 01802057 4 U (3 U + 1 U) 01802058 5 U (1 U + 3 U + 1 U) 5 U (3 U + 2 U) 01805061 01805062 6 U 6 U (2 x 3 U) 01802059 01802060 Horizontal rails can be bolted on in 15 mm depth grid 01808050 H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ L-ST / L-VT / L-MZ 100 H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD 100 H-KD / H-LD / L-KD H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ L-ST / L-VT / L-MZ H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD 100 H-KD / H-LD / L-KD H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ L-ST / L-VT / L-MZ H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD 233,35 H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ L-ST / L-VT / L-MZ ST / VT / MZ H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD L-ST / L-VT / L-MZ H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ 100 100 H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ L-ST / L-VT / L-MZ H-KD / H-LD / L-KD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-ST L-ST ST VT MZ H-KD H-VT L-VT L-KD H-MZ L-MZ Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.30 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Text Mounting position ratiopacPRO air horizontal rails/central rails front rear front rear 4-air U (1/2 U + 3 U + 1/2 U) 01802061 5-air U (1/2 U + 3 U + 1U +1/2 U) 01802062 7-air U (1/2 U + 6 U + 1/2 U) 7-air U (1/2 U + 3 U + 3U 1/2 U) 01802063 01802064 Horizontal rails can be bolted on in 15 mm depth grid 01808050 100 H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ L-ST / L-VT / L-MZ H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-KD / H-LD / L-KD H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ L-ST / L-VT / L-MZ 100 H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ L-ST / L-VT / L-MZ L-ST / L-VT / L-MZ H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ ST / VT / MZ 233,35 H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD 100 100 H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ L-ST / L-VT / L-MZ H-KD / H-LD / L-KD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-LD H-ST L-ST ST VT MZ H-KD H-VT L-VT L-KD H-MZ L-MZ 5.31 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Order Information Front horizontal rails With long lip for insertion/extraction of CompactPCI and VME64x boards "heavy" "heavy" Type H-KD Type H-LD short lip long lip bza44980 06197008 06197009 Al extrusion, anodised finish, contact surface conducting, with printed HP markings Al extrusion, anodised finish, contact surface conducting, with printed HP markings Usable length Length 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) HP mm 28 147.32 34560-228 34560-328 42 218.44 34560-242 34560-342 63 325.12 34560-263 34560-363 84 431.80 34560-284 34560-384 M4 × 10, St, zinc-plated, necessary if guide rail is screwed to slot 1, PU 100 pieces 24571-372 24571-372 Threaded inserts see page 5.35 5.35 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof "light": loading capacity up to approx. 7.5 kg; "heavy": loading capacity > 7.5 kg Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.32 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Main Catalogue Order Information Rear horizontal rails For indirect backplane fixing with insulation strip For direct backplane fixing For direct fixing of connectors to EN 60603-2 (DIN 41612) 04400001 04400002 04400003 "heavy" "heavy" "heavy" Type H-ST Type H-VT Type H-MZ standard long lip with Z-rail 06105074 06197011 06197013 06197015 Al extrusion, anodised finish, contact surface conducting, with printed HP markings Al extrusion, anodised finish, contact surface conducting, with printed HP markings Al extrusion, anodised finish, contact surface conducting, with printed HP markings Usable length Length 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) HP mm 28 147.32 34560-528 34560-728 34560-928 42 218.44 34560-542 34560-742 34560-942 63 325.12 34560-563 34560-763 34560-963 84 431.80 34560-584 34560-784 34560-984 Torx panhead screw, 4 x 10 24571-372 24571-372 24571-372 Perforated rail for connector mounting with insulation strip see page 5.35 – – Z-rail for connector mounting without insulation strip see page 5.35 – – Insulation strips see page 5.35 – – Threaded inserts see page 5.35 5.35 5.35 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof "light": loading capacity up to approx. 7.5 kg; "heavy": loading capacity > 7.5 kg 5.33 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Main Catalogue Order Information Horizontal rails rear, centre For indirect mounting of backplanes via insulation strip For direct backplane mounting For direct fixing of connectors to EN 60603-2 (DIN 41612) 04400001 04400002 04400003 Type ST Type VT Type MZ 06108090 06197016 06197017 06197018 Al extrusion, finish anodised, conductive contact surface; horizontal rail type AB (AB = support) is required to fix the 80 mm rear I/O boards; without marking Al extrusion, finish anodised, conductive contact surface; horizontal rail type AB (AB = support) is required to fix the 80 mm rear I/O boards; without marking Al extrusion, finish anodised, conductive contact surface; horizontal rail type AB (AB = support) is required to fix the 80 mm rear I/O boards; without marking Usable length Length 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) HP mm 28 147.32 34561-028 34561-128 34561-228 42 218.44 34561-042 34561-142 34561-242 63 325.12 34561-063 34561-163 34561-263 84 431.80 34561-084 34561-184 34561-284 Torx panhead screw, 4 x 10 24571-372 24571-372 24571-372 Insulation strips see page 5.35 – – Threaded inserts see page 5.35 5.35 5.35 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.34 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Main Catalogue Order Information Note All horizontal rails without print 1000 mm version without M4 thread in end Horizontal rails (type AB) for rear I/O guide rails For CompactPCI in rear I/O area 06108009 Type AB 06108069 06197009 Al extrusion, finish anodised, conductive contact surface; horizontal rail type AB (AB = support) is required to fix the 80 mm rear I/O boards; without marking Usable length Length 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) HP mm 20 106.68 34561-520 28 147.32 34561-528 40 208.28 34561-540 42 218.44 34561-542 63 325.12 34561-563 84 431.80 34561-584 – 1000 34561-501 Screw, M4 x 14, PU 100 pieces, for fastening horizontal rail to side panel 24560-130 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof "light": loading capacity up to approx. 7.5 kg; "heavy": loading capacity > 7.5 kg H - KD H - KD H - ST AB H - ST AB 12,75 15 12,75 9,75 3 5.35 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Threaded inserts, perforated strips, insulation strips Threaded insert Perforated strip Insulation strip M2.5 M3 (item 1) 06103056 BZA45853 BZ6749 Required for fixing the front panel to the horizontal rail; St, zinc-plated; use collar screw 12.3 mm, see page 6.64 For centring shielded plug-in units, Al, 1 mm, please order fixing grub screw separately For insulated mounting of backplane; PBT UL 94 V-0, grey Usable length Length Length Length HP mm 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) mm 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) mm PU 10 pieces2) 28 146.82 34561-328 – 147.12 30845-197 144.20 24560-828 42 217.94 34561-342 – 218.24 30845-211 210.40 24560-842 63 324.62 34561-363 – 324.92 30845-232 316.88 24560-863 84 431.30 34561-384 34561-484 431.60 30845-253 428.64 24560-884 5 2 5,08 Accessories Grub screw M2.5 x 8, PU 100 pieces 21100-276 – – – Grub screw M2.5 x 9, PU 100 pieces – – 21101-359 – Grub screw M3 x 8, PU 100 pieces – 21100-646 – – 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 2) Part no. includes one packing unit (PU); delivery is exclusively made in PU Z-rails, perforated rails Z-rail for connectors Perforated rail DIN EN 60603-2, DIN 41612 item 1 31-pin, DIN 41617 EN 606032, DIN 41612 item 1 BZA45849 BZA45850 BZA45848 06708063 06708051 For connector mounting with ST horizontal rails, please order threaded insert and screw separately For connector mounting with ST horizontal rails, please order threaded insert and screw separately For connector mounting with VT horizontal rails, please order threaded insert and screw separately Usable length Length HP mm 1 piece 1 piece PU 4 pieces 28 142.24 30822-033 – 20822-049 42 213.36 30822-047 – 20822-050 60 304.80 30822-065 30819-783 20822-047 84 426.70 30822-089 30819-808 20822-048 Torx panhead screw, to fix connector to perforated rail,, M2.5 × 7, PU 100 piecesItem 3 24560-147 24560-147 24560-147 Torx panhead screw, to fix perforated rail to horizontal rail, M2.5 × 10, PU 100 pieces Item 2 24560-148 24560-148 24560-148 172,5 172,5 175,5 2 1 3 3,0 9,75 12,75 2 1 3 12,75 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.36 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Order Information Divider plates Divider plates Mounting position for stainless steel EMC gasket Mounting position for textile EMC gasket front rear front rear bpa45911 06105078 bpa45912 Stainless steel, 1 mm, is mounted by clipping onto horizontal rail, space requirement on component side 2 mm; mounting direction varies with shielding design (EMC stainless steel or textile gasket); retrofitting the divider plate in an already-assembled subrack/case will first require dismantling of the horizontal rails; where front panels are unshielded, both mounting directions are possible Height Depth A B H U mm mm mm mm 1 piece 3 160 158.3 135.0 113.5 34562-761 3 220 218.3 195.0 113.5 34562-762 6 160 158.3 135.0 246.9 34562-763 6 220 218.3 195.0 246.9 34562-764 5.37 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Order Information Note Please order fixing material for assembly of mounting plate separately A guide rail can be mounted on the first and last slot position 4.4" and "reinforced" guide rails cannot be used Mounting plates Mounting plate Assembly strip for partial widths bpa45875 bpa46557 06812002 Al, 1.5 mm; for mounting over partial width, please order assembly strips separately St, 2 mm, zinc-plated; is bolted from front to rear onto the horizontal rails; to fix mounting plates Width Board lengths HP mm mm 1 piece 1 piece 28 146.88 160 34562-745 30840-021 28 146.88 220 34562-749 30840-033 28 146.88 280 34562-753 30840-045 28 146.88 340 34562-757 30840-057 42 217.99 160 34562-746 30840-021 42 217.99 220 34562-750 30840-033 42 217.99 280 34562-754 30840-045 42 217.99 340 34562-758 30840-057 63 324.67 160 34562-747 30840-021 63 324.67 220 34562-751 30840-033 63 324.67 280 34562-755 30840-045 63 324.67 340 34562-759 30840-057 84 431.35 160 34562-748 30840-021 84 431.35 220 34562-752 30840-033 84 431.35 280 34562-756 30840-045 84 431.35 340 34562-760 30840-057 Assembly kit for mounting plate PU 1 kit (Torx countersunk screw M4 x 5, St, zincplated, 12 pieces; screw M4 x 6, St, zinc-plated, 10 pieces; M4 square nut, St, zinc-plated, 10 pieces) 24560-184 – Assembly kit for assembly strips of mounting plate Torx screw M2.5 × 5, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces – 24560-146 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.38 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Order Information Note Please order front frame separately Horizontal board installation Horizontal board installation Board cage Front frame for EMC shielding Front frame, unshielded 06102073 bpa45913 bza43061 bpa45914 Struts die-cast zinc; horizontal rails front and rear; threaded insert, St, zinc-plated; fixing material kit; for horizontal mounting of double-height euroboards in 3 or 4 U high subracks/cases; 54 TE space required; please order front frame for EMC shielding separately 2 horizontal covers, AI, 2.5 mm, front anodised, rear iridescent green chromated; 2 vertical trims, Al extrusion, clear passivated; stainless steel EMC gasket; front frame forms the contact between subrack and the subassemblies Al, 2.5 mm, clear anodised; front frame with cut-out, clear internal width w = 266.35 mm Height Usable height h HP Other dimensions and options U Horizontal rail, front Horizontal rail, rear PU 1 kit PU 1 kit 1 piece 3 20 24564-117 24564-109 34564-108 3 20 24564-118 24564-109 34564-109 4 28 24564-217 24564-209 34564-208 Assembly tool, for mounting the EMC gasket (stainless steel) – 24560-270 – * For direct backplane mounting 273.98 = 54TE h H 273,98=54TE w 5.39 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Order Information Subdivision of the 6 U assembly area into: – 2 x 3 U – 1 x 6 U Designed to accept Euroboards (100 mm high) and double Euroboards (233.35 mm high) Note Please order EMC gasketing kit for horizontal rails separately, see page 5.19 Please order perforated strips for horizontal rails separately, see page 5.35 Please order rear centre horizontal rail separately, see page 5.33 Combined mountings (6 U and 2 x 3 U one above the other) Combined mounting Alternative front panels for combined mounting Splitting extrusion Horizontal and vertical subdivision (incl. front panel for stainless steel EMC gasket) Unshielded front panel, 6 U, 2 HP item 6 Front panel for textile EMC gasket, 6 U, 2 HP item 6 For combined mounting Item 2 bpa46549 bpa46549 bpa46549 bza45857 bza42182 Item 1: 2 front horizontal rails (H-KD), Al extrusion, anodised; item 2: 2 rear horizontal rails (AB), Al extrusion, anodised; item 3: threaded insert, St, zincplated; item 4: Zn die-cast support member; item 6: front panel 2 HP, 6 U, shielded; with EMC stainless steel gasket (84:0 without items 4, 6) Al, 2.5 mm, front anodised, rear iridescent green chromated Al, 2.5 mm, U-profile with notch, 6 U, 2 HP 6 U, die-cast zinc; splitting extrusion is inserted in the grid holes of the horizontal rail; the splitting extrusion can be bolted Width pitch T1:T2 HP PU 1 kit 1 (SPQ 5) 1 piece (SPQ 5)1) 1 piece 20:62 24562-420 30847-472 30849-140 64560-010 40:42 24562-440 42:40 24562-442 63:19 24562-463 84:0 24562-484 Countersunk screw with Torx M4 × 14, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces fixing splitting extrusion/horizontal rail – – – 24560-145 Panhead screw M2.5 × 10, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces fixing horizontal rail/splitting extrusion – – – 24560-179 Pozidrive/slotted collar screw M2.5 x 12.3, St, nickel-plated, PU 100 pieces – 21101-101 21101-101 – Pozidrive/slotted collar screw M2.5, black, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces – 21101-102 21101-102 – Washer, 2.7 x 5 x 1, plastic PA 6, PU 100 pieces – 21101-121 21101-121 – Textile gasket, core: foam, sleeve: textile cladding with CuNi coating, UL 94 V-0, PU 10 pieces – – 21101-855 – 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 4 4 6 1,3 1,3 2 2 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.40 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Main Catalogue Order Information Guide rails for plug-in units and modules, one-piece, groove width 2 mm and 2.5 mm Assembly - can be clipped into Al extruded horizontal rails - can be clipped into 1.5 mm thick plates Storage temperature from -40 °C ... 130 °C For plug-in units and frame type plug-in units Standard With DIN connector fixing as standard 06101001 06101501 Up to 220 mm length, PBT, UL 94 V-0; from 280 mm length, multi-piece, end piece PBT, UL 94 V-0, central section Al extrusion PBT, UL 94 V-0, red, connector is clipped directly onto the guide rails; for euroboards 100 x 160 mm or 100 x 220 mm only Board lengths Groove width Colour mm mm mm PU 10 pieces2) 1 pair (SPQ 10)1) 70 2 red – – 70 2 grey – – 160 2 red 24560-351 64560-074 220 2 red 24560-353 64560-075 280 2 red 24560-379 – 340 2 red 24560-380 – 160 2.5 red – – 220 2.5 red – – Accessories Retention screw, PU 100 pieces 24560-141 ESD clip, PU 50 pieces 24560-255 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 2) Part no. includes one packing unit (PU); delivery is exclusively made in PU Description of accessories see from page 6.41 5.41 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Main Catalogue Order Information Guide rails type "accessories", one-piece, groove width 2 mm and 2.5 mm Assembly - can be clipped into horizontal rails in Al extrusion - can be clipped into 1.5 mm thick plate Storage temperature from -40 °C ... +130 °C Guide rail type "Accessories" "Accessories" strengthened For heavy modules, Al extrusion, silver, robust version 06102002 bza46554 06102005 Up to 220 mm length, PBT, UL 94 V-0; > 280 mm length, multi-piece, end piece PBT, UL 94V-0, middle section Al extrusion PBT UL 94V-0, red; support beam of guide rails adds to strengthening Al extrusion; is screwed to horizontal rail "heavy" with retention screws Board lengths Groove width Colour mm mm mm PU 10 pieces2) 1 piece (SPQ 50)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 100 2 red – – – 160 2 red 24560-373 64560-076 – 160 2 grey – – 34562-881 220 2 red 24560-374 64560-078 – 220 2 grey – – 34562-882 280 2 red/silver 24560-375 64560-080 34562-883 340 2 red/silver 24560-376 – 34562-884 400 2 red/silver – – 34562-885 160 2.5 silver – – 34564-881 220 2.5 silver – – 34564-882 280 2.5 silver – – 34564-883 340 2.5 silver – – 34564-884 400 2.5 silver – – 34564-885 Accessories Retention screw, PU 100 pieces 24560-141 24560-141 24560-157 ESD clip, PU 50 pieces 24560-255 – Board locking, red, PU 10 pieces 24560-377 – Board handle, red, PU 10 piecesdescription 24560-378 – Identification strips for board handle, red, PU 1 sheet = 438 pieces 60817-228 – Coding see page 6.41 – 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 2) Part no. includes one packing unit (PU); delivery is exclusively made in PU Description of accessories see from page 6.41 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.42 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Main Catalogue Order Information Note Reinforcement for plastic profiles (PVC) > 280 mm depth available on request Guide rails for CompactPCI, VME64x with coding, 4.4" PCBs, groove width 2 mm and 2.5 mm Assembly - can be clipped into Al extruded horizontal rails - can be clipped into1.5 mm thick plates Storage temperature from -40 °C ... 130 °C For CompactPCI, VME64x with coding For 4.4" PCBs In accordance with IEEE 1101.10 and IEC 60297-3-103 Offset 0.1" for power supply units in accordance with IEEE 1101.10 and IEC 60297-3-103 06106001 06106002 06104009 One-piece for groove width 2 mm, PBT, UL 94 V-0; multi-piece at groove width 2,5 mm, end-piece PBT, UL 94 V-0, center piece Al profile PBT, UL 94 V-0, for installation of power supplies in CompactPCI systems or plug-in units with SMD placement One-piece, PBT, UL 94 V-0; for 4.4" PCBs or drive units Board lengths Groove width Colour PU 10 pieces2) PU 10 pieces2) PU 10 pieces mm mm mm 70 2 red 24560-355 – – 70 2 grey 24560-360 – – 160 2 red 24560-356 – 24560-361 160 2 grey 24560-358 – – 160 2 green – 24560-359 – 220 2 red – – 24560-362 220 2 grey – – – 220 2 green – – – 160 2.5 red – – – 220 2.5 red 24561-330 – – 220 2.5 grey 24561-340 – – 280 2.5 red 24561-331 – – 280 2.5 grey 24561-341 – – 340 2.5 red 24561-332 – – 340 2.5 grey 24561-342 – – Accessories ESD clip, PU 50 pieces 24560-255 – – ESD clips, for alignment pin, PU 50 pieces 24560-256 24560-256 – Retention screw, PU 100 pieces 24560-141 24560-141 24560-158 Coding peg, PU 100 pieces 20817-501 20817-501 – 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 2) Part no. includes one packing unit (PU); delivery is exclusively made in PU Description of accessories see from page 6.41 5.43 Desk-top cases –Y/ -air Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Main Catalogue Order Information Note Air baffle for 280 mm deep and for 80 mm rear I/O boards available on request Air baffle for slots Air baffle Air baffle with front panel without front panel front panel with lateral groove for stainless steel EMC gasket U front panel for textile EMC gasket 06108085 06108087 06108088 06101507 Al, 1 mm, incl. assembly kit; prevents an air short circuit in unoccupied slot positions; is pushed into the groove of the guide rails Air baffle, Al, 1 mm; front panel, Al, 2.5 mm, front anodised, rear conductive; EMC gasket (stainless steel); fixing material kit prevents an air short- circuit where slots are unoccupied; is pushed into the groove of the guide rails Air deflector, Al, 1 mm, front panel, Al extrusion, 2.5 mm, front anodised, rear conductive; EMC gasket (textile); fixing material kit prevents an air short-circuit where slots are unoccupied; is pushed into the groove of the guide rails Depth Width Height mm HP U 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 160 4 3 34562-823 20848-712 20848-728 160 4 6 34562-826 20848-720 20848-736 160 8 3 34562-833 20848-714 20848-730 160 8 6 34562-836 20848-722 20848-738 160 12 3 34562-843 20848-716 20848-732 160 12 6 34562-846 20848-724 20848-740 220 4 3 34562-824 20848-713 20848-729 220 4 6 34562-827 20848-721 20848-736 220 8 3 34562-834 20848-715 20848-731 220 8 6 34562-837 20848-723 20848-739 220 12 3 34562-844 20848-717 20848-733 220 12 6 34562-847 20848-725 20848-741 Assembly tool for EMC gasket (stainless steel), 1 piece – 24560-270 – Desk-top cases –i Overview . . . . . 0 Cabinets . . . . . . 1 Wall mounted cases . . . . . . . . 2 Accessories for cabinets and wall mounted cases 3 Climate control 4 Desk-top cases 5 Subracks/ 19" chassis . . . 6 Front panels, plug-in units . . 7 Systems . . . . . . 8 Power supply units . . . . . . . . . 9 Backplanes . . 10 Connectors, front panel component system . . . . . . 11 Appendix . . . . 12 Downloads and further important information can be found on the Internet under www.schroff.biz 5.44 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 iMain Catalogue 05809001 05806052 05806050 05806055 05806056 Easy access provided by removable cladding parts Extremely robust one-piece die-cast frame Non-sensitive, scratch-resistant finish through powder coating Low weight 05806054 05806053 05806051 noa44075 Wide accessory programme with acrylic glass front hoods, carrying handles, ... Assembly possibility for euroboards and backplanes EMC version VDE-compliant GND/earthing Standards Internal dimensions in accordance with IEC 60297-3-101 Ingress protection IP 20 in accordance with IEC 60529 EMC test in accordance with VG 95373 part 15 Protective GND/earth connections in accordance with: DIN EN 50178 / VDE 0160 DIN EN 60950 / VDE 0805 DIN EN 61010-1 / VDE 0411 part 1 DIN EN 61010-1A2 / VDE 0411 part 1/A1 Desk-top cases –i Main Catalogue 5.45 E 10/2012 iMain Catalogue Aluminium case for 19" components to IEC 60297-3-100 or individual electronics assemblies Front frame and side panels in aluminium Extensive accessories, matched to portable applications Basic level shielding from basic versions up, extended EMC shielding retrofittable Design alternative to compacPRO Desktop cases Complete case (pre-assembled) – Prepared for 19" components to IEC 60297 for installation of euroboards – Basic level shielding from basic versions up, extended EMC shielding retrofittable – Height 3 U, 6 U Cases – Pre-assembled cases as basis for individual components or 19" components (IEC 60297) – Basic level shielding from basic versions up, extended EMC shielding retrofittable – Height: 2 U, 3 U, 4 U, 6 U – 3 U and 4 U cases prepared for tip-up carrying handle 05809003 05806003 Accessories 05809002 ServicePLUS from page 5.4 e.g. modifications (special colours, special depths, cut-outs in top cover, base plate or side panels) e.g. assembly service from 1 piece www.schroff.biz/ServicePLUS 30407004 Overview . . . . 5.44 propacPRO Complete cases 3, 6 U, unshielded/ shielded . . . . . . . 5.46 Cases 2, 3 U . . . . 5.50 Cases 4, 6 U . . . . 5.51 Cases for tip-up carrying handle 3, 4 U. . . . . . . . . . 5.52 Dimensions . . . . . 5.53 EMC shielding . . 5.55 Accessories Front panels . . . . 5.54 Rear panels . . . . . 5.55 Design elements 5.58 Lateral covers . . 5.59 Handles . . . . . . . . 5.60 Air filters . . . . . . . 5.61 Hoods . . . . . . . . . 5.62 Mounting plates . 5.64 GND/earthing kit 5.65 Cable holder . . . 5.65 Mounting position horizontal/ central rails . . . . 5.66 Horizontal rails . 5.67 Threaded inserts 5.68 Z-rails, perforated rails . 5.69 Combined mounting . . . . . . 5.70 Horizontal board assembly . . . . . . 5.71 Tip-up feet . . . . . 5.72 Guide rails and ESD clips . . . . . . 5.73 Divider plates . . . 5.75 Air flow barrier . . 5.75 ServicePLUS . . 5.4 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.46 Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Desk-top enclosure –i ServicePLUS see page 5.4 iMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Desk-top case with pre-configured components, in accordance with IEC 60297-3-101; prepared for 19" components such as plug-in units and euroboards Ventilation slots in base plate Rear panel with vent slots Delivery comprises (Items 1-7, 9 and 10 fitted) Complete case, EMC shielded 05809004 3 U 05806106 Maximale Einbautiefe = D - 45 (Distanz: Frontplatte - Rückwand) 8 7 5 6 12 11 13 14 10 b 3 4 10 a 15 9 1 9 2 Item Qty Description 3 U 6 U 1 1 1 Frame, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 2 2 4 Side panel, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 9006, with EMC side panel gasketing 3 1 1 Cover plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surface conductive, visible surface powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 4 1 1 Base plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surface conductive, visible surface powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/ earthing tag, base plate with 4 rows of ventilation slots 5 2 2 End piece for rear, ABS, RAL 7016, UL 94 V-0; can be used as a foot when case is used in vertical position 6 - 2 Adaptor bracket (only at 6 U) 7 - 2 Cover trim for side panel, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 9006 8 4 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, PC, black, UL 94 V-0 (20603-002) 9 2 2 Lateral trim, Al extrusion, visible surface painted, RAL 7016 with EMC sealing (textile) 10a 2 2 Horizontal rail, Al extrusion, with threaded insert, St, M2.5; perforated strip, Al, 1 mm, EMC contact strip between front panel - horizontal rail - cover plate 10b 2 2 Horizontal rail, Al extrusion, with threaded insert, St, M2.5; EMC contact strip between rear panel - horizontal rail - cover plate 11 2 2 Centre horizontal rail top/bottom, Al extrusion, with threaded insert, St, M2.5 and insulation strip, PBT, UL 94 V-0 (for indirect backplane mounting); enclosed loose 12 - 1 Centre horizontal rail, Al extrusion, anodised, conductive surfaces, with two threaded inserts, St, M2.5 and two insulation strips, PBT, UL 94 V-0 13 1 1 Rear panel with perforation, Al, 2.5 mm, anodised, with EMC sealing (textile) affixed 14 2 2 EMC support profile rear, Al extrusion, EMC sealing (textile) affixed 15 10/ 20 10/ 20 Guide rail for 160 mm board length, PBT, UL 94 V-0, 28/42 HP 10 pieces, 63/84 HP 20 pieces 16 1 1 GND/earthing kit 17 1 1 Assembly kit 5.47 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Main Catalogue Order Information Note Dimension drawings of side panel see from page 5.53 Complete cases, EMC shielded 05809051 05806060 3 U 05806062 6 U 155,5 130,0 112,3 289,0 262,8 245,7 W2 W1 121,95 150,9 D 32,5 15 Ø 4,6 4 7,2 121,95 265,9 15 Ø 4,6 4 7,2 121,95 284,3 D 32,5 Usable width Width W1 Depth D Height Part no. W2 W2 W1 D HP mm mm mm U 28 147.3 185.9 266 3 24576-101 28 147.3 185.9 326 3 24576-102 42 218.4 257 266 3 24576-103 42 218.4 257 326 3 24576-104 42 218.4 257 386 3 24576-105 63 325.1 363.7 266 3 24576-106 63 325.1 363.7 326 3 24576-107 63 325.1 363.7 386 3 24576-108 84 431.8 470.3 266 3 24576-109 84 431.8 470.3 326 3 24576-110 84 431.8 470.3 386 3 24576-111 84 431.8 470.3 446 3 24576-112 84 431.8 470.3 506 3 24576-113 84 431.8 470.3 326 6 24576-121 84 431.8 470.3 446 6 24576-122 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.48 Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Desk-top enclosure –i ServicePLUS see page 5.4 Main Catalogue Desk-top case with pre-configured components, in accordance with IEC 60297-3-101; prepared for 19" components such as plug-in units and euroboards Ventilation slots in base plate Rear panel perforated Delivery comprises (Items 1-7, 9 and 10 fitted) Complete cases, unshielded 05809004 3 U 05806105 Maximum mounting depth = D - 45 (Distance: front panel - rear panel) 7 5 6 13 12 14 1 9 2 11 3 4 10 15 9 8 Item Qty Description 3 U 6 U 1 1 1 Frame, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 2 2 4 Side panel, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 9006 3 1 1 Cover plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surface conductive, visible surface powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 4 1 1 Base plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surface conductive, visible surface powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/ earthing tag, base plate with 4 rows of ventilation slots 5 2 2 End piece for rear, ABS, RAL 7016, UL 94 V-0; can be used as a foot for use in vertical position 6 - 2 Adaptor bracket (only at 6 U) 7 - 2 Cover trim for side panel, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 9006 8 4 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, PC, black, UL 94 V-0 (20603-002) 9 2 2 Lateral trim, Al extrusion, visible surface painted, RAL 7016 with EMC sealing (textile) 10 2 2 Horizontal rail, Al extrusion, with threaded insert, St, M2.5 11 2 2 Rear horizontal rail, Al extrusion, with threaded insert, St, M2.5 and insulation strips, PBT, UL 94 V-0 (for indirect backplane mounting) 12 - 1 Centre horizontal rail, Al extrusion, anodised, conductive surfaces, with two threaded inserts, St, M2.5 and two insulation strips, PBT, UL 94 V-0 13 1 1 Rear panel with perforation, Al, anodised, 2 mm at 28, 42 and 63 HP, 2.5 mm at 84 HP 14 4 4 Support member for rear panel, Zn die-cast 15 10/ 20 10/ 20 Guide rail for 160 mm board length, PBT, UL 94 V-0, 28/42 HP 10 pieces, 63/84 HP 20 pieces 16 1 1 GND/earthing kit 17 1 1 Assembly kit 5.49 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Main Catalogue Order Information Maximum mounting depth = D - 45 (Distance: front panel - rear panel) Note Dimension drawings of side panel see from page 5.53 Complete cases, unshielded 05809051 05806060 3 U 05806062 6 U 155,5 130,0 112,3 289,0 262,8 245,7 W2 W1 121,95 150,9 D 32,5 15 Ø 4,6 4 7,2 121,95 265,9 15 Ø 4,6 4 7,2 121,95 284,3 D 32,5 Usable width Width W1 Depth D Height Part no. W2 W2 HP mm mm mm U 28 147.3 185.9 266 3 24576-001 28 147.3 185.9 326 3 24576-002 42 218.4 257 266 3 24576-003 42 218.4 257 326 3 24576-004 42 218.4 257 386 3 24576-005 63 325.1 363.7 266 3 24576-006 63 325.1 363.7 326 3 24576-007 63 325.1 363.7 386 3 24576-008 84 431.8 470.3 266 3 24576-009 84 431.8 470.3 326 3 24576-010 84 431.8 470.3 386 3 24576-011 84 431.8 470.3 446 3 24576-012 84 431.8 470.3 506 3 24576-013 84 431.8 470.3 326 6 24576-021 84 431.8 470.3 446 6 24576-022 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.50 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i Main Catalogue Desk-top case with pre-configured components, in accordance with IEC 60297-3-101; prepared for 19" components such as plug-in units and euroboards Ventilation slots in base plate Prepared for GND/earthing Delivery comprises (kit, items 1 - 5 fitted) Order Information Maximum mounting depth = D - 45 (Distance: front panel - rear panel) Note Case, 3 U with side panel for tip-up carrying handle, see page 5.52 Dimensions see page 5.48 Dimensions side panel, see page 5.53 Cases, 2 and 3 U, unshielded 05806001 05806057 05806077 Cross-section 2 U, 3 U 05806059 05806060 2 U 3 U ServicePLUS see page 5.4 Item Qty Description 1 1 Frame, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 2 2 Side panel, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 9006 3 1 Cover plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surface conductive, visible surface powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 4 1 Base plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surface conductive, visible surface powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag, base plate with 4 rows of ventilation slots 5 2 End piece for rear, ABS, RAL 7016, UL 94 V-0; can be used as a foot for use in vertical position 6 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, PC, black, UL 94 V-0 7 1 Assembly kit Usable width Width W1 Depth D 2 U 3 U W2 W2 Part no. Part no. HP mm mm mm 28 147.3 185.9 266 – 14576-101 28 147.3 185.9 326 – 14576-103 42 218.4 257 266 14576-021 14576-121 42 218.4 257 326 14576-023 14576-123 42 218.4 257 386 – 14576-125 63 325.1 363.7 266 14576-041 14576-141 63 325.1 363.7 326 14576-043 14576-143 63 325.1 363.7 386 14576-045 14576-145 84 431.8 470.3 266 – 14576-161 84 431.8 470.3 326 – 14576-163 84 431.8 470.3 386 – 14576-165 84 431.8 470.3 446 – 14576-167 84 431.8 470.3 506 – 14576-169 Accessories GND/earthing kit Cu wire 1.5 mm2, PVC sleeve, green/ yellow, links side panels, base, cover and rear panel, PU 1 piece 21102-001 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.51 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Main Catalogue Desk-top case with pre-configured components, in accordance with IEC 60297-3-101; prepared for 19" components such as plug-in units and euroboards Ventilation slots in base plate Prepared for GND/earthing Delivery comprises (kit, items 1 - 6 fitted) Order Information Maximum mounting depth = D - 45 (Distance: front panel - rear panel) Note Case, 4 U with side panel for tip-up carrying handle, see page 5.52 Dimensions side panel, see page 5.53 Cases, 4 and 6 U, unshielded 05806003 05806058 05806078 05806061 05806062 4 U 6 U ServicePLUS see page 5.4 Item Qty Description 4 U 6 U 1 1 1 Frame, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 2 2 4 Side panel, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 9006 3 1 1 Cover plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surface conductive, visible surface powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 4 1 1 Base plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surface conductive, visible surface powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/ earthing tag, base plate with 4 rows of ventilation slots 5 2 2 End piece for rear, ABS, RAL 7016, UL 94 V-0; can be used as a foot for use in vertical position 6 – 2 Adaptor bracket, Al 7 2 2 Cover trim for side panel, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 9006 8 4 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, PC, black, UL 94 V-0 9 1 1 Assembly kit Usable width Width W1 Depth D 4 U 6 U W2 W2 Part no. Part no. HP mm mm mm 42 218.4 257 266 14576-221 – 42 218.4 257 326 14576-223 – 63 325.1 363.7 266 14576-241 – 63 325.1 363.7 326 14576-243 – 63 325.1 363.7 386 14576-245 – 63 325.1 363.7 446 14576-247 – 84 431.8 470.3 326 – 14576-463 84 431.8 470.3 386 14576-265 14576-465 84 431.8 470.3 446 14576-267 14576-467 84 431.8 470.3 506 14576-269 14576-469 Accessories GND/earthing kit Cu wire 1.5 mm2, PVC sleeve, green/ yellow, links side panels, base, cover and rear panel , PU 1 piece 21102-001 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.52 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i iMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Desk-top case with pre-configured components, in accordance with IEC 60297-3-101; prepared for 19" components such as plug-in units and euroboards Ventilation slots in base plate Prepared for GND/earthing Prepared for fitting of tip-up carrying handle Delivery comprises (kit, items 1 - 6 fitted) Order Information Note Dimensions see page 5.48 Dimensions side panel, see page 5.53 3 U and 4 U cases, unshielded, with holes for tip-up carrying handle 05812006 05812050 05812051 05812052 05812053 3 U 4 U ServicePLUS see page 5.4 5 2 1 7 3 4 155,5 130,0 112,3 200,0 174,0 156,8 W2 W1 121,95 150,9 D 32,5 15 Ø 4,6 4 7,2 17,0 17,0 Ø 4,6 Ø 10,4 69,0 11,4 121,95 33,05 195,3 D 32,5 17,0 17,0 69,0 15 Ø 4,6 4 7,2 Ø 4,6 Ø 10,4 Item Qty Description 3 U 4 U 1 1 1 Frame, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 2 2 4 Side panel, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 9006; with drill holes for tip-up carrying handle 3 1 1 Cover plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surface conductive, visible surface powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 4 1 1 Base plate, Al, 1 mm, internal surface conductive, visible surface powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag, base plate with 4 rows of ventilation slots 5 2 2 End piece for rear, ABS, RAL 7016, UL 94 V-0; can be used as a foot for use in vertical position 6 – 2 Cover trim for side panel, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 9006 7 4 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, PC, black, UL 94 V-0 8 1 1 Assembly kit Usable width Width W1 Depth D 3 U 4 U W2 W2 Part no. Part no. HP mm mm mm 42 218.4 257.0 326 14577-123 14577-223 42 218.4 257.0 386 14577-125 – 63 325.1 363.7 326 14577-143 14577-243 63 325.1 363.7 386 14577-145 14577-245 84 431.8 470.3 326 14577-163 – 84 431.8 470.3 386 14577-165 14577-265 Accessories GND/earthing kit Cu wire 1.5 mm2, PVC sleeve, green/ yellow, links side panels, base, cover and rear panel , PU 1 piece 21102-001 Tip-up carrying handle for 42 HP case width, PU 1 kit 24576-071 Tip-up carrying handle for 63 HP case width, PU 1 kit 24576-072 Tip-up carrying handle for 84 HP case width, PU 1 kit 24576-073 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.53 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Text Dimensions Extruded side panel 2 U Extruded side panel 3 U 05806079 05806080 Extruded side panel 4 U, right Extruded side panel 4 U, left 05806081 05806082 Extruded side panel 6 U Dimensions table For case depth D d n mm mm mm 266 221.6 210 14 326 281.6 270 18 386 341.6 330 22 446 401.6 390 26 506 461.6 450 30 Note A side panel for case 6 U consists of 2 pieces 3 U extruded side panels Side panel with horizontal rail 05806083 05806107 D 12,25 e = D - 62,1 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.54 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i 05806063 PPA43756 Main Catalogue Delivery comprises Order Information EMC front panel see chapter Front Panels, page 7.7 05806064 05806065 Main Catalogue Delivery comprises Order Information Note Please order items 2, 3 and 4 separately Front panel, unshielded, for mounting on case frame Item Qty Description 1 1 Full-width front panel, Al, 2 mm (on 84 HP = 2.5 mm), anodised, cut edges plain 2 1 Assembly kit For case height For case width A B C D Part no. U HP mm mm mm mm 2 42 238.7 230.0 74.0 84.0 20850-128 2 63 345.4 336.7 74.0 84.0 20850-129 2 84 452.0 443.3 74.0 84.0 20850-130 3 28 167.6 158.9 118.5 128.5 20850-134 3 42 238.7 230.0 118.5 128.5 20850-135 3 63 345.4 336.7 118.5 128.5 20850-136 3 84 452.0 443.3 118.5 128.5 20850-137 4 42 238.7 230.0 162.9 172.9 20850-142 4 63 345.4 336.7 162.9 172.9 20850-143 4 84 452.0 443.3 162.9 172.9 20850-144 6 84 452.0 443.3 251.8 261.8 20850-158 Front panel, 1 U, unshielded, for 4 U case, for mounting on horizontal rails Item Qty Description 1 1 Front panel, Al, 2.5 mm, front anodised, rear iridescent green chromated Width A B C Front panel HP mm mm mm Part no. 28 141.9 127.0 – 20850-423 42 213.0 198.1 101.6 20850-424 63 319.7 304.8 157.5 20850-425 84 426.4 411.5 203.2 20850-426 Width Item 2 EMC gasket, front panel/ horizontal rail PU 10 pieces Item 3 EMC gasketing kit horizontal rails, 1 piece Item 4 Horizontal rail type H-KD, 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) HP Part no. Part no. Part no. 28 24560-229 24562-528 34560-228 42 24560-231 24562-542 34560-242 63 24560-233 24562-563 34560-263 84 24560-235 24562-584 34560-284 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 5.55 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 01802055 01804050 Unshielded 01802055 Shieldable Main Catalogue Two versions: unshielded, Al, 2.5 mm shieldable, Al extrusion (textile EMC gasketing retrofittable) Delivery comprises Order Information Please order textile EMC gasket separately EMC gasket rear panel - horizontal rail see page 5.65 Horizontal rails see page 5.67 Assembly parts see page 6.63 04602054 Main Catalogue The textile EMC gasket is glue fixed laterally on the front panel, always in the groove on the right-hand side of the profile Temperature range -40 °C ... +70 °C Delivery comprises () Order Information Rear panel, perforated, for mounting on horizontal rails 7,45 7,45 B ø 5,9 x 3,3 W Z 3,2 7,2 25 3 3 H 2,5 W - 2,58 2,5 3,7 3,7 Item Qty Description 1 1 Rear panel, Al, 2.5 mm, front: anodised, rear: iridescent green chromated; unshielded or shieldable with EMC sealing (textile) Height H Width W B h unshielded shieldable U mm HP mm mm mm Part no. Part no. 2 84 28 141.9 – 78 30849-007 20848-679 2 84 42 213 101.6 78 30849-014 20848-680 2 84 63 319.7 157.5 78 30849-015 20848-681 2 84 84 426.4 208.3 78 30849-016 20848-682 3 128.4 28 141.9 – 122.4 30849-008 20848-633 3 128.4 42 213 101.6 122.4 30849-021 20848-634 3 128.4 63 319.7 157.5 122.4 30849-022 20848-635 3 128.4 84 426.4 208.3 122.4 30849-023 20848-636 4 172.9 28 141.9 – 166.9 30849-009 20848-656 4 172.9 42 213 101.6 166.9 30849-028 20848-657 4 172.9 63 319.7 157.5 166.9 30849-029 20848-658 4 172.9 84 426.4 208.3 166.9 30849-030 20848-659 6 261.8 28 141.9 – 255.8 30849-010 20848-640 6 261.8 42 213 101.6 255.8 30849-035 20848-641 6 261.8 63 319.7 157.5 255.8 30849-036 20848-642 6 261.8 84 426.4 208.3 255.8 30849-037 20848-643 Textile EMC gasket Item Qty Description 1 10/100 Textile EMC gasket, core: foam, sleeve: textile cladding with CuNi coating Height Height Qty/PU Part no. U mm pieces 2 52 10 21101-857 3 97 100 21101-854 3 97 10 21101-853 4 142 10 21101-858 6 232 100 21101-856 6 232 10 21101-855 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.56 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i 05806066 ppa43882 Main Catalogue Mounting with support brackets on case (right and left) Versions with and without perforation Delivery comprises Order Information 05806067 Main Catalogue Mounts on case (left, right) Without perforation Delivery comprises Order Information Rear panel, unshielded, for mounting on case frame Item Qty Description 1 1 Full-width rear panel, Al, anodised, cut edges blank 28, 42, 63 HP = 2 mm thickness 84 HP = 2.5 mm thickness 2 4 Support member, Zn die-cast 3 1 Assembly kit Height H Width W w With perforation Without perforation U mm HP mm mm Part no. Part no. 2 84 42 213 190 24576-144 24576-044 2 84 63 320 298 24576-145 24576-045 2 84 84 426 406 24576-146 24576-046 3 128.5 28 142 118 24576-147 24576-047 3 128.5 42 213 190 24576-148 24576-048 3 128.5 63 320 298 24576-149 24576-049 3 128.5 84 426 406 24576-150 24576-050 4 172.9 42 213 190 24576-152 24576-052 4 172.9 63 320 298 24576-153 24576-053 4 172.9 84 426 406 24576-154 24576-054 6 261.8 84 426 406 24576-158 24576-058 Rear panel, shielded, for mounting on case frame Item Qty Description 1 1 Full-width EMC rear panel, Al 1.5 mm, passivated, with GND/earthing connection (Faston 6.3 mm) 2 2 Textile EMC gasketing, for mounting top and bottom, core: foam, sleeve: textile cladding with CuNi coating 3 2 Textile EMC gasketing, for mounting left and right, core: foam, sleeve: textile cladding with CuNi coating 4 1 Assembly kit Height H Height h Width W w Part no. U mm mm HP mm mm 2 101.5 84 42 217.9 213 24576-244 2 101.5 84 63 324.6 319.7 24576-245 3 146 128.4 28 146.8 141.9 24576-247 3 146 128.4 42 217.9 213 24576-248 3 146 128.4 63 324.6 319.7 24576-249 3 146 128.4 84 431.3 426.4 24576-250 4 190.4 172.9 42 217.9 213 24576-252 4 190.4 172.9 63 324.6 319.7 24576-253 4 190.4 172.9 84 431.3 426.4 24576-254 6 279.3 261.8 84 431.3 426.4 24576-258 5.57 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 05806102 05806097 04602081 Main Catalogue Front panel with textile EMC gasketing Hinges can be fitted left or right Suitable for europacPRO subrack and ratiopacPRO, compacPRO and propacPRO cases Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Note Usable width reduced by 2 HP (hinged side) Horizontal rail (item 5) for front panel mounting is required, please order separately Lateral trim is necessary, please order separately, see page 5.59 05806068 Main Catalogue For EMC shielding between side panel and top cover or base plate (sufficient for at least 1 case) Order Information Front panel, hinged, shielded, for mounting on horizontal rails 1 3 2 5 Item Qty Description 1 1 Front panel, hinged, Al, 2.5 mm, front anodised, rear iridescent green chromated 2 2 Hinge, Zn die-cast, chrome-plated 3 1 Textile EMC gasket core: foam, sleeve: textile cladding with CuNi coating 4 1 Assembly kit Height Width H h W w Part no. U HP mm mm mm mm 3 84 128.4 89.9 426.4 203.2 20848-611 6 84 261.8 223.2 426.4 203.2 20848-617 Item 5, Horizontal rail Type H-VT heavy duty, recessed mounting 84 HP, 1 piece (SPQ 10) 34560-784 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. EMC side panel gasket Item Description Qty/PU Part no. 1 Sealing cord, silicone, silver coated, Ø 2.4 mm, length 2.1 m 1 30850-354 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.58 Main Catalogue E 11/2013 Desk-top enclosure –i Main Catalogue To individualise case design Delivery comprises Order Information Note Size 28 HP and further colours available on request Cannot be combined with front hood Design elements 05809002 Qty Description 1 Design element, Al extrusion, powder-coated 1 Assembly kit Description Width Light grey RAL 7035 Brilliant blue RAL 5007 HP Part no. Part no. Form 1 42 20850-184 20850-299 63 20850-185 20850-300 PPA43761 84 20850-186 20850-301 Form 2 42 20850-190 20850-315 63 20850-191 20850-316 PPA43762 84 20850-192 20850-317 Form 3 42 20850-196 20850-331 63 20850-197 20850-332 PPA43763 84 20850-198 20850-333 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.59 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 05806069 Main Catalogue For lateral covering of frame and for producing a continuous front with front panels and plug-in units Serves for lateral shielding of side panels simultaneously Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information 05806103 Main Catalogue For vertical EMC shielding between shielded front panels and side panel Delivery comprises Order Information Trim, front, for EMC shielding Item Qty Description 1 2 Lateral trim, Al extrusion, visible surface painted RAL 7016 2 1 Textile EMC gasket 3 1 Assembly kit For case height h Part no. U mm 2 84 24576-017 3 128.5 24576-117 4 172.9 24576-217 6 261.8 24576-417 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Trim, rear, for EMC shielding Item Qty Description 1 2 EMC contact strip, Al extrusion 2 1 Textile EMC gasket 3 1 Assembly kit Height Height Part no. U mm 2 65.55 24576-018 3 110 24576-118 4 154.45 24576-218 6 243.35 24576-418 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.60 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i Main Catalogue With powder-coated carrying bar Can be locked in 30° increments Load-carrying capacity 20 kg Delivery comprises (Kit) Order Information Note To fit the tip-up carrying handle, holes must be drilled in the side panel Readily prepared cases (3 U and 4 U), for mounting the tip-up carrying handle see page 5.52 05806098 Main Catalogue Load-carrying capacity: 20 kg Delivery comprises (Kit) Order Information Note Holes must be drilled into the side panels to fix the strap handle Side panels with holes already drilled available on request Usable from case depth of D = 326 mm Tip-up carrying handle 05806101 Item Qty Description 1 1 Carrying bar, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 7016 2 2 Handle side part, Zn, die-cast, powder-coated, length 180 mm 3 2 Safety insert, St, 1.5 mm, black 4 1 Assembly kit for side panel mounting For case width Part no. HP 28 24576-070 42 24576-071 63 24576-072 84 24576-073 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Strap handle Item Qty Description 1 1 Band, spring steel, handle, flexible plastic, grey, RAL 7016 2 2 Cover, grey, RAL 7016 3 1 Assembly kit Description Part no. Strap handle with adaptor 20850-249 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.61 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 05806070 Main Catalogue Subsequent mounting possible without modification or tools Filter change without opening the case, IP protection code not affected Delivery comprises (Kit) Order Information Note For optimum ventilation feet must be fixed to the case, please order separately Air filter 2 3 1 Item Qty Description 1 1 Filter holder, Al, 1 mm, powder-coated, RAL 9006 2 1 Filter mat, synthetic fibre 3 1 Velcro For case width Air filter Replacement filter 1 piece HP Part no. Part no. 28 24576-093 64571-033 42 24576-094 64571-034 63 24576-095 64571-035 84 24576-096 64571-036 Tip-up foot in plastic silver, similar to RAL 9006, 4 pieces 20603-001 Plastic tip-up foot anthracite, similar to RAL 7016, 4 pieces 20603-002 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.62 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i 05806071 05806072 1) Front panel 05806073 Lock for front hood Main Catalogue From acrylic glass, hinged, removable Mounting of hinges at top or bottom Lock (max. 2) retrofittable Lateral cover (item 5) also serves as vertical EMC shielding of side panels Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Note Cannot be combined with design elements Other heights available on request Before assembly of hood feet must be fixed to case; please order separately Front hood 3 U 16 1) 147,2 11 180° 3 Item Qty Description 1 1 Hood, PMMA, tinted blue grey, acrylic glass, 3 mm 2 2 Hinge, PC, UL 94 V-0, RAL 7016 3 2 Handle, PC, UL 94 V-0, RAL 7016 4 2 Retainer, UL 94 V-0, PC, RAL 7016 5 2 Lateral trim, Al extrusion, visible surface painted RAL 7016 6 1 Assembly kit For case width Part no. HP 28 24576-080 42 24576-081 63 24576-082 84 24576-083 Lock for front hood Locking cylinder, key, assembly kit, PU 1 kit 60850-171 Plastic tip-up foot silver, similar to RAL 9006, 4 pieces 20603-001 Plastic tip-up foot anthracite, similar to RAL 7016, 4 pieces 20603-002 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.63 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 iMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Increases the distance between rear panel and parking surface (when used vertically) Simplifies cable routing Increased shock and vibration damping Required for mounting rear hood Delivery comprises Order Information 05806075 05806076 Main Catalogue Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Note To fit the rear hood, feet must be fitted to the rear panel; please order separately Foot for rear hood ppa45113 ppa45106 Item Qty Description 1 2 Foot, PU foam 1 1 Assembly kit For cabinet height Height H Part no. U mm 3 147.9 24576-393 4 192.3 24576-394 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Rear hood Item Qty Description 1 1 Hood, Al, 1 mm, RAL 9006, fixing with knurled screws 2 1 Assembly kit HeightWidth A B C D E Part no. U HP mm mm mm mm mm 3 42 246 230 213 145.9 64 24576-086 3 63 352.7 336.7 319.7 145.9 64 24576-087 3 84 459.4 443.4 426.4 145.9 64 24576-088 4 63 352.7 336.7 319.7 190.4 108.5 24576-091 4 84 459.4 443.4 426.4 190.4 108.5 24576-092 Foot for rear hood for case height 3 U, PU foam, black, PU 2 pieces 24576-393 Foot for rear hood for case height 4 U, PU foam, black, PU 2 pieces 24576-394 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.64 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i Order Information 06103057 propacPRO: D = board length - 47.5 mm; n = 1 for 160 mm board length; n = 2 for 220 mm board length; n=4 for 340 mm board length Note Please order assembly kit for mounting plate separately Fixing strips required for partial width, please order separately Other versions on request Dimensions side panel with horizontal rail see page 5.53 Mounting plates Mounting plate for fixing of heavy components Mounting plate over full width: mounting is onto the side panels Mounting plate over partial width: mounting is onto one side panel and a fixing strip or onto 2 fixing strips Fixing strip for partial widths 05812001 06102501 05806100 Board lengths Al, 1.5 mm; for mounting over partial width, please order fixing strips separately St, 2 mm, zinc-plated; is bolted from front to rear onto the horizontal rails; to fix mounting plates Width W W HP mm mm 1 piece 1 piece 42 217.99 160 34562-746 30840-021 42 217.99 220 34562-750 30840-033 63 324.67 160 34562-747 30840-021 63 324.67 220 34562-751 30840-033 84 431.35 160 34562-748 30840-021 84 431.35 220 34562-752 30840-033 84 431.35 340 34562-760 30840-057 Assembly kit for mounting plate, PU 1 kit (Torx countersunk screw M4 x 5, St, zinc-plated, 12 pieces; screw M4 x 6, St, zinc-plated, 10 pieces; M4 square nut, St, zinc-plated, 10 pieces) 24560-184 – Assembly kit for fixing strips for partial width mounting plates, Torx screw M2.5 × 5, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces M2.5 × 5, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces – 24560-146 5.65 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 05806109 Main Catalogue The EMC contact strip is clipped onto the horizontal rail and forms a conductive link to front or rear panel Can be used for front/rear horizontal rails type VT (recessed) Delivery comprises Order Information aza43284 Main Catalogue Protective GND/earthing connections in accordance with: – DIN EN 50178/VDE 0160 – DIN EN 60950/VDE 0805 – DIN EN 61010-1/VDE 0411 part 1 – DIN EN 61010-1A2/VDE 0411 part 1A1 VDE tested Order Information 02908053 02908052 Main Catalogue Delivery comprises Order Information EMC gasket, stainless steel, between front/rear panel and horizontal rail Item Qty Description 1 10/100 EMC gasket, St, stainless Width Length Qty/PU Part no. HP mm pieces 28 131.78 10 24560-229 42 202.9 10 24560-231 63 304.5 10 24560-233 84 416.56 10 24560-235 84 416.56 100 24560-236 GND/earthing kit Description Part no. GND/earthing kit, Cu wire 1.5 mm2, PVC sleeve, green/ yellow, links side panels, base and rear panel, 1 piece 21102-001 Cable holder 19 9 17 14 26,5 46 20,2 Ø 3 Ø 4,4 Ø 4,4 Ø 3 Item Qty Description 1 2 Cable holder, ABS, UL V-94 0, RAL 7016, detent for cables between 8 mm and 12 mm 2 1 Drilling template, two drill holes each per holder are needed in rear panel 3 1 Assembly kit Description Part no. Cable holder 24575-800 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.66 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i Text Mounting position horizontal/central rails 2 U 05806084 3 U 05806085 05809050 4 U (3 + 1) "Z" (EMC shielding with 2 horizontal rails) 05806086 06106051 6 U 6 U (2 x 3) 05806087 05806088 H - VT H - VT H - VT H - VT H - VT H - VT H - VT H - VT H - ST H - VT H - MZ H-VT H-ST H-KD H-MZ ST H - VT H - VT 2 x H - KD H - VT H - VT H - ST H - VT H - MZ H - VT H - VT H - VT H - VT ST H - ST H - VT H - MZ H - ST H - VT H - MZ H - VT “Z” “Z” 2 x H - KD H - VT H - VT H - VT H - ST H - VT H - MZ H - ST H - VT H - MZ H - ST H - VT H - MZ 5.67 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Main Catalogue Order Information Note Further horizontal rails see from page 6.27 Fitting options see page 5.66 Horizontal rails to front/centre/rear For indiect backplane fixing with insulation strip For direct backplane fixing For direct fixing of connectors in accordance with EN 60603-2 (DIN 41612) Front horizontal rails Stainless steel EMC gasket between horizontal rail and horizontal rail Horizontal rail type H-VT robust, with EMC gasket 06197011 06197011 06197011 bza45877 06106052 "heavy" "heavy" "heavy" "heavy" Type H-ST Type H-VT Type H-MZ Type H-KD standard long lip with Z-rail short lip 06197011 06197009 06197015 06197008 Al extrusion, anodised finish, conductive surface, with printed HP markings Al extrusion, anodised finish, conductive surface, with printed HP markings Al extrusion, anodised finish, conductive surface, with printed HP markings Al extrusion, anodised finish, conductive surface, with printed HP markings item 1: metal strip, Al, 1 mm, item 2: EMC stainless steel gasket; for shielding of 2 horizontal rails positioned directly one above the other if assembly area is divided vertically horizontal rail: Al extrusion, anodised, conductive contact surface for cover plates on shielded cases Usable length Length HP mm 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) PU 1 kit 1 piece 28 147.32 34560-528 34560-728 34560-928 34560-228 24562-528 24576-028 42 218.44 34560-542 34560-742 34560-942 34560-242 24562-542 24576-042 63 325.12 34560-563 34560-763 34560-963 34560-263 24562-563 24576-063 84 431.80 34560-584 34560-784 34560-984 34560-284 24562-584 24576-084 Torx panhead screw , M4 × 14, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 24571-371 24571-371 24571-371 24571-371 – 24571-371 Torx panhead screw , M 4 × 10, St, zinc-plated, necessary if guide rail is screwed to slot 1, PU 100 pieces – – 24571-372 24571-372 – 24571-372 Perforated rail for connector mounting with insulation strip see page 5.69 – – – – – Z-rail for connector mounting without insulation strip see page 5.69 – – – – – Insulation strips see page – 5.68 – – – – Threaded inserts see page 5.68 5.68 5.68 5.68 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.68 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i 05806089 Main Catalogue For indirect backplane mounting (with insulation strip) For 6 U propacPRO case Delivery comprises (kit, item 1 to 4 are pre-mounted) Order Information Order Information Horizontal rails, centre, type ST-C Item Qty Description 1 1 Horizontal rail, Al extrusion, anodised, contact surfaces conductive 2 2 Adaptor plate, Al 3 2 Threaded insert, M2.5, St, zinc-plated 4 2 Countersunk screw, M4 x 14 5 4 Pan head screw, M4 x 6 Usable width Length Part no. HP mm 84 431.8 24575-474 Insulation strip 84 HP, PBT UL 94 V-0, grey, PU 10 pieces 24560-884 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Threaded inserts, perforated strips, insulation strips Threaded insert Perforated strip Insulation strip M2.5 M3 (item 1) 06103056 BZA45853 BZ6749 Threaded insert required for fixing the front panel to the horizontal rail; St, zinc-plated; use collar screw 12.3 mm, see page 6.64 Perforated strip for centring shielded plug-in units, Al, 1 mm, please order grub screw separately Insulation strip for insulated backplane mounting; PBT UL 94 V-0, grey Usable length Length Length Length HP mm 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) mm 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) mm PU 10 pieces 28 146.82 34561-328 – 147.12 30845-197 144.20 24560-828 42 217.94 34561-342 – 218.24 30845-211 210.40 24560-842 63 324.62 34561-363 – 324.92 30845-232 316.88 24560-863 84 431.30 34561-384 34561-484 431.60 30845-253 428.64 24560-884 5 2 5,08 Accessories Grub screw M2.5 x 8, PU 100 pieces 21100-276 – – – Grub screw M2.5 x 9, PU 100 pieces – – 21101-359 – Grub screw M3 x 8, PU 100 pieces – 21100-646 – – 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 2) Part no. includes one packing unit (PU); delivery is exclusively made in PU 5.69 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Order Information Z-rails, perforated rails Z-rail for connectors Perforated rail DIN EN 60603-2, DIN 41612 item 1 31-pin, DIN 41617 EN 606032, DIN 41612 item 1 BZA45849 BZA45850 BZA45848 06708063 06708051 for connector mounting on ST horizontal rails, please order threaded insert and screw separately for connector mounting on ST horizontal rails, please order threaded insert and screw separately for connector mounting on VT horizontal rails, please order threaded insert and screw separately Usable length Length HP mm 1 piece 1 piece PU 4 pieces 28 142.24 30822-033 – 20822-049 42 213.36 30822-047 – 20822-050 60 304.80 30822-065 30819-783 20822-047 84 426.70 30822-089 30819-808 20822-048 Item 3, Torx panhead screw to fix connector to perforated rail,, M2.5 × 7, PU 100 pieces 24560-147 24560-147 24560-147 Item 2, Torx panhead screw, to fix perforated rail to horizontal rail, M2.5 × 10, PU 100 pieces 24560-148 24560-148 24560-148 172,5 172,5 175,5 2 1 3 3,0 9,75 12,75 2 1 3 12,75 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.70 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i Order Information Subdivision of the 6 U assembly area into: – 2 x 3 U – 1 x 6 U Designed to accept euroboards (100 mm high) and double euroboards (233.35 mm high) Note Please order EMC gasketing kit for horizontal rails separately, see page 6.54 Please order perforated strips for horizontal rails separately, see page 5.68 Please order rear centre horizontal rail separately, see page 5.68 Combined mounting (6 U and 2 x 3 U one above the other) Combined mounting Splitting extrusion Horizontal and vertical subdivision (incl. front panel for stainless steel EMC gasket) Unshielded front panel, 6 U, 2 HP item 5 Front panel for textile EMC gasket, 6 U, 2 HP item 5 for combined mounting item 2 05806108 bza45819 06102501 06102501 06102501 item 1: 2 front horizontal rails (H-KD), Al extrusion, anodised; item 2: 2 rear horizontal rails (AB), Al extrusion, anodised; item 3: threaded insert, St, zinc-plated; item 4: Zn die-cast support member; item 5: front panel 2 HP, 6 U, shielded; with EMC stainless steel gasket; 84:0 without items 4, 5 Al, 2.5 mm, front anodised, rear iridescent green chromated Al, 2.5 mm, U-profile with notch, 6 U, 2 HP 6 U, Zn die-cast; splitting extrusion is inserted in the grid holes of the horizontal rail; the splitting extrusion can be bolted Width pitch T1:T2 HP PU 1 kit 1 (SPQ 5) 1 piece (SPQ 5)1) 1 piece 20:62 24562-420 30847-472 30849-140 64560-010 40:42 24562-440 42:40 24562-442 63:19 24562-463 84:0 24562-484 Torx countersunk screw M4 × 14, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces for fixing splitting extrusion/horizontal rail – – – 24560-145 Panhead screw M2.5 × 10, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces for fixing horizontal rail/splitting extrusion – – – 24560-179 Pozidrive/slotted collar screw M2.5 x 12.3, St, nickel-plated, PU 100 pieces – 21101-101 21101-101 – Pozidrive/slotted collar screw M2.5, black, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces – 21101-102 21101-102 – Washer 2.7 x 5 x 1, plastic PA 6, PU 100 pieces – 21101-121 21101-121 – Textile gasket, core: foam, sleeve: textile cladding with CuNi coating, UL 94 V-0, PU 10 pieces – 21101-855 5.71 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Order Information Horizontal board mounting Horizontal board mounting Board cage Front frame for EMC gasketing Front frame, unshielded 05806092 05806091 bpa45913 bza43061 (1 TE = 1 HP, 1 HE = 1 U) Struts die-cast zinc; horizontal rails front and rear; threaded insert, St, zinc-plated; fixing material kit; for horizontal mounting of double-height euroboards in 3 or 4 U high subracks/cases; 54 HP space required; please order front frame for EMC gasketing separately 2 horizontal trims, AI 2.5 mm, front anodised, rear iridescent green chromated; 2 vertical trims, Al extrusion, clear passivated; stainless steel EMC gasket; front frame forms the contact between subrack and the sub-assemblies Al, 2.5 mm, clear anodised; front frame with cut-out, clear internal width w = 266.35 mm Height H Usable height h HP Other dimensions and options U Horizontal rail, front Horizontal rail, rear PU 1 kit PU 1 kit 1 piece 3 20 24564-117 24564-109 34564-108 3 20 24564-118 24564-109 34564-109 4 28 24564-217 24564-209 34564-208 Assembly tool, for mounting the EMC gasket (stainless steel) – 24560-270 – * For direct backplane mounting 273.98= 54TE h H 273,98 = 54 TE w Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.72 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i 05806093 02906050 Main Catalogue Static load-carrying capacity 25 kg per foot Tip-up feet can be used instead of the pre-mounted case feet Fixing holes provided in bottom of case Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information AZA43836 02908051 Can be used instead of the round standard feet Fixing holes provided in bottom of case Secure case stance with slip-proof rubber inserts Load carrying capacity: 50 kg per foot, max. case weight 40 kg Order Information 1) Part no. comprises 1 piece; delivery is in standard pack quantity (SPQ): please order a minimum of 10 feet or a multiple Note Delivery is in standard pack multiples; pricing is per individual item Plastic tip-up feet Item Qty Description 1 4 Foot, PA, UL 94 V-0 2 4 Anti-slip protection, TPE 3 2 Tip-up device, PA, UL 94 V-0 4 1 Assembly kit Description Part no. Plastic tip-up foot anthracite, similar to RAL 7016, 4 pieces 20603-002 Plastic tip-up foot silver, similar to RAL 9006, 4 pieces 20603-001 Cheesehead screw with slot M4 × 12, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21101-211 Hexagon nut M4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-211 Spring washer A4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-207 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Tip-up feet made of die-cast aluminium 41 20 Ø7,8 15,5 Ø3,1 Ø4,6 15 20 16,6 1 Description Qty Part no. Foot with tip-up, Al die-cast, silver 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 10603-002 Foot without tip-up, Al die-cast, silver 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 10603-001 Cheesehead screw with slot M4 × 12, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21101-211 Hexagon nut M4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-211 Spring washer A4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-207 5.73 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Order Information Guide rails for plug-in units and frame type plug-in units, one-piece, groove width 2 mm Assembly - can be clipped into Al extruded horizontal rails - can be clipped into 1.5 mm thick plates Storage temperature from -40 °C ... 130 °C For plug-in units and frame type plug-in units Standard With DIN connector fixing as standard 06102001 06101501 up to 220 mm length, PBT, UL 94 V-0; multi-piece from 280 mm length, end piece PBT, UL 94 V-0, central section Al extrusion PBT, UL 94 V-0, red, connector is clipped directly onto the guide rails; for euroboards, 100 x 160 mm or 100 x 220 mm only Board lengths Groove width Colour mm mm mm PU 10 pieces 1 pair (SPQ 10)1) 70 2 red – – 70 2 grey – – 160 2 red 24560-351 64560-074 220 2 red 24560-353 64560-075 280 2 red 24560-379 – 340 2 red 24560-380 – Dimension drawings see page 6.40 6.40 Accessories Retention screw, PU 100 pieces 24560-141 24560-141 ESD clip, PU 50 pieces description see page 6.41 24560-255 24560-255 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 2) Part no. includes one packing unit (PU); delivery is exclusively made in PU Further guide rails see page 6.35 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.74 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top enclosure –i Order Information Guide rails type "accessories", one-piece, groove width 2 mm and 2.5 mm Assembly - can be clipped into horizontal rails in Al extrusion - can be clipped into 1.5 mm thick plates storage temperature from -40 °C ... +130 °C Guide rails Guide rails Guide rails "Accessories" "Accessories" strengthened for heavy modules, Al extrusion, silver, robust version 06102002 06102005 06102005 up to 280 mm length, PBT, UL 94 V-0; multi-piece from 280 mm length, end piece PBT, UL 94V-0, middle section Al extrusion PBT UL 94 V-0, red support beam of guide rails adds to strengthening Al extrusion; is screwed to horizontal rail "heavy" with retention screws Board lengths Groove width Colour mm mm mm PU 10 pieces 1 piece (SPQ 50) 1 piece (SPQ 50)1) 100 2 red – – – 160 2 red 24560-373 64560-076 – 160 2 grey – – 34562-881 220 2 red 24560-374 64560-078 – 220 2 grey – – 34562-882 280 2 red/ silver 24560-375 64560-080 34562-883 340 2 red/ silver 24560-376 – 34562-884 400 2 silver – 34562-885 160 2.5 silver – – 34564-881 220 2.5 silver – – 34564-882 280 2.5 silver – – 34564-883 340 2.5 silver – – 34564-884 400 2.5 silver – – 34564-885 Dimension drawings see page 6.40 6.40 6.40 Accessories Retention screw, PU 100 pieces 24560-141 24560-141 24560-157 ESD clip, PU 50 pieces description see page 6.41 24560-255 24560-255 – Board locking, red, PU 10 pieces, description see page 6.41 24560-377 24560-377 – Board handle, red, PU 10 pieces, description see page 6.41 24560-378 24560-378 – Identification strips for board handle, red, PU 1 sheet = 438 pieces, description see page 6.41 60817-228 60817-228 – Coding see page 6.41 6.41 – 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 2) Part no. includes one packing unit (PU); delivery is exclusively made in PU Further guide rails see page 6.35 5.75 Desk-top enclosure –i Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Order Information Order Information Divider plate Divider plate Mounting position when stainless steel EMC gasket is used Mounting position when textile EMC gasket is used front rear front rear bpa45911 06105078 bpa45912 Stainless steel, 1 mm, is mounted by clipping onto horizontal rail, space requirement on component side 2 mm; mounting direction varies with shielding design (EMC stainless steel or textile gasket); retrofitting the divider plate in an already-assembled subrack/case will first require dismantling of the horizontal rails; where front panels are unshielded, both mounting directions are possible Height Depth A B H U mm mm mm mm PU 10 pieces 3 160 158.3 135.0 113.5 34562-761 3 220 218.3 195.0 113.5 34562-762 6 160 158.3 135.0 246.9 34562-763 6 220 218.3 195.0 246.9 34562-764 Air baffle for slots Air baffle Air baffle with front panel without front panel U front panel for textile EMC gasket 06108085 06108088 06101507 Al, 1 mm, incl. assembly kit; prevents an air short circuit in unoccupied slot positions; is pushed into the groove of the guide rails Air deflector, Al, 1 mm, front panel, Al extrusion, 2.5 mm, front anodised, rear conductive; EMC textile gasket, fixing materials kit prevents an air short-circuit where slots are unoccupied; is pushed into the groove of the guide rails Depth Width Height mm HP U 1 piece 1 piece 160 4 3 34562-823 20848-728 160 4 6 34562-826 20848-736 160 8 3 34562-833 20848-730 160 8 6 34562-836 20848-738 160 12 3 34562-843 20848-732 160 12 6 34562-846 20848-740 220 4 3 34562-824 20848-729 220 4 6 34562-827 20848-736 220 8 3 34562-834 20848-731 220 8 6 34562-837 20848-739 220 12 3 34562-844 20848-733 220 12 6 34562-847 20848-741 Desk-top cases –b Overview . . . . . 0 Cabinets . . . . . . 1 Wall mounted cases . . . . . . . . 2 Accessories for cabinets and wall mounted cases 3 Climate control 4 Desk-top cases 5 Subracks/ 19" chassis . . . 6 Front panels, plug-in units . . 7 Systems . . . . . . 8 Power supply units . . . . . . . . . 9 Backplanes . . 10 Connectors, front panel component system . . . . . . 11 Appendix . . . . 12 Downloads and further important information can be found on the Internet under www.schroff.biz 5.76 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 bMain Catalogue 02004009 02004079 Flexible expansion options, for 19" components e.g. plug-in unit units, or for individual expansion Standards Interior dimensions in accordance with: IEC 60297-3-101 Type of protection IP 20 in accordance with IEC 60529 GND/earth connections in accordance with: DIN EN 50178 / VDE 0160 DIN EN 60950 / VDE 0805 DIN EN 61010-1 / VDE 0411 part 1 DIN EN 61010-1A2 / VDE 0411 part 1/A12 Desk-top cases –b Main Catalogue 5.77 E 10/2012 bMain Catalogue Robust desk-top case for 19" components in accordance with IEC 60297-3-10x or for individual electronics assemblies Front and rear identical, depth-symmetrical construction Highly robust thanks to die-cast frame (front/rear) Side panel with integrated handle function Desk-top cases Complete case – Pre-configured case, prepared for 19" components – Case height 3 U and 6 U Case – Case height 2 U, 3 U, 4 U and 6 U 02009005 02004006 Extensive accessory range 02004002 ServicePLUS from page 5.4 e.g. modifications (special colours, special depths, cut-outs in top cover, base plate or side panels) e.g. assembly service from 1 piece www.schroff.biz/ServicePLUS 30407004 Overview . . . 5.76 compacPRO Complete cases 3, 6 U . . . . . . . . . . 5.78 Cases 2, 3, 4 U . . 5.79 6 U cases . . . . . . . 5.80 Accessories Filler angle . . . . . 5.81 Cable holder . . . . 5.81 Front panel/rear panel . . . . . . . . . . 5.82 Rear feet . . . . . . . 5.83 Edge protection. 5.83 Hood . . . . . . . . . . 5.84 Front door . . . . . 5.85 Handle . . . . . . . . 5.86 GND/earthing . . . 5.86 Feet . . . . . . . . . . 5.87 Horizontal rail . 5.88 Threaded inserts 5.90 Guide rails and ESD clips . . . . . . . 5.92 Mounting plates . 5.94 Combined mounting . . . . . . 5.95 Horizontal board assembly . . . . . . 5.96 Air flow barrier . . 5.97 Dimensions . . . . . 5.98 ServicePLUS . . 5.4 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.78 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –b 02009005 02004054 02008050 bMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Desk-top case with pre-configured components in accordance with IEC 60297-3-101; prepared for 19" components such as plug-in units and euroboards For backplane mounting with insulation strips Ventilation slots in base plate Ventilation slots in rear panel Delivery comprises (Kit, items 1, 2, 6, 8 fitted) Order Information Maximum mounting depth = D - 21 (open space: front panel - rear panel) Note Dimensions of case, side panel see from page 5.98 Complete cases 3 and 6 U ServicePLUS see page 5.4 20 20 D w W 5 h H 1 9 2 4 8 12 7 5 11 10 6 3 Item Qty Description 3 U 6 U 1 2 4 Side panel, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 7016 2 2 2 Frame, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 3 1 1 Cover plate, Al, 1.5 mm, powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 4 1 1 Base plate with 4 rows of ventilation slots, Al, 1.5 mm, powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 5 - 2 Side plate powder-coated, RAL 9006, Al, 0.8 mm 6 4 4 Tip-up foot with anti-slip protection, PA, RAL 7016, UL 94 V-0 7 2 2 Cover bracket, Al extrusion, anodised, cut edges plain 8 2 2 Horizontal rail, Al extrusion, with threaded insert, St, M2.5 9 2 2 Rear horizontal rail, Al extrusion, with threaded insert, St, M2.5 and insulation strip, PBT, UL 94 V-0 (for indirect backplane mounting) 10 - 1 Centre horizontal rail, Al extrusion, anodised, conductive surfaces, with two threaded inserts, St, M2.5 and two insulation strips, PBT, UL 94 V-0 11 1 1 Rear panel with 1 row of ventilation slots, Al, anodised, 2 mm for 28, 42 and 63 HP, 2.5 mm for 84 HP 12 10/ 20 10/ 20 Guide rail for 160 mm board length, PBT, UL 94 V-0, 28/42 HP 10 pieces, 63/84 HP 20 pieces 13 1 1 GND/earthing kit 14 1 1 Assembly kit, also allows the fitting of a full-width front panel Height H Width W Depth D Usable width Part no. w w U mm mm HP mm 3 186 271 28 148 14575-114 3 186 331 28 148 14575-115 3 257 271 42 219 14575-134 3 257 331 42 219 14575-135 3 257 391 42 219 14575-136 3 364 271 63 326 14575-154 3 364 331 63 326 14575-155 3 364 391 63 326 14575-156 3 471 271 84 432 14575-174 3 471 331 84 432 14575-175 3 471 391 84 432 14575-176 3 471 511 84 432 14575-178 6 471 391 84 432 14575-476 6 471 451 84 432 14575-477 5.79 Desk-top cases –b Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 b Desk-top case, pre-configures, for individual assembly For backplane mounting with insulation strips Ventilation slots in base plate Delivery comprises (Kit, items 1 and 2 fitted) Order Information Cases 2, 3 and 4 U 02004005 02004054 02004053 ServicePLUS see page 5.4 20 20 D w W 5 h H 3 2 4 5 1 6 Item Qty Description 1 2 Side panel, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 7016 2 2 Frame, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 3 1 Cover plate, Al, 1.5 mm, powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing connection 4 1 Base plate with 4 rows of ventilation slots, Al, 1.5 mm, powder-coated RAL 9006, with earthing connection 5 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, PC, black 6 8 Fixing adaptor for cover plate, prefitted 7 1 Assembly kit, also allows the fitting of a full-width front panel, two cover brackets or a rear panel Height Usable width Width W Width w Height H Height h Depth D Part no. U HP mm mm mm mm mm 2 42 257 219 102.6 84.4 271 14575-023 2 42 257 219 102.6 84.4 331 14575-025 2 42 257 219 102.6 84.4 391 14575-027 2 84 471 432 102.6 84.4 271 14575-063 2 84 471 432 102.6 84.4 331 14575-065 2 84 471 432 102.6 84.4 391 14575-067 3 28 186 148 147.1 129.3 271 14575-103 3 28 186 148 147.1 129.3 331 14575-105 3 42 257 219 147.1 129.3 271 14575-123 3 42 257 219 147.1 129.3 331 14575-125 3 42 257 219 147.1 129.3 391 14575-127 3 63 364 326 147.1 129.3 271 14575-143 3 63 364 326 147.1 129.3 331 14575-145 3 63 364 326 147.1 129.3 391 14575-147 3 84 471 432 147.1 129.3 271 14575-163 3 84 471 432 147.1 129.3 331 14575-165 3 84 471 432 147.1 129.3 391 14575-167 3 84 471 432 147.1 129.3 451 14575-169 3 84 471 432 147.1 129.3 511 14575-171 4 42 257 219 191.6 173.8 271 14575-223 4 42 257 219 191.6 173.8 331 14575-225 4 63 364 326 191.6 173.8 271 14575-243 4 63 364 326 191.6 173.8 331 14575-245 4 63 364 326 191.6 173.8 391 14575-247 4 84 471 432 191.6 173.8 331 14575-265 4 84 471 432 191.6 173.8 391 14575-267 4 84 471 432 191.6 173.8 451 14575-269 4 84 471 432 191.6 173.8 511 14575-271 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.80 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –b 02004006 02004055 02004056 b Desk-top case, pre-configured, for individual assembly For backplane mounting with insulation strips Ventilation slots in base plate Delivery comprises (Kit items 1, 2 and 5 fitted) Order Information 6 U cases ServicePLUS see page 5.4 4 7 6 5 3 2 1 20 20 D w W 5 h H Item Qty Description 1 4 Side panel parts, Al extrusion, powder-coated, RAL 7016, 2 x 3 U 2 2 Frame, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 3 1 Cover plate, Al, 1.5 mm, powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 4 1 Base plate with 4 rows of ventilation slots, Al, 1.5 mm, powder-coated, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 5 2 Side plate, Al, 0.8 mm, powder-coated, RAL 9006 6 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, PC, black 7 8 Fixing adaptor for cover plate, prefitted 8 1 Assembly kit also allows the fitting of a full-width front panel, two cover brackets or a rear panel Usable width Width W Width w Height H Height h Depth D Part no. HP mm mm mm mm mm 63 364 326 280.5 262.9 331 14575-445 63 364 326 280.5 262.9 391 14575-447 84 471 432 280.5 262.9 271 14575-463 84 471 432 280.5 262.9 331 14575-465 84 471 432 280.5 262.9 391 14575-467 84 471 432 280.5 262.9 451 14575-469 84 471 432 280.5 262.9 511 14575-471 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.81 Desk-top cases –b Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 02005002 02004062 b To cover the sides of the frame and to create a continuous front plane with plug-in units and partial-width front panels This filler angle is recommended when fitting horizontal rails Delivery comprises Order Information Note Fixing material is supplied with case 02908053 02908052 AccessoriesI/B Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Filler angle Item Qty Description 1 2 Filler angle, Al extrusion, anodised, cut edges plain Height Part no. U 2 24575-019 3 24575-119 4 24575-219 6 24575-419 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Cable holder 19 9 17 14 26,5 46 20,2 Ø 3 Ø 4,4 Ø 4,4 Ø 3 Item Qty Description 1 2 Cable bracket, ABS, UL V-94 0, RAL 7016, detent for cables between 8 mm and 12 mm 2 1 Drilling template, two drill holes each per bracket are needed in rear panel 3 1 Assembly kit Description Part no. Cable holder 24575-800 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.82 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –b b Front panels and rear panels are screwed on front or rear frame of case Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Note Assembly kit to fix one rear and one front panel is included with the case Cable holder and rear feet, see from page 5.81 02004061 bDelivery comprises (kit) Order Information Note Cable holder and rear feet see from page 5.81 Front panel and rear panel 02005001 Rear panel/front panel CPA30656 Item Qty Description 1 1 Rear panel with 4 rows of ventilation slots, AI, anodised, cut edges plain; 28, 42, 63 HP = 2 mm thick; 84 HP = 2.5 mm thick 2 1 Front panel, Al, anodised, cut edges plain, 3 mm thick Height Width Height H Height h Width Rear panel Front panel B b U HP mm mm mm mm Part no. Part no. 2 42 84 66 238.7 226.3 30823-015 30823-209 2 84 84 66 452.1 439.7 30823-512 30823-215 3 28 128.4 100 167.5 155.1 30823-021 30823-254 3 42 128.4 100 238.7 226.3 30823-024 30823-257 3 63 128.4 100 345.4 333.1 30823-027 30823-224 3 84 128.4 100 452.1 439.7 30823-515 30823-260 4 42 172.9 144.5 238.7 226.3 30823-033 30823-269 4 63 172.9 144.5 345.4 333.1 30823-036 30823-227 4 84 172.9 144.5 452.1 439.7 30823-518 30823-272 6 63 261.8 233.4 345.4 333.1 30823-045 30823-230 6 84 261.8 233.4 452.1 439.7 30823-521 30823-284 Front panel/rear panel with hidden fixing Item Qty Description 1 1 Front panel, Al, anodised, cut edges plain, 2.5 mm 2 4 Fixing bracket Height Width Height H Height h Width Part no. B b U HP mm mm mm mm 2 42 84.0 66.0 238.7 226.3 24575-035 2 84 84.0 66.0 452.1 439.7 24575-075 3 28 128.4 100.0 167.5 155.1 24575-115 3 42 128.4 100.0 238.7 226.3 24575-135 3 63 128.4 100.0 345.4 333.1 24575-155 3 84 128.4 100.0 452.1 439.7 24575-175 4 42 172.9 144.5 238.7 226.3 24575-235 4 63 172.9 144.5 345.4 333.1 24575-255 4 84 172.9 144.5 452.1 439.7 24575-275 6 63 261.8 233.4 345.4 333.1 24575-455 6 84 261.8 233.4 452.1 439.7 24575-475 5.83 Desk-top cases –b Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 02005004 02004063 bDelivery comprises Order Information 02005005 02908054 bDelivery comprises Order Information Rear foot with rubber insert A 23 8.5 16.5 ø 4.2 Item Qty Description 1 2 Foot with rubber insert, PC, UL 94 V-0, RAL 7016 2 1 Fixing material For case height A Part no. U mm 3 139 24575-114 4 183.5 24575-214 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Edge protection/rear foot Item Qty Description 1 2 Edge protection, PU foam, black 2 1 Assembly kit For case height A B C Part no. U mm mm mm 3 159.1 114.0 100.0 20823-675 4 203.6 159.0 144.5 20823-676 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 20,2 C B A A A-A A 35 27 27,5 Ø 8 Ø 4,5 5 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.84 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –b 02004065 Dimensions for modifying the rear panel 02004066 bDelivery comprises Order Information Rear panel, see page 5.82 02005006 02004064 Cable support A4-512 bDelivery comprises Order Information Note Cable support can only be fitted in conjunction with rear foot for hood To fit the hood, the rear panel and the rear foot for hood must be mounted on the case Rear panel, see page 5.82 Rear foot for hood see page 5.84 Rear foot for hood B A D M6 M6 45 30 B 27.55 8 x 6.1 Item Qty Description 1 2 Foot, PU foam, black, 75° shore 2 1 Fixing material Height A B D Part no. U mm mm mm 3 133.5 95 65 20823-668 4 177.8 139.5 95 20823-669 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Hood 41.6 41.6 10 4 A 61.5 56 10° 156.5 ø 5.5 Item Qty Description 1 1 Hood, ABS, RAL 7016, wall thickness < 4 mm, fixing with knurled screws 2 1 Assembly kit Height Width A Part no. U HP mm 3 42 267 24575-136 3 63 373.5 24575-156 3 84 480 24575-176 Cable support PC, black, UL 94 V-0, PU 2 pieces 20823-674 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.85 Desk-top cases –b Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 02005003 02004069 Front door, hinged a4-2265 a4-225 1) Front panel b Assembly of the hinge to top or bottom With snap-on latch Lock retrofittable Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Dimensions table Front door, acrylic glass, hinged Item Qty Description 1 2 Side part, Al die-cast, powder-coated, RAL 7016 2 1 Front door, PMMA, tinted blue-grey, acrylic glass, 3 mm 3 1 Snap-on latch, PC, UL 94 V-0, black 4 2 Spacer plate, Al, 3 mm, passivated 5 1 Assembly kit Height Width Part no. U HP 3 42 24575-137 3 63 24575-157 3 84 24575-177 Lock for front door cylinder, 2 keys, assembly parts 21100-647 Height b H h B U TE mm mm mm 3 42 139,50 128,40 229,60 3 63 139,50 128,40 336,40 3 84 139,50 128,40 443,00 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.86 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –b b With powder-coated handle bar Handle bar adjustable in 30 degree increments by pressing button Load-carrying capacity 20 kg Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Dimensions aza43284 Main Catalogue Protective GND/earth connections in accordance with DIN EN 50178/VDE 0160, DIN EN 60950/VDE 0805, DIN EN 61010-1/VDE 0411 part 1, DIN EN 61010-1A2 /VDE 0411 part 1/A1 VDE inpection requested Order Information Tip-up carrying handle 02004002 02004080 68.5 180 c 4 x 30° 4 x 30° b a Item Qty Description 1 1 Carrying bar, AI profile, powder-coated, RAL 7016 2 2 Lateral section of handle, Zn die-cast, powder coated, length 180 mm 3 2 Safety insert, St, 1.5 mm, black 4 1 Fixing material incl. drilling template for side panel For case height Width Part no. U HP 2 42 24575-038 2 84 24575-078 3, 4 28 24575-118 3, 4 42 24575-138 3, 4 63 24575-158 3, 4 84 24575-178 Case width a b c HP mm mm mm 28 249.32 180.32 202.72 42 320.44 251.44 273.84 63 427.12 358.12 380.52 84 533.80 464.80 487,20 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. GND/earthing kit Description Qty/PU Part no. GND/earthing kit, CU wire 1.5 mm2, PVC covered, green/yellow, links side panel, base plate, cover and rear panel 1 24575-801 5.87 Desk-top cases –b Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 01802075 02006050 Static load-carrying capacity 25 kg per foot Tip-up feet can be used instead of the case feet fitted as standard Fixing holes provided in bottom of case Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information AZA43836 02908051 Static load-carrying capacity 50 kg per foot Tip-up feet can be used instead of the case feet fitted as standard Fixing holes provided in bottom of case Order Information 1) Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order at least 10 pieces or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. Plastic tip-up feet Item Qty Description 1 4 Foot, PA, UL 94 V-0 2 4 Anti-slip protection, TPE 3 2 Tip-up device, PA, UL 94 V-0 4 1 Assembly kit Description RAL 7016 anthracite RAL 9006 silver Part no. Part no. Plastic tip-up foot 20603-002 20603-001 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Al die-cast tip-up foot 41 20 Ø7,8 15,5 Ø3,1 Ø4,6 15 20 16,6 1 Description Qty Part no. Foot without tip-up, Al die-cast, silver 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 10603-001 Foot with tip-up, Al die-cast, silver 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 10603-002 Accessories Cheesehead screw with slot M4 × 12, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21101-211 Hexagon nut M4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-211 Spring washer A4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-207 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.88 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –b Text Mounting position horizontal/central rail Case, 2 U Case, 3 U + 4 U 02004073 02004074 Case, 6 U Case 2 x 3 U (6 U) 02004076 02004077 Horizontal rails 02004078 H-VT H-VT H-VT H-VT H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ H-VT H-VT H-VT H-VT H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ H-VT H-VT H-VT ST-C H-VT H-VT H-VT H-VT H-VT H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ H-KD H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ H-ST / H-VT / H-MZ H-ST H-VT H-MZ 5.89 Desk-top cases –b Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Order Information Note Further horizontal rails, see from page 6.27 Fitting options, see page 5.88 Horizontal rails to front/centre/rear For indirect backplane fixing with insulation strip For direct backplane fixing For direct fixing of connectors in accordance with EN 60603-2 (DIN 41612) Front horizontal rails 04400001 04400002 04400003 "heavy" "heavy" "heavy" "heavy" Type H-ST Type H-VT Type H-MZ Type H-KD standard long lip with Z-rail short lip 06197011 06197013 06197015 06197008 Al extrusion, anodised finish, conductive contact surface, with printed HP markings Al extrusion, anodised finish, conductive contact surface, with printed HP markings Al extrusion, anodised finish, conductive contact surface, with printed HP markings Al extrusion, anodised finish, conductive contact surface, with printed HP markings Usable length Length HP mm 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 28 147.32 34560-528 34560-728 34560-928 34560-228 42 218.44 34560-542 34560-742 34560-942 34560-242 63 325.12 34560-563 34560-763 34560-963 34560-263 84 431.80 34560-584 34560-784 34560-984 34560-284 Torx countersunk screw, , M4 × 14, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 24571-371 24571-371 24571-371 24571-371 Torx countersunk screw, , M4 × 10, St, zinc-plated, required if guide rail is screwed to slot 1, PU 100 pieces – – 24571-372 24571-372 Z-rail for connector mounting without insulation strip see page 5.91 – – – Insulation strips see page – 5.90 – – Threaded inserts see page 5.90 5.90 5.90 5.90 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.90 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –b 02005050 b For indirect backplane mounting (with insulation strip) For 6 U compacPRO case Delivery comprises (Kit, items 1 to 4 are pre-mounted) Order Information Order Information Horizontal rail, centre, type ST-C 3 2 4 1 5 Item Qty Description 1 1 Horizontal rail, Al extrusion, anodised, contact surfaces conductive 2 2 Adaptor plate, Al 3 2 Threaded insert, M2.5, St, zinc-plated 4 2 Countersunk screw, M4 x 14 5 4 Panhead screw, M4 x 6 Usable width Length Part no. HP mm 63 325.1 24575-454 84 431.8 24575-474 Threaded inserts, perforated strips, insulation strips Threaded insert Insulation strip M2.5 M3 06103056 BZ6749 Threaded insert required for fixing the front panel to the horizontal rail; St, zinc-plated; Use collar screw 12.3 mm, see page 6.64 Insulation strip for insulated mounting of backplane; PBT UL 94 V-0, grey Usable length Length Length HP mm 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) mm PU 10 pieces 28 146.82 34561-328 – 144.20 24560-828 42 217.94 34561-342 – 210.40 24560-842 63 324.62 34561-363 – 316.88 24560-863 84 431.30 34561-384 34561-484 428.64 24560-884 5 2 5,08 Accessories Grub screw M2.5 x 8, PU 100 pieces 21100-276 – – Grub screw M3 x 8, PU 100 pieces – 21100-646 – 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 2) Part no. includes one packing unit (PU); delivery is exclusively made in PU 5.91 Desk-top cases –b Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Order Information Z-rails, perforated rails Z-rail for connectors Perforated rail DIN EN 60603-2, DIN 41612 item 1 31-pin, DIN 41617 EN 606032, DIN 41612 item 1 BZA45849 BZA45850 BZA45848 06708063 06708051 for connector mounting on ST horizontal rails, please order threaded insert and screw separately for connector mounting on ST horizontal rails, please order threaded insert and screw separately for connector mounting on VT horizontal rails, please order threaded insert and screw separately Usable length Length HP mm 1 piece 1 piece PU 4 pieces 28 142.24 30822-033 – 20822-049 42 213.36 30822-047 – 20822-050 60 304.80 30822-065 30819-783 20822-047 84 426.70 30822-089 30819-808 20822-048 Item 3, Torx panhead screw to fix connector to perforated rail,, M2.5 × 7, PU 100 pieces 24560-147 24560-147 24560-147 Item 2, Torx panhead screw, to fix perforated rails to horizontal rail, M2.5 × 10, PU 100 pieces 24560-148 24560-148 24560-148 172,5 172,5 175,5 2 1 3 3,0 9,75 12,75 2 1 3 12,75 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.92 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –b Order Information Guide rails for plug-in units and modules, one-piece, groove width 2 mm and 2.5 mm Assembly - can be clipped into Al extruded horizontal rails - can be clipped into 1.5 mm thick plates Storage temperature from -40 °C ... 130 °C For plug-in units and frame type plug-in units standard standard, with DIN connector fixing 06102001 06101501 up to 220 mm length, PBT, UL 94 V-0; from 280 mm length, multi-piece, end piece PBT, UL 94 V-0, central section Al extrusion PBT, UL 94 V-0, red, connector is clipped directly onto the guide rails; for euroboards, 100 x 160 mm or 100 x 220 mm only Board length Groove width Colour mm mm mm PU 10 pieces 1 pair (SPQ 10)1) 70 2 red – – 70 2 grey – – 160 2 red 24560-351 64560-074 220 2 red 24560-353 64560-075 280 2 red 24560-379 – 340 2 red 24560-380 – 160 2.5 red – – 220 2.5 red – – Dimension drawings see page 6.40 6.40 Accessories Retention screw, PU 100 pieces 24560-141 24560-141 ESD clip, PU 50 pieces 24560-255 24560-255 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 2) Part no. includes one packing unit (PU); delivery is exclusively made in PU Description of accessories see from page 6.41 5.93 Desk-top cases –b Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Main Catalogue Order Information Guide rails type "accessory", one-piece, groove width 2 mm and 2.5 mm Assembly - can be clipped into horizontal rails in Al extrusion - can be clipped into 1.5 mm thick plate Storage temperature from -40 °C ... +130 °C Guide rails type accessory accessory, strengthened for heavy modules, Al extrusion, silver, robust version 06102002 06102005 06102005 up to 280 mm length, PBT, UL 94 V-0; > 280 mm length, multi-piece, end piece PBT, UL 94V-0, middle section Al extrusion PBT UL 94 V?0, red support beam of guide rails adds to strengthening Al extrusion; is screwed to horizontal rail "heavy" with retention screws Board length Groove width Colour mm mm mm PU 10 pieces 1 piece (SPQ 50) 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 100 2 red – – – 160 2 red 24560-373 64560-076 – 160 2 grey – – 34562-881 220 2 red 24560-374 64560-078 – 220 2 grey – – 34562-882 280 2 red/silver 24560-375 64560-080 34562-883 340 2 red/silver 24560-376 – 34562-884 400 2 red/silver – – 34562-885 160 2.5 silver – – 34564-881 220 2.5 silver – – 34564-882 280 2.5 silver – – 34564-883 340 2.5 silver – – 34564-884 400 2.5 silver – – 34564-885 Dimension drawings see page 6.40 6.40 6.40 Accessories Retention screw, PU 100 pieces 24560-141 24560-141 24560-157 ESD clip, PU 50 pieces 24560-255 24560-255 – Board locking, red, PU 10 pieces 24560-377 24560-377 – Board handle, red, PU 10 piecesdescription 24560-378 24560-378 – Identification strips for board handle, red, PU 1 sheet = 438 pieces 60817-228 60817-228 – Coding see page see page 6.41 – 1) SPQ (standard pack quantity): Order number includes 1 piece, but delivery is exclusively made in standard pack quantity (SPQ); please order at least the SPQ quantity or a multiple thereof 2) Part no. includes one packing unit (PU); delivery is exclusively made in PU Further guide rails see page 6.35 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.94 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –b Main Catalogue Order Information Note For installation and assembly of heavier components The mounting plate is as wide as the case and is fixed to the side panels A guide rail can be mounted on the first and last slot positions 4.4" and "strengthened" guide rails cannot be used Mounting plates Mounting plate for fixing of heavy components Mounting plate over full width: mounting is onto the side panels; mounting plate over partial width: mounting is onto one side panel and fixing strip or onto 2 fixing strips Assembly strip for partial widths 06102501 05806100 Width W Board length mm Al, 1.5 mm; for mounting over partial width, please order assembly strips separately St, 2 mm, zinc-plated; is bolted from front to rear onto the horizontal rails; to fix mounting plates HP W 28 146.88 160 34562-745 30840-021 28 146.88 220 34562-749 30840-033 28 146.88 280 34562-753 30840-045 28 146.88 340 34562-757 30840-057 42 217.99 160 34562-746 30840-021 42 217.99 220 34562-750 30840-033 42 217.99 280 34562-754 30840-045 42 217.99 340 34562-758 30840-057 63 324.67 160 34562-747 30840-021 63 324.67 220 34562-751 30840-033 63 324.67 280 34562-755 30840-045 63 324.67 340 34562-759 30840-057 84 431.35 160 34562-748 30840-021 84 431.35 220 34562-752 30840-033 84 431.35 280 34562-756 30840-045 84 431.35 340 34562-760 30840-057 Assembly kit for mounting plate PU 1 kit (Torx countersunk screw M4 x 5, St, zinc-plated, 12 pieces; screw M4 x 6, St, zinc-plated, 10 pieces; M4 square nut, St, zinc-plated, 10 pieces) 24560-184 – Assembly kit for assembly strips of mounting plate, Torx screw M2.5 × 5, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces M2.5 × 5, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces – 24560-146 5.95 Desk-top cases –b Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Order Information Subdivision of the 6 U assembly area into: – 2 x 3 U – 1 x 6 U Designed to accept Euroboards (100 mm high) and double Euroboards (233.35 mm high) Note Please order perforated strips for horizontal rails separately, see page 5.90 Please order rear centre horizontal rail separately, see page 5.89 Combined mountings (6 U and 2 x 3 U one above the other) Combined mounting: Splitting extrusion horizontal and vertical subdivision (incl. front panel for stainless steel EMC gasket) unshielded front panel, 6 U, 2 HP item 6 front panel for textile EMC gasket, 6 U, 2 HP item 6 for combined mounting Item 2 05806108 bza45819 06102501 06102501 06102501 item 1: 2 front horizontal rails (H-KD), Al extrusion, anodised; item 2: 2 rear horizontal rails (AB), Al extrusion, anodised; item 3: threaded insert, St, zinc-plated; item 4: Zn die-cast support member; item 6: front panel 2 HP, 6 U, shielded; with EMC stainless steel gasket (84:0 without items 4, 6) Al, 2.5 mm, front anodised, rear iridescent green chromated Al, 2.5 mm, U-profile with notch, 6 U, 2 HP 6 U, die-cast zinc; splitting extrusion is inserted in the grid holes of the horizontal rail; the splitting extrusion can be bolted Width pitch T1:T2 HP PU 1 kit 1 piece (SPQ 5) 1 piece (SPQ 5)1) 1 piece 20:62 24562-420 30847-472 30849-140 64560-010 40:42 24562-440 42:40 24562-442 63:19 24562-463 84:0 24562-484 Torx countersunk screw M4 × 14, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces fixing splitting extrusion/horizontal rail – – – 24560-145 Panhead screw M2.5 × 10, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces finxing horizontal rail/splitting extrusion – – – 24560-179 Pozidrive/slotted collar screw M2.5 x 12.3, St, nickel-plated, PU 100 pieces – 21101-101 21101-101 – Pozidrive/slotted collar screw M2.5, black, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces – 21101-102 21101-102 – Washer 2.7 x 5 x 1, plastic PA 6, PU 100 pieces – 21101-121 21101-121 – Textile gasket, core: foam, sleeve: textile cladding with CuNi coating, UL 94 V-0, PU 10 pieces – – 21101-855 – Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.96 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –b Order Information Horizontal board installation Horizontal board installation Board cage Front frame for EMC shielding Front frame, unshielded 05806092 05806091 bpa45913 bza43061 H = usable height (1 TE = 1 HP, 1 HE = 1 U) Struts die-cast zinc; horizontal rails front and rear; threaded insert, St, zinc-plated; fixing material kit; for horizontal mounting of double-height euroboards in 3 or 4 U high subracks/cases; 54 HP space required; please order front frame for EMC shielding separately 2 horizontal covers, AI 2.5 mm, front anodised, rear iridescent green chromated; 2 vertical trims, Al extrusion, clear passivated; stainless steel EMC gasket; front frame forms the contact between subrack and the subassemblies Al, 2.5 mm, clear anodised; front frame with cut-out, clear internal width w = 266.35 mm Height Usable height h HP Other dimensions and options U Horizontal rail, front Horizontal rail, rear PU 1 kit PU 1 kit 1 piece 3 20 24564-117 24564-109 34564-108 3 20 24564-118 24564-109 34564-109 4 28 24564-217 24564-209 34564-208 Assembly tool, for mounting the EMC gasket (stainless steel) – 24560-270 – * For direct backplane mounting 273.98 =54 TE h H 273,98 = 54 TE w 5.97 Desk-top cases –b Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Order Information Air baffle for slots Air baffle without front panel 06108085 06101507 Al, 1 mm, incl. assembly kit; prevents an air short circuit in unoccupied slot positions; is pushed into the groove of the guide rails Depth Width Height mm HP U 1 piece 160 4 3 34562-823 160 4 6 34562-826 160 8 3 34562-833 160 8 6 34562-836 160 12 3 34562-843 160 12 6 34562-846 220 4 3 34562-824 220 4 6 34562-827 220 8 3 34562-834 220 8 6 34562-837 220 12 3 34562-844 220 12 6 34562-847 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.98 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –b Text Dimensions Note Side panel for 6 U case consists of two 3 U extruded side panels Dimensions Extruded side panel 2 U Extruded side panel 3 U 02004057 02004058 Extruded side panel 4 U Extruded side panel 6 U 02004059 02004060 A N x 15 = B 19.5 ø 8.5 Y Y Z ø 4.6 4.6 M4 3 15 M4 49 Z 49 For case depth Max. mounting depth Dimensions mm mm A in mm B in mm 271 250 231 15 15 = 225 331 310 291 19 15 = 285 391 370 351 23 15 = 345 451 430 411 27 15 = 405 511 490 471 31 15 = 465 A N x 15 = B 55.5 24 19.5 77.5 88.1 ø 8.5 Y Y Z Z ø 4.6 4.6 M4 3 15 M4 A N x 15 = B 99.95 49 19.5 121.95 132.55 ø 8.5 Y Y Z Z ø 4.6 4.6 M4 3 15 M4 A N x 15 = B 144.4 19.5 166.4 177 ø 8.5 Y Y Z Z ø 4.6 4.6 M4 3 15 M4 49 93 A N x 15 = B 99.95 99.95 19.5 121.95 121.95 132.55 132.55 265.9 ø 8.5 Y Y Z ø 4.6 4.6 M4 3 15 M4 49 Z 49 5.99 Desk-top cases –b Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –J Overview . . . . . 0 Cabinets . . . . . . 1 Wall mounted cases . . . . . . . . 2 Accessories for cabinets and wall mounted cases 3 Climate control 4 Desk-top cases 5 Subracks/ 19" chassis . . . 6 Front panels, plug-in units . . 7 Systems . . . . . . 8 Power supply units . . . . . . . . . 9 Backplanes . . 10 Connectors, front panel component system . . . . . . 11 Appendix . . . . 12 Downloads and further important information can be found on the Internet under www.schroff.biz 5.100 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 JMain Catalogue 02202003 Standards Internal dimensions in accordance with IEC 60297-3-100 Type of protection IP 20 in accordance with IEC 60529 Protective ground connections in accordance with: DIN EN 50178/VDE 0160 DIN EN 60950/VDE 0805 DIN EN 61010-1/VDE 0411 part 1 DIN EN 61010-1A2/VDE 0411 part 1/A1 Desk-top cases –J 5.101 E 10/2012 J Case to accept 19" subracks or 19" chassis Internal assemblies of up to 40 kg Up to six rows of ventilation slots in the base plate for optimal air inlet High stability Front and rear identical, depth-symmetrical construction With handle strip or recessed grip Text Case Al die-cast frame front and rear Top cover and base plate can be subsequently removed Top cover and base plate fitted with hidden GND/earth connections Case height 3, 4, 6, 7 and 9 U (cladding parts in steel) Case height 9 U and 12 U (cladding parts in aluminium) 02202004 02202005 ServicePLUS from page 5.4 e.g. modifications (cut-outs, special colours) e.g. custom solutions (special sizes) e.g. assembly service from 1 piece www.schroff.biz/ServicePLUS 30407004 Overview . . . . 5.100 comptec 3, 4 U, St . . . . . . 5.102 6, 7, 9 U, St . . . . 5.103 9, 12 U, Al . . . . . 5.104 Accessories Folding handle 5.105 Slide rails . . . . . . 5.105 Earthing kit . . . . 5.106 Assembly kit . . . . 5.106 Tip-up feet . . . . . 5.107 ServicePLUS . . 5.4 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.102 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –J JMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Desk-top case (pre-fitted) Top cover, base plate and rear panel in steel Front and rear frames in die-cast Al Ventilation slits in base plate Ventilation gills in rear panel Side panel with integral handle function Delivery comprises (kit) Items 1, 2, 5 and 9 fitted. Order Information Note Please order GND/earthing kit separately, see page 5.106 The case foot, item 10, can be replaced by a tip-up foot, see page. 5.107 Please order slide rails separately, see page 5.105 19" case, 3 U, 4 U 02202001 CTTP0001 Front view CTA30677 h = case foot height, HE = U, internal usable height Side view CTA42313 Usable width b = B - 69 mm, h = height of case foot ServicePLUS see page 5.4 7 1 8 9 2 5 10 H h HE B b Item Qty Description 1 1 Front frame, Al die-cast, RAL 7016, with 19" grid 2 1 Rear frame, Al die-cast, RAL 7016, with 19" grid 5 2 Side panel, Al extrusion, RAL 7016 7 1 Cover plate, Al, 1 mm, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 8 1 Base plate, Al, 1 mm, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 9 1 Rear panel, St, 1 mm, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 10 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, PC, black, UL 94 V-0 11 1 Assembly kit Height H h Depth D Usable depth d Width B Part no. U mm mm mm mm mm 3 153 13.0 300 276 520 10225-601 3 153 13.0 400 376 520 10225-612 3 153 13.0 500 476 520 10225-623 4 198 13.0 300 276 520 10225-602 4 198 13.0 400 376 520 10225-613 4 198 13.0 500 476 520 10225-624 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.103 Desk-top cases –J Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 J Desk-top case (pre-fitted) With handle shell Top cover, base plate and rear panel in steel Front and rear frames in die-cast Al Ventilation slits in rear panel and base Delivery comprises (kit) Items 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 9 fitted. Order Information Note Please order GND/earthing kit separately, see page 5.106 The case foot, item 10, can be replaced by a tip-up foot, see page 5.107 Please order slide rails separately, see page 5.105 Handle shell, item 6, can be replaced by a folding handle, see page 5.105 19" case, 6 U, 7 U, 9U 02202002 CTTP0002 Front view CTA30676 h = case foot height, HE = U, internal usable height Side view CTA42312 Usable depth d = D - 24 mm ServicePLUS see page 5.4 7 1 4 10 9 3 6 5 2 8 H h HE B b Item Qty Description 1 1 Front frame, Al die-cast, RAL 7016, with 19" grid 2 1 Rear frame, Al die-cast, RAL 7016, with 19" grid 3 2 Side profile at top, Al extrusion, RAL 7016 4 2 Side profile at bottom, Al extrusion, RAL 7016 5 2 Side panel, St, 1.5 mm, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 6 2 Handle shell, PC, RAL 7016, UL 94 V-0, load-carrying capacity: 60 kg/pair 7 1 Cover plate, St, 1 mm, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 8 1 Base plate, St, 1 mm, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 9 1 Rear panel, St, 1 mm, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 10 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, PC, black, UL 94 V-0 11 1 Assembly kit Height H h Depth D Usable depth d Width B Part no. U mm mm mm mm mm 6 286 13 300 276 520 10225-604 6 286 13 400 376 520 10225-615 6 286 13 500 476 520 10225-626 6 286 13 600 576 520 10225-637 7 331 13 400 376 520 10225-616 7 331 13 500 476 520 10225-627 7 331 13 600 576 520 10225-638 9 420 13 400 376 520 10225-618 9 420 13 500 476 520 10225-629 9 420 13 600 576 520 10225-640 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.104 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –J 02202006 CTTP0003 Front view CTA30679 Usable width b = B - 69 mm, h = height of case foot Side view CTA42314 Usable depth d = D - 24 mm ServicePLUS see page 5.4 J Desk-top case (pre-fitted) With handle shell Top cover, base plate and rear panel in Al Front and rear frames in die-cast Al Ventilation slots in base plate Air vents in rear panel Delivery comprises (kit) Items 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 9 fitted. Order Information Note Please order GND/earthing kit separately, see page 5.106 The case foot, item 10, can be replaced by a tip-up foot, see page 5.107 Please order slide rails separately, see page 5.105 Handle shell, item 6, can be replaced by a folding handle, see page 5.105 19" cases 9 and 12 U, aluminium 9 3 6 5 2 4 10 7 1 8 H h HE B b Item Qty Description 1 1 Front frame, Al die-cast, RAL 7016, with 19" grid 2 1 Rear frame, Al die-cast, RAL 7016, with 19" grid 3 2 Side profile at top, Al extrusion, RAL 7016 4 2 Side profile at bottom, Al extrusion, RAL 7016 5 2 Side panel, Al, 1.5 mm, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 6 2 Handle shell, PC, RAL 7016, UL 94 V-0, load-carrying capacity: 60 kg/pair 7 1 Cover plate, Al, 1 mm, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 8 1 Base plate, Al, 1 mm, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 9 1 Rear panel, Al, 1 mm, RAL 9006, with GND/earthing tag 10 4 Case foot with anti-slip protection, PC, black, UL 94 V-0 11 1 Assembly kit Height H h Depth D Usable depth d Width B Part no. U mm mm mm mm mm 9 420 13 400 376 520 10225-667 9 420 13 500 476 520 10225-682 9 420 13 600 576 520 10225-693 12 553 13 400 376 520 10225-670 12 553 13 500 476 520 10225-685 12 553 13 600 576 520 10225-696 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.105 Desk-top cases –J Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2013 CTTP0006 J Folding handles can be used instead of the pre-fitted handle shells Load-carrying capacity: 50 kg/pair Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information J Slide rails are suitable as support for 19" subracks and 19" chassis Delivery comprises Order Information Note 2 slide rails are required per subrack or 19" chassis Slide rail cannot be used for shielded 19" subracks; special slide rails available on request Folding handle Item Qty Description 1 2 Folding handle, AI die-cast, RAL 7016 2 1 Assembly kit Description Part no. Folding handle 20225-439 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Slide rails CTTP0005 Item Qty Description 1 1 Slide rail, Al extrusion, anodised, cut edges plain, static load-carrying capacity 10 kg For case depth Part no. mm 300 30225-089 400 30225-090 500 30225-091 600 30225-092 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.106 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases –J aza43284 J The GND/earthing kit allows VDE compliant earthing of cases in accordance with: EN 50178/VDE 0160 EN 60950/VDE 0805 EN 61010-1/VDE 0411 part 1 EN 61010-1A2/VDE 0411 part 1/A VDE tested Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information SC128XXX 06108055 J For fitting subracks or 19" chassis in a comptec case For fixing 19" front panels Delivery comprises Order Information GND/earthing kit Item Qty Description 1 1 GND/earthing kit, Cu wire, 1.5 mm2, PVC sheathing, green/yellow, connects side panels, cover, base plate and rear panel Description Up to 4 U bigger than 4 U Part no. Part no. GND/earthing kit for cases with steel covers 21100-490 21100-448 GND/earthing kit for cases with aluminium covers – 21100-347 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 19" fixing Item Description 1 Screw M6 × 16, zinc-plated with Pozidrive 2 Cage nut M6, zinc-plated 3 Plastic washer, ABS, black Description Part no. PU = 8 × screw, washer, nut 21100-435 PU = 50 each of M6 screw, washer and cage nut 21101-809 PU = 100 each of M6 screw, washer and cage nut 21101-810 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.107 Desk-top cases –J Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 01802075 J Static load-carrying capacity 25 kg per foot Tip-up feet can be used instead of the case feet fitted as standard Fixing holes provided in bottom of case Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information AZA43836 J Static load-carrying capacity 50 kg per foot Tip-up feet can be used instead of the case feet fitted as standard Fixing holes provided in bottom of case Order Information 1) Part no. comprises 1 piece; delivery is in standard pack quantity (SPQ): please order a minimum of 10 feet or a multiple Plastic tip-up feet Item Qty Description 1 4 Foot, PA, UL 94 V-0 2 4 Anti-slip protection, TPE 3 2 Tip-up device, PA, UL 94 V-0 4 1 Assembly kit Description RAL 7016 anthracite RAL 9006 silver Part no. Part no. Plastic tip-up foot 20603-002 20603-001 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Tip-up foot in die-cast Al Description Qty Part no. Foot with tip-up, Al die-cast, silver 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 10603-002 Foot without tip-up, Al die-cast, silver 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 10603-001 Cheesehead screw with slot M4 × 12, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21101-211 Hexagon nut M4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-211 Spring washer A4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-207 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.108 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases – Accessories AccessoriesMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Front handles see page 5.108 Strap handles see page 5.111 Tip-up carrying handles, see page 5.112 Folding handles see page 5.113 Tray handle see page 5.114 Feet, see page 5.115 Screwdriver (Torx) 5.117 Measuring tape, see page 5.117 BZA42318 AccessoriesMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Static load-carrying capacity 10 kg/pair Bolted from rear Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order at least 10 pieces or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. BZA42330 Accessories Static load-carrying capacity 30 kg/pair Bolted from rear Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order at least 10 front handles or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. Contents 06002052 05895003 02992004 aza43835 02992003 32506001 Front handle, one-piece, width 7 mm Item Qty Description 1 1 Front handle, Al extrusion, anodised A E Part no. mm mm 48 40 10501-001 98 90 10501-002 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Front handle, one-piece, width 9 mm Item Qty Description 1 1 Front handle, Al extrusion, anodised Description Part no. Front handle 10501-003 Pozidrive countersunk screw 14 × 10, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21101-381 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.109 Desk-top cases – Accessories Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Main Catalogue Static load-carrying capacity 30 kg/pair Bolted from front Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information 1 U BZA42316 2 U ... 6 U BZA42327 Main Catalogue Static load-carrying capacity 30 kg/pair Bolted from rear Delivery comprises Order Information Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order at least 10 front handles or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. Note Please order panhead screws separately Front handle, one-piece, width 10 mm 02905050 H = 1 U 02905051 H ≥ 2 U 40 h H 10 10 Ø 4,4 8,4 Ø 4 8 Item Qty Description 1 2 Front handle, Al extrusion, anodised 2 1 Assembly kit Height H Height H Height h Part no. U mm mm 1 40 28 20860-256 2 69 53 20860-257 3 113 97.5 20860-258 4 157.45 141.9 20860-259 5 201.9 186.4 20860-260 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Front handle, one-piece, width 12.2 mm Item Qty Description 1 1 Front handle, AI extrusion, anodised A E clear anodised black anodised mm mm Part no. Part no. 41 25 10501-116 – 57.5 44.5 10501-016 – 69 55 10501-004 10501-025 102 88 10501-005 10501-026 132 120 10501-006 10501-027 146.4 133.4 10501-018 – 194 180 10501-007 10501-028 249 235 10501-008 10501-029 Panhead pozidrive screw self-locking, M5 × 12, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-788 Torx countersunk screw M5 × 12, zinc-plated, 100 pieces 24560-183 Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.110 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases – Accessories A3-227 Static load-carrying capacity 10 kg/pair In three parts, middle section in Al extrusion, end pieces in glass fibre reinforced plastic Bolts on from front Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order at least 10 front handles or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. Note Please order panhead screws separately 02908050 Item 1: front handle; item 2: end piece Accessories Order Information Front handle, multi-piece, width 12 mm Item Qty Description 1 1 Front handle, Al extrusion, anodised 2 2 End piece, PA, black A E Part no. mm mm 87.5 73.5 10502-050 102.0 88 10502-057 134.0 120 10502-059 194.0 180 10502-063 249 235 10502-065 Panhead screw pozidrive self-locking, M5 × 12, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-788 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Front handle, multi-piece, width 12 mm 1000 40 12 1 2 Description Qty/PU Part no. Item 1, front handle, Al extrusion, anodised,1 m long 1 30502-051 Item 2, end piece, PA, black, 2 pieces each required 1 60502-003 Panhead pozidrive screw self-locking, M5 × 12, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-788 5.111 Desk-top cases – Accessories Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 05895003 02902050 Accessories Static load-carrying capacity 20 kg Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information 02992006 Length 240 mm/170 mm BZA42368 Accessories Static load-carrying capacity 20 kg Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Strap handle, width 25 mm Item Qty Description 1 1 Band, spring steel, handle, flexible plastic, grey, RAL 7016 2 2 Cover, grey, RAL 7016 3 1 Assembly kit Length Part no. mm 230 20850-249 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Strap handle, width 22 mm Item Qty Description 1 1 Band, spring steel, plastic-coated, black 2 2 Cover cap, St, chrome-plated 3 1 Assembly kit Length Part no. mm 170 10504-002 240 10504-003 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.112 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases – Accessories AccessoriesMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Static load-carrying capacity 25 kg (with handle bars of 450 mm length) 02992002 A4-2361 Accessories Handle can be adjusted in 30° grid by pressing button Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information 02992001 A4-2367 Accessories Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Tip-up carrying handle in separate parts 02992002 02992001 Lateral handle parts Item Qty Description 1 2 Lateral parts, die-cast zinc, painted (chrome decor) 2 2 Safety inserts, St, 1.5 mm, black 3 2 Adaptor/locking brackets 4 1 Assembly kit Length Part no. mm 180 10502-297 250 10502-296 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Handle bar Item Qty Description 1 1 Handle bar, AI, black anodised Length Part no. mm 1000 30502-191 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.113 Desk-top cases – Accessories Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Accessories Static load-carrying capacity 30 kg/pair For case ingress protection to IP 40 Locks in folded and opened positions Equal cut-out for fitting in front of or behind case wall Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order at least 10 pieces or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. 02992005 Folding plastic handle A2-123 Accessories Static load-carrying capacity 20 kg/pair For case ingress protection to IP 40 Locks in folded and opened positions External mounting only Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order at least 10 pieces or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. Folding metal handle 02992004 A4-2369 A4-2370 Item Qty Description 1 1 Handle, Al die-cast, RAL 9005, black 2 1 Handle shell, Al die-cast, RAL 9006, silver Description Part no. Folding metal handle 20505-032 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Folding plastic handle Item Qty Description 1 1 Handle, PA, light grey 2 1 Handle shell, PA, dark grey 3 1 Assembly kit Description Part no. Folding plastic handle 10505-014 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.114 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases – Accessories 02992003 A3-0670a Size 1, case cut-out 49 × 104 mm A3-0670b Size 2, case cut-out 73 × 171 mm Accessories Static load-carrying capacity 30 kg/pair Delivery comprises Order Information Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order a minimum of 10 tray handles or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. Note Please order spring clips for fixing to the case separately Required: – for handle size 1: 2 spring clips – for handle size 2: 3 spring clips Tray handle Item Qty Description 1 1 Handle shell, PC, UL 94 V-0 Colour Size 1 for material thickness 1.5 mm Size 1 for material thickness 2.5 mm Size 2 for material thickness 1.5 mm Part no. Part no. Part no. greybrown 60229-002 60229-001 60225-015 black 60229-004 60229-003 60225-012 RAL 7016 – – 20225-167 Spring clip PU 20 pieces 21100-089 Spring clip PU 100 pieces 21100-093 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.115 Desk-top cases – Accessories Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 A4-330 Accessories Delivery comprises Order Information Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order at least 50 pieces or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. Note Foot is inserted into mounting hole and then fixed by pressing in the expanding pin A4-2315 Accessories Order Information Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order at least 50 pieces or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. Plastic foot Pos. Menge Beschreibung 1 1 Plastic foot, PC, UL 94 V-0, black Description Dimensions Hole diameter Part no. A B C mm mm mm mm For material thickness 1 ... 3 16 7.2 4 7 60224-009 For material thickness 1.5 ... 3 21 15 7 7.7 60224-011 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Rubber foot Dimensions Material Colour Qty Part no. Height Hole diameter mm mm 10 25 Rubber grey 1 60200-001 15 26 Rubber grey 1 60200-027 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days 5.116 Main Catalogue E 10/2012 Desk-top cases – Accessories Accessories Static load-carrying capacity 25 kg per foot Can be used instead of standard feet Fixing holes provided in bottom of case Order Information Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order a minimum of 10 feet or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. Note Please order assembly kit separately. 0180207502906050 Accessories Static load-carrying capacity 25 kg per foot Can be used instead of standard feet Fixing holes provided in bottom of case Delivery comprises (kit) Order Information Plastic tip-up foot AZA43835 02912050 78,4 47 20 38,4 13,9 Ø3,1 Ø4,8 13,3 15,8 14 1 5 Description Qty/PU grey black Part no. Part no. Foot with tip-up, PA, UL 94 HB 1 10603-023 10603-025 Foot without tip-up, PA, UL 94 HB 1 10603-024 10603-026 Pozidrive flathead screw M4 × 10, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-513 Hexagon nut M4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-211 Spring washer A4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-207 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Plastic tip-up feet Item Qty Description 1 4 Foot, PA, UL 94 V-0 2 4 Anti-slip protection, TPE 3 2 Tip-up device, PA, UL 94 V-0 4 1 Assembly kit Description RAL 7016 anthracite RAL 9006 silver Part no. Part no. Plastic tip-up foot 20603-002 20603-001 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. 5.117 Desk-top cases – Accessories Part number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working days Part number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days Main Catalogue E 10/2012 AZA43836 Accessories Static load-carrying capacity 50 kg per foot Can be used instead of standard feet Fixing holes provided in bottom of case Order Information 1) Delivery is exclusively in Standard Pack Quantity (SPQ): Please order at least 10 pieces or a multiple. Pricing is per individual item. Retention partsMain CataloguePart number in bold face type: ready for despatch within 2 working daysPart number in normal type: ready for despatch within 10 working days T8: For mounting guide rails to horizontal rails T20: For mounting horizontal rails and rear hoods to side panels, cover plates, support brackets and front handles Order Information 32506001 Main Catalogue Measuring tape with cm, U-, HP-division (lenght 2 m) Plastic cases, metal measuring tape with automatic collection Order Information Al die-cast tip-up foot Description Qty Part no. Foot without tip-up, Al die-cast, silver 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 10603-001 Foot with tip-up, Al die-cast, silver 1 piece (SPQ 10)1) 10603-002 Accessories Cheesehead screw with slot M4 × 12, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21101-211 Hexagon nut M4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-211 Spring washer A4, St, zinc-plated, PU 100 pieces 21100-207 Screwdriver AZA45925 Torx screwdriver Qty/PU Part no. pieces M2.5 T 8 Torx 1 64560-026 M4 T 20 Torx 1 64560-027 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Measuring tape Description Qty/PU Part no. Measuring tape 1 89009-001 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick search code = Part no. Schroff gmbh, Langenalber Strass e 96–100, D-75334 Straubenhardt WWW.PENTA IREQUIPMENTPROTECT ION.COM 39601-641 © 2012 Pentair Equipment Protection Electronics Packaging www.schroff.biz UK 04/2006 9.3 Power supplies– 19" compatible – AC/DC switched-mode power supply 11396002 DIJM0084 Connector pin-out 19" compatible – AC/DC switched-mode power supply Wide range mains/line input voltage (from 90 – 264 VAC and 130 – 340 VDC) Single output voltage Redundancy operation with integrated decoupling diode Active Current Share Bus (CSB) Signalling: Output voltage OK Efficiency up to 80% Delivery comprises Order Information Note Please order front panel separately Output data at Ta= 0 ... 50 °C Further accessories, see page 9.21 Single, 50 W ecopower Pin Connection 4 Output + V1 6 Output + V1 8 Sense line + V1 10 Sense line 0 V1 12 Output 0 V1 14 Output 0 V1 16 - 18 - 20 - 22 CSB 24 Output OK 26 - 28 L 30 N 32 PE Qty Description 1 19" compatible power supply height 3 U width A: 6 HP depth 171.93 mm (160 mm deep boards) connector H15M (assembled) keying/coding peg (assembled) Voltage Current Power Description Order no. V A W 5 9 45 SEK 105 13100-043 12 4.2 51 SEK 112 13100-044 15 3.4 51 SEK 115 13100-041 24 2.1 51 SEK 124 13100-045 48 1.1 53 SEK 148 13100-046 Front panel 6 HP, Al, front anodised, rear colourless chromated, with vertical slots for EMC contact strips, incl. assembly kit, 1 piece 21006-943 EMC contact strips Stainless steel, 2 pieces per front panel necessary, PU 10 pieces 21101-705 Connector H 15 F FASTON connection, 1 piece 69001-733 Coding PU (keying/coding peg, 1 piece, keying/coding pin 2 pieces) 60800-123 For further information www.schroff.biz/oneclick oneClick code = Order no. 6 1 2 3 4 5 7 TE = HP = F Aufbau / Exploded diagram / Montage ELA44928 Maßbilder / Dimensions / Dimensions DIJM0001 Fühlerleitungbetrieb (Last) Die Fühlerleitungen werden polrichtig direkt an der Last angeschlossen. Die Leitungen müssen verdrillt oder abgeschirmt sein (Schirm mit PE verbinden). Für optimale Störspannungsunterdrückung sollte negative Ausgangsleitung mit Schutzleiter (PE, Pin 32) verbunden werden. Fühlerleitungbetrieb (lokal) Die Senseanschlüsse werden polrichtig direkt am Power Supply gebrückt. Betrieb ohne Fühlerleitung Fühlerleitungsanschlüsse sind intern mit einem Widerstand verbunden; ohne Fühlerleitungsanschluß wird die Ausgangsspannung ca. auf Nennspannung geregelt. Operation with sense lines (load) The sense lines are connected directly to the load with the correct polarity. The lines must be twisted or screened (connect screen with PE). For optimum interference suppression, the negative output should be connected to the protective GND/earth (PE, pin 32). Operation with sense lines (local) The sense connections are bridged directly to the power supply with the correct polarity. Operation without sense lines Sense connections are connected internally with a resistor; without sense connection the output voltage is approx. the same as the nominal voltage. Utilisation avec lignes de compensation (charge) Les lignes de compensation doivent être raccordées directement à la charge en respectant la correspondance des polarités. Elles doivent être torsadées ou blindées (raccorder le blindage au conducteur de protection PE). Pour obtenir une neutralisation optimale des tensions parasites , la ligne négative devrait être reliée au conducteur de protection (PE, broche 32). Utilisation avec lignes de compensation (local) Les lignes de compensation doivent être pontées directement en sortie d´alimentation en respectant la correspondance des polarités. Utilisation sans lignes de compensation Les raccordements des lignes de compensation sont pontées dans l´alimentation à l´aide d´une résistance. Lorsque les lignes de compensation ne sont pas raccordées en externe, la tension de sortie est régulée approximativement à la valeur nominale. Pos. Item Repère Benennung Description Désignation Bestell-Nr. Order No. Référence 1 Netzgerät, Teileinsatz 3 HE nach DIN 41494, Teil 5 Power Supply, Plug-in unit 3 U to DIN 41494, part 5 Alimentation, Module enfichable 3 U, selon DIN 41494 partie 5 2 Steckverbinder Messerleiste Male connector Connecteur mâle H 15 M, DIN 41612 3 Codierleiste, Kammleiste Coding strip, Female strip Détrompeur, Peigne 4 Steckverbinder-Gegenstück Female connector Connecteur femelle 69001-733 5 Codierleisten-Gegenstück Coding strip Réceptacle détrompeur 60800-123 6 HF Frontplatte (seitlich geschlitzt) mit Befestigungsmaterial Front panel with slots incl. assembly parts Face avant HF (avec fentes latérales) et pièces de fixation 21006-943 7 Sicherung Fuse Fusible secteur Power LED grün, versorgt durch die Ausgangsspannung LED green, supplied by the ouput voltage LED verte, alimentée par tension de sortie D V Einstellung der Ausgangsspannung V Adjustment of the output voltages V Réglage tensions de sortie V Prinzipschaltbild, Steckerbelegung / Circuit diagram, Connector pin-out / Schéma de principe, Brochage DIJM0002 PSU + Sense - Sense - V + V 12,14 4,6 8 10 R C + PSU + Sense - Sense - V + V 12,14 4,6 8 10 R DIJM0057 Uup Udown Hyst. typ. SEK 105 4,6 ±0,2 V 4,5 ±0,2 V 60 mV SEK 112 11,0 ±0,2 V 10,9 ±0,2 V 200 mV SEK 115 13,9 ±0,2 V 13,7 ±0,2 V 200 mV SEK 124 23 ±0,3 V 22,8 ±0,3 V 300 mV SEK 148 46,9 ±0,4 V 45,5 ±0,4 V 600 mV Rpullup SEK 105 470 h SEK 112 1k6 h SEK 115 1k6 h SEK 124 4k7 h SEK 148 20k h + - + - PSU 2 PSU 1 + - RL V1 V1 Leistungsbegrenzung Zum Schutz des Gerätes müssen die maximalen Ausgangsströme mit steigender Temperatur reduziert werden. Das Derating setzt bei 50 °C ein. Strombegrenzung Die Geräte sind für Dauerkurzschluß ausgelegt. Der Ausgangsstrom wird gemäß einer I/U-Kennlinie begrenzt. Wird die Ausgangsspannung vom Anwender erhöht, muß er sicherstellen, daß der maximale Ausgangstrom um den gleichen Faktor verringert wird. Das Netzgerät kann sonst zerstört werden. Beispiel: UDC + 10 % => IDC - 10 %. Überspannungsschutz Der OVP ist werkseitig eingestellt (siehe technische Daten). Beim Ansprechen des Überspannungschutzes wird der Regler abgeschaltet. Wenn die Überspannung nicht mehr ansteht schaltet sich das Netzgerät wieder ein. Serienschaltung Sehen Sie am Ausgang externe Inversdioden vor. Summenspannung von 200 V nicht überschreiten. Spricht bei einem Gerät die Strombegrenzung an, muß die Last kurz abgetrennt werden. Bei Serienschaltung können am Ausgang berührungsgefährliche Spannungen auftreten: SELV-Spannung nur bis 60 VDC. Parallelschaltung Zur Leistungserhöhung oder Redundanzbetrieb werden die Ausgänge der Netzgeräte parallel verbunden. Es erfolgt eine geregelte Lastaufteilung wenn der Current Share Bus der Netzgeräte miteinander verbunden ist (Pin 22, max. 12 Geräte parallelschaltbar, max. Ausgangsleistung ca. 0.9*Pmax.). Damit im Redundanzbetrieb alle Netzgeräte arbeiten ist eine Grundlast von 0,1*Pmax erforderlich. Die Entkoppeldiode ist eingebaut. Netzspannung Die Power Supplies haben einen Weitbereichseingang (90 VAC – 264 VAC, 130 VDC – 340 VDC). Output OK Signal Das Output OK Signal zeigt an, ob die Ausgangsspannung vorhanden ist (siehe Diagramm Output OK Signal). Der Pullup Widerstand ist eingebaut. Output power Limiting In order to protect the unit the maximum output currents reduced as the temperature increases. Derating is activated at 50 °C. Current limiting The power supply features short-circuit protection. The output current is limited according to an I/V curve. If the output voltage is increased by the user, the maximum output current must be reduced by the same factor. The power supply may otherwise be destroyed. Example: VDC + 10 % => IDC - 10 %. Over-voltage protection The OVP is pre-set (see technical data). When the over-voltage protection is triggered the regulator is switched off. The unit is automatically reset when there is no longer any over-voltage. Series operation External inverse diodes should be used at the output. Do not exceed a total voltage of 200 V. If the current limiting is triggered in a unit the load should be removed briefly. Dangerous voltages may occur at the output with series operation: SELV voltage only up to 60 VDC. Parallel operation The unit outputs are set up for parallel operation to increase the output power or for redundancy. The load share control operates if the Current Share Buses of the unit are linked together(Pin 22 max 12 units). max. output performance approx. 0.9*Pmax. So that all power supplies work in redundancy mode, a basic load of 0.1*Pmax is required. The decoupling diode is built in. Mains/line voltage The power supplies have a broad range input (90 VAC – 264 VAC, 130 VDC – 340 VDC). Output OK Signal The Output OK Signal is on if there is an existing output voltage(see diagram Output OK Signal). The pullup resistor is build in. Limitation de puissance Afin de protéger l’alimentation, les courants de sortie max. diminuent á mesure que la température augmente. Le derating démarre à 50 °C. Limitation de courant Les alimentations sont conçues pour pouvoir supporter un court-circuit permanent. Le courant des sortie est régulé selon une courbe caractéristique I/V. Si l’utilisateur accroît la tension de sortie, il doit veiller à réduire le courant maximal de sortie dans la même proportion, sinon l’alimentation risque d’être détériorée. Exemple: UDC + 10 % => IDC - 10 %. Protection aux surtensions L’OVP est prérèglé en usine (voir Caractéristiques Techniques). Dans le cas du déclenchement de la protection aux surtensions, l’alimentation est arrêtée. Lorsque la surtension disparait, l’alimentation se remet en marche. Branchement en série Il faut prévoir des diodes de protection contre les inversions de polarité. Ne pas dépasser la tension totale de 200 V. Lorsque l’un des appareils déclenche en limitation de courant, il faut déconnecter la charge pendant un court moment. Lors d’une mise en série, des tensions dangereuse peuvent apparaître à la sortie: tension SELV uniquement jusqu’à 60 VDC. Branchement en parallèle Pour accroitre la puissance ou pour une utilisation en redondance des alimentations les sorties seront reliées en parallèle. Une répartition autonome de la charge est assurée lorsque les sorties Current Share Bus des alimentations sont reliées entre elles (broche 22, max. 12 alimentations en parallèle, tension max. de sortie env. 0.9*Pmax). Pour qu’en mode de redondance toutes les alimentations soient en service il faut une charge minimale de 0,1*Pmax. La diode de découplage est intégrée. Adaptation de la tension secteur L´alimentation dispose d´une plage d´entrée secteur étendue. Elle s´adapte automatiquement à la tension secteur (90 VAC – 264 VAC, 130 VDC – 340 VDC). Signal Output OK Le signal Output OK indique la présence ou non de la tension de sortie (voir schéma Signal Output OK). La résistante Pullup est intégrée. Strombegrenzung Current limiting Limitation de courant Parallelschaltung (CSB) Parallel operation Branchement en parallèle Serienschaltung Series operation Branchement en série V [ % ] 110 I [ % ] 100 + + + I - - PSU 2 PSU 1 + - - PSU 3 RL CSB 1 I 2 I n Output OK Signal Garantiebedingungen Leistungsdauer Für dieses Produkt leisten wir 2 Jahre Garantie. Der Anspruch beginnt mit dem Tage der Auslieferung. Umfang der Mängelbeseitigung Innerhalb der Garantiezeit beseitigen wir kostenlos alle Funktionsfehler am Produkt, die auf mangelhafte Ausführung bzw. Materialfehler zurückzuführen sind. Weitergehende Ansprüche – insbesondere für Folgeschäden – sind ausgeschlossen. Garantieausschluß Schäden und Funktionsstörungen verursacht durch Nichtbeachten unserer Bedienungsanleitung sowie Fall, Stoß, Verschmutzung oder sonstige unsachgemäße Behandlung fallen nicht unter die Garantieleistung. Die Garantie erlischt, wenn das Produkt von unbefugter Seite geöffnet wurde. Eingriffe erfolgt sind oder die Seriennummer am Produkt verändert oder unkenntlich gemacht wurde. Abwicklung des Garantieanspruches Das vorliegende Produkt wurde sorgfältig geprüft und eingestellt. Bei berechtigten Beanstandungen schicken Sie uns das Produkt bitte zurück. Zur Erhaltung Ihres Garantieanspruches beachten Sie bitte folgendes: Legen Sie eine möglichst genaue Beschreibung des Defektes bei. Das Produkt ist im Original-Karton oder gleichwertiger Verpackung einzusenden und zwar versichert und portofrei. Warranty conditions Duration This product has a warranty of 2 years. The warranty begins on the day of delivery Cover of defects Within the warranty period Schroff will repair free of charge any faulty functioning of the product resulting from faulty design or defective material. All other claims under the warranty are excluded, in particular consequential damage. Warranty exclusion The warranty does not cover damage or functional defects caused by non-adherence to the Company´s operating instructions or such caused by dropping, knocking, contamination or other untoward handling. The warranty is invalidated if the product is opened by unauthorized personnel, tampered with or the serial number on the product has been changed or rendered illegible. Claims under warranty This product has been carefully checked. If you have a valid claim, please return the product to SCHROFF. In order to make a claim under the warranty, ensure that the following is carried out: Include a detailed description of the fault. The product should be returned in the original carton or similar packaging, insured and post paid. Garantie Garantie contractuelle Les conditions d‘applications de la garantie, et en particulier la durée, l‘étendue et les cas d‘exclusion, figurent dans nos conditions générales de ventes, paragraphe 11 „Garantie contractuelle“. Application de la garantie Cette alimentation a été soigneusement contrôlée en usine. En cas de réclamations, veuillez nous la retourner accompagnée d‘une description la plus précise possible du défaut constaté, et d‘une copie du bon de livraison ou de la facture. Le produit doit nous être retourné dans son emballage d‘origine port assuré et payé. Schroff n‘assume aucune responsabilité pour des appareils non assurés et endommagés pendant le transport. Technische Daten Technical Data Caractéristiques techniques SEK 105 SEK 112 SEK 115 SEK 124 SEK 148 Eingangsgrößen Input parameters Valeurs d’entée 13100 - 043 - 044 - 041 - 045 - 046 Netzspannung Nennwerte VAC Mains/line voltage Nominal values VAC Tension secteur Valeurs nominales VAC 100 – 240 VAC Arbeitsbereiche Operating ranges Plage de fonctionnement 90 – 264 VAC 128 – 370 VDC 4) Netznennstrom bei 90 VAC / 187 VAC Mains/line current at 90 VAC / 187 VAC Courant nominal pour 90 VAC / 187 VAC 1,3 / 0,6 A Netzfrequenzbereich Mains/line frequency Fréquence secteur 48 – 62 Hz Leistungsfaktor cos j Performance factor cos j Facteur de puissance cos j 0,6 Wirkungsgrad typabhängig Efficiency, depending on type Rendement selon le type 69 – 80% Einschaltstrom IP ( bei 230 VAC ) Current at switch-on IP ( at 230 VAC ) Courant d’appel IP ( pour 230 VAC ) < 20 A Ableitstrom Leakage current Courant de fuite £ 500 μA Ausgangsgrößen Output parameters Valeurs de sortie Ausgangsleistung [ W ] Output [ W ] Puissance de sortie [ W ] 45 51 53 Ausgangsspannung D V [ V ] werkseitig 2) Output voltage D V [ V ] pre-set 2) Tension de sortie D V [ V ] Réglage usine 2) 5 12 15 24 48 Einstellbereich 1) Adjustment range 1) Plage de réglage 1) 4,2 – 6 11 – 13,5 13,5 – 16,5 21 – 25,5 43 – 50 Ausgangsstrom (bei 90 - 264 VAC) [ A ] 0 ... 50 °C Output current (at 90 - 264 VAC ) [ A ] 0 ... 50 °C Courant de sortie (et 90 - 264 VAC ) [ A ] 0 ... 50 °C 9,0 4,2 3,4 2,1 1,1 70 °C 70 °C 70 °C 6,0 2,9 2,4 1,5 0,8 Kurzschlußstrom [ A ] Short-circuit current [ A ] Courant de court-circuit [ A ] < 11 < 6 < 4,5 < 3 < 2 Überspannungsschutz OVP(schaltet Netzgerät ab), automatisch wiederkehrend, werkseitig fest eingestellt [ V ] Over-voltage protection pre-set (switches power supply off) with automatic reset [ V ] Protection surtensions OVP (coupe l’alimentation), remise en marche automatique [ V ] 6 ±0,3 14 ±0,5 17 ±0,5 26 ± 0,5 52 ± 2 Restwelligkeit bei [mVPP] 100 Hz Residual ripple at [mVPP] 100 Hz Ondulation résiduelle [mVPP] 100 Hz < 20 < 100 < 100 < 100 < 150 Taktfrequenz (100 kHz) Frequency (100 kHz) à la fréquence de découpage (100 kHz) < 40 < 50 < 50 < 50 < 60 Störspannung (BW: 100 MHz) [mVPP] Interference voltage (BW: 100 MHz) [mVPP] Tension parasite (BP: 100 MHz) [mVPP] < 100 < 200 < 200 < 200 < 200 Lastausregelung, statisch ( Lastwechsel 0 - 100 % ) [mV] Load control, static ( load change 0 - 100 % ) [mV] Régulation en charge statique ( variation charge 0 - 100 % ) [mV] < 50 < 50 < 50 < 100 < 100 Netzausregelung 90 – 264 V [mV] Mains voltage change 90 – 264 V [mV] Régulation secteur 90 – 264 V [mV] < 10 < 25 < 25 < 100 < 100 Temperaturkoeffizient Temperature coefficient Coefficient de température - 0,015 %/K CSB und Ausgang über Diode entkoppelt CSB and output via decoupling diode CSB et Sortie découpling par diode eingebaut / built in / monté Dynamische Regelabweichungen (Lastwechsel: 50 ... 100% mit 100 Hz; dI/dt = 0,135 A/μs) Dynamic control deviations (Load change: 50 ... 100% at 100 Hz; dI/dt = 0.135 A/μs) Valeurs dynamiques de sortie (Variation de charge: 50 ... 100% avec 100 Hz; dI/dt = 0,135 A/μs) Gesamtausregelzeit, Toleranz 0,1% x V1 Nenn [ms] Total control time, Tolerance 0,1 % x V1 nom [ms] Temps de réponse globall, Tolérance 0,1% x V1 Nenn [ms] < 1,5 Überschwingweite und Unterschwingweite [ mV ] Overshoot and undershoot [ mV ] Amplitude de dépassement et amplitude négative [ mV ] < 500 < 250 < 300 < 500 Schutz- und Überwachungseinrichtungen Protection and control features Dispositifs de protection et surveillance Einschaltzeit Soft start delay Temps de montée < 0,8 s Netzsicherung, High Breaking träge Mains/line fuse, high breaking slow Fusible secteur, high breaking slow 4 A/250 VAC, 5 x 20 mm, DIN EN60127-2/V4) Netzausfallüberbrückung bei VAC = 187 VAC und 100 % Last Mains/line failure buffer at VAC = 187 VAC and 100 % load Pontage microcoupures secteur avec VAC = 187 VAC et charge 100 % > 30 ms Fernfühler kompensiert Remote control compensated Compensation max. 0,5 V Strombegrenzungskennlinie Current limiting Limitation de courant U / I , V / I Signalisierung „Ausgangsspannung ok“ “Output OK“ Signal Signalisation «tension de sortie OK» Output OK, low active, internal pull-up max. 55 V / 50 mA High Pegel [ V ] High Level [ V ] High signal [ V ] 5 12 15 24 48 Prüf- und Umweltbedingungen Test and environmental specifications Conditions de test et d’environnement Klimaprüfung nach Climatic test to Epreuve climatique selon IEC 68-2-38 Schock- und Vibrationstest gemäß Beschleunigung 2 g Shock and vibration tests in accordance Acceleration 2 g Tests de chocs et vibrations selon Accélération 2 g EN 60068-2-6 Höhe 3 HE / Tiefe 160 mm / Breite [TE] Hight 3 U / depth 160mm / Width [HP] Hauteur 3 U / Prof. 160 mm, Largeur [F] 6 Gewicht (Masse) Weight Poids (masse) 0,55 kg CE Störaussendung CE Transmission Compatibilité électromagnétique CE Emission EN 50081-1 EN 55011class B, EN 55022 class B Störfestigkeit, Schärfeklasse 3 Susceptability, degree of severity 3 CEM Immunité, sévérity 3 EN 50082-2, EN 61000-4-2,EN 61000-4-3, EN 61000-4-4 ,EN 61000-4-5, EN 61000-4-6 Sicherheit, Schutzklasse 1 Safety, Protection class 1 Sécurité, Classe de protection 1 EN 60950 ( ERG ) Hochspannungsprüfung nach EN 60950 Eingang-Ausgang High voltage test to EN 60950 input-output Tests haute-tension selon EN 60950 Entrée-Sortie 4,3 kVDC 3) Eingang-PE input-PE Entrée-Masse 2,2 kVDC 3) Ausgang-PE output-PE Sortie-Masse 0,7 kVDC 3) UL 1950 UL 1950 UL 1950 No. E 153809 Netzgerät wartungsfrei Power supply, maintenance-free Alimentation sans entretien Ja / yes / oui Kühlart Cooling Refroidissement Convection Umgebungstemperatur Betrieb / Lagerung Ambient temperature Operation / Storage Température ambiante Service / Stockage 0 ... 70 °C / -20 ... + 85 °C MTBF bei Vollast, TU = 40 °C MTBF at full load, Ta = 40 °C MTBF à pleine charge, Ta = 40 °C 500000 h 1) Bei Erhöhung der Ausgangsspannung DV Strombegrenzung beachten. 2) Toleranz ± 100 mV. 3) ACHTUNG: Hochspannungsprüfung wurde durchgeführt. Bei erneuter Prüfung darf max. 80% der Prüfspannung angelegt werden. Bei unsachgemäßer Prüfung (z.B. manche Bauteile müssen kurzgeschlossen werden) kann das Gerät zerstört werden. 4) Für den DC-Betrieb ist eine geeignete Sicherung vorzuschalten, zB. von Wickmann 19356 T 3,15 A 1) When increasing the output voltage DV check the current limiting. 2) Tolerance ± 100 mV. 3) CAUTION: The high voltage test has been carried out. Any repeat test must be carried out at max. 80% of the test voltage. If the test is carried out incorrectly (e.g. some components have to be short-circuited), the unit may be destroyed. 4) For DC-operation you must put an additional fuse in front, e.g. from Wickmann 19356 T 3,15 A 1) Lorsqu’on augmente la tension de sortie DV il faut tenir compte de la limitation de courant. 2) Tolérance ± 100 mV. 3) ATTENTION: Les tests haute-tension ont été effectués. En cas de répétition de ces tests, uniquement 80 % de la tension d’essai peut être appliquée. En cas de tests non appropriés (certains composants doivent être mis en court-circuit), l’appareil peut être détruit. 5) L’utilisation d’un fusible adéquate est obligatoire pour le fonctionnement en DC, par ex. Wickmann 19356 T 3,15 A ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ LebÁÁeÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁnÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁsÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁgÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁeÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁfÁÁÁÁÁÁaÁÁÁÁÁÁ hr! ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ DÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁaÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁnÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁgÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁeÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁrÁÁÁÁÁÁ!ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ DangÁÁÁÁÁÁeÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁrÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁdÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁeÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁmÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ort! Attention ! Observer les prescriptions et règles de sécurité! Avant la mise en service, lire la notice d’utilisation. Raccorder le conducteur de terre (PE). Si une protection contre les contacts directs est nécessaire, l’alimentation doit obligatoirement être montée dans un boîtier. L’appareil ne peut être ouvert que par des personnes qualifiés! La protection anti-feu est à assurer par une enveloppe indépendante de l’alimentation. Consignes de sécurité L’alimentation doit être munie d’une face avant appropriée, afin d’éviter tout contact avec des parties sous tension. Afin d’éviter les couplages parasites, les câblages secteur et secondaires doivent cheminer séparément. Precautions! Please read the safety instructions carefully! Please read these operating instructions carefully before switching on. Connect the PE conductor before operating. The power supply should be mounted in a case to avoid risk of direct contact with live parts. The power supply unit should be opened by authorized service personnel only! Ensure correct installation for conformity to fire regulations. Safety instructions To avoid interference, the mains/line and output connections must be physically separated from one another. Vorsicht! Sicherheitsvorschriften, -bestimmungen und -hinweise beachten! Vor dem Betrieb Bedienungsanleitung lesen. Vor dem Betrieb PE-Leiter anschließen. Direkter Berührschutz erfordert unbedingt den Einbau in Gehäuse, die das Berühren spannungsführender Teile ausschließt. Das Geräte darf nur von Fachpersonal geöffnet werden! Brandschutz ist durch das übergeordnete Gefäßsystem sicherzustellen Sicherheitshinweise Nur mit geeigneter Frontplatte betreiben, um die Berührung spannungsführender Teile zu verhindern! Um Störungseinkopplungen zu vermeiden müssen Netz-/ und Ausgangsleitungen getrennt verlegt werden. Jede Unterbrechung der Schutzleitung innerhalb oder außerhalb des Gerätes oder die Abkoppelung des Schutzleiteranschlusses kann das Gerät gefährlich machen; absichtliche Unterbrechung ist untersagt! Vor dem Sicherungswechsel Gerät vom Netz trennen. Die Geräte sind werkseitig nur einpolig abgesichert. Bei Netzanschluß mit polverwechselbaren Steckvorrichtungen ist eine zweite Sicherung vorzusehen. Durch Serienschaltung (Reihenschaltung) mehrerer Stromversorgungen können an den Ausgängen lebensgefährliche Spannungen (ab 60 VDC) auftreten (SELV-Spannung nur bis 60 VDC)! Beim Einbau des Gerätes Sicherheitsmaßnahmen nach EN 60950 beachten! Allgemeine Sicherheitsvorschriften und -bestimmungen beachten! Operate only with suitable front panel to avoid contact with voltagebearing parts! The power supply should be mounted in a case to avoid risk of direct contact with live parts! Do not disconnect ground/earth inside or outside the power supply. The company cannot be held reponsible for unsafe operating conditions resulting from deliberate disconnection! Disconnect the mains/line voltage from the unit before changing the fuse. The units are fused for live only. A second fuse should be used for the neutral connection where the polarity of the connectors can be reversed. When operating several power supplies in series, dangerous voltages may occur at the output terminals; SELV voltage must be limited to 60 VDC! When mounting the unit read the safety instructions to EN 60950! Pour obtenir une protection contre les contacts directs, l’appareil doit obligatoirement être monté dans un boîtier excluant toute possibilité de contact avec des parties sous tension. Toute interruption de la ligne de protection à l’intérieur ou à l’extérieur de l’alimentation, de même qu’une déconnexion de cette ligne, peuvent rendre l’appareil dangereux. Tout acte intentionnel dans ce sens est strictement interdit. Avant de remplacer le fusible, couper l’appareil du secteur L’alimentation ne dispose que d’une protection unipolaire. Si le dispositif de connexion au secteur est de nature â favoriser une inversion polaire, il faut prévoir un second fusible. Le couplage en série de plusieurs alimentations peut occasionner des tensions mortelles aux sorties ( à partir de 60 VDC). Limite de tension SELV = 60 VDC max. Lors du montage de l’alimentation, respecter les mesures de sécurité prévues par la norme EN 60950. Observer les prescriptions et règles de sécurité générales. EN 60950 Bedienungsanleitung Operating instructions Notice d’utilisation SEK single (SEK 1xx) (13100-041 – 13100-046) Vor Inbetriebnahme diese Bedienungsanleitung sorgfältig lesen! Entstehen durch Nichtbeachtung Schäden, erlöschen die Garantieansprüche. Diese Dokumentation wurde mit größter Sorgfalt erstellt. Dennoch können wir für die vollständige Richtigkeit keine Garantie übernehmen. Please read these operating instructions carefully before applying power. The warranty is subject to correct input voltages being applied. Repairs or modifications made by anyone other than SCHROFF will invalidate the warranty. This documentation has been compiled with the utmost care. We cannot however guarantee its correctness in every respect. Avant la mise en service, veuillez lire attentivement la présente notice d'utilisation. Tout dommage dû à l'inobservation de nos instructions n'est pas couvert par notre garantie. La présente documentation a été réalisée avec le plus grand soin mais nous déclinons toute responsabilité en cas d'erreur ou d'omission. SCHROFF GMBH www.schroff.biz D/GB/F 11/06 Langenalber Straße 96-100, D-75334 Straubenhardt, Tel. +49 (7082) 794-0, Fax +49 (7082) 794-200 73972-035 Rev. 002 11396002 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U 1 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U (48 x 48 mm) New 48 x 48-mm Basic Temperature Controller with Enhanced Functions and Performance. Improved Indication Accuracy and Preventive Maintenance Function. • Indication Accuracy Thermocouple input: ±0.3% of PV (previous models: ±0.5%) Pt input: ±0.2% of PV (previous models: ±0.5%) Analog input: ±0.2% FS (previous models: ±0.5%) • New E5CN-U Models (Plug-in Models) with analog inputs and current outputs. • A PV/SV-status display function can be set to alternate between displaying the PV or SV and the status of the Temperature Controller (auto/manual, RUN/STOP and alarms). • Preventive maintenance for relays using a Control Output ON/OFF Counter. Main I/O Functions 48 × 48-mm E5CN 48 × 48-mm E5CN-U Refer to Safety Precautions on page 18. Event Inputs • None • Two Sensor Inputs • Universal thermocouple/Pt inputs (Models with temperature inputs) • Analog current/voltage inputs (Models with analog inputs) Indication Accuracy • Thermocouple input: ±0.3% of PV • Pt input: ±0.2% of PV • Analog input: ±0.2% FS Sampling Period and control update • 250 ms Control Output 1 • Relay output • Voltage output (for driving SSR) • Current output • Long-life relay output (hybrid) Control Output 2 • None • Voltage output (for driving SSR) 2 Auxiliary Outputs 2 line Display: PV and SV 4-digit, 11 segment display E5CN • Auto/manual switching • Temperature Controller status display • Simple program function • Control output ON/OFF count alarm • PV change rate alarm • Models optional with RS-485 communications This data sheet is provided as a guideline for selecting products. Be sure to refer to the following user manuals for application precautions and other information required for operation before attempting to use the product. E5CN/E5AN/E5EN Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual Basic Type (Cat. No. H156) E5CN/E5AN/E5EN Digital Temperature Controllers Communications Manual Basic Type (Cat. No. H158) 2 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U Lineup Note: All models can be used for Heating, Cooling and Heating & Cooling control Model Number Structure Model Number Legend Controllers 1. Control Output 1 R: Relay output Q: Voltage output (for driving SSR) C: Current output Y: Long-life relay output (hybrid) ✽1 2. Auxiliary Outputs ✽2 2: Two outputs 3. Option M: Option Unit can be mounted. 4. Input Type T: Universal thermocouple/platinum resistance thermometer L: Analog current/voltage input 5. Power Supply Voltage Blank: 100 to 240 VAC D: 24 VAC/VDC 6. Case Color Blank: Black W: Silver (contact your local sales for more information) 7. Terminal Cover -500: With terminal cover Option Units 1. Applicable Controller CN: E5CN 2. Function 1 Blank: None Q: Control output 2 (voltage for driving SSR) P: Power supply for sensor 3. Function 2 Blank: None H: Heater burnout/SSR failure/Heater overcurrent detection (CT1) HH: Heater burnout/SSR failure/Heater overcurrent detection (For 3-phase heater applications, 2x CT) B: Two event inputs 03: RS-485 communications H03: Heater burnout/SSR failure/Heater overcurrent detection (CT1) + RS-485 communications HB: Heater burnout/SSR failure/Heater overcurrent detection (CT1) + Two event inputs HH03: Heater burnout/SSR failure/Heater overcurrent detection (For 3-phase heater applications, 2x CT) 4. Version N2: Applicable only to models produced after January 2008 (Box marked with N6) Note: Not all combinations of function 1 and function 2 specifications are possible for Option Units (E53-CN@@N2). ✽1. Always connect an AC load to a long-life relay output. The output will not turn OFF if a DC load is connected because a triac is used for switching the circuit. For details, check the conditions in Ratings. ✽2. Auxiliary outputs are contact outputs that can be used to output alarms, control or results of logic operations. Plug-in Terminal block E5CN Basic Type Analog input Temperature input 2 control outputs 1 control output 2 control outputs 1 control output 2 auxiliary outputs 2 auxiliary outputs 2 auxiliary outputs 2 auxiliary outputs Analog input Temperature input 1 control output 1 control output 2 auxiliary outputs 2 auxiliary outputs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 E5CN-@2M@@-@-500 1 2 3 4 E53-CN@@N2 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U 3 Ordering Information Controllers with Terminal Blocks Note: add power supply voltage to model to complete ordering code (ie. E5CN-R2MT-500 AC100-240 or E5CN-R2MTD-500 AC/DC24) Option Units One of the following Option Units can be mounted to provide the E5CN with additional functions. Note: Option Units cannot be used for plug-in models. These Option Units are applicable only to models produced after January 2008 (Box marked with N6). Size Case color Power supply voltage Input type Auxiliary outputs Control output 1 Model 1/16 DIN 48 × 48 × 78 (W × H × D) Black 100 to 240 VAC Thermocouple or Resistance thermometer 2 Relay output E5CN-R2MT-500 Voltage output (for driving SSR) E5CN-Q2MT-500 Current output E5CN-C2MT-500 Long-life relay output (hybrid) E5CN-Y2MT-500 24 VAC/VDC Thermocouple or Resistance thermometer 2 Relay output E5CN-R2MTD-500 Voltage output (for driving SSR) E5CN-Q2MTD-500 Current output E5CN-C2MTD-500 100 to 240 VAC Analog (current/voltage) 2 Relay output E5CN-R2ML-500 Voltage output (for driving SSR) E5CN-Q2ML-500 Current output E5CN-C2ML-500 Long-life relay output (hybrid) E5CN-Y2ML-500 24 VAC/VDC Analog (current/voltage) 2 Relay output E5CN-R2MLD-500 Voltage output (for driving SSR) E5CN-Q2MLD-500 Current output E5CN-C2MLD-500 Functions Model Event inputs E53-CNBN2 Event inputs Control output 2 (Voltage for driving SSR) E53-CNQBN2 Event inputs Heater burnout/SSR failure/Heater overcurrent detection E53-CNHBN2 Event inputs External power supply for ES1B E53-CNPBN2 Communications RS-485 E53-CN03N2 Communications RS-485 Control output 2 (Voltage for driving SSR) E53-CNQ03N2 Communications RS-485 Heater burnout/SSR failure/Heater overcurrent detection E53-CNH03N2 Communications RS-485 3-phase heater burnout/SSR failure/ Heater overcurrent detection E53-CNHH03N2 Communications RS-485 External power supply for ES1B E53-CNP03N2 Heater burnout/SSR failure/Heater overcurrent detection Control output 2 (Voltage for driving SSR) E53-CNQHN2 3-phase heater burnout/SSR failure/ Heater overcurrent detection Control output 2 (Voltage for driving SSR) E53-CNQHHN2 Heater burnout/SSR failure/Heater overcurrent detection External power supply for ES1B E53-CNPHN2 4 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U Model Number Structure Model Number Legend (Plug-in-type Controllers) 1. Output Type R: Relay output Q: Voltage output (for driving SSR) C: Current output 2. Number of Alarms 2: Two alarms 3. Input Type T: Universal thermocouple/platinum resistance thermometer L: Analog Input 4. Plug-in type U: Plug-in type Ordering Information Plug-in-type Controllers Note: add power supply voltage to model to complete ordering code. (ie. E5CN-R2TU AC100-240 or E5CN-R2TDU AC/DC24) 1 2 3 4 E5CN-@2@U Size Case color Power supply voltage Input type Auxiliary outputs Control output 1 Model 1/16 DIN Black 100 to 240 VAC Thermocouple or resistance thermometer 2 Relay output E5CN-R2TU Voltage output (for driving SSR) E5CN-Q2TU Current output E5CN-C2TU Analog (current/voltage) 2 Relay output E5CN-R2LU Voltage output (for driving SSR) E5CN-Q2LU Current output E5CN-C2LU 24 VAC/VDC Thermocouple or resistance thermometer 2 Relay output E5CN-R2TDU Voltage output (for driving SSR) E5CN-Q2TDU Current output E5CN-C2TDU Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U 5 Accessories (Order Separately) USB-Serial Conversion Cable Terminal Cover Note: The Terminal Cover comes with the E5CN-@@@-500 models. Waterproof Packing Note: The Waterproof Packing is included with the Controller only for models with terminal blocks. Current Transformers (CTs) Adapter Note: Use this Adapter when the panel has been previously prepared for the E5B@ (72x72 mm panel cut-out). Sockets (for Plug-in Models) CX-Thermo Support Software Model E58-CIFQ1 Connectable models Terminal block models Model E53-COV17 Model Y92S-29 Hole diameter Model 5.8 dia. E54-CT1 12.0 dia. E54-CT3 Connectable models Model Terminal block models Y92F-45 Type Model Front-connecting Socket P2CF-11 Front-connecting Socket with Finger Protection P2CF-11-E Back-connecting Socket P3GA-11 Terminal Cover for Back-connecting socket with Finger Protection Y92A-48G Model EST2-2C-MV4 6 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U Specifications Ratings Power supply voltage No D in model number: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz D in model number: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC Operating voltage range 85% to 110% of rated supply voltage Power consumption E5CN 100 to 240 VAC: 7.5 VA (max.) (E5CN-R2T at 100 VAC: 3.0 VA) 24 VAC/VDC: 5 VA/3 W (max.) (E5CN-R2TD at 24 VAC: 2.7 VA) E5CN-U 100 to 240 VAC: 6 VA (max.) 24 VAC/VDC: 3 VA/2 W (max.) (models with current output: 4 VA/2 W) Sensor input Models with temperature inputs Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W, or PL II Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100 Infrared temperature sensor: 10 to 70° C, 60 to 120°C, 115 to 165° C, or 140 to 260°C Voltage input: 0 to 50 mV Models with analog inputs Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V Input impedance Current input: 150 Ω max., Voltage input: 1 MΩ min. (Use a 1:1 connection when connecting the ES2-HB.) Control method ON/OFF control or 2-PID control (with auto-tuning) Control outputs Relay output E5CN SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations, minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA E5CN-U SPDT, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations, minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA Voltage output (for driving SSR) E5CN E5CN-U Output voltage: 12 VDC ±15% (PNP), max. load current: 21 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit Current output E5CN 4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 20 mA DC, load: 600 Ω max., resolution: approx. 10,000 Long-life relay output E5CN SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical life: 1,000,000 operations, load power supply voltage: 75 to 250 VAC (DC loads cannot be connected.), minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA, leakage current: 5 mA max. (250 VAC, 60 Hz) Auxiliary outputs Number of outputs 2 Output specifications Relay output: SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations, minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA Event inputs Number of inputs 2 External contact input specifications Contact input: ON: 1 kΩ max., OFF: 100 kΩ min. Non-contact input: ON: Residual voltage: 1.5 V max., OFF: Leakage current: 0.1 mA max. Current flow: Approx. 7 mA per contact External power supply for ES1B 12 VDC ±10%, 20 mA, short-circuit protection circuit provided Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys Indication method 11-segment digital display and individual indicators (7-segment display emulation also possible) Character height: PV: 11 mm, SV: 6.5 mm Multi SP Up to four set points (SP0 to SP3) can be saved and selected using event inputs, key operations, or serial communications. Bank switching Not supported Other functions Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, SP ramp, other alarm functions, heater burnout detection, 40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital filter, self-tuning, temperature input shift, run/stop, protection functions, control output ON/OFF counter, extraction of square root, MV change rate limit, logic operations, PV/SV status display, simple program, automatic cooling coefficient adjustment Ambient operating temperature −10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing), for 3-year warranty: −10 to 50°C Ambient operating humidity 25% to 85% Storage temperature −25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing) Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U 7 Input Ranges Thermocouple/Platinum Resistance Thermometer (Universal Inputs) Models with Analog Inputs Shaded settings are the default settings. Input Type Platinum resistance thermometer Thermocouple Infrared temperature sensor Analog input Name Pt100 JPt100 K J T E L U N R S B W PL II 10 to 70°C 60 to 120 °C 115 to 165 °C 140 to 260 °C 0 to 50 mV Temperature range (° C) 2300 1800 1700 1600 1500 1400 1300 1200 1100 1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 0 −100.0 −200.0 2300 Usable in the following ranges by scaling: −1999 to 9999 or −199.9 to 999.9 1800 1700 1700 1300 1300 1300 850 850 850 600 500.0 500.0 500.0 400.0 400 400.0 400 400.0 260 120 165 100.0 100.0 90 100 0.0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 −20.0 −100 −20.0 −100 −200 −199.9 −199.9 −200 −200 −199.9 −200 −200 −199.9 −200 Setting number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 24 25 19 20 21 22 23 Shaded settings are the default settings. The applicable standards for the input types are as follows: K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B: JIS C 1602-1995, IEC 584-1 L: Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 W: W5Re/W26Re, ASTM E988-1990 JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989 Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, IEC 751 PL II: According to Platinel II electromotive force charts from BASF (previously Engelhard) Input Type Current Voltage Input specification 4 to 20mA 0 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V Setting range Usable in the following ranges by scaling: −1999 to 9999, −199.9 to 999.9, −19.99 to 99.99 or −1.999 to 9.999 Setting number 0 1 2 3 4 8 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U Alarm Outputs Each alarm can be independently set to one of the following 13 alarm types. The default is 2: Upper limit. Auxiliary outputs are allocated for alarms. ON delays and OFF delays (0 to 999 s) can also be specified. Note: For models with heater burnout, SSR failure, and heater overcurrent detection, alarm 1 will be an OR output of the alarm selected from the following alarm types and the alarms for heater burnout, SSR failure, and heater overcurrent. To output only a heater burnout alarm, SSR failure alarm, and heater overcurrent alarm for alarm 1, set the alarm type to 0 (i.e., no alarm function). ✽1. With set values 1, 4 and 5, the upper and lower limit values can be set independently for each alarm type, and are expressed as “L” and “H.” ✽2. Set value: 1, Upper- and lower-limit alarm ✽3. Set value: 4, Upper- and lower-limit range ✽4. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence For Upper- and Lower-Limit Alarm Described Above • Case 1 and 2 Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps. • Case 3: Always OFF ✽5. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps. Set value Alarm type Alarm output operation When X is positive When X is negative 0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF 1 ✽1 Upper- and lowerlimit ✽2 2 Upper limit 3 Lower limit 4 ✽1 Upper- and lowerlimit range ✽3 5 ✽1 Upper- and lowerlimit with standby sequence ✽4 6 Upper-limit with standby sequence 7 Lower-limit with standby sequence 8 Absolute-value upper-limit 9 Absolute-value lower-limit 10 Absolute-value upper-limit with standby sequence 11 Absolute-value lower-limit with standby sequence 12 LBA (for alarm 1 only) --- 13 PV change rate alarm --- ON OFF SP L H SP X ON OFF SP X ON OFF SP ON X OFF SP ON X OFF SP L H ON OFF SP L H ON OFF ✽5 SP X ON OFF SP X ON OFF SP X ON OFF SP ON X OFF 0 ON X OFF 0 X ON OFF 0 X ON OFF 0 X ON OFF 0 X ON OFF 0 ON X OFF 0 X ON OFF 0 X ON OFF L H H < 0, L > 0 ⏐H⏐ < ⏐L⏐ SP Case 1 L H H > 0, L < 0 ⏐H⏐ > ⏐L⏐ SP Case 2 H L H < 0, L < 0 SP H L H < 0, L > 0 SP ⏐H⏐ ≥ ⏐L⏐ H L H > 0, L < 0 SP ⏐H⏐ ≤ ⏐L⏐ Case 3 (Always ON) L H SP Case 1 SP L H Case 2 H SP L L L H SP SPH Case 3 (Always OFF) H < 0, L > 0 ⏐H⏐ < ⏐L⏐ H > 0, L < 0 ⏐H⏐ > ⏐L⏐ H < 0, L < 0 H < 0, L > 0 ⏐H⏐ ≥ ⏐L⏐ H > 0, L < 0 ⏐H⏐ ≤ ⏐L⏐ Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U 9 Characteristics ✽1. The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the −200 to 1300° C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of −100° C max., and U and L thermocouples at any temperatures is ±2° C ±1 digit max. The indication accuracy of the B thermocouple at a temperature of 400° C max. is not specified. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples in the 400 to 800° C range is ±3° C max. The indication accuracy of the R and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200° C max. is ±3° C ±1 digit max. The indication accuracy of W thermocouples is ±0.3 of PV or ±3° C, whichever is greater, ±1 digit max. The indication accuracy of PL II thermocouples is ±0.3 of PV or ±2° C, whichever is greater, ± 1 digit max. ✽2. Ambient temperature: −10° C to 23° C to 55° C, Voltage range: −15% to 10% of rated voltage ✽3. K thermocouple at −100°C max.: ±10° max. ✽4. “EU” stands for Engineering Unit and is used as the unit after scaling. For a temperature sensor, the EU is ° C or ° F. ✽5. When robust tuning (RT) is ON, the differential time is 0.0 to 999.9 (in units of 0.1 s). ✽6. External communications (RS-485) and cable communications for the Setup Tool can be used at the same time. ✽7. The E5CN-U plug-in model is certified for UL listing only when used together with the OMRON P2CF-11 Socket. Indication accuracy Thermocouple: ✽1 Terminal block models (E5CN): (±0.3% of indicated value or ±1° C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. Plug-in models (E5CN-U): (±1% of indicated value or ±2° C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. Platinum resistance thermometer input: Terminal block models (E5CN) and plug-in models (E5CN-U): (±0.2% of indicated value or ±0.8° C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. Analog input: Terminal block models (E5CN) and plug-in models (E5CN-U): ±0.2% FS ±1 digit max. CT input: Terminal block models (E5CN): ±5% FS ±1 digit max. Influence of temperature ✽2 Thermocouple input (R, S, B, W, PL II): Terminal block models (E5CN): (±1% of PV or ±10° C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. Plug-in models (E5CN-U): (±2% of PV or ±10° C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. Other thermocouple input: ✽3 Terminal block models (E5CN): (±1% of PV or ±4° C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. Plug-in models (E5CN-U): (±2% of PV or ±4° C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. Platinum resistance thermometer input: Terminal block models (E5CN) and plug-in models (E5CN-U): (±1% of PV or ±2°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. Analog input: Terminal block models (E5CN) and plug-in models (E5CN-U): (±1%FS) ±1 digit max. Influence of voltage ✽2 Input sampling period 250 ms Hysteresis Models with thermocouple/platinum resistance thermometer input (universal input): 0.1 to 999.9 EU (in units of 0.1 EU) ✽4 Models with analog input: 0.01 to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS) Proportional band (P) Models with thermocouple/platinum resistance thermometer input (universal input): 0.1 to 999.9 EU (in units of 0.1 EU) ✽4 Models with analog input: 0.1 to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS) Integral time (I) 0 to 3999 s (in units of 1 s) Derivative time (D) 0 to 3999 s (in units of 1 s) ✽5 Control period 0.5, 1 to 99 s (in units of 1 s) Manual reset value 0.0 to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%) Alarm setting range −1999 to 9999 (decimal point position depends on input type) Affect of signal source resistance Thermocouple: 0.1° C/Ω max. (100 Ω max.) Platinum resistance thermometer: 0.1° C/Ω max. (10 Ω max.) Insulation resistance 20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength 2,300 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz for 1 min (between terminals with different charge) Vibration resistance Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 10 min each in X, Y, and Z directions Destruction 10 to 55 Hz, 0.75-mm single amplitude for 2 hrs each in X, Y, and Z directions Shock resistance Malfunction 100 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions Destruction 300 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions Weight E5CN Controller: Approx. 150 g, Mounting Bracket: Approx. 10 g E5CN-U Controller: Approx. 110 g, Mounting Bracket: Approx. 10 g Degree of protection E5CN Front panel: IP66, Rear case: IP20, Terminals: IP00 E5CN-U Front panel: IP50, Rear case: IP20, Terminals: IP00 Memory protection Non-volatile memory (number of writes: 1,000,000 times) Setup Tool CX-Thermo version 4.0 or higher Setup Tool port Provided on the bottom of the E5CN. Use this port to connect a computer to the E5CN when using the Setup Tool. An E58-CIFQ1 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to connect the computer to the E5CN. ✽6 Standards Approved standards ✽7 UL 61010-1, CSA C22.2 No. 1010-1 Conformed standards EN 61010-1 (IEC 61010-1): Pollution level 2, overcurrent category II EMC EMI: EN 61326 Radiated Interference Electromagnetic Field Strength: EN 55011 Group 1, class A Noise Terminal Voltage: EN 55011 Group 1, class A EMS: EN 61326 ESD Immunity: EN 61000-4-2 Electromagnetic Field Immunity: EN 61000-4-3 Burst Noise Immunity: EN 61000-4-4 Conducted Disturbance Immunity: EN 61000-4-6 Surge Immunity: EN 61000-4-5 Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity: EN 61000-4-8 Voltage Dip/Interrupting Immunity: EN 61000-4-11 10 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U USB-Serial Conversion Cable Note: A driver must be installed in the personal computer. Refer to installation information in the operation manual for the Conversion Cable. Communications Specifications ✽ The baud rate, data bit length, stop bit length, and vertical parity can be individually set using the Communications Setting Level. Current Transformer (Order Separately) Ratings Heater Burnout Alarms, SSR Failure Alarms, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms ✽1. For heater burnout alarms, the heater current will be measured when the control output is ON, and the output assigned to the alarm 1 function will turn ON if the heater current is lower than the set value (i.e., heater burnout detection current value). ✽2. For SSR failure alarms, the heater current will be measured when the control output is OFF, and the output assigned to the alarm 1 function will turn ON if the heater current is higher than the set value (i.e., SSR failure detection current value). ✽3. For heater overcurrent alarms, the heater current will be measured when the control output is ON, and the output assigned to the alarm 1 function will turn ON if the heater current is higher than the set value (i.e., heater overcurrent detection current value). Electrical Life Expectancy Curve for Relays (Reference Values) Note: Do not connect a DC load to a Controller with a Long-life Relay Output. Applicable OS Windows 2000, XP, or Vista Applicable software Thermo Mini, CX-Thermo version 4.0 or higher Applicable models E5AN/E5EN/E5CN/E5CN-U/E5AN-H/ E5EN-H/E5CN-H USB interface standard Conforms to USB Specification 1.1. DTE speed 38400 bps Connector specifications Computer: USB (type A plug) Temperature Controller: Setup Tool port (on bottom of Controller) Power supply Bus power (Supplied from USB host controller.) Power supply voltage 5 VDC Current consumption 70 mA Ambient operating temperature 0 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing) Ambient operating humidity 10% to 80% Storage temperature −20 to 60°C (with no condensation or icing) Storage humidity 10% to 80% Altitude 2,000 m max. Weight Approx. 100 g Transmission line connection method RS-485: Multipoint Communications RS-485 (two-wire, half duplex) Synchronization method Start-stop synchronization Protocol CompoWay/F, SYSWAY, or Modbus Baud rate 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600 bps Transmission code ASCII Data bit length ✽ 7 or 8 bits Stop bit length ✽ 1 or 2 bits Error detection Vertical parity (none, even, odd) Frame check sequence (FCS) with SYSWAY Block check character (BCC) with CompoWay/F or CRC-16 Modbus Flow control None Interface RS-485 Retry function None Communications buffer 217 bytes Communications response wait time 0 to 99 ms Default: 20 ms Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC for 1 min Vibration resistance 50 Hz, 98 m/s2 Weight E54-CT1: Approx. 11.5 g, E54-CT3: Approx. 50 g Accessories (E54-CT3 only) Armatures (2) Plugs (2) CT input (for heater current detection) Models with detection for single-phase heaters: One input Models with detection for single-phase or three-phase heaters: Two inputs Maximum heater current 50 A AC Input current indication accuracy ±5% FS ±1 digit max. Heater burnout alarm setting range ✽1 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A) Minimum detection ON time: 100 ms SSR failure alarm setting range ✽2 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A) Minimum detection OFF time: 100 ms Heater overcurrent alarm setting range ✽3 0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A) Minimum detection ON time: 100 ms 500 300 100 50 30 10 5 3 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 E5CN 250 VAC, 30 VDC (resistive load) cosφ = 1 Switching current (A) Life (× 104 operations) Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U 11 External Connections • A voltage output (control output, for driving SSR) is not electrically insulated from the internal circuits. When using a grounding thermocouple, do not connect any of the control output terminals to ground. (If the control output terminals are connected to ground, errors will occur in the measured temperature values as a result of leakage current.) • Consult with your OMRON representative before using the external power supply for the ES1B for any other purpose. E5CN Controllers Option Units E5CN-U Note: For the Wiring Socket, purchase the P2CF-11 or PG3A-11 separately. Relay output 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load) Voltage output (for driving SSR) 12 VDC, 21 mA Current output 0 to 20 mA DC Load: 600 Ω max. 4 to 20 mA DC Long-life relay output 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load) Control output 1 + − A B B + − Input power supply Control output 1 Auxiliary outputs (relay outputs) 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load) • 100 to 240 VAC • 24 VAC/VDC (no polarity) + − + V − Auxiliary output 2 mA Auxiliary output 1 A heater burnout alarm, heater short alarm, heater overcurrent alarm, or input alarm is sent to the output to which the alarm 1 function is assigned. DO NOT USE DO NOT USE DO NOT USE mA Volt T/c Pt Analog input Temperature input 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 E V 1 E V 2 E53-CNHBN2 Event inputs and CT 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 E53-CNPBN2 Event Inputs and External Power Supply E V 1 E V 2 + − External power supply 12 VDC, 20 mA 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 E53-CNPHN2 External Power Supply and CT + − External power supply 12 VDC, 20 mA 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 B(+) A(−) RS-485 E53-CNP03N2 Communications (RS-485) and External Power Supply + − External power supply 12 VDC, 20 mA 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 E53-CNQHN2 Control Output 2 and CT + − Control output 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 E V 1 E V 2 E53-CNQBN2 Event Inputs and Control Output 2 + − Control output 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 B(+) A(−) RS-485 E53-CNHH03N2 Communications (RS-485) and CT2 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 B(+) A(−) RS-485 E53-CNQ03N2 Communications (RS-485) and Control Output 2 + − Control output 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 B(+) A(−) RS-485 E53-CN03N2 Communications (RS-485) 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 E V 1 E V 2 E53-CNBN2 Event inputs 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 E53-CNQHHN2 Control Output 2 and CT2 + − Control output 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 B(+) A(−) RS-485 E53-CNH03N2 Communications (RS-485) and CT DO NOT USE DO NOT USE DO NOT USE DO NOT USE DO NOT USE DO NOT USE DO NOT USE DO NOT USE DO NOT USE DO NOT USE CT1 CT1 CT1 CT1 CT1 CT1 CT2 CT2 Voltage output (for driving SSR) 12 VDC, 21 mA Control output 2 A B B Auxiliary output 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load) Control output 1 Input power supply • 100 to 240 VAC • 24 VAC/VDC (no polarity) Auxiliary output 1 (Relay outputs) V m A An input error is sent to the output to which the alarm 1 function is assigned. Current output 0 to 20 mA DC Relay output (three terminals used) SPDT, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load) Voltage output (for driving SSR) 12 VDC, 21 mA Load: 600 W max. 4 to 20 mA DC Control output 1 Auxiliary output 2 (Control output (cooling side)) DO NOT USE DO NOT USE DO NOT USE mA Volt T/c Pt Analog input Temperature input 12 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U Nomenclature Dimensions (Unit: mm) Accessories (Order Separately) USB-Serial Conversion Cable Operation indicators Level Key Temperature unit No.1 display No. 2 display Up Key Mode Key Down Key E5CN E5CN-U The front panel is the same for the E5CN and E5CN-U. 45+0.6 0 45+0.6 0 45+0.6 0 60 min. (48 × number of units − 2.5)+1.0 0 Group mounting does not allow waterproofing. Panel Cutout Mounted Separately Group Mounted 48 × 48 Terminal Cover (E53-COV17) (Accessory) 44.8 × 44.8 48.8 6 1.5 91 78 Mounting Adapter (Accessory) 58 Waterproof Packing (Accessory) E5CN Terminal Models Note: The terminal block cannot be removed. • Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 5 mm. • Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain the specified mounting space between Controllers.) • To mount the Controller so that it is waterproof, insert the waterproof packing onto the Controller. • When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating temperature specified in the specifications. 48 × 48 6 14.2 58 44.8 × 44.8 70.5 (84.7) Mounting Adapter (Accessory) 45+0.6 0 45+0.6 0 45+0.6 0 60 min. (48 × number of units − 2.5)+1.0 0 Panel Cutout Mounted Separately Group Mounted E5CN-U Plug-in Models • Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 5 mm. • Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain the specified mounting space between Controllers.) • When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating temperature specified in the specifications. (2,100) 250 1,765 USB connector (type A plug) Serial connector LED indicator (RD) LED indicator (SD) E58-CIFQ1 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U 13 Current Transformers 48 48.8 22 9.1 Order the Waterproof Packing separately if it becomes lost or damaged. The Waterproof Packing can be used to achieve an IP66 degree of protection. (Deterioration, shrinking, or hardening of the waterproof packing may occur depending on the operating environment. Therefore, periodic replacement is recommended to ensure the level of waterproofing specified in IP66. The time for periodic replacement depends on the operating environment. Be sure to confirm this point at your site. Consider one year a rough standard. OMRON shall not be liable for the level of water resistance if the customer does not perform periodic replacement.) The Waterproof Packing does not need to be attached if a waterproof structure is not required. Terminal Cover E53-COV17 Waterproof Packing Y92S-29 (for DIN 48 × 48) Note: The E53-COV10 cannot be used. E54-CT3 Accessory • Armature 30 21 15 5.8 dia. 25 3 40 10.5 2.8 7.5 10 Two, 3.5 dia. 40 × 40 30 12 dia. 9 2.36 dia. 15 30 Two, M3 (depth: 4) Approx. 3 dia. 18 (22) Approx. 6 dia. Plug Armature Lead E54-CT1 E54-CT3 Connection Example • Plug E54-CT1 Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo) (Reference Values) Maximum continuous heater current: 50 A (50/60 Hz) Number of windings: 400±2 Winding resistance: 18±2 Ω Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.) 1 10 100 mA 1 10 100 1,000 A Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.) 100 V 50 Hz Distortion factor 10% 3% 1% 100 Ω RL = 10 Ω 10 ∞ 1 100 mV 10 1 100 μV 10 1 kΩ E54-CT3 Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo) (Reference Values) Maximum continuous heater current: 120 A (50/60 Hz) (Maximum continuous heater current for the Temperature Controller is 50 A.) Number of windings: 400±2 Winding resistance: 8±0.8 Ω 3% 1% 1 kΩ 100 Ω 50 Ω RL = 10 Ω 500 Ω ∞ Distortion factor 10% Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.) 1 10 100 mA 1 10 100 1,000 A Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.) 100 V 50 Hz 10 1 100 mV 10 1 100 μV 10 14 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U Adapter E5CN-U Wiring Socket Note: A model with finger protection (P2CF-11-E) is also available. Note: 1. Using any other sockets will adversely affect accuracy. Use only the specified sockets. 2. A Protective Cover for finger protection (Y92A-48G) is also available. Fixture (Accessory) 69.6 to 77.6 67 × 67 87 72 × 72 4.7 76 72 × 72 48 × 48 Panel (1 to 8 mm) 77.3 (to back of E5CN) 2.2 4.7 Y92F-45 Note: Use this Adapter when the panel has already been prepared for the E5B@. Mounted to E5CN 40±0.2 4.5 8 7 6 5 4 3 1 2 9 10 11 70 max. 4 Eleven, M3.5 × 7.5 sems screws 7.8 Two, 4.5-dia. holes 50 max. 3 31.2 max. 35.4 Note: Can also be mounted to a DIN track. Mounting Holes Terminal Layout/Internal Connections (Top View) Two, 4.5 dia. mounting holes Front-connecting Socket P2CF-11 5 6 7 8 4 3 2 9 1 11 10 25.6 27 dia. 45 45 4.5 16.3 6.2 4 7 3 8.7 6 Terminal Layout/Internal Connections (Bottom View) Back-connecting Socket P3GA-11 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U 15 Operation Setting Levels Diagram This diagram shows all of the setting levels. To move to the advanced function setting level and calibration level, you must enter passwords. Some parameters are not displayed depending on the protect level setting and the conditions of use. Control stops when you move from the operation level to the initial setting level. Basic Type ✽1. You can return to the operation level by executing a software reset. ✽2. It is not possible to move to other levels from the calibration level by operating the keys on the front panel. It can be done only by first turning OFF the power. ✽3. From the manual control level, key operations can be used to move to the operation level only. Error Displays (Troubleshooting) When an error occurs, the No.1 display shows the error code. Take necessary measure according to the error code, referring the table below. Note: If the input value exceeds the display limit (-1999 to 9999), though it is within the control range, will be displayed under -1999 and above 9999. Under these conditions, control output and alarm output will operate normally. For details on the control range, refer to the E5CN/E5AN/E5EN Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual Basic Type (Cat. No. H156). ✽These errors are displayed only when the PV/SP is displayed. Errors are not displayed for other displays. No.1 display Meaning Action Status at error Control output Alarm output s.err (S. Err) Input error ✽ Check the wiring of inputs for miswiring, disconnections, and short-circuits and check the input type. OFF Operates as above the upper limit. e333 (E333) A/D converter error Turn the power OFF then back ON again. If the display remains the same, the controller must be repaired. If the display is restored to normal, then a probable cause can be external noise affecting the control system. Check for external noise. OFF OFF e111 (E111) Memory error Turn the power OFF then back ON again. If the display remains the same, the controller must be repaired. If the display is restored to normal, then a probable cause can be external noise affecting the control system. Check for external noise. OFF OFF Start in manual mode. 25 10 0 c 25 10 0 c a- m Power ON ✽3 Manual mode Press the O Key or the PF Key for at least 1 s. ✽4 Press the O Key for at least 3 s while a-m is displayed. (a-m will flash after 1st second.) Operation Level Press the O Key for at least 1 s. Press the O Key for at least 1 s. Input password. Input password while amoV is displayed. (Set value −169) Press the O Key less than 1 s. Press the O Key for at least 3 s. (Display will flash after 1st second.) Control stops. Press the O Key for less than 1 s. Press the O+ M Keys for at least 3 s. (Display will flash after 1st second.) Protect Level Control in progress Level change Not displayed for some models Control stopped Start in automatic mode. Adjustment Level Initial Setting Level Manual Control Level Advanced Function Setting Level Calibration Level Communications Setting Level Press the O+ M Keys for at least 1 s. *1 Note: The time taken to move to the protect level can be adjusted by changing the “Move to protect level time” setting. ✽2 16 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U M M M M M M M psel cwf u-no 1 bps 9.6 len 7 sbit 2 prty even sdwt 20 Starting in manual mode. M M M M M M pmov 0 oapt 0 pmsk on prlp 0 icpt 1 wtpt off 25 M M M M M M M M M M ST (Self-tuning) M M M M in-t 5 in-h 100 in-l dp d-u sl-h 1300 sl-l -200 cntl onof s-hc stnd st on ptrn off cp 20 c-cp 20 orev or-r 0 0 c M M M l.adj cmwt off at off M M M M M M ct1 0.0 0.0 0.0 hb1 0.0 hb2 0. 0 M M 50.0 50.0 M M oc1 50.0 oc2 50.0 M M M sp-0 0 sp-1 0 sp-2 0 sp-3 0 M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M of-r 50.0 soak 1 c-sc 1.00 d 40 p 8.0 i 233 c-db 0.0 hys 1.0 chys 1.0 ol-l -5.0 wt-b off mv-s 0.0 mv-e 0.0 ol-h 105.0 M M M ins 0.0 insh 0.0 insl 0. 0 sprt off sqrp 0.0 M M M a-m 25 25 0 M M M M M M M sp-m 0 ct1 0.0 ct2 0.0 lcr1 0.0 lcr2 0.0 prst rset sktr 0 M m-sp 0 r-s run M M M M M M M M M M M M c-o 0.0 al-1 0 al1h 0 al1l 0 al- 2 0 al2h 0 al2l 0 al-3 0 al3l 0 al3h 0 o 0.0 M orl 0.0 M ct2 lcr1 hs1 lcr2 hs2 0.0 0.0 alh1 0.2 M alt1 2 M Power ON Starting in automatic mode. Manual Control Level PID Control only PV/MV Press the O Key less than 1 s. Press the O Key less than 1 s. Operation Level Adjustment Level Adjustment Level Display Displayed only once when entering adjustment level. AT Execute/Cancel Communications Writing Heater Current 1 Value Monitor Heater Burnout Detection 1 Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 Heater Current 2 Value Monitor Heater Burnout Detection 2 Heater Overcurrent Detection 2 Leakage Current 1 Monitor Leakage Current 2 Monitor HS Alarm 1 HS Alarm 2 C SP 0 C SP 1 C SP 2 SP used by multi-SP C SP 3 C C C C C C C Temperature Input Shift 1-point shift 2-point shift Set either of these parameters. Upper Limit Temperature Input Shift Value Lower Limit Temperature Input Shift Value Proportional Band Integral Time PID settings Derivative Time Cooling Coefficient Heating/cooling Dead Band Manual Reset Value Clear the offset during stabilization of P or PD control. Hysteresis (Heating) Hysteresis (Cooling) Hysteresis settings C Soak Time Wait Band MV at Stop MV at PV Error C SP Ramp Set Value MV Upper Limit MV Lower Limit MV Change Rate Limit Extraction of Square Root Low-cut Point C Process Value Added when Additional PV display is ON. C Process Value/ Set Point C C C Auto/Manual Switch PID control only. Added when auto/manual select addition is ON. Multi-SP Set Point Setting Set Point During SP Ramp Heater Current 1 Value Monitor Heater Current 2 Value Monitor Leakage Current 1 Monitor Leakage Current 2 Monitor Program Start Soak Time Remain Press the O and M Keys for at least 3 s. Protect Level Press the O and M Keys for at least 1 s. Press the O Key less than 1 s. Communications Setting Level Note: The time taken to move to the protect level can be adjusted by changing the "Move to protect level time" setting. Note: Displayed only for models with communications. Changes are effective after cycling power or after a software reset. Move to Protect Level: Displayed only when a password is set. Restricts moving to protect level. Operation/Adjustment Protect: Restricts displaying and modifying menus in operation, adjustment, and manual control levels. Initial Setting/ Communications Protect: This protect level restricts movement to the initial setting, communications setting, and advanced function setting levels. Setting Change Protect: Protects changes to setups by operating the front panel keys. Password to Move to Protect Level: Password setting Parameter Mask Enable: Displayed only when a parameter mask is set. Protocol Setting: Switches between CompoWay/F (SYSWAY) and Modbus. Communications Unit No. Communications Baud Rate CompoWay/F (SYSWAY) only Communications Data Length Communications Stop Bits Communications Parity Send Data Wait Time C RUN/STOP Alarm Value 1 Set either of these parameters. Alarm Value Upper Limit 1 Alarm Value Lower Limit 1 C C C C Alarm Value 2 Set either of these parameters. Alarm Value Upper Limit 2 Alarm Value Lower Limit 2 C Alarm Value 3 C C Alarm Value Upper Limit 3 Alarm Value Lower Limit 3 Set either of these parameters. MV Monitor (Heating) MV Monitor (Cooling) Press the O Key for at least 1 s. Press the O Key less than 1 s. Initial Setting Level Input Type Scaling Upper Limit Scaling Lower Limit Decimal Point For input type of analog C C Temperature Unit °C, °F For input type of temperature SP Upper Limit SP Lower Limit Limit the set point PID ON/OFF Standard or Heating/Cooling For input type of temperature, standard control, or PID Program Pattern When assigning PID or control output to ON/OFF output Control Period (Heating) Control Period (Cooling) Set the ON/OFF output cycle. Direct/Reverse Operation C Alarm 1 Type Alarm 1 Hysteresis Press the O Key for at least 3 s. Other than the Auto/Manual Switch display Press the O Key for at least 1 s. Press the O Key for at least 3 s. Parameters Basic Type Some parameters are not displayed depending on the model of the Controller and parameter settings. For details, refer to the E5CN/E5AN/E5EN Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual Basic Type (Cat. No. H156). Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U 17 M M M M M M a1lt off a2lt off a3lt off prlt 3 sero off cjc on rlrv M M off colr red pv-b 5.0 M M M M M M M M M hsu on hsl off hsh 0.1 lba 0 lbal 8.0 lbab 3.0 out1 o out2 none M init off M M M M M M M M mspu off spru m rest a sb1n n-o sb2n n-o sb3n n-o hbu on hbl off hbh 0.1 M M M M ra1m 0 ra2m 0 ra2 0 ra1 0 rac 0 M M M M M spdp 4 odsl o pvdp on pvst off svst off M M cmov 0 inf 0.0 M M alfa 0.65 st-b 15.0 M M at-h 0.8 at-g 0.8 M lcma 20.0 M M M M M M a1on 0 a2on 0 a3 on 0 a1of 0 a2of 0 a3of 0 M M M M M ocu on ocl off och 0.1 M M M M M sub1 alm1 sub2 alm2 csel on t-u m alsp sp-m M pvrp 4 csca off M manl off M M M pvad off o-dp off ret off M istp ins1 M M mvse off amad off rt off M RT M M M M M M alt2 2 a lt3 2 tr-t off tr-h 100.0 tr-l 0.0 M o1-t 4-20 M M ev-m 1 ev-1 none ev-2 stop alh3 0.2 M alh2 0.2 M d. ref 0.2 5 Press the O Key for at least 1 s. Advanced Function Setting Level C Alarm 2 Type Alarm 3 Type Alarm 2 Hysteresis Alarm 3 Hysteresis C Transfer Output Type Linear output Transfer Output Upper Limit Transfer Output Lower Limit Linear Current Output Linear output Number of Multi-SP Uses Two SPs: 1 Four SPs: 2 Event Input Assignment 1 Event Input Assignment 2 M amov 0 M sqr off M Extraction of Square Root Enable Move to Advanced Function Setting Level: Displayed when initial setting/communications protect is set to 0. Move by setting password (−169). Parameter Initialization Multi-SP Uses SP Ramp Time Unit Standby Sequence Reset Auxiliary Output 1 Open in Alarm Auxiliary Output 2 Open in Alarm Auxiliary Output 3 Open in Alarm HB ON/OFF Heater Burnout Latch C C Heater Burnout Hysteresis ST Stable Range AT Calculated Gain α C AT Hysteresis Limit Cycle MV Amplitude Input Digital Filter Additional PV Display MV Display Automatic Display Return Time Alarm 1 Latch Alarm 2 Latch Alarm 3 Latch Move to Protect Level Time Input Error Output Cold Junction Compensation Method MB Command Logic Switching PV Change Color PV Stable Band Alarm 1 ON Delay Alarm 2 ON Delay Alarm 3 ON Delay Alarm 1 OFF Delay Alarm 2 OFF Delay Alarm 3 OFF Delay Input Shift Type MV at Stop and Error Addition Auto/Manual Select Addition HS Alarm Use HS Alarm Latch HS Alarm Hysteresis LBA Detection Time C C LBA Level LBA Band Control Output 1 Assignment Control Output 2 Assignment Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment Character Select Soak Time Unit Alarm SP Selection Manual MV Limit Enable PV Rate of Change Calculation Period Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjustment Heater Overcurrent Use Heater Overcurrent Latch Heater Overcurrent Hysteresis Move to Calibration Level "PV/SP" Display Screen Selection MV Display Selection PV Decimal Point Display PV Status Display Function SV Status Display Function Display Refresh Period Control Output 1 ON/OFF Count Monitor Control Output 2 ON/OFF Count Monitor Control Output 1 ON/OFF Count Alarm Set Value Control Output 2 ON/OFF Count Alarm Set Value ON/OFF Counter Reset 18 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U Safety Precautions !CAUTION ✽1. An SELV circuit is one separated from the power supply with double insulation or reinforced insulation, that does not exceed 30 V r.m.s. and 42.4 V peak or 60 VDC. ✽2. A class 2 power supply is one tested and certified by UL as having the current and voltage of the secondary output restricted to specific levels. ✽3. The tightening torque for E5CN-U is 0.5 N·m. Precautions for Safe Use Be sure to observe the following precautions to prevent malfunction or adverse affects on the performance or functionality of the product. Not doing so may occasionally result in faulty operation. 1. This product is specifically designed for indoor use only. Do not use this product in the following places: • Places directly subject to heat radiated from heating equipment. • Places subject to splashing liquid or oil atmosphere. • Places subject to direct sunlight. • Places subject to dust or corrosive gas (in particular, sulfide gas and ammonia gas). • Places subject to intense temperature change. • Places subject to icing and condensation. • Places subject to vibration and large shocks. 2. Use and store the product within the rated ambient temperature and humidity. Gang-mounting two or more Temperature Controllers, or mounting Temperature Controllers above each other may cause heat to build up inside the Temperature Controllers, which will shorten their service life. In such a case, use forced cooling by fans or other means of air ventilation to cool down the Temperature Controllers. 3. To allow heat to escape, do not block the area around the product. Do not block the ventilation holes on the product. 4. Be sure to wire properly with correct polarity of terminals. 5. Use the specified size (M3.5, width 7.2 mm or less) crimped terminals for wiring. To connect bare wires to the terminal block, use stranded or solid copper wires with a gage of AWG24 to AWG14 (equal to a cross-sectional area of 0.205 to 2.081 mm2). (The stripping length is 5 to 6 mm.) Up to two wires of the same size and type or two crimp terminals can be inserted into a single terminal. 6. Do not wire the terminals that are not used. 7. To avoid inductive noise, keep the wiring for the product’s terminal block away from power cables carry high voltages or large currents. Also, do not wire power lines together with or parallel to product wiring. Using shielded cables and using separate conduits or ducts is recommended. Attach a surge suppressor or noise filter to peripheral devices that generate noise (in particular, motors, transformers, solenoids, magnetic coils, or other equipment that have an inductance component). When a noise filter is used at the power supply, first check the voltage or current, and attach the noise filter as close as possible to the product. Allow as much space as possible between the product and devices that generate powerful high frequencies (high-frequency welders, high-frequency sewing machines, etc.) or surge. 8. Use this product within the rated load and power supply. 9. Make sure that the rated voltage is attained within two seconds of turning ON the power using a switch or relay contact. If the voltage is applied gradually, the power may not be reset or output malfunctions may occur. 10.Make sure that the Temperature Controller has 30 minutes or more to warm up after turning ON the power before starting actual control operations to ensure the correct temperature display. Do not touch the terminals while power is being supplied. Doing so may occasionally result in minor injury due to electric shock. Do not allow pieces of metal, wire clippings, or fine metallic shavings or filings from installation to enter the product. Doing so may occasionally result in electric shock, fire, or malfunction. Do not use the product where subject to flammable or explosive gas. Otherwise, minor injury from explosion may occasionally occur. Do not leave the cable for the Support Software connected to the product. Malfunction may occur due to noise in the cable. Do not use the Temperature Controller or Conversion Cable if it is damaged. Doing so may occasionally result in minor electric shock or fire. Never disassemble, modify, or repair the product or touch any of the internal parts. Minor electric shock, fire, or malfunction may occasionally occur. CAUTION - Risk of Fire and Electric Shock a) This product is UL listed as Open Type Process Control Equipment. It must be mounted in an enclosure that does not allow fire to escape externally. b) More than one disconnect switch may be required to de-energize the equipment before servicing the product. c) Signal inputs are SELV, limited energy. ✽1 d) Caution: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not interconnect the outputs of different Class 2 circuits. ✽2 If the output relays are used past their life expectancy, contact fusing or burning may occasionally occur. Always consider the application conditions and use the output relays within their rated load and electrical life expectancy. The life expectancy of output relays varies considerably with the output load and switching conditions. Tighten the terminal screws to between 0.74 and 0.90 N·m. ✽3 Loose screws may occasionally result in fire. Set the parameters of the product so that they are suitable for the system being controlled. If they are not suitable, unexpected operation may occasionally result in property damage or accidents. A malfunction in the product may occasionally make control operations impossible or prevent alarm outputs, resulting in property damage. To maintain safety in the event of malfunction of the product, take appropriate safety measures, such as installing a monitoring device on a separate line. A semiconductor is used in the output section of long-life relays. If excessive noise or surge is impressed on the output terminals, a short-circuit failure is likely to occur. If the output remains shorted, fire will occur due to overheating of the heater or other cause. Take measures in the overall system to prevent excessive temperature increase and to prevent fire from spreading. Do not allow pieces of metal or wire cuttings to get inside the cable connector for the Support Software. Failure to do so may occasionally result in minor electric shock, fire, or damage to equipment. Do not allow dust and dirt to collect between the pins in the connector on the Conversion Cable. Failure to do so may occasionally result in fire. When inserting the body of the Temperature Controller into the case, confirm that the hooks on the top and bottom are securely engaged with the case. If the body of the Temperature Controller is not inserted properly, faulty contact in the terminal section or reduced water resistance may occasionally result in fire or malfunction. When connecting the Control Output Unit to the socket, press it in until there is no gap between the Control Output Unit and the socket. Otherwise contact faults in the connector pins may occasionally result in fire or malfunction. Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U 19 11.When executing self-tuning, turn ON power to the load (e.g., heater) at the same time as or before supplying power to the product. If power is turned ON to the product before turning ON power to the load, self-tuning will not be performed properly and optimum control will not be achieved. 12.A switch or circuit breaker must be provided close to the product. The switch or circuit breaker must be within easy reach of the operator, and must be marked as a disconnecting means for this unit. 13.Always turn OFF the power supply before pulling out the interior of the product, and never touch nor apply shock to the terminals or electronic components. When inserting the interior of the product, do not allow the electronic components to touch the case. 14.Do not use paint thinner or similar chemical to clean with. Use standard grade alcohol. 15.Design the system (e.g., control panel) considering the 2 seconds of delay that the product's output to be set after power ON. 16.The output may turn OFF when shifting to certain levels. Take this into consideration when performing control. 17.The number of EEPROM write operations is limited. Therefore, use RAM write mode when frequently overwriting data during communications or other operations. 18.Always touch a grounded piece of metal before touching the Temperature Controller to discharge static electricity from your body. 19.Do not remove the terminal block. Doing so may result in failure or malfunction. 20.Control outputs (for driving SSR) that are voltage outputs are not isolated from the internal circuits. When using a grounded thermocouple, do not connect any of the control output terminals to ground. (Doing so may result in an unwanted circuit path, causing error in the measured temperature.) 21.When replacing the body of the Temperature Controller, check the condition of the terminals. If corroded terminals are used, contact failure in the terminals may cause the temperature inside the Temperature Controller to increase, possibly resulting in fire. If the terminals are corroded, replace the case as well. 22.Use suitable tools when taking the Temperature Controller apart for disposal. Sharp parts inside the Temperature Controller may cause injury. 23.Before connecting an Output Unit, confirm the specifications and thoroughly read relevant information in the datasheet and manual for the Temperature Controller. 24.Check the orientation of the connectors on the Conversion Cable before connecting the Conversion Cable. Do not force a connector if it does not connect smoothly. Using excessive force may damage the connector. 25.Do not place heavy object on the Conversion Cable, bend the cable past its natural bending radius, or pull on the cable with undue force. 26.Do not connect or disconnect the Conversion Cable while communications are in progress. Product faults or malfunction may occur. 27.Make sure that the Conversion Cable's metal components are not touching the external power terminals. 28.Do not touch the connectors on the Conversion Cable with wet hands. Electrical shock may result. 29.Before using infrared communications, correctly attach the enclosed Mounting Adapter to the cable for the Support Software. When connecting the infrared port on the cable to the Support Software into the Adapter, insert the connector to the specified line. Communications may not be possible if the connector is not connected properly. Precautions for Correct Use Service Life 1. Use the product within the following temperature and humidity ranges: Temperature: −10 to 55° C (with no icing or condensation) Humidity: 25% to 85% If the product is installed inside a control board, the ambient temperature must be kept to under 55°C, including the temperature around the product. 2. The service life of electronic devices like Temperature Controllers is determined not only by the number of times the relay is switched but also by the service life of internal electronic components. Component service life is affected by the ambient temperature: the higher the temperature, the shorter the service life and, the lower the temperature, the longer the service life. Therefore, the service life can be extended by lowering the temperature of the Temperature Controller. 3. When two or more Temperature Controllers are mounted horizontally close to each other or vertically next to one another, the internal temperature will increase due to heat radiated by the Temperature Controllers and the service life will decrease. In such a case, use forced cooling by fans or other means of air ventilation to cool down the Temperature Controllers. When providing forced cooling, however, be careful not to cool down the terminals sections alone to avoid measurement errors. Measurement Accuracy 1. When extending or connecting the thermocouple lead wire, be sure to use compensating wires that match the thermocouple types. 2. When extending or connecting the lead wire of the platinum resistance thermometer, be sure to use wires that have low resistance and keep the resistance of the three lead wires the same. 3. Mount the product so that it is horizontally level. 4. If the measurement accuracy is low, check to see if input shift has been set correctly. Waterproofing The degree of protection is as shown below. Sections without any specification on their degree of protection or those with IP@0 are not waterproof. Front panel: IP66 Rear case: IP20, Terminal section: IP00 (E5CN-U: Front panel: IP50, rear case: IP20, terminals: IP00) Operating Precautions 1. It takes approximately two seconds for the outputs to turn ON from after the power supply is turned ON. Due consideration must be given to this time when incorporating Temperature Controllers in a sequence circuit. 2. When using self-tuning, turn ON power for the load (e.g., heater) at the same time as or before supplying power to the Temperature Controller. If power is turned ON for the Temperature Controller before turning ON power for the load, self-tuning will not be performed properly and optimum control will not be achieved. 3. When starting operation after the Temperature Controller has warmed up, turn OFF the power and then turn it ON again at the same time as turning ON power for the load. (Instead of turning the Temperature Controller OFF and ON again, switching from STOP mode to RUN mode can also be used.) 4. Avoid using the Controller in places near a radio, television set, or wireless installing. These devices can cause radio disturbances which adversely affect the performance of the Controller. Others 1. The disk that is included with the Conversion Cable is designed for a computer CD-ROM driver. Never attempt to play the disk in a general-purpose audio player. 2. Do not connect or disconnect the Conversion Cable connector repeatedly over a short period of time. The computer may malfunction. 3. After connecting the Conversion Cable to the computer, check the COM port number before starting communications. The computer requires time to recognize the cable connection. This delay does not indicate failure. 4. Do not connect the Conversion Cable through a USB hub. Doing so may damage the Conversion Cable. 5. Do not use an extension cable to extend the Conversion Cable length when connecting to the computer. Doing so may damage the Conversion Cable. 20 Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U Mounting Mounting to a Panel For waterproof mounting, waterproof packing must be installed on the Controller. Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Controllers. Waterproof packing is not necessary when there is no need for the waterproofing function. 1. The Panel Mounting Adapter is also included with the E5CN-U. There is no waterproof packing included with the E5CN-U. 2. Insert the E5CN/E5CN-U into the mounting hole in the panel. 3. Push the adapter from the terminals up to the panel, and temporarily fasten the E5CN/E5CN-U. 4. Tighten the two fastening screws on the adapter. Alternately tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a balance. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.29 to 0.39 N·m. Mounting the Terminal Cover Make sure that the “UP” mark is facing up, and then attach the E53- COV17 Terminal Cover to the holes on the top and bottom of the Temperature Controller. Removing the Temperature Controller from the Case The Temperature Controller can be removed from the case to perform maintenance without removing the terminal leads. This is possible for only the E5CN, E5AN, and E5EN, and not for the E5CN-U. Check the specifications of the case and Temperature Controller before removing the Temperature Controller from the case. 1. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the two tool insertion holes (one on the top and one on the bottom) to release the hooks. 2. Insert the flat-blade screwdriver in the gap between the front panel and rear case, and pull out the front panel slightly. Hold the top and bottom of the front panel and carefully pull it out toward you, without applying unnecessary force. 3. When inserting the body of the Temperature Controller into the case, make sure the PCBs are parallel to each other, make sure that the sealing rubber is in place, and press the E5CN toward the rear case into position. While pushing the E5CN into place, push down on the hooks on the top and bottom surfaces of the rear case so that the hooks are securely locked in place. Be sure that electronic components do not come into contact with the case. Precautions when Wiring • Separate input leads and power lines in order to prevent external noise. • Use wires with a gage of AWG24 (cross-sectional area: 0.205 mm2) to AWG14 (cross-sectional area: 2.081 mm2) twistedpair cable (stripping length: 5 to 6 mm). • Use crimp terminals when wiring the terminals. • Tighten the terminal screws to a torque of 0.74 to 0.90 N·m, however the terminal screws on the E5CN-U must be tightened to a torque of 0.5 N·m. • Use the following types of crimp terminals for M3.5 screws. • Do not remove the terminal block. Doing so will result in malfunction or failure. E53-COV17 Terminal Cover (Accessory) Adapter (Accessory) E5CN E5CN-U Waterproof packing (Accessory) Panel Order the P2CF-11 or P3GA-11 Socket separately. For Front-mounting Socket (Panel mounting is also possible. 0.4 2.0 (1) (2) (3) (1) Flat-blade screwdriver (Unit: mm) Tool insertion hole 7.2 mm max. 7.2 mm max. Basic-type Digital Temperature Controller E5CN/E5CN-U 21 Warranty and Application Considerations Read and Understand This Catalog Please read and understand this catalog before purchasing the products. Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments. Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON. OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS, OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT LIABILITY. In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted. IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR. Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products. Take all necessary steps to determine the suitability of the product for the systems, machines, and equipment with which it will be used. Know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to this product. NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM. Disclaimers PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this catalog is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability. CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. Consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased product. DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when tolerances are shown. Cat. No. H04E-EN-01 In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice. OMRON EUROPE B.V. Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD, Hoofddorp, The Netherlands Phone: +31 23 568 13 00 Fax: +31 23 568 13 88 www.industrial.omron.eu ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527. 02/2008 GO FOR EXPERIENCE The huge installed base of our easy-to-use control components, is proof of our experience. Our control products with a display provide the clearest visibility and a perfect read-out. Omron, your single source for all your control components needs. We have been supplying quality components for more than half a century 396 Control components 397 Control components Control components – Table of contents Temperature controllers 19 Product overview 398 Selection table 400 Basic temperature controllers K8AB-TH 402 E5L 403 E5C2 405 E5CSV 406 General purpose controllers E5_N 407 CelciuXº 410 Advanced and Multi-Loop controllers E5_N-H/E5_N-HT 412 E5_R/E5_R-T 414 Auxiliaries PRT1-SCU11/ES1B 416 ES1C 417 Power supplies 20 Product overview 418 Selection table 421 Single-phase S8VS 422 S8VM 423 S8JX-G 424 S8TS 425 S8T-DCBU-01/-02 426 Three-phase S8VT 427 Timers 21 Product overview 428 Selection table 430 Analogue solid state timers H3DS 432 H3DK 433 H3YN 434 H3CR 435 Digital timers H5CX 436 Motor timers H2C 437 Counters 22 Product overview 438 Selection table 440 Totalisers H7EC 442 H7ET 443 H7ER 444 Pre-set counters H8GN 445 H7CX 446 Cam positioners H8PS 447 Programmable relays 23 Product overview 448 Selection table 451 Programmable relays ZEN-10C 452 ZEN-20C 453 ZEN-8E 454 ZEN-PA 455 Digital panel indicators 24 Product overview 456 Selection table 458 1/32 DIN multi-function K3GN 460 1/8 DIN standard indicators K3MA-J, -L, -F 461 1/8 DIN advanced indicators – analogue input K3HB-X, -H, -V, -S 462 1/8 DIN advanced indicators – digital input K3HB-C, -P, -R 464 How many loops are required? K8AB-TH E5C2 E5CSV Single digital display E5_N What type of output? No display Dual digital display Voltage (pulse) Voltage (pulse)/ relay/mA linear Relay Basic General purpose What type of output? What type of control is needed? Single loop E5L CELCIUXº – CONTROL AND CONNECTIVITY The CelciuX° is designed to handle complex temperature profiles thanks to Omron’s unique Gradient Temperature Control (GTC) algorithm and to offer easy program-less communication with Omron and third-party PLCs and HMI. Above all, the CelciuX° incorporates all “simple to use” clever temperature control technology, like 2-PID, disturbance control and various ways of tuning. • Interfaces to a wide range of industrial networks • Reduced engineering due to program-less communications, Smart Active Parts and Function Block Libraries • One unit handling various types of input, such as Pt, Thermocouple, mA, and V input Always the latest news on: www.omron-industrial.com/celciux CelciuXº – Multi Loop Temperature Controller 398 Temperature controllers Page 402 Page 405 Page 403 Page 406 Page 407 E5_N-HT SV programmer Triple digital display Advanced On-panel In-panel CelciuXº What type of mounting is required? Multi-loop E5_R Standard E5_R-T SV programmer E5_N-H Standard Triple digital display Process 399 19 Temperature controllers Page 412 Page 412 Page 414 Page 414 Page 410 400 Selection table Category Alarm controller Analogue/digital temperature controller Analogue temperature controller Compact digital temperature controller Digital temperature controller Selection criteria Model K8AB-TH E5L E5C2 E5CSV E5AN E5EN E5CN Type Basic General purpose Panel In-panel type In- & on-panel type On-panel type Loops – Single loop Size 22.5 mm wide 45x35 mm 1/16 DIN 1/16 DIN 1/4 DIN 1/8 DIN 1/16 DIN Control mode ON/OFF PID – – *1 *1 P only – – – – 2-PID *2 *2 2-PID is Omron´s easy to use high performance PID algorithm – – – Operation *3 *3 H = heat, H/C = heat or cool, H & C = heat and/or cool – H/C H H/C H & C H & C H & C Valve Control *4 *4 Valve control = relay up and down – – – – – – – Features Accuracy ±2% ±1ºC – ±0.5% ±0.3% ±0.3% ±0.3% Auto-tuning – – – Self-tuning – – – Transfer output – – – – Remote input – – – – – – – Number of alarms 1 – – 1 3 3 3 Heater alarm – – – – *5 *5 *5 IP rating front panel IP20 IP40 IP40 IP65 IP66 IP66 IP66 Display Rotary switch SV dial 3 digit LCD SV dial Single 3.5 digit Dual 4 digit (colour change) Dual 4 digit (colour change) Dual 4 digit (colour change) Supply voltage 110/240 VAC 24 VAC/VDC – – Comms *6 RS-232 – – – – – RS-485 – – – – Event IP – – – QLP port *7 – – – – DeviceNet – – – – – – – Modbus – – – – Control output Relay SSR – – – – – – – Voltage (pulse) – – Linear voltage – – – – – – – Linear current – – – – Input type – linear mA – – – – mV – – – – V – – – – Input type – thermocouple K – J – – T – – E – – – L – – U – – – N – – – R – – S – – – B – – – W – – – – PLII – – – Input type – RTD Pt100 – JPt100 – – – THE – sensor provided – – – Page 402 403 405 406 407 407 407 Temperature controllers 401 19 Temperature controllers *5. Heater alarm = heater burnout & SSR failure detection *6. PROFIBUS-DP communication option via PRT1-SCU11 for E5_N(-H), E5_R, CelciuX°. More information on Page 416 *7. QLP: Quick Link Port to connected TC to PC using the smart USB cable E58-CIFQ1 *8. 3 Alarms per loop, 2 and 4 loop models are available. Digital temperature controller Digital process controller E5GN CelciuXº E5CN-H E5EN-H/AN-H E5_N-HT E5AR E5ER E5_R-T General purpose Modular Universal SV Programmer Advanced SV Programmer On-panel type In-panel type On-panel type Same specification as corresponding E5_N-H On-panel type Same specifications as corresponding E5_R. Single loop Multi-loop Single loop Multi-loop 1/32 DIN 31×96 mm 1/16 DIN 1/4, 1/8 DIN 1/4 DIN 1/8 DIN – – – – – – H & C H & C H & C H & C H & C H & C – – – ±0.3% ±0.5% ±0.1% ±0.1% ±0.1% ±0.1% – – – – – 3 3 3 3 4 4 *5 *8 *5 *5 – – IP66 – IP66 IP66 IP66 IP66 Dual 4 digit (colour change) LED Dual 5 digit (colour change) Triple 5 digit (colour change) Triple 5 digit Triple 5 digit – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 407 410 412 375 414 402 K8AB-TH Basic temperature controllers Protect your heating application This temperature monitoring relay was designed specially for monitoring abnormal temperatures to prevent excessive temperature increase and to protect equipment. K8AB-TH provides temperature monitoring in slim design with a width of just 22.5 mm. • Simple function settings using DIP switch • Selectable alarm latch and SV setting protection • Multi-input support for thermocouple or Pt100 sensor input • Changeover relay: fail-safe selectable • Alarm status identification with LED Ordering information Specifications Input type Temperature setting range Setting unit Supply voltage Size in mm (HxWxD) Order code Thermocouple/ Pt100 0 to 399°C/F 1°C/F 100 to 240 VAC 90x22.5x100 K8AB-TH11S AC100-240 24 VAC/VDC K8AB-TH11S AC/DC24 Thermocouple 0 to 1,800°C 0 to 3,200 °F *1 *1 Setting range depending on sensor type selected 10°C/F 100 to 240 VAC K8AB-TH12S AC100-240 24 VAC/VDC K8AB-TH12S AC/DC24 Item 100 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz 24 VAC 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC Allowable voltage range 85 to 110% of power supply voltage Power consumption 5 VA max. 2 W max. (24 VDC), 4 VA max. (24 VAC) Sensor inputs K8AB-TH11S Thermocouple: K, J, T, E; platinum-resistance thermometer: Pt100 K8AB-TH12S Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, B, R, S, PLII Output relay One SPDT relay (3 A at 250 VAC, resistive load) External inputs (for latch setting) Contact input ON: 1 k2 max., OFF: 100 k2 min. Non-contact input ON residual voltage: 1.5 V max., OFF leakage current: 0.1 mA max. Leakage current: Approx. 10 mA Setting method Rotary switch setting (set of three switches) Indicators Power (PWR): Green LED, relay output (ALM): Red LED Other functions Alarm mode (upper limit/lower limit), output normally ON/OFF selection, output latch, setting protection, fail-safe operation selectable, temperature unit°C/°F Ambient operating temperature -10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing); for 3-year guarantee: -10 to 50°C Storage temperature -25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing) Setting accuracy ±2% of full scale Hysteresis width 2°C Output relay Resistive load 3 A at 250 VAC (cos= 1), 3 A at 30 VDC (L/R = 0 ms) Inductive load 1 A at 250 VAC (cos= 0.4), 1 A at 30 VDC (L/R = 7 ms) Minimum load 10 mA at 5 VDC Maximum contact voltage 250 VAC Maximum contact current 3 A AC Maximum switching capacity 1,500 VA Mechanical life 10,000,000 operations Electrical life Make: 50,000 times, break: 30,000 times Sampling cycle 500 ms Weight 130 g Degree of protection IP20 Memory protection Non-volatile memory (number or writes: 200,000) Safety standards Approved standards EN 61010-1 Application standards EN 61326 and EN 61010-1 (pollution level 2, overvoltage category II) Crimp terminals Two solid wires of 2.5 mm2 or two ferrules of 1.5 mm2 with insulation sleeves can be tightened together Case colour Munsell 5Y8/1 (ivory) Case material ABS resin (self-extinguishing resin) Mounting Mounted to DIN-rail or with M4 screws Size in mm (HxWxD) 90x22.5x100 403 19 Temperature controllers E5L Basic temperature controllers Ideal for simple built-in control This compact but powerful ON/OFF controller is provided with a sensor and is available in an analogue or digital version. Mounting is in-panel with a standard PTF14A-E socket. • Available in 4 application specific ranges. • Sensor provided to enable immediate usage. • High capacity output of 10 A at 250 VAC for direct load switching. • Simple operation and setting. Even simpler with digital model. Ordering information Options (Order separately) Model Size Type Control Method Control Output Order code E5L-A_ 45×35 mm Plug-in ON/OFF operation Relay E5L-A-30-20 E5L-A-0-50 E5L-A-0-100 E5L-A-100-200 E5L-C_ 45×35 mm Plug-in ON/OFF operation Relay E5L-C-30-20 E5L-C-0-100 E5L-C-100-200 Sockets Type Order code Front-connecting Socket PTF14A PTF14A-E E5L Basic temperature controllers 404 Specifications * The accuracy of the accessory thermistor is not included. Ratings Item Model E5L-A_ E5L-C_ Power supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Operating voltage range 85% to 110% of the rated supply voltage Power consumption Approx. 3 VA Inputs Element-interchangeable thermistor Control method ON/OFF control Control output SPDT contacts, 250 VAC, 10 A, cos = 1 (resistive load) SPST-NO contacts, 250 VAC, 10 A, cos = 1 (resistive load) Setting method Analogue setting Digital settings using keys on front panel Indication method No display LCD digital display (character height: 12 mm) Other functions Setting protection (key protection) Input shift Direct/reverse operation Indication accuracy – ±(1°C + 1 digit) max.* Setting accuracy – ±(1°C + 1 digit) max.* Hysteresis -30 to 20°C models: Approx. 0.5 to 2.5°C (variable) 0 to 50°C models: Approx. 0.5 to 4°C (variable) 0 to 100°C models: Approx. 0.5 to 4°C (variable) 100 to 200°C models: Approx. 0.7 to 4°C (variable) 1 to 9°C (in increments of 1°C) Repeat accuracy 1% FS max – Minimum scale (standard scale) -30 to 20°C models and 0 to 50°C models: 5°C 0 to 100°C models and 100 to 200°C models: 10°C – Influence of temperature – ±([1% of PV or 2°C, whichever is greater]+ 1 digit) max. Influence of voltage – Sampling period – 2 s Insulation resistance 100 MW max. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength 2,300 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min (between charged terminals and uncharged metallic parts, between power supply terminals and input terminals, between power supply terminals and output terminals, and between input terminals and output terminals) Vibration (malfunction) Frequency of 10 to 55 Hz, 0.5-mm double amplitude for 10 min each in X, Y, and Z directions Vibration (destruction) Frequency of 10 to 55 Hz, 0.75-mm double amplitude for 2 h each in X, Y, and Z directions Shock (malfunction) 147 m/s2, 3 times each in 6 directions 100 m/s2, 3 times each in 6 directions Shock (destruction) 294 m/s2, 3 times each in 6 directions Electrical life expectancy (control output relay) 100,000 operations min (at maximum applicable load) Memory protection – Non-volatile memory (100,000 write operations) Weight (Thermostat) Approx. 80 g (Thermostat only) Degree of protection Front panel: IP40, Terminals: IP00 Approved standards – Conformed standards EN 61010-1 (IEC 61010-1), Pollution Degree 2, Overvoltage Category II EMC Directives EMI: EN61326-1 Radiated EMI: EN55011 Group 1 Class A Conducted EMI: EN55011 Group 1 Class A EMS: EN61326-1 Electrostatic discharge immunity: EN61000-4-2 Electromagnetic field strength immunity: EN61000-4-3 Burst noise immunity: EN61000-4-4 Conducted disturbance immunity: EN61000-4-6 Surge immunity: EN61000-4-5 Voltage dip and power interruption immunity: EN61000-4-11 405 19 Temperature controllers E5C2 Basic temperature controllers Easy-to-use, basic temperature controller with analogue dial setting Omron's basic ON/OFF or PD controller features an analogue setting dial. This compact, low-cost controller has a setting accuracy of 2% of full scale. It incorporates a plug-in socket allowing for DIN-rail or flush mounting. • Compact, cost-effective controller • Control mode: ON/OFF or PD • Control output: relay • Power supply: 100-120 / 200-240VAC • Thermocouple K: 0 to 1200°C, L: 0 to 400°C, Pt100: -50 to 200°C Ordering information Note: Specify either 100/110/120 VAC or 200/220/240 VAC when ordering. Accessories Specifications Setting method Indication method Control mode Output Order code Thermocouple Platinum resistance thermometer Pt100 Thermistor THE K (CA) chromel vs. alumel L (IC) iron vs. constantan Analogue setting No indication ON/OFF Relay E5C2-R20K E5C2-R20L-D E5C2-R20P-D E5C2-R20G P Relay E5C2-R40K E5C2-R40L-D E5C2-R40P-D Input ranges Thermocouple *1 *1 Values in ( ) are the minimum unit. Platinum resistance thermometer Thermistor *2 *2 Values in ( ) are the thermistor resistive value. K (CA) chromel vs. alumel L (IC) iron vs. constantan Pt100 THE °C 0 to 200 (5), 0 to 300 (10), 0 to 400 (10), 0 to 600 (20), 0 to 800 (20), 0 to 1,000 (25), 0 to 1,200 (25) 0 to 200 (5), 0 to 300 (10), 0 to 400 (10) 5 to 450 (10) -50 to 50 (2), -20 to 80 (2), 0 to 50 (1), 0 to 100 (2), 0 to 200 (5), 0 to 300 (10), 0 to 400 (10) -50 to 50 (2) (6 k at 0°C), 0 to 100 (2) (6 k at 0°C), 50 to 150 (2) (30 k at 0°C) Functions Order code Front connecting socket with finger protection P2CF-08-E Back connecting socket (for flush mounting) P3G-08 Finger protection cover (for P3G-08) Y92A-48G Protective front cover (IP66) Y92A-48B Supply voltage 100/110/120 VAC or 200/220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Thermocouple input type K, L (with sensor break detection) RTD input type Pt100, THE Control mode ON/OFF or P control Setting method analogue setting Output Relay, SPDT, 3 A at 250 VAC Life expectancy Electrical: 100,000 operations min. Setting accuracy ±2% FS max. Hysteresis Approx. 0.5% FS (fixed) Proportional band 3% FS (fixed) Reset range 5 ±1% FS min. Control period 20 s IP Rating front panel IP40 (IP66 cover available) IP rating terminals IP00 Ambient temperature -10 to 55°C Size in mm (HxWxD) 48x48x96 406 E5CSV Basic temperature controllers The easy way to perfect temperature control This multi-range 1/16 DIN controller with alarm function offers field-selectable PID control or ON/OFF control. The large, single display shows process value, direction of deviation from set point, output and alarm status. • All setting field configurable with switches • Multi-input (Thermocouple/Pt100) • Clearly visible 3.5 digit display with character height of 13.5 mm • Control output: relay, voltage (for driving SSR) • ON/OFF or 2-PID control with auto-tuning and self-tuning Ordering information Note:Other models are available on request. Accessories Specifications Size in mm Supply voltage Number of alarm points Control output Order code 1/16 DIN 48Hx48Wx78D 100 to 240 VAC 1 Relay E5CSV-R1T-500 Voltage (for driving SSR) E5CSV-Q1T-500 24 VAC/VDC 1 Relay E5CSV-R1TD-500 Voltage (for driving SSR) E5CSV-Q1TD-500 Type Order code Hard protective cover Y92A-48B Supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz or 24 VAC/VDC (depending on model) Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage Power consumption 5 VA Sensor input Multi-input (thermocouple/platinum resistance thermometer): K, J, L, T, U, N, R, Pt100, JPt100 Control output Relay output SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load) Voltage output (for driving SSR) 12 VDC, 21 mA (with short-circuit protection circuit) Control method ON/OFF or 2-PID (with auto-tune and self-tune) Alarm output SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 1 A (resistive load) Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys (functionality set-up with DIP switch) Indication 7-segment digital display (character height: 13.5 mm) and deviation indicators Ambient temperature -10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing) Setting/indication accuracy ±0.5% of indication value or ±1 °C, whichever is greater ±1 digit max. Hysteresis (for ON/OFF control) 0.2% FS (0.1% FS for multi-input (thermocouple/platinum resistance thermometer) models) Proportional band (P) 1 to 999°C (automatic adjustment using AT/ST) Integral time (I) 0 to 1,999 s (automatic adjustment using AT/ST) Derivative time (D) 0 to 1,999 s (automatic adjustment using AT/ST) Control period 2/20 s Sampling period 500 ms Electrical life expectancy 100,000 operations min. (relay output models) Weight Approx. 120 g (controller only) Degree of protection Front panel: Equivalent to IP66; rear case: IP20; terminals: IP00 Memory protection EEPROM (non-volatile memory) (number of writes: 1,000,000) Size in mm (HxWxD) 48x48x78 407 19 Temperature controllers E5_N General purpose controllers Compact and intelligent general purpose controllers The E5_N general purpose line of temperature controllers is available in 4 standard DIN formats. They all feature a high intensity dual LCD display with a wide viewing angle. The whole series features 3 colour PV change for easy status recognition. • Control mode: ON/OFF or 2-PID • Control output: relay, hybrid relay, voltage (pulse) or linear current • Power supply: 100/240 VAC or 24 VDC/VAC • Easy PC connection for parameter cloning, setting and tuning • Clear and intuitive set-up and operation Ordering information Note:- Output and Alarm Relays: 3 A/250 VAC, electrical life: 100,000 operations - Output voltage (pulse): 12 V, 21 mA (ie. to drive solid state relays) - Hybrid relay (long life relay) electrical life 1,000,000 operations - Linear current: 0(4) to 20 mA - Heater alarm / HA = heater burnout + SSR short detection + SSR overcurrent - Voltage: Specify the power supply specifications (voltage) when ordering E5GN Type Input Output Fixed option Alarms Order code 48x24 mm model (includes supply voltage indication) On-panel temperature (TC/Pt/mV) relay – 1 relay E5GN-R1T-C AC100-240 E5GN-R1TD-C AC/DC24 RS-485 communication E5GN-R103T-C-FLK AC100-240 E5GN-R103TD-C-FLK AC/DC24 2 Event inputs E5GN-R1BT-C AC100-240 E5GN-R1BTD-C AC/DC24 voltage (pulse) – E5GN-Q1T-C AC100-240 E5GN-Q1TD-C AC/DC24 RS-485 communication E5GN-Q103T-C-FLK AC100-240 E5GN-Q103TD-C-FLK AC/DC24 2 Event inputs E5GN-Q1BT-C AC100-240 E5GN-Q1BTD-C AC/DC24 current (linear) – E5GN-C1T-C AC100-240 E5GN-C1TD-C AC/DC24 RS-485 communication E5GN-C103T-C-FLK AC100-240 E5GN-C103TD-C-FLK AC100-240 2 Event inputs E5GN-C1BT-C AC100-240 E5GN-C1BTD-C AC/DC24 relay – 2 relay E5GN-R2T-C AC100-240 E5GN-R2TD-C AC/DC24 RS-485 communication E5GN-R203T-C-FLK AC100-240 E5GN-R203TD-C-FLK AC100-240 2 Event inputs E5GN-R2BT-C AC100-240 E5GN-R2BTD-C AC/DC24 Heater Alarm E5GN-R2HT-C AC100-240 E5GN-R2HTD-C AC/DC24 voltage (pulse) – E5GN-Q2T-C AC100-240 E5GN-Q2TD-C AC/DC24 RS-485 communication E5GN-Q203T-C-FLK AC100-240 E5GN-Q203TD-C-FLK AC/DC24 2 Event inputs E5GN-Q2BT-C AC100-240 E5GN-Q2BTD-C AC/DC24 Heater Alarm E5GN-Q2HT-C AC100-240 E5GN-Q2HTD-C AC/DC24 analogue (mA/V) relay RS-485 communication 1 relay E5GN-R103L-FLK AC100-240 E5GN-R103LD-FLK AC/DC24 voltage (pulse) RS-485 communication E5GN-Q103L-FLK AC100-240 E5GN-Q103LD-FLK AC/DC24 current (linear) – E5GN-C1L-C AC100-240 E5GN-C1LD-C AC/DC24 Type Input Output Fixed option Alarms Order code 48x48 mm model (includes supply voltage indication) On-panel temperature (TC/Pt/mV) relay – 2 relays E5CN-R2MT-500 AC100-240 E5CN-R2MTD-500 AC/DC24 voltage (pulse) E5CN-Q2MT-500 AC100-240 E5CN-Q2MTD-500 AC/DC24 linear current E5CN-C2MT-500 AC100-240 E5CN-C2MTD-500 AC/DC24 hybrid relay E5CN-Y2MT-500 AC100-240 – analogue (mA/V) relay E5CN-R2ML-500 AC100-240 E5CN-R2MLD-500 AC/DC24 voltage (pulse) E5CN-Q2ML-500 AC100-240 E5CN-Q2MLD-500 AC/DC24 linear current E5CN-C2ML-500 AC100-240 E5CN-C2MLD-500 AC/DC24 hybrid relay E5CN-Y2ML-500 AC100-240 n/a In-panel temperature (TC/Pt/mV) relay 2 relays E5CN-R2TU AC100-240 E5CN-R2TDU AC/DC24 voltage (pulse) E5CN-Q2TU AC100-240 E5CN-Q2TDU AC/DC24 linear current E5CN-C2TU AC100-240 E5CN-C2TDU AC/DC24 analogue (mA/V) relay E5CN-R2LU AC100-240 – voltage (pulse) E5CN-Q2LU AC100-240 – linear current E5CN-C2LU AC100-240 – E5_N General purpose controllers 408 Accessories E5CN option boards (One slot available in each instrument; do no fit in E5CN-U types) Note: Options with "N2" in the code, only fit in E5CN produced after January 2008 (marked N6 on the box) E5CN series optional tools Option Order code 2 Event inputs – – E53-CNBN2 – voltage (pulse) E53-CNQBN2 heater alarm – E53-CNHBN2 – power supply (12 VDC/20 mA) E53-CNPBN2 RS-485 serial communications (CompowayF/ Modbus RTU) – – E53-CN03N2 – voltage (pulse) E53-CNQ03N2 heater alarm – E53-CNH03N2 3-phase HA – E53-CNHH03N2 – power supply (12 VDC/20 mA) E53-CNP03N2 – heater alarm voltage (pulse) E53-CNQHN2 3-phase HA voltage (pulse) E53-CNQHHN2 heater alarm power supply (12 VDC/20 mA) E53-CNPHN2 Option Order code USB PC based configuration cable E58-CIFQ1 PC based configuration and tuning software CX-Thermo PC based parameter cloning software (free) ThermoMini Standard 11 pin socket for E5CN-_ _ _ U type P2CF-11-E E5_N General purpose controllers 409 19 Temperature controllers Note:- Output and Alarm Relays: 3 A/250 VAC, electrical life: 100,000 operations - Output voltage (pulse): 12 V, 21 mA (ie. to drive solid state relays) - Hybrid relay (long life relay) electrical life 1,000,000 operations - Linear current: 0(4) to 20 mA - Heater alarm / HA = heater burnout + SSR short detection + SSR overcurrent E5AN/-EN option boards (one slot available in each instrument) E5AN/-EN series optional tools Specifications Type Input Output Fixed option Alarms Order code (includes supply voltage indication) 48x96 mm model 96x96 mm model On-panel temperature (TC/Pt/mV) relay – 3 relays E5EN-R3MT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-R3MT-500-N AC100-240 E5EN-R3MTD-500-N AC/DC24 E5AN-R3MTD-500-N AC/DC24 heater alarm E5EN-R3HMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-R3HMT-500-N AC100-240 E5EN-R3HMTD-500-N AC/DC24 E5AN-R3HMTD-500-N AC/DC24 3-phase heater alarm E5EN-R3HHMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-R3HHMT-500-N AC100-240 E5EN-R3HHMTD-500-N AC/DC24 E5AN-R3HHMTD-500-N AC/DC24 voltage (pulse) E5EN-R3QMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-R3QMT-500-N AC100-240 hybrid relay E5EN-R3YMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-R3YMT-500-N AC100-240 power supply E5EN-R3PMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-R3PMT-500-N AC100-240 voltage (pulse) – E5EN-Q3MT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-Q3MT-500-N AC100-240 E5EN-Q3MTD-500-N AC/DC24 E5AN-Q3MTD-500-N AC/DC24 heater alarm E5EN-Q3HMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-Q3HMT-500-N AC100-240 E5EN-Q3HMTD-500-N AC/DC24 E5AN-Q3HMTD-500-N AC/DC24 3-phase heater alarm E5EN-Q3HHMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-Q3HHMT-500-N AC100-240 E5EN-Q3HHMTD-500-N AC/DC24 E5AN-Q3HHMTD-500-N AC/DC24 voltage (pulse) E5EN-Q3QMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-Q3QMT-500-N AC100-240 hybrid relay E5EN-Q3YMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-Q3YMT-500-N AC100-240 power supply E5EN-Q3PMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-Q3PMT-500-N AC100-240 linear current – E5EN-C3MT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-C3MT-500-N AC100-240 E5EN-C3MTD-500-N AC/DC24 E5AN-C3MTD-500-N AC/DC24 voltage (pulse) E5EN-C3QMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-C3QMT-500-N AC100-240 hybrid relay E5EN-C3YMT-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-C3YMT-500-N AC100-240 analogue (mA/V) relay – E5EN-R3ML-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-R3ML-500-N AC100-240 heater alarm E5EN-R3HML-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-R3HML-500-N AC100-240 voltage (pulse) – E5EN-Q3ML-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-Q3ML-500-N AC100-240 heater alarm E5EN-Q3HML-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-Q3HML-500-N AC100-240 hybrid relay E5EN-Q3YML-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-Q3YML-500-N AC100-240 linear current – E5EN-C3ML-500-N AC100-240 E5AN-C3ML-500-N AC100-240 Option Order code RS-232C communications (CompoWay/F/Modbus) E53-EN01 RS-485 communications (CompoWay/F/Modbus) E53-EN03 event input E53-AKB Option Order code USB PC based configuration cable E58-CIFQ1 PC based configuration and tuning software CX-Thermo PC based parameter cloning software (free) ThermoMini Supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz or 24 VAC, 50/60Hz; 24 VDC Heater alarm yes, optional, choice of 1 or 3 phase Thermocouple input type K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W or PL II RTD input type Pt100, JPt100 Linear input type mV or "T" models mA and V on "L" models Control mode ON/OFF, 2-PID (heat or heat/cool) Accuracy Thermocouple ± 0.3% (E5CN-U ± 1%) Platinum resistance ± 0.2% Analogue input ± 0.2% FS Auto-tuning yes, 40% and 100% MV output limit selection. When using Heat/Cool: automatic cool gain adjustment Self-tuning yes RS-232C Only for AN/-EN: Optional, Protocol CompowayF or Modbus freely selectable RS-485 optional, CompowayF or Modbus selectable Event input optional QLP port (USB connection PC) yes Ambient temperature -10 to 55°C IP Rating front panel IP66 Sampling period 250 ms 410 CelciuXº General purpose controllers CelciuXº - Multi-Loop temperature control – Control and Connectivity CelciuXº is designed to handle complex temperature profiles thanks to Omron’s unique Gradient temperature Control (GTC) algorithm and to offer easy program-less communication with Omron and third-party PLCs and HMI. Above all, CelciuXº incorporates all “simple to use” clever temperature control technology, like 2-PID, disturbance control and various ways of tuning. • Interfaces to a wide range of industrial networks • Reduced engineering due to Program-less communications, Smart Active Parts and Function Block Libraries • Available with screw terminals and screw-less clamp terminals • One unit handling various types of input, such as Pt, Thermocouple, mA, and V input • Gradient Temperature Control (GTC) Ordering information Accessories Current transformer Communications and cables Type Control points Control outputs Auxiliary outputs Other functions Terminal Order code Basic unit 2 2 voltage (puls) 2 transistor (NPN) *1 *1 For heating/cooling control applications, the auxiliary outputs on the 2-point models are used for cooling control. On the 4-point models, heating/cooling control can be performed for two input points only. 2 CT input *2 + 2 event input *2 When using the heater burnout alarm, purchase a Current Transformer (E54-CT1 or E54-CT3) separately. M3 screws EJ1N-TC2A-QNHB Basic unit 2 2 voltage (puls) 2 transistor (NPN) *1 2 CT input *2 + 2 event input Screw-less clamp EJ1N-TC2B-QNHB Basic unit 2 2 current 2 transistor (NPN) *1 2 event input M3 screws EJ1N-TC2A-CNB Basic unit 2 2 current 2 transistor (NPN) *1 2 event input Screw-less clamp EJ1N-TC2B-CNB Basic unit 4 4 voltage (puls) – – M3 screws EJ1N-TC4A-QQ Basic unit 4 4 voltage (puls) – – Screw-less clamp EJ1N-TC4B-QQ High function unit – – 4 transistor (NPN) 4 event input M3 screws EJ1N-HFUA-NFLK High function unit – – 4 transistor (NPN) 4 event input Screw-less clamp EJ1N-HFUB-NFLK DeviceNet unit – – – – Screw connector EJ1N-HFUB-DRT End unit *3 *3 An End unit is always required for connection to a Basic unit or an HFU. An HFU cannot operate without a Basic unit. – – 2 transistor (NPN) – M3 screws EJ1C-EDUA-NFLK End unit *3 – – 2 transistor (NPN) – Removable Connector EJ1C-EDUC-NFLK Type Control points Control outputs Auxiliary outputs Other functions Terminal Order code Basic unit 2 (GTC) 2 voltage (puls)*1 *1 Heating/cooling control is not supported for gradient temperature control. 2 transistor (NPN) 2 CT input*2 *2 When using the heater burnout alarm, use a Current Transformer (E54-CT1 or E54-CT3) (sold separately). M3 screws EJ1G-TC2A-QNH Basic unit 2 (GTC) 2 voltage (puls)*1 2 transistor (NPN) 2 CT input*2 Screw-less clamp EJ1G-TC2B-QNH Basic unit 4 (GTC) 4 voltage (puls)*1 – – M3 screws EJ1G-TC4A-QQ Basic unit 4 (GTC) 4 voltage (puls)*1 – – Screw-less clamp EJ1G-TC4B-QQ High function unit – (GTC) – 4 transistor (NPN) – M3 screws EJ1G-HFUA-NFLK High function unit – (GTC) – 4 transistor (NPN) – Screw-less clamp EJ1G-HFUB-NFLK End unit*3 *3 An End-unit (EDU) is always required to connect an HFU and or a Basic TC unit for Communications and Power supply. A GTC (Gradient Temperature Control) basic TC unit always requires a GTC HFU unit. – – 2 transistor (NPN) – M3 screws EJ1C-EDUA-NFLK End unit*3 – – 2 transistor (NPN) – Removable Connector EJ1C-EDUC-NFLK Diameter Order code 5.8 dia. E54-CT1 12.0 dia. E54-CT3 Description Order code G3ZA connecting cable 5 meter EJ1C-CBLA050 USB programming cable E58-CIFQ1 PC based configuration and tuning software CX-Thermo EST2-2C-MV4 PROFIBUS Gateway PRT1-SCU11 CelciuXº General purpose controllers 411 19 Temperature controllers Specifications Item Type EJ1_-TC2 EJ1_-TC4 Power supply voltage 24 VDC Operating voltage range 85% to 110% of rated voltage Power consumption 4 W max. (at maximum load) 5 W max. (at maximum load) Input (see note)*1 *1 Inputs are fully multi-input. Therefore, platinum resistance thermometer, thermocouple, infrared thermosensor, and analogue input can be selected. Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W, PLII ES1B Infrared Thermosensor: 10 to 70°C, 60 to 120°C, 115 to 165°C, 140 to 260°C. Analogue input: 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100, JPt100 Input impedance Current input: 150max., voltage input: 1 M min. Control outputs Voltage output Output voltage: 12 VDC ±15%, max. load current: 21 mA (PNP models with short-circuit protection circuit) Transistor output Max. operating voltage: 30 V, max. load current: 100 mA – Current output Current output range: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA DC Load: 500 max. (including transfer output) (Resolution: Approx: 2,800 for 4 to 20 mA DC, approx. 3,500 for 0 to 20 mA DC) – Event inputs Input points 2 – Contact input ON: 1 k max., OFF. 100 k min. – Non-contact input ON: Residual voltage: 1.5 V max., OFF: Leakage current: 0.1 mA max. – Outflow current: approx. 4 mA per point – Number of input and control points Input points: 2, control points: 2 Input points: 4, control points: 4 Setting method Via communications Control method ON/OFF control or 2-PID (with autotuning, selftuning, Heat & Cool autotuning and non-linear cool output selection) Other functions Two-point input shift, digital input filter, remote SP, SP ramp, manual manipulated variable, manipulated variable limiter, interference overshoot adjustment, loop burnout alarm, RUN/STOP, banks, I/O allocations, etc. Alarm output 2 points via End unit Communication RS-485, PROFIBUS, Modbus, DeviceNet RS-485, PROFIBUS, Modbus, DeviceNet Size in mm (WxHxD) 31x96x109 Weight 180 g Ambient temperature range Operating -10°C to 55°C, Storage -25°C to 65°C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient humidity range Operating. 25% to 85% (with no condensation) 412 E5_N-H/E5_N-HT Advanced and Multi-Loop controllers Universal compact digital process controllers The E5_N-H series of process controllers take the proven concept of the general purpose E5_N series to a process level. Main features of the E5_N-H series are universal inputs, process outputs and options such as transfer output, remote setpoint and setvalue programmer. • Control mode: ON/OFF or 2-PID, Valve control on EN-H/AN-H • Control output: relay, voltage (pulse), SSR, linear current and voltage • Power supply: 100/240 VAC or 24 VDC/VAC • Easy PC connection for parameter cloning, setting and tuning • Clear and intuitive set-up and operation Ordering information Note: - Output and Alarm Relays: 3 A/250 VAC, electrical life: 100,000 operations - Output voltage (pulse): 12 V, 21 mA (ie. to drive solid state relays) - Linear current: 0(4) to 20 mA - Linear voltage output: 0 to 10 V Accessories E5CN-H option boards (One slot available in each instrument) Type Input Output Fixed option Alarms Order code 48x48 mm model (includes supply voltage indication) On-panel Universal TC/Pt/mV mA/V Relay output – 3 software alarms 2 SUB outputs E5CN-HR2M-500 AC100-240 E5CN-HR2MD-500 AC/DC24 Voltage (pulse) E5CN-HQ2M-500 AC100-240 E5CN-HQ2MD-500 AC/DC24 Current output E5CN-HC2M-500 AC100-240 E5CN-HC2MD-500 AC/DC24 Linear voltage output E5CN-HV2M-500 AC100-240 E5CN-HV2MD-500 AC/DC24 Relay output SV programmer (8 programs of 32 segments E5CN-HTR2M-500 AC100-240 E5CN-HTR2MD-500 AC/DC24 Voltage (pulse) E5CN-HTQ2M-500 AC100-240 E5CN-HTQ2MD-500 AC/DC24 Current output E5CN-HTC2M-500 AC100-240 E5CN-HTC2MD-500 AC/DC24 Linear voltage output E5CN-HTV2M-500 AC100-240 E5CN-HTV2MD-500 AC/DC24 Option Order code Event inputs E53-CNBN2 Event inputs Control output 2 Voltage (for driving SSR) E53-CNQBN2 Event inputs Heater burnout/SSR failure/ Heater overcurrent detection E53-CNHBN2 Event inputs Transfer output E53-CNBFN2 Communications RS-232C Control output 2 Voltage (for driving SSR) E53-CN01N2 Communications RS-232C E53-CNQ01N2 Communications RS-232C Heater burnout/SSR failure/ Heater overcurrent detection E53-CNH01N2 Communications RS-485 E53-CN03N2 Communications RS-485 Control output 2 Voltage (for driving SSR) E53-CNQO3N2 Communications RS-485 Heater burnout/SSR failure/ Heater overcurrent detection E53-CNH03N2 Communications RS-485 3-phase heater burnout/SSR failure/ Heater overcurrent detection E53-CNHH03N2 Control output 2 Voltage (for driving SSR) Transfer output E53-CNQFN2 Control output 2 Voltage (for driving SSR) Heater burnout/SSR failure/ Heater overcurrent detection E53-CNQHN2 Control output 2 Voltage (for driving SSR) 3-phase heater burnout/SSR failure/ Heater overcurrent detection E53-CNQHHN2 E5_N-H/E5_N-HT Advanced and Multi-Loop controllers 413 19 Temperature controllers Note: - All E5EN-H/AN-H have 2 event inputs - All E5EN-H/AN-H have Remote Setpoint 4 to 20 mA input Specifications E5CN-H/EN-H/AN-H E5AN-H/EN-H output option boards (2 slots available in E5_N-HAA__-500 models: SS models have 2 fixed SSR output modules) E5AN-H/EN-H option boards (one slot available in each instrument) E5AN-H/EN-H series optional tools Control method Auxiliary output Control output 1/2 Heater burnout Transfer output Order code (includes supply voltage indication) 96x96 mm model 48x96 mm model Basic 2 alarm relays none fitted, 2 slots 1-phase E5AN-HAA2HBM-500 AC100-240 E5EN-HAA2HBM-500 AC100-240 none fitted, 2 slots E5AN-HAA2HBMD-500 AC/DC24 E5EN-HAA2HBMD-500 AC/DC24 2 SSR output fitted E5AN-HSS2HBM-500 AC100-240 E5EN-HSS2HBM-500 AC100-240 2 SSR output fitted E5AN-HSS2HBMD-500 AC/DC24 E5EN-HSS2HBMD-500 AC/DC24 none fitted, 2 slots 3-phase 4 to 20 mA output E5AN-HAA2HHBFM-500 AC100-240 E5EN-HAA2HHBFM-500 AC100-240 none fitted, 2 slots E5AN-HAA2HHBFMD-500 AC/DC24 E5EN-HAA2HHBFMD-500 AC/DC24 2 SSR output fitted E5AN-HSS2HHBFM-500 AC100-240 E5EN-HSS2HHBFM-500 AC100-240 2 SSR output fitted E5AN-HSS2HHBFMD-500 AC/DC24 E5EN-HSS2HHBFMD-500 AC/DC24 3 alarm relays none fitted, 2 slots E5AN-HAA3BFM-500 AC100-240 E5EN-HAA3BFM-500 AC100-240 none fitted, 2 slots E5AN-HAA3BFMD-500 AC/DC24 E5EN-HAA3BFMD-500 AC/DC24 2 SSR output fitted E5AN-HSS3BFM-500 AC100-240 E5EN-HSS3BFM-500 AC100-240 2 SSR output fitted E5AN-HSS3BFMD-500 AC/DC24 E5EN-HSS3BFMD-500 AC/DC24 Valve controller 2 alarm relays 2 relay output fitted E5AN-HPRR2BM-500 AC100-240 E5EN-HPRR2BM-500 AC100-240 E5AN-HPRR2BMD-500 AC/DC24 E5EN-HPRR2BMD-500 AC/DC24 4 to 20 mA output E5AN-HPRR2BFM-500 AC100-240 E5EN-HPRR2BFM-500 AC100-240 E5AN-HPRR2BFMD-500 AC/DC24 E5EN-HPRR2BFMD-500 AC/DC24 SV programmer (8 programs of 32 segments 2 alarm relays none fitted, 2 slots 1-phase E5AN-HTAA2HBM-500 E5EN-HTAA2HBM-500 AC100-240 E5AN-HTAA2HBMD-500 E5EN-HTAA2HBMD-500 AC/DC24 3-phase 4 to 20 mA output E5AN-HTAA2HHBFM-500 E5EN-HTAA2HHBFM-500 E5AN-HTAA2HHBFMD-500 E5EN-HTAA2HHBFMD-500 3 alarm relays E5AN-HTAA3BFM-500 E5EN-HTAA3BFM-500 E5AN-HTAA3BFMD-500 E5EN-HTAA3BFMD-500 SV programmer and valve controller 2 alarm relays 2 relay output fitted E5AN-HTPRR2BM-500 E5EN-HTPRR2BM-500 E5AN-HTPRR2BMD-500 E5EN-HTPRR2BMD-500 4 to 20 mA output E5AN-HTPRR2BFM-500 E5EN-HTPRR2BFM-500 E5AN-HTPRR2BFMD-500 E5EN-HTPRR2BFMD-500 Supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz or 24 VAC, 50/60Hz; 24 VDC Sensor input Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W or PL II Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100 Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V or 0 to 10 V Control mode ON/OFF, 2-PID and valve (PRR) Accuracy Thermocouple: (± 0.1% of indicated value or ±1°C, whichever is greater) ± digit max. *1 Platinum resistance thermometer: (± 0.1% of indicated value or ± 0.5°C, whichever is greater) ± 1 digit max. Analogue input: ± 0.1% FS ± 1 digit max. Auto-tuning yes, 40% and 100% MV output limit selection. When using Heat/Cool: automatic cool gain adjustment Self-tuning yes RS-232C/RS-422/RS-485 optional, CompowayF or Modbus selectable Event input Optional (Standard 2 event input in EN-H/AN-H) QLP port (USB connection PC) yes Ambient temperature -10 to 55°C IP Rating front panel IP66 Sampling period 60 ms Option Order code Relay E53-RN Voltage (pulse) PNP 12VDC E53-QN Voltage (pulse) NPN 12VDC E53-Q3 Voltage (pulse) NPN 24VDC E53-Q4 Linear 4 to 20 mA E53-C3N Linear 0 to 20 mA E53-C3DN Linear 0 to 10 V E53-V34N Linear 0 to 5 V E53-V35N Option Order code RS-232C communications (CompoWay/F/Modbus) E53-EN01 RS-422 communications (CompoWay/F/Modbus) E53-EN02 RS-485 communications (CompoWay/F/Modbus) E53-EN03 event input E53-AKB Option Order code USB PC based configuration cable E58-CIFQ1 PC based configuration and tuning software CX-Thermo EST2-2C-MV4 414 E5_R/E5_R-T Advanced and Multi-Loop controllers Fast, accurate and equipped for application specific needs The E5_R series provides you with high accuracy inputs (0.01°C for Pt100) and a 50 ms sample and control cycle for all four loops. Its unique Disturbance Overshoot Reduction Adjustment ensures solid, robust control. • Easy and clear read-out thanks to bright Liquid Crystal Display • Exceptional versatility – multi-loop control, cascade control, and valve control • Easy integration with DeviceNet, PROFIBUS or Modbus • SV programmer optional, 32 programs with up to 256 segments Ordering information Note:- Voltage: Specify the power supply specifications (voltage) when ordering. - Standard = heat and/or cool PID control, valve = valve positioning (relay up/down) (PRR) - max 2 = 2 loops heat and/or cool or 1 loop cascade, ratio or remote SP - max 4 = 4 loops heat and/or cool - 1, 2 or 4 = number of analogue universal input 1 + pot = 1 universal and 1 slide wire feedback from valve - QC = voltage (pulse) or current (switch), Q = voltage (pulse), C = current, 4R = 4 two pole relay, 2T = two transistor output NPN Functions Loops Input Output Comms Order code analogue Event Control Alarm 96x96 mm Supply voltage standard 1 1 2 2 QC+Q 4R – E5AR-Q4B AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard 1 1 2 2 QC+Q 4R RS-485 E5AR-Q43B-FLK AC100-240 – standard 1 1 6 2 QC+Q 4R RS-485 E5AR-Q43DB-FLK AC100-240 – standard 1 1 6 4 QC+Q+C+C 4R RS-485 E5AR-QC43DB-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard max 2 2 4 2 QC+Q 4R RS-485 E5AR-Q43DW-FLK AC100-240 – standard max 2 2 4 4 QC+Q+QC+Q 4R RS-485 E5AR-QQ43DW-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard max 4 4 4 4 QC+Q+QC+Q 4R RS-485 E5AR-QQ43DWW-FLK AC100-240 – standard 1 1 2 2 C+C 4R – E5AR-C4B AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard 1 1 2 2 C+C 4R RS-485 E5AR-C43B-FLK AC100-240 – standard 1 1 6 2 C+C 4R RS-485 E5AR-C43DB-FLK AC100-240 – standard max 2 2 4 2 C+C 4R RS-485 E5AR-C43DW-FLK AC100-240 – standard max 4 4 4 4 C+C+C+C 4R RS-485 E5AR-CC43DWW-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 valve 1 1 + pot 4 2 R+R 4R – E5AR-PR4DF AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 valve 1 1 + pot 4 4 R+R+QC+Q 4R RS-485 E5AR-PRQ43DF-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard 1 1 2 2 QC+Q 4R DeviceNet E5AR-Q4B-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard 1 1 2 4 QC+Q+C+C 4R DeviceNet E5AR-QC4B-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard max 2 2 – 4 QC+Q+QC+Q 4R DeviceNet E5AR-QQ4W-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard 1 1 2 2 C+C 4R DeviceNet E5AR-C4B-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard max 4 4 – 4 C+C+C+C 4R DeviceNet E5AR-CC4WW-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 valve 1 1 + pot – 2 R+R 4R DeviceNet E5AR-PR4F-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 valve 1 1 + pot – 4 R+R+QC+Q 4R DeviceNet E5AR-PRQ4F-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer 1 1 2 2 QC+Q 4R – E5AR-TQ4B AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer 1 1 2 2 C+C 4R – E5AR-TC4B AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer 1 1 2 2 QC+Q 4R RS-485 E5AR-TQ43B-FLK AC100-240 – SV programmer 1 1 2 2 C+C 4R RS-485 E5AR-TC43B-FLK AC100-240 – SV programmer 1 1 10 2 QC+Q 10T RS-485 E5AR-TQE3MB-FLK AC100-240 – SV programmer 1 1 10 2 C+C 10T RS-485 E5AR-TCE3MB-FLK AC100-240 – SV programmer 1 1 10 4 QC+Q+C+C 10T RS-485 E5AR-TQCE3MB-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer max 2 2 4 2 QC+Q 4R RS-485 E5AR-TQ43DW-FLK AC100-240 – SV programmer max 2 2 4 2 C+C 4R RS-485 E5AR-TC43DW-FLK AC100-240 – SV programmer max 2 2 8 4 QC+Q+QC+Q 10T RS-485 E5AR-TQQE3MW-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer max 4 4 8 4 C+C+C+C 10T RS-485 E5AR-TCCE3MWW-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer max 4 4 8 4 QC+Q+QC+Q 10T RS-485 E5AR-TQQE3MWW-FLK AC100-240 – SV programmer + valve 1 1 + pot 4 2 R+R 4R – E5AR-TPR4DF AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer + valve 1 1 + pot 8 4 R+R+QC+Q 10T RS-485 E5AR-TPRQE3MF-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 E5_R/E5_R-T Advanced and Multi-Loop controllers 415 19 Temperature controllers Note:- Voltage: Specify the power supply specifications (voltage) when ordering. - Standard = heat and/or cool PID control, valve = valve positioning (relay up/down) (PRR) - max 2 = 2 loops heat and/or cool or 1 loop cascade, ratio or remote SP - max 4 = 4 loops heat and/or cool - 1, 2 or 4 = number of analogue universal input 1 + pot = 1 universal and 1 slide wire feedback from valve - QC = voltage (pulse) or current (switch), Q = voltage (pulse), C = current, 4R = 4 two pole relay, 2T = two transistor output NPN Accessories E5_R/E5_R-T optional tools Specifications Functions Loops Input Output Comms Order code analogue Event Control Alarm 48x96 mm Supply voltage standard 1 1 2 2 QC+Q 4R – E5ER-Q4B AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard 1 1 2 2 QC+Q 4R RS-485 E5ER-Q43B-FLK AC100-240 – standard 1 1 2 4 QC+Q+C+C 4R RS-485 E5ER-QC43B-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard 1 1 6 2 QC+Q 2T RS-485 E5ER-QT3DB-FLK AC100-240 – standard max 2 2 4 2 QC+Q 2T RS-485 E5ER-QT3DW-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard 1 1 2 2 C+C 4R – E5ER-C4B AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard 1 1 2 2 C+C 4R RS-485 E5ER-C43B-FLK AC100-240 – standard 1 1 6 2 C+C 2T RS-485 E5ER-CT3DB-FLK AC100-240 – standard max 2 2 4 2 C+C 2T RS-485 E5ER-CT3DW-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 valve 1 1 + pot 4 2 R+R 2T – E5ER-PRTDF AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 valve 1 1 + pot – 4 R+R+QC+Q 4R RS-485 E5ER-PRQ43F-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard 1 1 2 2 QC+Q 2T DeviceNet E5ER-QTB-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard max 2 2 – 2 QC+Q 2T DeviceNet E5ER-QTW-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard 1 1 2 2 C+C 2T DeviceNet E5ER-CTB-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 standard max 2 2 – 2 C+C 2T DeviceNet E5ER-CTW-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 valve 1 1 + pot – 2 R+R 2T DeviceNet E5ER-PRTF-DRT AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer 1 1 2 2 QC+Q 4R – E5ER-TQ4B AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer 1 1 2 2 C+C 4R – E5ER-TC4B AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer 1 1 2 2 QC+Q 4R RS-485 E5ER-TQC43B-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer max 2 2 4 2 QC+Q 2T RS-485 E5ER-TQT3DW-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer max 2 2 4 2 C+C 2T RS-485 E5ER-TCT3DW-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer + valve 1 1 + pot 4 2 R+R 2T – E5ER-TPRTDF AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 SV programmer + valve 1 1 + pot – 3 R+R + QC 4R RS-485 E5ER-TPRQ43F-FLK AC100-240 or DC/AC 24 Terminal covers Order code Terminal cover for E5AR E53-COV14 Terminal cover for E5ER E53-COV15 Option Order code PC based configuration and tuning software CX-Thermo EST2-2C-MV4 Thermocouple input type K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W RTD input type Pt100 Linear input type mA, V Control mode 2-PID or ON/OFF control Accuracy ±0.1% FS Auto-tuning yes RS-485 optional Event input optional Ambient temperature -10 to 55°C IP rating front panel IP66 Sampling period 50 ms Size in mm (HxWxD) E5ER: 96x48x110 E5AR: 96x96x110 416 PRT1-SCU11 Auxiliaries Omron’s intelligent PROFIBUS and CompoWay/F gateway This gateway supports all CompoWay/F equipped products, including temperature controllers, digital panel indicators, etc. It can also be used for connecting MCW151-E and E5_K series. • Cost-effectively integrates basic instruments into a PROFIBUS network • Requires no complex protocol conversion writing • Has function blocks for drag-and-drop configuration • Connects up to 15 instruments to a single PROFIBUS point Ordering information Supports all CompoWay/F equipped units, but has "drag-and-drop" function blocks for • E5AN/E5EN/E5CN/E5GN • E5ZN and CelciuXº (EJ1) • E5AR/E5ER • E5AK/E5EK Specifications ES1B Achieve low-cost measurements with an infrared thermosensor This infrared thermosensor provides an accurate, stable and cost-effective way to measure the temperature of objects. It behaves just like a standard K-type thermocouple, which enables it to operate with any temperature controller or alarm unit. • Cost-effective infrared thermosensor • Contactless, meaning no deterioration, unlike thermocouples • 4 temperature ranges available: 10-70°C, 60-120°C, 115-165°C and 140-260°C • Response speed 300 ms Ordering information Dimensions (unit: mm) Specifications Name Order code PROFIBUS remote terminal serial communications unit PRT1-SCU11 Storage temperature -20 to +75°C Ambient temperature 0 to 55°C Ambient humidity 10 to 90% (non-condensing) EMC compliance EN 50081-2, EN 61131-2 Power supply +24 VDC (+10%/-15%) Current consumption 80 mA (typical) Weight 125 g (typical) Communication interface RS-485 based PROFIBUS-DP RS-422A Host link RS-485 CompoWay/F RS-232C Peripheral Port supporting connection to thermotools Size in mm (HxWxD) 90x40x65 Appearance and sensing characteristics Specification Order code 10 to 70°C ES1B 10-70C 60 to 120°C ES1B 60-120C 115 to 165°C ES1B 115-165C 140 to 260°C ES1B 140-260C 2 dia. 20 dia. 2 mm 20 mm 40 mm 60 mm 40 dia. 60 dia. 14.2 dia. 36.5 17.8 15 6.5 44.5 3,000 ABS resin PVC-covered (−25°C to 70°C) Polyolefin tube Screw M18×1.0 Green, output + White, output − Orange, power + Shield, power − Power supply voltage 12/24 VDC Current consumption 20 mA max. Accuracy ±5°C ±2% PV or ±2°C, whichever is larger ±10°C ±4% PV or ±4°C, whichever is larger ±30°C ±6% PV or ±6°C, whichever is larger ±40°C ±8% PV or ±8°C, whichever is larger Reproducibility ±1% PV or ±1°C, whichever is larger Temperature drift 0.4°C/°C max. Receiver element Thermopile Response speed Approximately 300 ms at response rate of 63% Operating temperature -25 to 70°C (with no icing or condensation) Allowable ambient humidity 35 to 85% Degree of protection IP65 Size in mm head: 17.8 dia.×44.5 (screw M18×1.0), cable 3,000 417 19 Temperature controllers ES1C Auxiliaries Achieve Superior Environmental Resistance and a Wide Measurement Range of 0 to 400°C. This gateway supports all CompoWay/F equipped products, including temperature controllers, digital panel indicators, etc. It can also be used for connecting MCW151-E and E5_K series. • Flexible placement with slim cylindrical shape and long focus with a distance of 500 mm and area diameter of 80 mm. • The SUS body and silicon lens resist ambient operating temperatures of up to 70×C and resist dust and water to the equivalent of IP67. • Fast measurement with high-speed response of 100 ms/90%. • Strong resistance to noise with output of 4 to 20 mA. Ordering information Measurement Range Ratings and Characteristics Dimensions (unit: mm) Specification (measuring temperature range) Order code 0 to 400°C ES1C-A40 110 dia. 80 dia. 70 dia. 300 500 1000 [mm] Note: The measurement range is the measurement diameter for an optical response of 90%. Make sure that the actual object to be measured is sufficiently larger than the measurement diameters in the above figure. Item Model ES1C Power supply voltage 12 to 24 VDC Operating voltage range 90% to 110% of rated voltage Current consumption 70 mA max. Measuring temperature range 0 to 400C Measurement accuracy 0 to 200C: 2C, 201 to 400C: 1% (emissivity: 0.95) Response time 100 ms/90% Reproducibility 1C of reading value Measurement wavelength 8 to 14 m Light-receiving element Thermopile Emissivity 0.95 fixed Current output 4 to 20 mA DC, Load: 250 max. Ambient temperature range Operating: 0 to 70C, Storage: 20 to 70C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient humidity range Operating and storage: 35% to 85% Vibration resistance (destruction) 1.5-mm amplitude at 10 to 55 Hz for 2 hours each in the X, Y, and Z directions Weight 180 g Degree of protection Equivalent to IP67 12 dia. (lens diameter) M18×P1.0 (cable length) 24 120 2,000 60 (threaded section) S8VS S8JX-G Compact S8VT Single-phase Supply voltage?? Power factor correction?? Three-phase Slim S8VM Yes No PREVENT YOUR SYSTEM FROM STOPPING The buffer block prevents equipment stoppage, data loss and other problems resulting from momentary power failures. One S8TS-DCBU-02 buffer block provides a back-up time of 500 ms at an output current of 2.5 A. Can be wired to the 24 VDC output from any switch mode power supply • Connects to both single-phase and three-phase 24 VDC power supplies • Connects to an S8TS power supply via an S8T-BUS03 bus line connector • Parallel connection up to 4 units to increase back-up time and capacity S8TS-DCBU-02 – Buffer block against momentary power failures 418 Page 422 Page 427 Power supplies Page 423 Page 424 S8TS Which type of power supply you are looking for? S8T-DCBU-01 Modular S8T-DCBU-02 DC back-up S8TS DC battery back-up up to several minutes S8TS buffer block momentary up to 500 ms 419 20 Power supplies Page 425 Page 426 Page 426 420 421 20 Power supplies Selection table Power supplies Category Compact Power Supplies Slim Power Supplies Modular Selection criteria Model S8VS S8VT S8VM S8JX-G S8TS Phases Single-phase Rated voltage 100 to 240 VAC Voltage 24 V 24 V 12 V 24 V 5 V 12 V 15 V 24 V 5 V 12 V 24 V Power 3 W – – – – – – – – – – – 7.5 W – – – – – – – – – – – 10 W – – – – – – – – – – – 15 W 0.65 A – 1.3 A 0.65 A 3 A 1.3 A 1 A 0.65 A – – – 25 W – – – – – – – – 5 A – – 30 W 1.3 A – 2.5 A 1.3 A – – – – – 2.5 A – 35 W 7 A 3 A 2.4 A 1.5 A – 2.5 A – 50 W – – 4.3 A 2.2 A 10 A 4.2 A – 2.1 A – – – 60 W 2.5 A – – – – – – – – 5 A 2.5 A 90 W – – – – – – – – – 7.5 A – 100 W – – 8.5 A 4.5 A 20 A 8.5 A – 4.5 A – – – 120 W 5 A 5 A – – – – – – – 10 A 5 A 150 W – – 12.5 A 6.5 A – – – 6.5 A – – – 180 W – – – – – – – – – – 7.5 A 240 W 10 A 10 A – – – – – – – – 10 A 300 W – – 27 A 14 A – – – 14 A – – – 480 W 20 A 20 A – – – – – – – – – 600 W – – 53 A 27 A – – – 27 A – – – 960 W – 40 A – – – – – – – – – 1500 W – – – 70 A – – – – – – – Features Conforms to EN61000-3-2 with PFC – – – – with PFC with PFC with PFC DC back-up – – – – – – – – Capacitor back-up – – – – – – – – Undervoltage alarm – – – – – – Overvoltage protection Overload protection DIN-rail mounting Screw mounting (with bracket) – only 40 A – – – EMI Class B – – – – – – UL Class 2 only 60 W – – – – – – – N+1 redundancy – – – – – – – – Parallel operation – – – – – – – Series operation Page 422 427 423 424 425 Standard Available – No/not available 422 S8VS Single-phase Compact power supply The S8VS is our standard industrial din-rail mounted power supply. It is built to last forever. Up to 60 W we provide them into a plastic housing, from 120 W the S8VS is built in strong metal case. The full ranges provide a very good dimension/output power ratio to optimize panel space uses. The range covers 6 models at 24 VDC with wattage of 15, 30, 60, 120, 240 and 480 W. The 15 and 30 W are also available in 5 or 12 VDC output voltage. The range withstands high vibration and shocks. The S8VS are fan-less power supplies. • Wide AC input range from 85 to 264 VAC • Micro S8VS output power range 15 and 30 W at 5, 12 and 24 VDC • Micro can mounted, standard din-rail, horizontal or facing horizontal any direction is okay • S8VS models available from 60 to 480 W at 24 VDC, 4 models Ordering information Specifications Power Output voltage Output current Under-voltage control Size in mm (HxWxD) Order code 15 W 5 VDC 2 A (10 W) yes, red LED 85x22.5x96.4 S8VS-01505 12 VDC 1.2 A S8VS-01512 24 VDC 0.65 A S8VS-01524 30 W 5 VDC 4 A (20 W) yes, red LED 85x22.5x96.4 S8VS-03005 12 VDC 2.5 A S8VS-03012 24 VDC 1.3 A S8VS-03024 60 W 24 VDC 2.5 A no 95x40x108.3 S8VS-06024 120 W 24 VDC 5 A no 115x50x121.3 S8VS-12024 240 W 24 VDC 10 A no 115x100x125.3 S8VS-24024 480 W 24 VDC 20 A no 115x150x127.2 S8VS-48024 Specification 15 W 30 W 60 W 120 W 240 W 480 W Efficiency 77% min. (24 V) 80% min. (24 V) 78% min. 80% min. 80% min. 83% min. Power factor – – – 0.95 min. 0.95 min. 0.95 min. Input voltage 100 to 240 VAC (85 to 264 VAC), single-phase Output voltage Voltage adjustment ±10 to ±15% (with V. ADJ) min. Ripple 2% p-p max. (at rated input/output voltage) Input variation 0.5% max. (at 85 to 264 VAC input, 100% load) Temperature influence 0.05%/°C max. Overload protection 105 to 160% of rated load current, voltage drop, automatic reset Overvoltage protection yes yes yes yes yes yes Input current 100 V 0.45 A max. 0.9 A max. 1.7 A max. 1.9 A max. 3.8 A max. 7.4 A max. 200 V 0.25 A max. 0.6 A max. 1.0 A max. 1.1 A max. 2.0 A max. 3.9 A max. 230 V 0.19 A (5 V: 0.14 A) 0.37 A (5 V: 0.27 A) 0.7 A typ. 0.6 A typ. 1.2 A typ. 2.4 A typ. Output indicator yes (green) yes (green) yes (green) yes (green) yes (green) yes (green) LED Weight 160 g 180 g 330 g 550 g 1,150 g 1,700 g max. Operating temperature -10 to 60°C -10 to 60°C *1 *1 For 30 W model 24 V: No derating, 12 & 5 V: Derating beyond 50°C. -10 to 60°C, derating beyond 40°C, no icing or condensation Series operation yes (24 V only) yes yes yes yes yes 423 20 Power supplies S8VM Single-phase Slim size S8VM power supplies All models have the same height of only 84.5 mm. These ranges cover up-to 1,500 W. The output voltages are 5, 12, 15 or 24 VDC. In this series we have standard types and versions with two alarms up-to 150 W models: one for short dip in the 24 VDC supply, second one when the voltage gradually drops in time. The models form 300 W/600 W/1,500 W are equipped with an overload alarm function. • Widest range in DC-output voltage (5 V, 12 V, 15 V & 24 V) & wattage (15 up-to 1,500 W) • LED indication power ON • Transistor output & LED indication under-voltage alarm 1 & 2 or Power failure • All models can be Din-rail mounted (except 1,500W) • EMI Class B, UL Class 1 division 2, SEMI-F47 (200VAC input) Ordering information Specifications Power ratings Output voltage Output current Size in mm (HxWXD) Order code DIN-rail mounting Undervoltage alarm type Sinking (NPN) Sourcing (PNP) 15 W 12 V 1.3 A 84.5x35.1x94.4 S8VM-01512CD – – 24 V 0.65 A S8VM-01524CD S8VM-01524AD *1 *1 No alarm output built-in. 30 W 12 V 2.5 A 84.5x35.1x109.4 S8VM-03012CD – – 24 V 1.3 A S8VM-03024CD S8VM-03024AD *1 50 W 12 V 4.3 A 84.5x35.1x124.5 S8VM-05012CD – – 24 V 2.2 A S8VM-05024CD S8VM-05024AD S8VM-05024PD 100 W 12 V 8.5 A 84.5x36.6x164.5 S8VM-10012CD – – 24 V 4.5 A S8VM-10024CD S8VM-10024AD S8VM-10024PD 150 W 12 V 12.5 A 84.5x45.6x164.5 S8VM-15012CD – – 24 V 6.5 A S8VM-15024CD S8VM-15024AD S8VM-15024PD Power ratings Output voltage Output current Size in mm (HxWXD) Bottom mounting DIN-rail adaptor Power failure output 300 W 12 V 27 A 84.5x62.5x188 S8VM-30012C S82Y-VM30D overload, overvoltage and overheat 24 V 14 A S8VM-30024C 600 W 12 V 53 A 84.5x101.8x192 S8VM-60012C S82Y-VM60D 24 V 27 A S8VM-60024C – 1,500 W 24 V 70 A 84.5x126.5x327 S8VM-15224C – – Item 15 W 30 W 50 W 100 W 150 W 300 W 600 W 1,500 W Efficiency 12 V models 78% min. 79% min. 79% min. 81% min. 81% min. 78% min. 79% min. – 24 V models 80% min. 81% min. 80% min. 82% min. 83% min. 81% min. 81% min. 82% min. Input voltage 100 to 240 VAC, (85 to 264 VAC), single phase Output Voltage adjustment -20% to 20% with V. ADJ min. (S8VM-_ _ _ 24A_ /P_ : -10% to 20%) Ripple 12 V models 1.5% (p-p) max. 1.5% (p-p) max. 2.0% (p-p) max. – 24 V models 1.0% (p-p) max. 0.75% (p-p) max. 1.25% (p-p) max. 1.25% (p-p) max. Input variation 0.4% max. Temperature influence 0.02%/°C max. Overload protection 105% to 160% of rated load current, voltage drop, automatic reset Overvoltage protection yes Output indicator yes (green) Weight 180 g max. 220 g max. 290 g max. 460 g max. 530 g max. 1,100 g max. 1,700 g max. 3,800 g max. Series operation yes Remote sensing function no no no yes 424 S8JX-G Single-phase Slim & economic power supply The S8JX-G is Omron’s cost effective power supply delivering Omron’s quality and reliability. The range of this Power Supply covers up to 600 W, the output voltages are 5, 12 or 24 VDC. The low profile and multiple mounting options help you reduce panel space. With a minimum life expectancy of 10 years and protection against over-voltage, over-current and short circuiting, the S8JX-G is as reliable as you may expect from Omron. • Wide range in DC-output voltage (5 V, 12 V, 15 V & 24 V) & wattage (15 to 600 W) • LED indication power ON • Over-voltage, over-current, and short circuit protection • Vibration resistance 4,5 g • All models can be DIN-rail mounted • Approvals: UL, cUL, UL508 Listed, CE, SEMI F47, VDE Ordering information Specifications Power Output voltage Output current Size in mm (HxWxD) Order code 15 W 5 V 3 A 91x40x90 S8JX-G01505CD 12 V 1.3 A S8JX-G01512CD 15 V 1 A S8JX-G01515CD 24 V 0.65 A S8JX-G01524CD 35 W 5 V 7 A 91x40x90 S8JX-G03505CD 12 V 3 A S8JX-G03512CD 15 V 2.4 A S8JX-G03515CD 24 V 1.5 A S8JX-G03524CD 50 W 5 V 10 A 92x40x100 S8JX-G05005CD 12 V 4.2 A S8JX-G05012CD 24 V 2.1 A S8JX-G05024CD 100 W 5 V 20 A 92x50x150 S8JX-G10005CD 12 V 8.5 A S8JX-G10012CD 24 V 4.5 A S8JX-G10024CD 150 W 24 V 6.5 A 92x50x150 S8JX-G15024CD 300 W 24 V 14 A 92x110x167 S8JX-G30024CD 600 W 24 V 27 A 92x150x160 S8JX-G60024C*1 *1 Additional accessory is required for DIN-rail mounting. Item 15 W 35 W 50 W 100 W 150 W 300 W 600 W Efficiency 100 to 240 V input 68% min. 73% min. 76% min. 76% min. 86% min. – – 100/200 V (Selected) – – – – – 82% min. 80% min. Input voltage 100 to 240 VAC (85 to 264 VAC) 100 to 120 VAC (85 to 132 VAC) 200 to 240 VAC (170 to 264 VAC) (Switchable) 100 to 370 VDC Note: This range is not applicable for the safety standards. Output Voltage adjustment -10% to 15% (with V. ADJ) Ripple 2% (p-p) max. Input variation 0.4% max. Temperature influence 0.05%/°C max. (at rated input and output) 0.05%/°C max. Overload protection 105% to 160% of rated load current, voltage drop, intermittent, automatic reset 105% of rated load current, voltage drop, intermittent, automatic reset 105% of rated load current, Inverted L voltage drop, the circuit will be shut OFF when the overload exceeds 5 s. Overvoltage protection yes Output indicator yes (green) Weight 250 g max. 250 g max. 300 g max. 550 g max. 600 g max. 1,600 g max. 2,500 g max. Series operation yes (For up to two Power Supplies; external diodes required.) 425 20 Power supplies S8TS Single-phase Industrial use, modular power supply for multiple configurations The S8TS is an expandable power supply; standard units can easily be snapped together in parallel to provide you with ultimate flexibility. Expandable up to 4 units, it can deliver a total power of 240W at 24VDC or a multi-output configuration. • Improves system reliability by building up N+1 redundancy • Standard unit; 60 W at 24 VDC, 30 W at 12 VDC and 25 W at 5 VDC • Battery back-up unit protects against power outage (see accessories) • Buffer unit protects against power glitches and outage (see accessories) • EMI Class B, UL Class 2, UL Class 1 division 2 Ordering information Accessories Specifications Basic block Order code Output voltage Output current Screw terminal type Connector terminal type With bus line connectors*1 *1 One S8T-BUS01 connector and one S8T-BUS02 connector are included as accessories. Without bus line connectors*2 *2 Bus line connectors can be ordered separately if necessary. With bus line connectors*1 Without bus line connectors*2 24 V 2.5 A S8TS-06024-E1*3 *3 Conforms to EMI class B with DC minus terminal ground. S8TS-06024 S8TS-06024F-E1 S8TS-06024F 12 V 2.5 A S8TS-03012-E1 S8TS-03012 S8TS-03012F-E1 S8TS-03012F 5 V 5 A – S8TS-02505 – S8TS-02505F Bus line connector Type Number of connectors Order code AC line + DC line bus (For parallel operation) 1 connector S8T-BUS01 10 connectors*1 *1 One package contains 10 S8T-BUS01 connectors. S8T-BUS11 AC line bus (For series operation or isolated operation) 1 connector S8T-BUS02 10 connectors*2 *2 One package contains 10 S8T-BUS02 connectors. S8T-BUS12 Item 5 V models 24/12 V models Single operation Single operation Parallel operation Efficiency 62% min. 24 V models: 75%, 12 V models: 70% min. Power factor 0.8 min. 24 V models: 0.9 min., 12 V models: 0.8 min. Input voltage 100 to 240 VAC, (85 to 264 VAC), single-phase Output voltage Voltage adjustment 5 V ±10% min. 24 V models: 22 to 28 V, 12 V models: 12 V ±10% min. Ripple 2% (p-p) max. 2% (p-p) max. 2% (p-p) max. Input variation 0.5% max. – – Temperature influence 0.05%/°C max. (with rated input, 10 to 100% load) Overcurrent protection 105 to 125% of rated load current, inverted L drop, automatic reset Overvoltage protection yes yes yes Output indicator yes (green) yes (green) yes (green) Weight 450 g max. 450 g max. 450 g max. Series operation yes yes yes Parallel operation no yes yes Size in mm (HxWxD) 120x43x120 426 S8T-DCBU-01/-02 Single-phase S8T-DCBU-01 The S8T-DCBU-01 battery backup block supplies 24 VDC for a fixed period of time during AC input outages to considerably improve system reliability. • Supplies 24 VDC for a long period of time during AC input outages • For system reliability improvement • Block power supply basic block is connected by the bus line connector • Simple system configuration • Alarms indicated on main unit and via alarm signal output Ordering information Note:The S8TS DC back-up block is for S8TS power supplies only. Specifications S8T-DCBU-02 Prevents equipment stoppage, data loss and other problems resulting from momentary power failures. One S8T-DCBU-02 buffer block provides a back-up time of 500 ms at an output current of 2.5 A. Can be wired to the 24 VDC output from any switch mode power supply. • Connects to all Omron power supplies: S8TS, S8VS, S82J, S82K, S8VM, S8PE • Connects to both single-phase and three-phase power supplies • Connects to an S8TS power supply via an S8T-BUS03 bus line connector • Parallel connection up to 4 units to increase back-up time and capacity • Complies with Semi F47-0200 standard Ordering information Accessories Specifications Product Input voltage Output voltage Output current Order code DC back-up block 24 to 28 VDC 24 V 3.7 A/8 A S8T-DCBU-01 Battery holder – – – S82Y-TS01 Product Input voltage Output voltage Output current Type Order code Basic block (use together with the DC back-up block) 100 to 240 VAC 24 V 2.5 A Screw terminal type With bus line connectors S8TS-06024-E1 Without bus line connectors S8TS-06024 Connector terminal type With bus line connectors S8TS-06024F-E1 Without bus line connectors S8TS-06024F Product Back-up time Overcurrent protection operating point selector Order code Battery 8 min./3.7 A 5.7 A (typ.) – LC-R122R2PG 4 min./8.0 A 5.7 A (typ.) 11.7 A (typ.) LC-R123R4PG Item Size in mm (HxWxD) S8T-DCBU-01 120x43x130 Battery holder 82x185.7x222.25 Input voltage Output voltage (during back-up operation) Output current Order code 24 VDC (24 to 28 VDC) 22.5 V 2.5 A S8T-DCBU-02 Type Number of connectors Order code DC bus line connector (for use with S8TS only) 1 connector S8T-BUS03 10 connectors S8T-BUS13 Item Size in mm(HxWxD) S8T-DCBU-02 120x43x120 427 20 Power supplies S8VT Three-phase Compact 3-phase input power supply To make the compact power supply range complete we have our 3-phase S8VT series, which give you the best power to footprint ratio. The range exists of 4 models with wattage of 120, 240, 480 and 960 W all at 24 VDC. This version is constructed from a very robust metal housing and all models are din-rail mounting. The input range cover 3 phase voltage input from 340 to 576 VAC and single phase DC input from 480 to 810 VDC. • 5, 10, 20 and 40A; 24VDC output • 3-phase input (340-576VAC) or 1-phase 480 to 810 VDC • Compact design with best footprint on the market • UL60950 (CSA22.2-60950), UL508 listing (CSA22.2-14) and CE • Parallel & serial operation possible (all models) Ordering information Specifications Power ratings Output voltage Output current Size in mm (HxWxD) Order code 120 W 24 V 5 A 125x45x130 S8VT-F12024E 240 W 24 V 10 A 170x45x130 S8VT-F24024E 480 W 24 V 20 A 170x100x130 S8VT-F48024E 960 W 24 V 40 A 170x195x130 S8VT-F96024E Item 5 A 10 A 20 A 40 A Efficiency 88% 90% 91% 91% Voltage range 340 to 576 VAC 3 AC resp, 480 to 810 VDC (1 phase) Output voltage Voltage adjustment 22.5 to 26.4 VDC min. Ripple 100 mV max. Input variation ±0.5% max. Temperature influence Less than 0.05%/°C Overload protection yes Overvoltage protection yes Output indicator yes (green) Weight 750 g 1.0 kg 1.8 kg 3.3 kg Series operation yes (for 2 units) Parallel operation yes (for 2 units) H2C Motor timer WHEN TIMING ACCURACY MATTERS! The H5CX series offers multiple-functions and -timing ranges for precise timing control, as well as real twin-timing and memory function. These and other added-value features ensure that the H5CX covers almost every possible user requirement in timers. • 15 different time functions • Three colour display value, red, orange or green • Models with instantaneous contact outputs • 0.001 s to 9999 h, 10 ranges H5CX – The most complete digital timer 428 Page 437 Timers H3DK 22.5 mm H3DS H3CR 17.5 mm Which size is required? Which mounting method is required? Which type of timer is needed? H3YN DIN-rail Plug/front Analogue H5CX 48x24 mm 48x48 mm Which size is required? Digital H8GN timer/counter 429 21 Timers Page 432 Page 433 Page 434 Page 435 Page 445 Page 436 430 Selection table Category Analogue solid state timer Selection criteria Model H3DS-M H3DS-S H3DS-A H3DS-F H3DS-G H3DS-X H3DK-M H3DK-S H3DK-F H3DK-G H3DK-H Mounting DIN-rail Size 17.5 mm 22.5 mm Type Multi-functional Twin timer Star-delta Two-wired Multi-functional Twin timer Star-delta Power OFF-delay Contact configuration Time limit Instantaneous – – – – – – – – – Programmable contacts – – – – – – – – – 14 pins – – – – – – – – – – – 11 pins – – – – – – – – – – – 8 pins – – – – – – – – – – – Screw terminals Screw-less clamp terminals – – – – – Screw-less clamp sockets – – – – – – – – – – – Inputs Voltage input – – – – – – Outputs Transistor – – – – – – – – – – – Relay – SCR – – – – – – – – – – Relay output type SPDT – – (2x) SPST-NO – – – – (2x) – – – – – – DPDT – – – – – – – – – 4PDT – – – – – – – – – – – Features Time range Total time range 0.1 s to 120 h 1 s to 120 h 2 s to 120 h 0.1 s to 12 h 1 s to 120 s 0.1 s to 120 h 0.1 s to 1,200 h 0.1 s to 1,200 h 0.1 s to 1,200 h 1 s to 120 s 0.1 s to 120 s Number of sub ranges 7 7 7 6 2 7 12 12 8 2 2 (model dependent) Supply voltage 24 to 230 VAC or 24 to 48 VDC 24 to 230 VAC or 24 to 48 VDC 24 to 230 VAC or 24 to 48 VDC 24 to 230 VAC or 24 to 48 VDC 24 to 230 VAC or 24 to 48 VDC 24 to 230 VAC or 24 to 48 VDC 24 to 240 VAC/DC or 12 VDC 24 to 240 VAC/DC or 12 VDC 24 to 240 VAC/DC or 12 VDC 24 to 240 VAC/DC, 240 to 440VAC, 12 VDC 100 to 120 VAC, 200 to 240 VAC, 24 to 48 VAC/DC Number of operating modes 8 4 1 2 1 1 8 4 1 1 1 Functions ON-delay – – – – – – Flicker OFF start – – – – – – – Flicker ON start – – – – – Signal ON-/OFF-delay – – – – – – – – – Signal OFF-delay – – – – – – – – Interval (signal or power start) – – – – – – – One-shot output (ON-delay) – – – – – – – ON-delay (fixed) – – – – – – – – – Independent ON/OFF time setting – – – – – – – – – – – Star-delta – – – – – – – – – – Remarks Transistor – – – – – – – – – – Page 432 433 Timers 431 21 Timers Category Analogue solid state timer Digital timer Motor timer Selection criteria Model H3YN H3CR-A H3CR-F H3CR-G H3CR-H H5CX H8GN H2C Mounting Socket/on panel Size 21.5 mm 1/16 DIN 1/32 DIN 1/16 DIN Type Miniature Multifunctional Twin timer Star-delta Power OFF-delay Multifunctional Preset counter/ timer Motor timer Contact configuration Time limit Instantaneous – – – Programmable contacts – – – – – – 14 pins – – – – – – – 11 pins – – 8 pins – Screw terminals – – – – – Screw-less clamp terminals – – – – – – – – Screw-less clamp sockets – – – – – – – Inputs Voltage input – – – – – – – Outputs Transistor – – – – – – Relay SCR – – – – – – – – Relay output type SPDT – – – SPST-NO – – – (2x) – – – – DPDT – – – – 4PDT – – – – – – – Features Time range Total time range 0.1 s to 10 h (model dependent) 0.05 s to 300 h, 0.1 s to 600 h (model dependent) 0.05 s to 30 h or 1.2 s to 300 h (model dependent) 0.5 s to 120 s 0.05 s to 12 s, 1.2 s to 12 min 0.001 s to 9999 h (configurable) 0.000 s to 9999 h (configurable) 0.2 s to 30 h Number of sub ranges 2 9 14 4 4 10 9 15 Supply voltage 24, 100 to 120, 200 to 230 VAC, 12, 24, 48, 100 to 110, 125 VDC 100 to 240 VAC, 100 to 125 VDC, 24 to 48 VAC, 12 to 48 VDC 100 to 240 VAC, 12 VDC, 24 VAC/DC, 48 to 125 VDC 100 to 120 VAC, 200 to 240 VAC 100 to 120 VAC, 200 to 240 VAC, 24 VAC/DC, 48 VDC, 100 to 125 VDC 100 to 240 VAC, 24 VAC, 12 to 24 VDC 24 VDC 24, 48, 100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 220, 240 VAC Number of operating modes 4 6 (model dependent) – 1 1 15 6 2 Functions ON-delay – – – Flicker OFF start – – – Flicker ON start – – – – Signal ON-/OFF-delay – – – – – – Signal OFF-delay – – – Interval (signal or power start) – – – – One-shot output (ONdelay) – – – – – – ON-delay (fixed) – – – – – – – Independent ON/OFF time setting – – – – – – Star-delta – – – – – – – Remarks Transistor – – – – – – Page 434 435 436 445 437 Standard Available – No/not available 432 H3DS Analogue solid state timers DIN-rail mounted, standard 17.5 mm wide solid state timer range This broad range of timers includes many functionalities and has a wide AC/DC power supply range. Models with screwless clamp connection available. • 17.5 mm width, modular 45 mm • DIN-rail mounting • 24-48 VDC and 24-230 VAC • 0.1 s to 120 h, 7 ranges Ordering information Specifications Type Supply voltage Control output Time setting range Operating modes Order code Screw terminal type Screw-less clamp type Multi-functional timer 24 to 230 VAC (50/60 Hz)/ 24 to 48 VDC SPDT 0.1 s to120 h ON-delay, flicker OFF start, flicker ON start, signal ON/OFF-delay, signal OFF-delay, interval, one-shot H3DS-ML H3DS-MLC Standard timer ON-delay, flicker ON start, interval, oneshot H3DS-SL H3DS-SLC Single function timer ON-delay H3DS-AL H3DS-ALC Twin timer Relay SPDT 0.1 s to 12 h Flicker OFF start, flicker ON start H3DS-FL H3DS-FLC Star-delta timer 2x Relay SPST-NO 1 s to 120 s Star-delta H3DS-GL H3DS-GLC Two-wired timer 24 to 230 VAC/VDC (50/60 Hz) SCR output 0.1 s to 120 h ON-delay H3DS-XL H3DS-XLC Terminal block Screw terminal type: Clamps two 2.5 mm2 max. bar terminals without sleeves Screw-less clamp type: Clamps two 1.5 mm2 max. bar terminals without sleeves Mounting method DIN-rail mounting Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage Power reset Minimum power-off time: 0.1 s, 0.5 s for H3DS-G Reset voltage 2.4 VAC/VDC max., 1.0 VAC/VDC max. for H3DS-X Voltage input Max. permissible capacitance between input lines (terminals B1 and A2): 2,000 pF Load connectable in parallel with inputs (terminals B1 and A1) H-level: 20.4 to 253 VAC/20.4 to 52.8 VDC L-level: 0 to 2.4 VAC/VDC Control output Contact output: 5 A at 250 VAC with resistive load (cos = 1) 5 A at 30 VDC with resistive load (cos = 1) Ambient temperature Operating: -10 to 55°C (with no icing) Storage: -25 to 65°C (with no icing) Accuracy of operating time ±1% max. of FS (±1% ±10 ms max. at 1.2 s range) Setting error ±10% ±50 ms max. of FS Influence of voltage ±0.7% max. of FS (±0.7% ±10 ms max. at 1.2 s range) Influence of temperature ±5% max. of FS (±5% ±10 ms max. at 1.2 s range) Life expectancy (not H3DS-X) Mechanical: 10 million operations min. (under no load at 1,800 operations/h) Electrical: 100,000 operations min. (5 A at 250 VAC, resistive load at 360 operations/h) Size in mm(HxWxD) 80x17.5x73 433 21 Timers H3DK Analogue solid state timers DIN-rail mounted, standard 22.5 mm wide solid state timer range The H3DK series of timers provides a wide AC/DC power supply and time range to reduce the number of items. • Size in mm (HxWxD): 79x22.5x100 • DIN-rail mounting • 12 VDC and 24-240 VAC/VDC (except -H). 240-440 VAC for -G • Wide time setting range: 0.10 s - 1,200 h (except -H and -G), 12 ranges (for -M and -S) Ordering information Specifications Type Supply voltage Control output Time setting range Operating modes Order code Multi-functional standard timers 12 VDC SPDT 0.1 s to 1200 h ON-delay, flicker OFF start, flicker ON start, signal ON/OFF-delay, signal OFF-delay, interval, one-shot H3DK-M1A DC12 DPDT H3DK-M2A DC12 *1 *1 One output can be set to instantaneous. SPDT ON-delay, flicker ON start, interval, one-shot H3DK-S1A DC12 DPDT H3DK-S2A DC12 *1 24 to 240 VAC/VDC SPDT ON-delay, flicker OFF start, flicker ON start, signal ON/OFF-delay, signal OFF-delay, interval, one-shot H3DK-M1 AC/DC24-240 DPDT H3DK-M2 AC/DC24-240 *1 SPDT ON-delay, flicker ON start, interval, one-shot H3DK-S1 AC/DC24-240 DPDT H3DK-S2 AC/DC24-240 *1 Twin timer 12 VDC SPDT 0.1 s to 12 h Flicker OFF start, flicker ON start H3DK-FA DC12 24 to 240 VAC/VDC H3DK-F AC/DC24-240 Star-delta timer 12 VDC 2x SPDT 1 to 120 s Star-delta H3DK-GA DC12 24 to 240 VAC/VDC H3DK-G AC/DC24-240 240 to 440 VAC H3DK-GE AC/DC240-440 Power OFF-delay timer 24 to 48 VAC/VDC SPDT 1 to 120 s Signal OFF-delay H3DK-HBL AC/DC24-48 0.1 to 12 s H3DK-HBS AC/DC24-48 100 to 120 VAC 1 to 120 s H3DK-HCL AC100-120V 0.1 to 12 s H3DK-HCS AC100-120V 200 to 240 VAC 1 to 120 s H3DK-HDL AC200-240V 0.1 to 12 s H3DK-HDS AC200-240V Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage (90 to 110% for the 12 VDC models). Power reset Minimum power-off time: H3DK-M/S, H3DK-F: 0.1 s, H3DK-G: 0.5 s. (Not for H3DK-H) Reset voltage 10% of rated voltage. (Not for H3DK-H) Voltage input (H3DK-M/-S) 24 to 240 VAC/DC: H-level 20.4 to 264 VAC/VDC, L-level 0 to 2.4 VAC/VDC. 12 VDC: H-level 10.8 to 13.2 VDC, L-level 0 to 1.2 VDC. Control output Contact output: 5 A at 250 VAC with resistive load (cos = 1), 5 A at 24 VDC (30 VDC for -M/-S) with resistive load (not for H3DK-GE) Ambient temperature Operating: -20 to 55°C (with no icing), storage: -40 to 70°C (with no icing) Accuracy of operating time ±1% of FS max. (±1% ±10 ms max. at 1.2 s range) Setting error ±10% of FS ±0.05 s max. Minimum input signal width 50 ms (start input) (Only for H3DK-M/S) Influence of voltage ±0.5% of FS max. (±0.5% ±10 ms max. at 1.2 s range). For H3DK-G: ±0.5% of FS max. Influence of temperature ±2% of FS max. (±2% ±10 ms max. at 1.2s range). For H3DK-G: ±2% of FS max. Life expectancy Mechanical: 10 million operations min. (under no load at 1,800 operations/h) Electrical: 100,000 operations min. (5 A at 250 VAC, resistive load at 360 operations/h) Degree of protection IP30 (terminal block: IP20) Terminal block Clamps two 2.5 mm2 max. bar terminals without sleeves Size in mm (HxWxD) 79x22.5x100 434 H3YN Analogue solid state timers Miniature timer with multiple time ranges and multiple operating modes H3YN features 4 multi-operating modes: ON-delay, interval, flicker ON start and flicker OFF start. • Size in mm (HxWxD): 28x21.5x52.6 • Plug-in • All supply voltages available • 0.1 s to 10 h • DPDT (5A) or 4PDT (3A) Ordering information Accessories Connecting socket Hold-down clips Specifications Supply voltage Functions Time-limit contact Order code Short-time range model (0.1 s to 10 min) Long-time range model (0.1 min to 10 h) 12 VDC ON-delay Interval Flicker ON Flicker OFF DPDT H3YN-2 12DC H3YN-21 12DC 24 VAC H3YN-2 24AC H3YN-21 24AC 24 VDC H3YN-2 24DC H3YN-21 24DC 100 to 120 VAC H3YN-2 100-120AC H3YN-21 100-120AC 200 to 230 VAC H3YN-2 200-230AC H3YN-21 200-230AC 12 VDC 4PDT H3YN-4 12DC H3YN-41 12DC 24 VAC H3YN-4 24AC H3YN-41 24AC 24 VDC H3YN-4 24DC H3YN-41 24DC 100 to 120 VAC H3YN-4 100-120AC H3YN-41 100-120AC 200 to 230 VAC H3YN-4 200-230AC H3YN-41 200-230AC Timer DIN-rail mounting/ front-connecting socket Back-connecting socket PCB terminal H3YN-2/-21 PYF08A, PYF08A-N, PYF08A-E PY08-02 H3YN-4/-41 PYF14A, PYF14A-N, PYF14A-E PY14-02 Applicable socket Order code PYF08A, PYF08A-N, PYF08A-E, PYF14A, PYF14A-N, PYF14A-E Y92H-3 (pair) PY08, PY08-02, PY14-02 Y92H-4 Item H3YN-2/-4 H3YN-21/-41 Time ranges 0.1 s to 10 min (1 s, 10 s, 1 min, or 10 min max. selectable) 0.1 min to 10 h (1 min, 10 min, 1 h, or 10 h max. selectable) Rated supply voltage 24, 100 to 120, 200 to 230 VAC (50/60 Hz) 12, 24, 48, 100 to 110, 125 VDC Pin type Plug-in Operating mode ON-delay, interval, flicker OFF start, or flicker ON start (selectable with DIP switch) Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage (12 VDC: 90 to 110% of rated supply voltage) Reset voltage 10% min. of rated supply voltage Control outputs DPDT: 5 A at 250 VAC, resistive load (cos = 1), 4PDT: 3 A at 250 VAC, resistive load (cos = 1) Accuracy of operating time ±1% FS max. (1 s range: ±1% ±10 ms max.) Setting error ±10% ±50 ms FS max. Reset time Min. power-opening time: 0.1 s max. (including halfway reset) Influence of voltage ±2% FS max. Influence of temperature ±2% FS max. Ambient temperature Operating: -10 to 50°C (with no icing), storage: -25 to 65°C (with no icing) Degree of protection IP40 Size in mm (HxWxD) 28x21.5x52.6 435 21 Timers H3CR Analogue solid state timers DIN 48x48 mm multi-functional timer series This elaborate range of solid state timers provides you with a multi-functional timer, twin timer, star-delta timer and a power OFF-delay timer. • 48x48 mm front-panel/plug-in • High-/low-voltage models (except -H and -G) • 0.05 s to 300 h (except -H and -G) • DPDT, 5A at 250VAC • Transistor 100mA at 30VDC Ordering information Accessories Specifications Output Number of pins Supply voltage Time range Operating mode Order code Relay DPDT 11 100 to 240 VAC/100 to 125 VDC 0.05 s to 300 h ON-delay, flicker OFF start, flicker ON start, signal ON/ OFF-delay, signal OFF-delay, interval H3CR-A 100-240AC/100-125DC 24 to 48 VAC/12 to 48 VDC H3CR-A 24-48AC/12-48DC Transistor 24 to 48 VAC/12 to 48 VDC 0.05 s to 300 h H3CR-AS 24-48AC/12-48DC Relay DPDT 8 100 to 240 VAC/100 to 125 VDC 0.05 s to 300 h ON-delay, flicker ON start, interval, one-shot H3CR-A8 100-240AC/100-125DC 24 to 48 VAC/12 to 48 VDC H3CR-A8 24-48AC/12-48DC Transistor 24 to 48 VAC/12 to 48 VDC 0.05 s to 300 h H3CR-A8S 24-48AC/12-48DC Relay SPDT 100 to 240 VAC/100 to 125 VDC H3CR-A8E 100-240AC/100-125DC 24 to 48 VAC/VDC H3CR-A8E 24-48AC/DC Relay DPDT 11 100 to 240 VAC 0.05 s to 30 h Flicker OFF start H3CR-F 100-240AC 24 VAC/VDC H3CR-F 24AC/DC 8 100 to 240 VAC H3CR-F8 100-240AC 24 VAC/VDC H3CR-F8 24AC/DC 11 100 to 240 VAC 0.05 s to 30 h Flicker ON start H3CR-FN 100-240AC 24 VAC/VDC H3CR-FN 24AC/DC 8 100 to 240 VAC H3CR-F8N 100-240AC 24 VAC/VDC H3CR-F8N 24AC/DC Time-limit contact and instantaneous contact 100 to 120 VAC Star-delta H3CR-G8EL 100-120AC 200 to 240 VAC H3CR-G8EL 200-240AC DPDT 8 100 to 120 VAC 0.05 to 12 s Power OFF-delay H3CR-H8LS 100-120AC 200 to 240 VAC H3CR-H8LS 200-240AC 24 VAC/VDC H3CR-H8LS 24AC/DC 100 to 120 VAC 0.05 to 12 m H3CR-H8LM 100-120AC 200 to 240 VAC H3CR-H8LM 200-240AC 24 VAC/VDC H3CR-H8LM 24AC/DC Name/specifications Order code Flush-mounting adapter Y92F-30 Protective cover Y92A-48B Front connecting socket 8-pin, finger-safe type, DIN-rail P2CF-08-E Front connecting socket 11-pin, finger-safe type, DIN-rail P2CF-11-E Back connecting socket 8-pin P3G-08 11-pin P3GA-11 Name/specifications Order code Time setting ring Setting a specific time Y92S-27 Limiting the setting range Y92S-28 Panel cover Light grey (5Y7/1) Y92P-48GL Black (N1.5) Y92P-48GB Accuracy of operating time ±0.2% FS max. (±0.2% ±10 ms max. in a range of 1.2 s) Influence of voltage ±0.2% FS max. (±0.2% ±10 ms max. in a range of 1.2 s) Influence of temperature ±1% FS max. (±1% ±10 ms max. in a range of 1.2 s) Ambient temperature Operating: -10 to 55°C (with no icing), storage: -25 to 65°C (with no icing) Life expectancy Mechanical: 20,000,000 operations min. (under no load at 1,800 operations/h) Electrical: 100,000 operations min. (5 A at 250 VAC, resistive load at 1,800 operations/h) Size in mm (HxWxD) 48x48x66.6 (H3CR-A, -F), 48x48x78 (H3CR-G, -H) Setting error ±5% FS ±50 ms Degree of protection IP40 (panel surface) Weight Approx. 90 g 436 H5CX Digital timers The most complete digital standard timer on the market H5CX offers you the most complete series of products on the market today. Based on extensive customer research, these new timers have been designed with value added features that users both need and appreciate. • Size in mm (HxWxD): 48x48x59 to 78 mm • Three colour display value, red, green or orange • Models with Instantaneous Contact Outputs • 0.001 s to 9999 h, 10 ranges • Input NPN, PNP and contact Ordering information Accessories Specifications Output type Supply voltage Functions External connection Size in mm (HxWxD) Inputs Order code Contact output 100 to 240 VAC A: Signal ON-delay A-1: Signal ON-delay 2 A-2: Power ON-delay 1 A-3: Power ON-delay 2 b: Repeat cycle 1 b-1: Repeat cycle 2 d: Signal OFF-delay E: Interval F: Cumulative Z: ON/OFF-duty adjustable flicker toff: Twin timer OFF start ton: Twin timer ON start Screw terminals 48x48x84 Signal, Reset, Gate (NPN/PNP inputs) H5CX-A-N 12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC 48x48x65 H5CX-AD-N Transistor output 100 to 240 VAC 48x48x84 H5CX-AS-N 12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC 48x48x65 H5CX-ASD-N Contact output 100 to 240 VAC 11-pin socket 48x48x69.7 Signal, Reset, Gate (NPN/PNP inputs) H5CX-A11-N 12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC H5CX-A11D-N Transistor output 100 to 240 VAC H5CX-A11S-N 12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC H5CX-A11SD-N Contact output 100 to 240 VAC 8-pin socket 48x48x69.7 Signal, Reset (NPN inputs) H5CX-L8-N 12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC H5CX-L8D-N Transistor output 100 to 240 VAC H5CX-L8S-N 12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC H5CX-L8SD-N Contact output Models with instantaneous contact outputs 100 to 240 VAC A-2: Power ON-delay 1 b: Repeat cycle 1 E: Interval Z: ON/OFF-duty adjustable flicker toff: Twin timer OFF start 1 ton: Twin timer ON start 1 – H5CX-L8E-N 12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC H5CX-L8ED-N Transistor output 12 to 24 VDC A: Signal ON-delay 1 F: Cumulative Screw terminals 48x48x65 Signal, Reset, Gate (NPN/PNP inputs) H5CX-BWSD-N Name Order code Flush-mounting adapter Y92F-30 Waterproof packing Y92S-29 Front-connecting socket 8-pin, finger safe type P2CF-08-E 11-pin, finger safe type P2CF-11-E Back-connecting socket 8-pin P3G-08 11-pin P3GA-11 Hard cover Y92A-48 Soft cover Y92A-48F1 Front panels (4-digit models) Light gray Y92P-CXT4G White Y92P-CXT4S Item H5CX-A_ H5CX-A11_ H5CX-L8_ Display 7-segment, negative transmissive LCD Present value: 12 mm high characters red, orange or green (programmable) red Set value: 6 mm high characters, green Digits 4 digits Total time range 0.001 s to 9,999 h (configurable) Timer mode Elapsed time (Up), remaining time (Down) (selectable) Input signals Signal, reset, gate Signal, reset Key protection Yes Memory backup EEPROM (overwrites: 100,000 times min.) that can store data for 10 years min. Ambient temperature Operating: -10 to 55°C (no icing or condensation), side-by-side mounting: -10 to 50°C Case colour Black (N1.5) 437 21 Timers H2C Motor timers DIN-sized (48x48) motor timer with variable time ranges This motor timer series provides you with many features, such as ON-delay, time indicator, moving pointer and synchronous motor. Moreover, the LED indicator shows the time operation, time range and the rated voltage. • DIN-sized 48x48mm • Front-panel/plug-in/DIN-rail • All supply voltages available • 0.2 s to 30 h • SPDT, 6A at 250VAC Ordering information Note: Other voltages available on request Accessories Specifications Operation/resetting system Internal connection Terminal Time-limit contact Instantaneou s contact Time range code Order code Time-limit operation/ electric resetting Separate motor and clutch connection 11-pin socket SPDT SPDT 1.25 s to 30 h in 5 ranges H2C-RSA 110AC H2C-RSA 220AC H2C-RSA 24AC 0.2 s to 6 h in 5 ranges H2C-RSB 110AC H2C-RSB 220AC H2C-RSB 24AC 0.5 s to 12 h in 5 ranges H2C-RSC 110AC H2C-RSC 220AC H2C-RSC 24AC Time-limit operation/ self-resetting Separate motor and clutch connection 11-pin socket SPDT SPDT 1.25 s to 30 h in 5 ranges H2C-SA 110AC H2C-SA 220AC H2C-SA 24AC 0.2 s to 6 h in 5 ranges H2C-SB 110AC H2C-SB 220AC H2C-SB 24AC 0.5 s to 12 h in 5 ranges H2C-SC 110AC H2C-SC 220AC H2C-SC 24AC Name/specifications Order code DIN-rail mounting/ front-connecting socket 8-pin, finger safe type P2CF-08-E 11-pin, finger safe type P2CF-11-E Back-connecting socket 8-pin, screw terminal P3G-08 11-pin P3GA-11 Name/specifications Order code Hold-down clip (pair) For PL08 and PL11 sockets Y92H-1 For PF085A socket Y92H-2 Flush mounting adapter Y92F-30 Time setting ring Y92A-Y1 Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage Reset voltage 10% max. of rated supply voltage Reset time Min. power-opening time: 0.5 s, min. pulse width: 0.5 s Control outputs 6 A at 250 VAC, resistive load (cos = 1) Mounting method Flush mounting (except for H2C-F/-FR models), surface-mounting, DIN-rail mounting Life expectancy Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations min. Electrical: 500,000 operations min. Motor life expectancy 20,000 h Accuracy of operating time ±0.5% FS max. (±1% max. at 0.2 to 6 s for the time range code B or at 0.5 to 12 s for the time range code C) Setting error ±2% FS max. Reset time 0.5 s max. Influence of voltage ±1% FS max. Influence of temperature ±2% FS max. Ambient temperature Operating: -10 to 50°C Case colour Light grey (Munsell 5Y7/1) Degree of protection IP40 (panel surface) Size in mm (HxWxD) 48x48x77.5 H7ER Speed H7EC Totalising H7ET Timer Which type of application? 48x24 mm (1/32 DIN) Which size is required? Totalising MULTI-FUNCTIONAL PRESET COUNTER The H7CX series offers the ultimate in versatility and intuitive programming. • 7 basic functions in one • Switching colour on threshold, green, orange & red • Twin counter mode • 12 different outputs modes • Display 6 digits from -100 K +1 up to 1 M -1 H7CX – Designed with value added features 438 Page 442 Page 443 Page 444 Counters H7CX H8GN counter/timer 48x24 mm (1/32 DIN) 48x48 mm (1/16 DIN) Which size is required? Pre-set counter time count What is the type of counting application? H8PS 96x96 mm (1/4 DIN) Which size is required? Cam positioner 439 22 Counters Page 445 Page 446 Page 447 440 Selection table Category Self-powered total Self-powered timer Self-powered tachometer Selection criteria Model H7EC H7ET H7ER Display LCD Size 1/32 DIN Outputs Control outputs – – – 5 stage – – – Total – Time – – Preset – – – Batch – – – Dual – – – Tachometer – Inputs Control inputs No-voltage, PNP/NPN, DC-voltage, AC/DC multi-voltage No-voltage, PNP/NPN, DC-voltage, AC/DC multi-voltage No-voltage, PNP/NPN Features Dual operation – – – Number of digits 8 7 4 or 5 NPN/PNP switch Back-lit External reset – Manual reset – Number of banks – – – Built-in sensor power supply – – – IP rating IP66 IP66 IP66 Terminals Screw terminals PCB terminals – – – 11-pin socket – – – Supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC – – – 12 to 24 VDC – – – 24 VDC Comms – – – Functions Up – Down – – – Up/down – – – Reversible – – – Speed 0 to 30 Hz or 0 to 1 kHz – 1 or 10 kHz Counting range 0 to 99999999 0.0 h to 999999.9 h <--> 0.0 h to 3999 d 23.9 h or 0 s to 999 h 59 min 59 s <--> 0.0 min to 9999 h 59.9 min 1000 s-1 or 1000 min-1; 1000 s-1 or 1000 min-1 <--> 10000 min-1 Colour Beige Black Page 442 443 444 Counters 441 22 Counters Counter type Pre-set counter/timer Pre-set counter Cam positioner Selection criteria Model H8GN H7CX H8PS Display LCD negative transmissive LCD negative transmissive Size 1/32 DIN 1/16 DIN 1/4 DIN Outputs Control outputs 1 relay (SPDT) 1 relay (SPDT), transistor NPN or PNP, cam outputs 8/16/32, run out, tachometer 5 stage – Total – Time – – Preset – Batch – Dual – Tachometer – – Inputs Control inputs No-voltage No-voltage, PNP/NPN Encoder Features Dual operation Number of digits PV: 4, SV: 4 PV: 4, SV: 4 or PV: 6, SV: 6 7 NPN/PNP switch – – Back-lit – External reset – Manual reset 8 (16- and 32-output models only) Number of banks 4 – – Built-in sensor power supply – – IP rating IP66 IP66 IP40 Terminals Screw terminals PCB terminals – – 11-pin socket – – Supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC – – 12 to 24 VDC – – 24 VDC – Comms – – Functions Up – Down – Up/down – – Reversible – Speed 0 to 30 Hz or 0 to 5 kHz 0 to 30 Hz or 0 to 5 kHz – Counting range -999 to 9999 -99999 to 999999 – Colour Beige – – Black – Page 445 446 447 Standard Available – No/not available 442 H7EC Totalisers Self-powered LCD totaliser The H7E series is available with large display with 8.6 mm character height. It includes models with backlight for improved visibility in dimly lit places. The H7E family includes total counters, time counters, tachometers and PCB mounted counters. • Size in mm (HxWxD): 24x48x55.5, 1/32 DIN size housing • 8 digits, 8.6 mm character height • Black or light-grey housing • Dual input speed: 30 Hz <-> 1 kHz • Short body: all models have a depth of 48.5 mm Ordering information Specifications Count input Max. counting speed Display Order code Light grey body Black body No-voltage 30 Hz <-> 1 kHz (switchable) 7-segment LCD H7EC-N H7EC-N-B PNP/NPN universal DC voltage input 30 Hz <-> 1 kHz (switchable) 7-segment LCD H7EC-NV H7EC-NV-B 7-segment LCD with backlight H7EC-NV-H H7EC-NV-BH AC/DC multi-voltage input 20 Hz 7-segment LCD H7EC-NFV H7EC-NFV-B Item H7EC-NV-_/H7EC-NV-_H H7EC-NFV-_ H7EC-N-_ Operating mode Up type Mounting method Flush mounting External connections Screw terminals, optional wire-wrap terminals Number of digits 8 Display 7-segment LCD with or without backlight, zero suppression (character height: 8.6 mm) Max. counting speed 30 Hz/1 kHz 20 Hz 30 Hz/1 kHz Case colour Light grey or black (-B models) Attachment Waterproof packing, flush mounting bracket Supply voltage Backlight model: 24 VDC (0.3 W max.) (only for backlight) No-backlight model: Not required (powered by built-in battery) Not required (powered by built-in battery) Count input High (logic) level: 4.5 to 30 VDC Low (logic) level: 0 to 2 VDC (input impedance: Approx. 4.7 k) High (logic) level: 24 to 240 VAC/VDC, 50/60 Hz Low (logic) level: 0 to 2.4 VAC/VDC, 50/60 Hz No voltage input Maximum short-circuit impedance: 10 k max. Short-circuit residual voltage: 0.5 V max. Reset input No voltage input Minimum open impedance: 750 k min. Maximum short-circuit impedance: 10 k max. Short-circuit residual voltage: 0.5 V max. Minimum open impedance: 750 k min. Minimum signal width 20 Hz: 25 ms, 30 Hz: 16.7 ms, 1 KHz: 0.5 ms Reset system External reset and manual reset: Minimum signal width of 20 ms Ambient temperature Operating: -10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing), storage: -25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing) Degree of protection Front-panel: IP66, NEMA4, terminal block: IP20 Battery life (reference) 7 years min. with continuous input at 25°C (lithium battery) Size in mm (HxWxD) 24x48x55.5 443 22 Counters H7ET Totalisers Self-powered time counter The H7E series is available with large display with 8.6mm character height. It includes models with backlight for improved visibility in dimly lit places. The H7E family includes total counters, time counters, tachometers and PCB mounted counters. • Size in mm (HxWxD) 24x48x55.5, 1/32 DIN size housing • 7 digits, 8.6mm character height • Black or light-grey housing • Dual time range 999999.9 h <-> 3999 d 23.9 h or 999 h 59 m 59 s <-> 9999 h 59.9m Ordering information Specifications Timer input Display Order code Time range 999999.9h <-> 3999d23.9h (switchable) Time range 999h59m59s <-> 9999h59.9m Light grey body Black body Light grey body Black body No-voltage input 7-segment LCD H7ET-N H7ET-N-B H7ET-N1 H7ET-N1-B PNP/NPN universal DC voltage input 7-segment LCD H7ET-NV H7ET-NV-B H7ET-NV1 H7ET-NV1-B 7-segment LCD with backlight H7ET-NV-H H7ET-NV-BH H7ET-NV1-H H7ET-NV1-BH AC/DC multi-voltage input 7-segment LCD H7ET-NFV H7ET-NFV-B H7ET-NFV1 H7ET-NFV1-B Item H7ET-NV_-_/H7ET-NV_-_H H7ET-NFV_-_ H7ET-N_-_ Operating mode Accumulating Mounting method Flush mounting External connections Screw terminals Display 7-segment LCD with or without backlight, zero suppression (character height: 8.6 mm) Number of digits 7 Case colour Light grey or black (-B models) Attachment Waterproof packing, flush mounting bracket, time unit labels Supply voltage Backlight model: 24 VDC (0.3 W max.) (for backlight) No-backlight model: Not required (powered by built-in battery) Not required (powered by built-in battery) Timer input High (logic) level: 4.5 to 30 VDC Low (logic) level: 0 to 2 VDC (Input impedance: Approx. 4.7 k) High (logic) level: 24 to 240 VAC/VDC, 50/60 Hz Low (logic) level: 0 to 2.4 VAC/VDC, 50/60 Hz No voltage input Maximum short-circuit impedance: 10 k max. Short-circuit residual voltage: 0.5 V max. Reset input No voltage input Minimum open impedance: 750 k min. Maximum short-circuit impedance: 10 k max. Short-circuit residual voltage: 0.5 V max. Minimum open impedance: 750 k min. Minimum pulse width 1 s Reset system External reset and manual reset: Minimum signal width of 20 ms Ambient temperature Operating: -10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing), storage: -25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing) Time accuracy ±100 ppm (25°C) Degree of protection Front-panel: IP66, NEMA4 with waterproof packing, terminal block: IP20 Battery life (reference) 10 years min. with continuous input at 25°C (lithium battery) Size in mm (HxWxD) 24x48x55.5 444 H7ER Totalisers Self-powered tachometer The H7E series is available with large display with 8.6mm character height. It includes models with backlight for improved visibility in dimly lit places. The H7E family includes total counters, time counters, tachometers and PCB mounted counters. • Size in mm (HxWxD) 24x48x53.5, 1/32 DIN size housing • 5 digits, 8.6mm character height • Black or light-grey housing • Dual revolution display Ordering information Specifications Count input Display Order code Max. revolutions displayed (applicable encoder resolution) 1,000 s-1 (1 pulse/rev.) 1,000 min-1 (60 pulse/rev.) 1,000.0 s-1 (10 pulse/rev) 1,000.0 min-1 (600 pulse/rev) <-> 10,000 min-1 (60 pulse/rev) (switchable) Light grey body Black body Light grey body Black body No-voltage input 7-segment LCD H7ER-N H7ER-N-B PNP/NPN universal DC voltage input 7-segment LCD H7ER-NV H7ER-NV-B H7ER-NV1 H7ER-NV1-B 7-segment LCD with backlight H7ER-NV-H H7ER-NV-BH H7ER-NV1-H H7ER-NV1-BH Item H7ER-NV1-_/H7ER-NV1-_H H7ER-NV-_/H7ER-NV-_H H7ER-N-_ Operating mode Up type Mounting method Flush mounting External connections Screw terminals, wire-wrap terminals Display 7-segment LCD with or without backlight, zero suppression (character height: 8.6 mm) Number of digits 5 4 Max. revolutions displayed 1,000.0 s-1 (when encoder resolution of 10 pulse/rev is used) 1,000.0 min-1 (when encoder resolution of 600 pulse/rev is used) <-> 10,000 min-1 (when encoder resolution of 60 pulse/rev is used) (switchable with switch) 1,000 s-1 (when encoder resolution of 1 pulse/rev is used) 1,000 min-1 (when encoder resolution of 60 pulse/rev is used) Attachment Waterproof packing, flush mounting bracket, revolution unit labels Supply voltage Backlight model: 24 VDC (0.3 W max.) (for backlight lit) No-backlight model: Not required (powered by built-in battery) Not required (powered by built-in battery) Count input High (logic) level: 4.5 to 30 VDC Low (logic) level: 0 to 2 VDC (Input impedance: Approx. 4.7 k) No voltage input Maximum short-circuit impedance: 10 k max. Short-circuit residual voltage: 0.5 V max. Minimum open impedance: 750 k min. Max. counting speed 10 kHz 1 kHz Minimum signal width 10 kHz: 0.05 ms, 1 kHz: 0.5 ms Ambient temperature Operating: -10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing), storage: -25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing) Degree of protection Front-panel: IP66, NEMA4 with waterproof packing, terminal block: IP20 Battery life (reference) 7 years min. with continuous input at 25°C (lithium battery) Size in mm (HxWxD) 24x48x53.5 445 22 Counters H8GN Pre-set counters World’s smallest compact preset counter/timer The H8GN is a 1/32 DIN timer and counter in one. It is simple to switch between the timer and counter functions. During operation it is also possible to switch the display to monitor the totalising count value in 8 digits. Many sophisticated functions come as standard with H8GN. • Size in mm (HxWxD) 24x48x83, 1/32 DIN size housing • 8 digit display, 4 value and 4 set value • Front mounting • -999 to 9999 • 24 VDC Ordering information Specifications Functions Supply voltage Output Order code Communications Counter Timer No communications RS-485 Counter: Up/down/reversible, 4 digits, N, F, C or K output modes Total counter: 8 digits A: ON-delay B: Flicker D: Signal OFF-delay E: Interval F: Accumulative Z: ON/OFF-duty adjustable flicker 24 VDC Contact output (SPDT) H8GN-AD H8GN-AD-FLK Rated supply voltage 24 VDC Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage Power consumption 1.5 W max. (for max. DC load) (inrush current: 15 A max.) Mounting method Flush-mounting External connections Screw terminals (M3 screws) Terminal screw tightening torque 0.5 Nm max. Attachment Waterproof packing, flush-mounting bracket Display 7-segment, negative transmissive LCD; time display (h, min, s); CMW, OUT, RST, TOTAL Present value (red, 7 mm high characters); set value (green, 3.4 mm high characters) Digits PV: 4 digits, SV: 4 digits, when total count value is displayed: 8 digits (zeros suppressed) Memory backup EEPROM (non-volatile memory) (number of writes: 100,000 times) Counter Maximum counting speed 30 Hz or 5 kHz Counting range -999 to 9,999 Input modes Increment, decrement, individual, quadrature inputs Timer Timer modes Elapsed time (up), remaining time (down) Inputs Input signals For counter: CP1, CP2, and reset For timer: Start, gate, and reset Input method No-voltage input (contact short-circuit and open input) Short-circuit (ON) impedance: 1 k max. (approx. 2 mA runoff current at 0 ) Short-circuit (ON) residual voltage: 2 VDC max. Open (OFF) impedance: 100 k min. Applied voltage: 30 VDC max. Start, reset, gate Minimum input signal width: 1 or 20 ms (selectable) Power reset Minimum power-opening time: 0.5 s Control output SPDT contact output: 3 A at 250 VAC/30 VDC, resistive load (cos = 1) Minimum applied load 10 mA at 5 VDC (failure level: P, reference value) Reset system External, manual, and power supply resets (for timer in A, B, D, E, or Z modes) Sensor waiting time 260 ms max. (inputs cannot be received during sensor wait time if control outputs are turned OFF) Timer function Accuracy of operating time and setting error (including temperature and voltage effects) Signal start: ±0.03% ±30 ms max. Power-ON start: ±0.03% ±50 ms max. Ambient temperature Operating storage -10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation) -25 to 65°C (with no icing or condensation) Case colour Rear section: Grey smoke; front section: N1.5 (black) Degree of protection Panel surface: IP66 and NEMA Type 4X (indoors); rear case: IP20, terminal block: IP20 Size in mm (HxWxD) 24x48x83 446 H7CX Pre-set counters The most complete digital standard counter on the market H7CX offers you the most complete series of products on the market today. Based on extensive customer research, these new counters have been designed with value added features that users both need and appreciate. • Size in mm (HxWxD) 48x48x59 to 78mm 1/16 DIN size housing • Three colour display value, red, green or orange • Twin counter mode • 6 digit model -99,999 to 999,999, set value -99,999 to 999,999 or 0 to 999,999 • Input contact, NPN or PNP Ordering information Accessories Specifications Type External connection Sensor power supply Supply voltage Output type Digits Size in mm (HxWxD) Order code 1-stage counter 1-stage counter with total counter 2-stage counter 1-stage counter with batch counter Dual counter (addition/subtraction) Tachometer Twin counter Screw terminal 12 VDC 100 to 240 VAC Contact and transistor output 6 48x48x84 H7CX-AU-N 12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC H7CX-AUD1-N Transistor output (2x) H7CX-AUSD1-N 100 to 240 VAC Contact output (2x) H7CX-AW-N 12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC H7CX-AWD1-N 1-stage counter 1-stage counter with total counter 11-pin socket 12 VDC 100 to 240 VAC Contact output 48x48x69.7 H7CX-A11-N 12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC H7CX-A11D1-N 100 to 240 VAC Transistor output H7CX-A11S-N 12 to 24 VDC/24 VAC H7CX-A11SD1-N Screw terminal 100 to 240 VAC Contact output 48x48x84 H7CX-A-N 100 to 240 VAC Transistor output H7CX-AS-N Name Order code Flush-mounting adapter Y92F-30 Waterproof packing Y92S-29 DIN-rail mounting/front-connecting socket 11-pin, finger safe type P2CF-11-E Back-connecting socket 11-pin P3GA-11 Finger safe terminal cover for P3GA-11 Y92A-48G Hard cover Y92A-48 Soft cover Y92A-48F1 Front panels (4-digit models) Light gray Y92P-CXC4G White Y92P-CXC4S Front panels (6-digit models) Light gray Y92P-CXC6G White Y92P-CXC6S Display 7-segment, negative transmissive LCD Digits 6-digits: -99,999 to 999,999, SV range: -99999 to 999999 or 0 to 999999 Max. counting speed 30 Hz or 5 kHz (selectable, ON/OFF ratio 1:1) Input modes Increment, decrement, increment/decrement (UP/DOWN A (command input), UP/DOWN B (individual inputs), or UP/DOWN C (quadrature inputs)) Control output Contact output: 3 A at 250 VAC/30 VDC, resistive load (cos= 1) Minimum applied load: 10 mA at 5 VDC Transistor output:NPN open collector, 100 mA at 30 VDC Residual voltage: 1.5 VDC max. (approx. 1V) Leakage current: 0.1 mA max. Key protection Yes Decimal point adjustment Yes (rightmost 3 digits) Sensor waiting time 290 ms max. Memory backup EEPROM (overwrites: 100,000 times min.) stores data 10 years min. Ambient temperature Operating: -10 to 55°C (-10 to 50°C when mounted side by side) Case colour Black (N1.5) (Optional Front Panels are available to change the Front Panel colour to light gray or white.) Life expectancy Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations min. Electrical: 100,000 operations min. (3 A at 250 VAC, resistive load) Degree of protection Panel surface: IP66, NEMA 4 (indoors), and UL Type 4X (indoors) 447 22 Counters H8PS Cam positioners Compact, easy-to-use cam positioner The H8PS provides high speed operation at 1,600 r/min and high-precision settings to 0.5° ensuring widespread application. H8PS features a highly visible display with back-lit negative transmissive LCD. Advance angle compensation function compensates for output delays. • 96 to 121.2Hx96Wx60.6 to 67.5D mm • Front-panel / DIN-rail • 24 VDC • 8-, 16- and 32-outputs • NPN/PNP 100 mA at 30 VDC Ordering information Encoders Accessories Encoder accessories Specifications Number of outputs Mounting method Output configuration Bank function Size in mm (HxWxD) Order code 8-outputs Flush-mounting NPN transistor output No 96x96x67.5 H8PS-8B PNP transistor output H8PS-8BP Front-mounting/DIN-rail mounting NPN transistor output 96x96x60.6 H8PS-8BF PNP transistor output H8PS-8BFP 16-outputs Flush-mounting NPN transistor output Yes 96x96x67.5 H8PS-16B PNP transistor output H8PS-16BP Front-mounting/DIN-rail mounting NPN transistor output 121.2x96x60.6 H8PS-16BF PNP transistor output H8PS-16BFP 32-outputs Flush-mounting NPN transistor output 96x96x67.5 H8PS-32B PNP transistor output H8PS-32BP Front-mounting/DIN-rail mounting NPN transistor output 121.2x96x60.6 H8PS-32BF PNP transistor output H8PS-32BFP Type Resolution Cable length Order code Economy 256 2 m E6CP-AG5C-C 256 2M Standard 256 1 m E6C3-AG5C-C 256 1M 2 m E6C3-AG5C-C 256 2M 360 E6C3-AG5C-C 360 2M 720 E6C3-AG5C-C 720 2M Rigid 256 2 m E6F-AG5C-C 256 2M 360 E6F-AG5C-C 360 2M 720 E6F-AG5C-C 720 2M Name Specification Order code Discrete wire output cable 2 m Y92S-41-200 Connector-type output cable 2 m E5ZE-CBL200 Support software CD-ROM H8PS-SOFT-V1 USB cable A miniB, 2 m Y92S-40 Parallel input adapter Two units can operate in parallel Y92C-30 Protective cover Y92A-96B Watertight cover Y92A-96N DIN-rail mounting base Y92F-91 Name Specification Order code Shaft coupling for the E6CP Axis: 6 mm dia. E69-C06B Shaft coupling for the E6C3 Axis: 8 mm dia. E69-C08B Shaft coupling for the E6F Axis: 10 mm dia. E69-C10B Extension cable 5 m (same for E6CP, E6C3, and E6F) E69-DF5 Rated supply voltage 24 VDC Inputs Encoder input 8-output models: None; 16-/32-output models: Bank inputs 1/2/4, origin input, start input External inputs Input signals 8-output models: None; 16-/32-output models: Bank inputs 1/2/4, origin input, start input Input type No voltage inputs: ON impedance: 1 k max. (leakage current: Approx. 2 mA at 0 ) ON residual voltage: 2 V max., OFF impedance: 100 k min., applied voltage: 30 VDC max. Minimum input signal width: 20 ms Number of banks 8 banks (for 16-/32-output models only) Display method 7-segment, negative transmissive LCD (main display: 11 mm (red), sub-display: 5.5 mm (green)) Memory backup method EEPROM (overwrites: 100,000 times min.) that can store data for 10 years min. Ambient operating temperature -10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation) Storage temperature -25 to 65°C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient humidity 25 to 85% Degree of protection Panel surface: IP40, rear case: IP20 Case colour Light grey (Munsell 5Y7/1) ZEN-10C2 10 (6 I, 4 O) expandable up to 34 I/O ZEN-20C2 How many I/O points? LED type 20 (12 I, 8 O) expandable up to 44 I/O FLEXIBLE AUTOMATION EXPANDED Our range is extended with a communication model. Now you have the possibility to connect several ZEN in a network environment. This will enhance the ZEN series to solve even more applications. • RS-485 communication • To connect up to 32 units • Easy CompoWayF protocol ZEN-C4 – More flexibility with RS-485 communication 448 Page 452 Page 453 Programmable relays ZEN-10C1 What functionality is required? ZEN-20C1 ZEN-10C3 ZEN-20C3 ZEN-10C4 ZEN-8E 10 (6 I, 4 O) expandable up to 34 I/O 20 (12 I, 8 O) expandable up to 44 I/O 10 (6 I, 4 O) fixed I/O 20 (12 I, 8 O) fixed I/O 10 (6 I, 4 O) expandable up to 33 I/O with communication How many I/O points? Display type with buttons, calendar and clock Expansion unit 8 I/O (4 I, 4 O) How many extra I/O points? 449 23 Programmable relays Page 452 Page 453 Page 452 Page 453 Page 452 Page 454 450 Programmable relays 451 23 Programmable relays Model ZEN-10C ZEN-20C Type CPU unit CPU unit Features C1 With LCD Display, program/control buttons, calendar and real-time clock With LCD display, program/control buttons, calendar and real-time clock Features C2 With LED indication Logic control Programming by software With LED indication Logic control Programming by software Features C3 Same as C1 but not expandable. Same as C1 but not expandable. Features C4 Same as C1 but instead of one output relay you get RS-485 communication. – Features Starter kits Complete set with C1 CPU including software, cable and manual – Number of I / O points 10 expandable up to 34 I/O (C4 up to 33 I/O) 20 expandable up to 44 I/O Inputs 6 12 Inputs/power supply 100 to 240 VAC or 12 to 24 VDC 100 to 240 VAC or 12 to 24 VDC Outputs 4 relays (C4 = 3 relays) or 4 transistors 8 relays or 8 transistors Page 452 453 – No/not available Selection table 452 ZEN-10C Programmable relays Flexible automation The ZEN-10C offers simple logic control in a choice of four CPU units. Expansion is possible on three of these CPU's of up to 34 I/O whereas the fourth (C3 Units) is fixed at 10 I/O. All DC models have analogue input and a high-speed counter input up to 150 Hz. • DC input/supply units have analogue input + high speed counter • The ZEN-10C4 has RS-485 communication • Expansion available with relay output or transistor output • ZEN-Kits the best choice to start! Ordering information Specifications Accessories Name Number of I/O points Inputs (I)/ power supply Outputs (Q) Type LCD, buttons (B), calendar and clock Analogue input/ comparators (A) 8-digit counter (F)/ comparators (G) No. of bits 16 No. of bits 8 Size in mm (HxWxD) Order code CPU units 10 Expandable up to 34 I/O 6 100 to 240 VAC 4 Relays LCD yes – – Work bits (M) Holding bits (H) Timers (T) Counters (C) Weekly timers (@) LCD display (D) Timer/counter comparator (P) Holding timers (#) Button input (B) 90x70x56 ZEN-10C1AR-A-V2 LED – – – ZEN-10C2AR-A-V2 12 to 24 VDC LCD yes yes / 4 yes / 4 ZEN-10C1DR-D-V2 LED – yes / 4 yes / 4 ZEN-10C2DR-D-V2 Transistors LCD yes yes / 4 yes / 4 ZEN-10C1DT-D-V2 LED – yes / 4 yes / 4 ZEN-10C2DT-D-V2 Fixed I/O 100 to 240 VAC Relays LCD yes – yes / 4 ZEN-10C3AR-A-V2 12 to 24 VDC LCD yes yes / 4 yes / 4 ZEN-10C3DR-D-V2 10 Expandable up to 33 I/O 100 to 240 VAC 3 LCD/ Comm. yes – yes / 4 ZEN-10C4AR-A-V2 12 to 24 VDC yes yes / 4 yes / 4 ZEN-10C4DR-D-V2 ZEN kit Set containing CPU unit (ZEN-10C1AR-A-V2), connecting cable, ZEN support software and manual. ZEN-KIT01-EV4 Set containing CPU unit (ZEN-10C1DR-D-V2), connecting cable, ZEN support software and manual. ZEN-KIT02-EV4 Item Specifications ZEN-10C_AR-A-V2 ZEN-10C_D_-D-V2 Power supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 12 to 24 VDC (DC ripple rate: 5%) Rated power supply voltage 85 to 264 VAC 10.8 to 28.8 VDC Power consumption 9 VA max. 4 W max. Inrush current 3 A max. 30 A max. Ambient temperature 0°C to 55°C (-25°C to 55°C for ZEN-10C2 models (LED)) Ambient storage -20°C to 55°C (-40°C to 75°C for ZEN-10C2 models (LED)) Control method Stored program control I/O control method Cyclic scan Programming language Ladder diagram Program capacity 96 lines (3 input conditions and 1 output per line) LCD display 12 characters x 4 lines, with backlight (LCD-type CPU unit only) Operation keys 8 (4 cursor keys and 4 operation keys) (LCD-type CPU unit only) Super-capacitor holding time 2 days min. (25°C) Battery life (ZEN-BAT01) 10 years min. (25°C) Calendar & Clock function Accuracy: ± 15 s/month (at 25°C) Name Description Order code Memory Cassette EEPROM (for data security and copying) ZEN-ME01 Battery unit Battery (keeps time, date and bit values for 10 years at 25°C) ZEN-BAT01 Connecting Cable For the programming software, RS-232C cable, 9-way `D' connector for PC ZEN-CIF01 USB-Serial conversion cable USB-Serial conversion cable (to be used in combination with ZEN-CIF01) CS1W-CIF31 ZEN support software Runs on Windows ME, 2000, XP, NT4.0 Service Pack 3, Vista ZEN-SOFT01-V4 453 23 Programmable relays ZEN-20C Programmable relays Extended flexible automation Ideal for small-scale control applications, the ZEN-20C provides an economical alternative to discrete timers, counters and general purpose relays. With 12 Inputs and 8 relay or transistor Outputs, and expansion possibilities of up to 44 I/O on C1 and C2 models, the ZEN-20C offers extended flexibility, with features such as calendar and real time clock functionality. • ZEN-20C1/C2 expandable up to 44 I/Os • ZEN DC units have analogue input 0-10 VDC • DC models have as well high speed counter 150 Hz • Expansion available with relay output or transistor output Ordering information Specifications Accessories Name Number of I/O points Inputs (I)/ power supply Outputs (Q) Type LCD, buttons (B), calendar and clock Analogue input/ comparators (A) 8-digit counter (F)/ comparators (G) No. of bits 16 No. of bits 8 Size in mm (HxWxD) Order code CPU units 20 12 100 to 240 VAC 8 Relays LCD yes – – Work bits (M) Holding bits (H) Timers (T) Counters (C) Weekly timers (@) LCD display (D) Timer/counter comparator (P) Holding timers (#) Button input (B) 90x122.5 x56 ZEN-20C1AR-A-V2 Expandable up to 44 I/O LED – – – ZEN-20C2AR-A-V2 12 to 24 VDC LCD yes yes / 4 yes / 4 ZEN-20C1DR-D-V2 LED – yes / 4 yes / 4 ZEN-20C1DR-D-V2 Transistors LCD yes yes / 4 yes / 4 ZEN-20C1DT-D-V2 LED – yes / 4 yes / 4 ZEN-20C2DT-D-V2 Fixed I/O 100 to 240 VAC Relays LCD yes – yes / 4 ZEN-20C3AR-A-V2 12 to 24 VDC LCD yes yes / 4 yes / 4 ZEN-20C3DR-D-V2 Item Specifications ZEN-20C_AR-A-V2 ZEN-20C_D_-D-V2 Power supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 12 to 24 VDC (DC ripple rate: 5%) Rated power supply voltage 85 to 264 VAC 10.8 to 28.8 VDC Power consumption 11 VA max. 5 W max. Inrush current 4 A max. 30 A max. Ambient temperature 0°C to 55°C (-25°C to 55°C for ZEN-20C2 models (LED)) Ambient storage -20°C to 55°C (-40°C to 75°C for ZEN-20C2 models (LED)) Control method Stored program control I/O control method Cyclic scan Programming language Ladder diagram Program capacity 96 lines (3 input conditions and 1 output per line) LCD display 12 characters x 4 lines, with backlight (LCD-type CPU unit only) Operation keys 8 (4 cursor keys and 4 operation keys) (LCD-type CPU unit only) Super-capacitor holding time 2 days min. (25°C) Battery life (ZEN-BAT01) 10 years min. (25°C) Calendar & Clock function Accuracy: ± 15 s/month (at 25°C) if applicable Name Description Order code Memory Cassette EEPROM (for data security and copying) ZEN-ME01 Battery unit Battery (keeps time, date and bit values for 10 years at 25°C) ZEN-BAT01 Connecting Cable For the programming software, RS-232C cable, 9-way `D' connector for PC ZEN-CIF01 USB-Serial conversion cable USB-Serial conversion cable (to be used in combination with ZEN-CIF01) CS1W-CIF31 ZEN support software Runs on Windows ME, 2000, XP, NT4.0 Service Pack 3, Vista ZEN-SOFT01-V4 454 ZEN-8E Programmable relays ZEN Expansion units To enlarge your ZEN application we provide three different expansion units in only 35 mm width ZEN housing. All expansion units have standard 4 inputs and 4 outputs. You can add maximum 3 expansion units to one CPU. • 4 inputs, 100 to 240VAC or 12 to 24VDC • 4 outputs, either relays or transistors (only DC models) • DIN-rail mounting • Size in mm (HxWxD): 90x35x56 Ordering information Specifications Name Number of I/O points Inputs (X)/ power supply Outputs (Y) Size in mm (HxWxD) Order code Expansion I/O units 8 4 100 to 240 VAC 4 Relays 90x35x56 ZEN-8E1AR 12 to 24 VDC ZEN-8E1DR Transistors ZEN-8E1DT Item Specifications ZEN-8E1AR ZEN-8E1D_ Power supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 12 to 24 VDC (DC ripple rate: 5% max.) Rated power supply voltage 85 to 264 VAC 10.8 to 28.8 VDC Power consumption 4 VA max. 2 W max. Inrush current 1.5 A max. 15 A max. Ambient temperature 0°C to 55°C (-25°C to 55°C for ZEN-10C2 models (LED)) Ambient storage -20°C to 55°C (-40°C to 75°C for ZEN-10C2 models (LED)) 455 23 Programmable relays ZEN-PA Programmable relays ZEN Power Supply The ZEN Power Supply has the same compact housing as our 10 I/O CPU units. With a current/wattage output of 1.3 A/30 W it covers enough power to supply the DC ZEN itself and the eventually used sensors. If needed parallel operation is possible. • Output voltage 24 VDC • Output current 1.3 A • Capacity 30 W • Allows parallel operation • Size in mm (HxWxD): 90x70x56 Ordering information Specifications Power rating Inputs voltage Output current Order code 30 W 100 to 240 VAC 1.3 A ZEN-PA03024 Item Specifications Power rating 30 W Efficiency 80% min. (24 V) Input voltage 100 to 240 VAC (85 to 264 VAC), single-phase Output voltage Voltage adjustment ±10% to ±15% (with V. ADJ) min. of rate output voltage Ripple 2% (p-p) max. (-25°C to -10°C: 4% max.) Input variation 0.5% max. Temperature 0.05% / °C max. Overload protection 105% to 135% of rated load current, inverted L drop, intermittent Overvoltage protection yes Input Current 100 V 0.8 A max. 200 V 0.45 A max. Output indicator yes (green) Weight 240 g max. Operating temperature -10°C to 60°C Parallel operation yes (2 units max.) Which size is required? K3GN K3MA-J K3MA-L K3MA-F Which application is required? Process Temperature Frequency/ rate Process/ frequency/ rate General purpose 48x24 mm (1/32 DIN) LOOKING FOR PERFECT MEASURING & READ-OUT? With our K3HB series we cover a wide range of applications. One of them is the weighing indicator which performs perfect measurement in any weighing application. The instrument can be equipped with a load-cell power supply of 10 V/100 mA. Several option boards for communication, contact output boards or event inputs are also available. On top of these you can get direct DeviceNet communication. • High speed sampling 20 ms • Equipped with position meter • Two colour display for easy recognition K3HB-V – For perfect weighing 456 Page 460 Page 461 Page 461 Page 461 Digital panel indicators Which application is required? K3HB-X Process K3HB-H Temperature Advanced K3HB-V Weighing 96x48 mm (1/8 DIN) K3HB-S Linear sensor K3HB-R Rotary pulse K3HB-P Time interval K3HB-C Up/down counting pulse 457 24 Digital panel indicators Page 462 Page 462 Page 462 Page 462 Page 464 Page 464 Page 464 458 Selection table Category Multifunctional digital panel indicator Process indicator Temperature indicator Frequency/rate indicator Process indicator Selection criteria Model K3GN K3MA-J K3MA-L K3MA-F K3HB-X Size 1/32 DIN 1/8 DIN Features Colour change display Number of digits 5 5 4 5 5 Leading zero suppression Forced zero function Min./max. hold function Average processing User selectable inputs Start-up compensating time – – – Key protection Decimal point position setting Accuracy ±0.1% of full scale ±0.1% of full scale ±0.1% of full scale ±0.1% of full scale ±0.1% of full scale (DC voltage & DC current), ±0.5% of full scale (AC voltage & AC current) Input range 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, -5 to 5 V, -10 to 10 V or 0 to 30 Hz or 0 to 5 kHz 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, -5 to 5 V, -10 to 10 V Pt100, JPt100 or thermocouple K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B 0 to 30 Hz or 0 to 5 kHz 0.000 to 10.000 A, 0.0000 to 19.999 mA, -199.99 to 199.99 mA, 4.000 to 20.000 mA, 0.0 to 400.0 V, 0.0000 to 1.999 V, -199.99 to 199.99 V, 1.0000 to 5.0000 V Sample rate 250 ms 250 ms 500 ms – 20 ms Features Remote/local processing, parameter initialisation, programmable output configuration, process value hold Teaching, comparative output pattern selection, parameter initialisation, programmable output configuration, process value hold Programmable output configuration, process value hold Teaching, comparative output pattern selection, programmable output configuration, process value hold Scaling, teaching, averaging, output hysteresis, output OFF-delay, output test, bank selection, reset, comparative output Sensor power supply – – – Front protection IP rating IP66 IP66 IP66 IP66 IP66 Supply voltage 24 VDC 24 VAC/VDC or 100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/VDC or 100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/VDC or 100 to 240 VAC 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC/VDC Inputs NPN – PNP – Temperature – – – – – Contact – – – – Voltage pulse – – – – Load cell – – – – – DC voltage – DC current – – AC voltage – – – – AC current – – – – Outputs Relay NPN – – – PNP – – – Linear – – – – BCD – – – – – Comms – – – Page 460 461 462 Digital panel indicators 459 24 Digital panel indicators Temperature indicator Weighing indicator Linear sensor indicator Up/down counting pulse indicator Time interval indicator Rotary pulse indicator K3HB-H K3HB-V K3HB-S K3HB-C K3HB-P K3HB-R 1/8 DIN – – 5 5 5 5 5 5 – – – – – Thermocouple: ±0.3% of full scale, Pt-100: ±0.2% of full scale ±0.1% of full scale One input: ±0.1% of full scale, two inputs: ±0.2% of full scale ±0.08% rgd ±1 digit ±0.006% rgd ±1 digit ±0.02% rgd ±1 digit Pt100, thermocouple K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W 0.00 to 199.99 mV, 0.000 to 19.999 mV, 100.00 mV, 199.99 mV 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 5 V, -5 to 5 V, -10 to 10 V No voltage contact: 30 Hz, voltage pulse: 50 kHz, open collector: 50 kHz No voltage contact: 30 Hz, voltage pulse: 50 kHz, open collector: 50 kHz No voltage contact: 30 Hz, voltage pulse: 50 kHz, open collector: 50 kHz 20 ms 20 ms 0.5 ms – – – Scaling, teaching, averaging, output hysteresis, output OFF-delay, output test, bank selection, reset, comparative output Scaling, teaching, averaging, output hysteresis, output OFF-delay, output test, bank selection, reset, comparative output Scaling, 2-input calculation, teaching, averaging, output hysteresis, output OFFdelay, output test, bank selection, reset, comparative output Scaling, measurement operation selection, output hysteresis, output OFFdelay, output test, display value selection, display colour selection, key protection, bank selection, display refresh period, maximum/minimum hold, reset Scaling, measurement operation selection, output hysteresis, output OFFdelay, output test, teaching, display value selection, display colour selection, key protection, bank selection, display refresh period, maximum/minimum hold, reset Scaling, measurement operation selection, averaging, previous average value comparison, output hysteresis, output OFF-delay, output test, teaching, display value selection, display colour selection, key protection, bank selection, display refresh period, maximum /minimum hold, reset IP66 IP66 IP66 IP66 IP66 IP66 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC/VDC 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC/VDC 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC/VDC 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC/VDC 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC/VDC 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC/VDC – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 462 464 Standard Available – No/not available 460 K3GN 1/32 DIN multi-function Compact and intelligent digital panel meter The K3GN is able to cover a wide variety of applications with its 3 main functions: process meter, RPM processor/tachometer and digital data display for PC/PLC. Configuration is easy and the design is advanced and compact. • Process indicator DC voltage/current • RPM process/tachometer • Digital data display for PC/PLC • Very compact 1/32 DIN housing: Size in mm (HxWxD): 24x48x83mm • 5-digit display with programmable display colour, in red or green Ordering information Specifications Input type Supply voltage Output Order code No communications RS-485 DC voltage/current, NPN 24 VDC Dual relays (SPST-NO) K3GN-NDC 24 DC K3GN-NDC-FLK 24 DC Three NPN open collector K3GN-NDT1 24 DC K3GN-NDT1-FLK 24 DC DC voltage/current, PNP Dual relays (SPST-NO) K3GN-PDC 24 DC K3GN-PDC-FLK 24 DC Three PNP open collector K3GN-PDT2 24 DC K3GN-PDT2-FLK 24 DC Supply voltage 24 VDC Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of the rated supply voltage Power consumption 2.5 W max. (at max. DC load with all indicators lit) Ambient temperature Operating: -10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing) Storage: -25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing) Display refresh period Sampling period (sampling times multiplied by number of averaging times if average processing is selected) Max. displayed digits 5 digits (-19999 to 99999) Display 7-segment digital display, character height: 7.0 mm Polarity display “-” is displayed automatically with a negative input signal Zero display Leading zeros are not displayed Scaling function Programmable with front-panel key inputs (range of display: -19999 to 99999). The decimal point position can be set as desired. External controls HOLD: (measurement value held) ZERO: (forced-zero) Hysteresis setting Programmable with front-panel key inputs (0001 to 9999) Other functions Programmable colour display Selectable output operating action Teaching set values Average processing (simple average) Lockout configuration Communications writing control (communications output models only) Output Relays: 2 SPST-NO Transistors: 3 NPN open collector 3 PNP open collector Combinations: Communications output (RS-485) + relay outputs Communications output (RS-485) + transistor outputs Communications output (RS-485) + transistor outputs (3 PNP open collector) Communications Communications function: RS-485 Delay in comparative outputs (transistor outputs) 750 ms max. Degree of protection Front-panel: NEMA4X for indoor use (equivalent to IP66) Rear case: IEC standard IP20 Terminals: IEC standard IP20 Memory protection Non-volatile memory (EEPROM) (possible to rewrite 100,000 times) Size in mm (HxWxD) 24x48x80 461 24 Digital panel indicators K3MA-J, -L, -F 1/8 DIN standard indicators Highly visible LCD display with 2 colour (red and green) LEDs The K3MA series comes with a process meter, a frequency/rate meter and a temperature meter of either 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC/VDC. All are equipped with the same quality display and have the same short depth of 80 mm. • 1/8 DIN size housing • Highly visible, negative transmissive backlit LCD display • 14.2 mm high characters • 5 digits (-19,999 to 99,999), K3MA-L: 4 digits • Front-panel IP66 Ordering information Accessories Specifications Indicator Supply voltage Input type & ranges Output Order code Process meter 100 to 240 VAC DC voltage: 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, -5 to 5 V, -10 to 10 V DC current: 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA 2 relay contact outputs (SPST-NO) K3MA-J-A2 100-240VAC 24 VAC/VDC 2 relay contact outputs (SPST-NO) K3MA-J-A2 24VAC/VDC Temperature meter 100 to 240 VAC Platinum-resistance thermometer: Pt100, JPt100 or thermocouple K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B 1 relay contact output (SPDT) K3MA-L-C 100-240VAC 24 VAC/VDC 1 relay contact output (SPDT) K3MA-L-C 24VAC/VDC Frequency/rate meter 100 to 240 VAC Rotary pulse: No voltage: 0.05 to 30.00 Hz; open collector: 0.1 to 5000.0 Hz 2 relay contact outputs (SPST-NO) K3MA-F-A2 100-240VAC 24 VAC/VDC 2 relay contact outputs (SPST-NO) K3MA-F-A2 24VAC/VDC Type Order code Splash-proof soft cover K32-49SC Hard cover K32-49HC Item 100-240 VAC models 24 VAC/VDC models Supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC (50/60 Hz), 24 VDC Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of the rated supply voltage Power consumption (under maximum load) 6 VA max. 4.5 VA max. (24 VAC) 4.5 W max. (24 VDC) Ambient temperature Operating: -10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing) Storage: -25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing) Weight Approx. 200 g Display 7-segment digital display, character height: 14.2 mm Polarity display "-" is displayed automatically with a negative input signal Zero display Leading zeros are not displayed Hold function Max. hold (maximum value), min. hold (minimum value) Hysteresis setting Programmable with front-panel key inputs (0001 to 9,999) Delay in comparative outputs 1 s max. Degree of protection Front-panel: NEMA4X for indoor use (equivalent to IP66) Rear case: IEC standard IP20 Terminals: IEC standard IP00 + finger protection (VDE 0106/100) Memory protection Non-volatile memory (EEPROM) (possible to rewrite 100,000 times) Size in mm (HxWxD) 48x96x80 462 K3HB-X, -H, -V, -S 1/8 DIN advanced indicators - analogue input Process, temperature, weighing and linear sensor indicators These indicators with analogue input feature a clear and easy-to-use colour change display. All models are equipped with an IP66 housing. K3HB series is high speed, with a sample rate of 50 Hz, and even 2,000 Hz for K3HB-S • Position meter indication for easy monitoring • Optional DeviceNet, RS-232C, RS-485 • Double display, with 5 digits, in two colours • 1/8 DIN size housing Ordering information Option boards Sensor power supply/output boards Relay/transistor output boards Event input boards *1 CPA/CPB can be combined with relay outputs only. *2 Only one of the following can be used by each digital indicator: RS-232C/RS-485 communications, a linear output, or DeviceNet communications. K3HB has got three slots for option boards: Slot B, slot C and slot D. Accessories Type of indicator Input sensor type and range Supply voltage Order code Process indicator K3HB-X AC current input, from 0.000 to 10.000 A, 0.0000 to 19.999 mA 100 to 240 VAC K3HB-XAA 100-240VAC 24 VAC/VDC K3HB-XAA 24VAC/VDC DC current input, from ±199.99 mA, to 4.000 to 20.000 mA 100 to 240 VAC K3HB-XAD 100-240VAC 24 VAC/VDC K3HB-XAD 24VAC/VDC AC voltage input, from 0.0 to 400.0 V to 0.0000 to 1.999 V 100 to 240 VAC K3HB-XVA 100-240VAC 24 VAC/VDC K3HB-XVA 24VAC/VDC DC voltage input, from ±199.99 V to 1.0000 to 5.0000 V 100 to 240 VAC K3HB-XVD 100-240VAC 24 VAC/VDC K3HB-XVD 24VAC/VDC Temperature indicator K3HB-H Temperature input Pt100, thermocouple K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W 100 to 240 VAC K3HB-HTA 100-240VAC 24 VAC/VDC K3HB-HTA 24VAC/VDC Weighing indicator K3HB-V Load cell input (DC low voltage input), 0.00 to 199.99 mV, 0.000 to 19.999 mV, 100.00 mV, 199.999 mV 100 to 240 VAC K3HB-VLC 100-240 VAC 24 VAC/VDC K3HB-VLC 24VAC/VDC Linear sensor indicator K3HB-S DC process input, 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, -5 to 5 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA 24 VAC/VDC K3HB-SSD AC/DC24 100 to 240 VAC K3HB-SSD AC100-240 Slot Output Sensor power supply Communications Applicable indicator types Order code B Relay PASS: SPDT 12 VDC ±10%, 80 mA – K3HB-X, -H, -S K33-CPA *1 Linear current DC0(4) - 20 mA – K3HB-X, -H, -S K33-L1 A *2 Linear voltage DC0(1) - 5 V, 0 to 10 V – K3HB-X, -H, -S K33-L2A *2 – – – K3HB-X, -H, -S K33-A *2 – – RS-232C K3HB-X, -H, -S K33-FLK1 A *2 – – RS-485 K3HB-X, -H, -S K33-FLK3A *2 Relay PASS: SPDT 10 VDC ±5%, 100 mA – K3HB-V K33-CPB *1 Linear current DC0(4) - 20 mA – K3HB-V K33-L1B *2 Linear voltage DC0(1) - 5 V, 0 to 10 V – K3HB-V K33-L2B *2 – – – K3HB-V K33-B *2 – – RS-232C K3HB-V K33-FLK1B *2 – – RS-485 K3HB-V K33-FLK3B *2 Slot Output Communications Order code C Relay H/L: SPDT each – K34-C1 HH/H/LL/L: SPST-NO each – K34-C2 Transistor NPN open collector: HH/H/PASS/L/LL – K34-T1 PNP open collector: HH/H/PASS/L/LL – K34-T2 – – DeviceNet K34-DRT *2 Slot Input type Number of points Communications Order code D NPN open collector 5 M3 terminal blocks K35-1 8 10-pin MIL connector K35-2 PNP open collector 5 M3 terminal blocks K35-3 8 10-pin MIL connector K35-4 Type Order code Special cable (for event inputs with 8-pin connector) K32-DICN K3HB-X, -H, -V, -S 1/8 DIN advanced indicators - analogue input 463 24 Digital panel indicators Specifications Power supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC (50/60 Hz), 24 VAC/VDC, DeviceNet power supply: 24 VDC Allowable power supply voltage range 85 to 110% of the rated power supply voltage, DeviceNet power supply: 11 to 25 VDC Power consumption 100 to 240 V: 18 VA max. (max. load), 24 VAC/DC: 11 VA/7 W max. (max. load) Display method Negative LCD (backlit LED) display 7-segment digital display (character height: PV: 14.2 mm (green/red); SV: 4.9 mm (green)) Ambient operating temperature -10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation) Display range -19,999 to 99,999 Weight Approx. 300 g (base unit only) Degree of protection Front-panel Conforms to NEMA 4X for indoor use (equivalent to IP66) Rear case IP20 Terminals IP00 + finger protection (VDE0106/100) Memory protection EEPROM (non-volatile memory), number of rewrites: 100,000 Event input ratings Contact ON: 1 k max., OFF: 100 k min. No-contact ON residual voltage: 2 V max., OFF leakage current: 0.1 mA max., load current: 4 mA max. Maximum applied voltage: 30 VDC max. Output ratings Transistor output Maximum load voltage 24 VDC Maximum load current 50 mA Leakage current 100 μA max. Contact output (resistive load) Rated load 5 A at 250 VAC, 5 A at 30 VDC Rated through current 5 A Mechanical life expectancy 5,000,000 operations Electrical life expectancy 100,000 operations Linear output Allowable load impedance 500 max. (mA); 5 k min. (V) Resolution Approx. 10,000 Output error ±0.5% FS Size in mm (HxWxD) 48x96x100 464 K3HB-C, -P, -R 1/8 DIN advanced indicators - digital input Rotary pulse, timer interval and up/down counting pulse indicators These indicators with analogue input feature a clear and easy-to-use colour change display. All models are equipped with an IP66 housing. K3HB-R and -C are highspeed, with a sample rate up to 50 kHz. • Position meter indication for easy monitoring • Optional DeviceNet, RS-232C, RS-485 • Double display, with 5 digits, in two colours • 1/8 DIN size housing Ordering information Option boards Sensor power supply/output boards Relay/transistor output boards Event input boards *1 CPA can be combined with relay outputs only. *2 Only one of the following can be used by each digital indicator: RS-232C/RS-485 communications, a linear output, or DeviceNet communications. K3HB has got three slots for option boards: Slot B, slot C and slot D. Accessories Type of indicator Input ranges Supply voltage Input sensor Order code Rotary pulse indicator K3HB-R No voltage contact: 30 Hz max. Voltage pulse: 50 kHz max. Open collector: 50 kHz max. 100 to 240 VAC NPN input/voltage pulse K3HB-RNB 100-240VAC 24 VAC/VDC K3HB-RNB 24VAC/VDC 100 to 240 VAC PNP input K3HB-RPB 100-240VAC 24 VAC/VDC K3HB-RPB 24VAC/VDC 100 to 240 VAC NPN K3HB-PNB 100-240VAC 100 to 240 VAC PNP K3HB-PPB 100-240VAC Timer interval indicator K3HB-P 24 VAC/VDC PNP K3HB-PPB 24VAC/VDC 100 to 240 VAC NPN K3HB-CNB 100-240VAC Up/down counting pulse indicator K3HB-C 24 VAC/VDC NPN K3HB-CNB 24VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC PNP K3HB-CPB 24VAC/VDC Slot Output Sensor power supply Communications Order code B Relay PASS: SPDT 12 VDC ±10%, 80 mA – K33-CPA *1 Linear current DC0(4) - 20 mA – K33-L1 A *2 Linear voltage DC0(1) - 5 V, 0 to 10 V – K33-L2A *2 – – – K33-A *2 – – RS-232C K33-FLK1 A *2 – – RS-485 K33-FLK3A *2 Slot Output Communications Order code C Relay H/L: SPDT each – K34-C1 HH/H/LL/L: SPST-NO each – K34-C2 Transistor NPN open collector: HH/H/PASS/L/LL – K34-T1 PNP open collector: HH/H/PASS/L/LL – K34-T2 – DeviceNet K34-DRT *2 BCD + transistor NPN open collector: HH/H/PASS/L/LL – K34-BCD Slot Input type Number of points Communications Order code D NPN open collector 5 M3 terminal blocks K35-1 8 10-pin MIL connector K35-2 PNP open collector 5 M3 terminal blocks K35-3 8 10-pin MIL connector K35-4 Type Order code Special cable (for event inputs with 8-pin connector) K32-DICN Special BCD output cable K32-BCD K3HB-C, -P, -R 1/8 DIN advanced indicators - digital input 465 24 Digital panel indicators Specifications Power supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC (50/60 Hz), 24 VAC/VDC, DeviceNet power supply: 24 VDC Allowable power supply voltage range 85 to 110% of the rated power supply voltage, DeviceNet power supply: 11 to 25 VDC Power consumption 100 to 240 V: 18 VA max. (max. load), 24 VAC/DC: 11 VA/7 W max. (max. load) Display method Negative LCD (backlit LED) display 7-segment digital display (character height: PV: 14.2 mm (green/red); SV: 4.9 mm (green)) Ambient operating temperature -10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation) Display range -19,999 to 99,999 Weight Approx. 300 g (base unit only) Degree of protection Front-panel Conforms to NEMA 4X for indoor use (equivalent to IP66) Rear case IP20 Terminals IP00 + finger protection (VDE0106/100) Memory protection EEPROM (non-volatile memory), number of rewrites: 100,000 Event input ratings Contact ON: 1 k max., OFF: 100 k min. No-contact ON residual voltage: 2 V max., OFF leakage current: 0.1 mA max., load current: 4 mA max. Maximum applied voltage: 30 VDC max. Output ratings Transistor output Maximum load voltage 24 VDC Maximum load current 50 mA Leakage current 100 μA max. Contact output (resistive load) Rated load 5 A at 250 VAC, 5 A at 30 VDC Rated through current 5 A Mechanical life expectancy 5,000,000 operations Electrical life expectancy 100,000 operations Linear output Allowable load impedance 500 max. (mA); 5 k min. (V) Resolution Approx. 10,000 Output error ±0.5% FS Size in mm (HxWxD) 48x96x100 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E PIC18F/LF1XK50 Data Sheet 20-Pin USB Flash Microcontrollers with nanoWatt XLP Technology DS41350E-page 2 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Information contained in this publication regarding device applications and the like is provided only for your convenience and may be superseded by updates. It is your responsibility to ensure that your application meets with your specifications. MICROCHIP MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, RELATED TO THE INFORMATION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ITS CONDITION, QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. Microchip disclaims all liability arising from this information and its use. Use of Microchip devices in life support and/or safety applications is entirely at the buyer’s risk, and the buyer agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Microchip from any and all damages, claims, suits, or expenses resulting from such use. No licenses are conveyed, implicitly or otherwise, under any Microchip intellectual property rights. Trademarks The Microchip name and logo, the Microchip logo, dsPIC, KEELOQ, KEELOQ logo, MPLAB, PIC, PICmicro, PICSTART, PIC32 logo, rfPIC and UNI/O are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. FilterLab, Hampshire, HI-TECH C, Linear Active Thermistor, MXDEV, MXLAB, SEEVAL and The Embedded Control Solutions Company are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. Analog-for-the-Digital Age, Application Maestro, CodeGuard, dsPICDEM, dsPICDEM.net, dsPICworks, dsSPEAK, ECAN, ECONOMONITOR, FanSense, HI-TIDE, In-Circuit Serial Programming, ICSP, Mindi, MiWi, MPASM, MPLAB Certified logo, MPLIB, MPLINK, mTouch, Omniscient Code Generation, PICC, PICC-18, PICDEM, PICDEM.net, PICkit, PICtail, REAL ICE, rfLAB, Select Mode, Total Endurance, TSHARC, UniWinDriver, WiperLock and ZENA are trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. SQTP is a service mark of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. All other trademarks mentioned herein are property of their respective companies. © 2010, Microchip Technology Incorporated, Printed in the U.S.A., All Rights Reserved. Printed on recycled paper. ISBN: 978-1-60932-624-1 Note the following details of the code protection feature on Microchip devices: • Microchip products meet the specification contained in their particular Microchip Data Sheet. • Microchip believes that its family of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the market today, when used in the intended manner and under normal conditions. • There are dishonest and possibly illegal methods used to breach the code protection feature. All of these methods, to our knowledge, require using the Microchip products in a manner outside the operating specifications contained in Microchip’s Data Sheets. Most likely, the person doing so is engaged in theft of intellectual property. • Microchip is willing to work with the customer who is concerned about the integrity of their code. • Neither Microchip nor any other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of their code. Code protection does not mean that we are guaranteeing the product as “unbreakable.” Code protection is constantly evolving. We at Microchip are committed to continuously improving the code protection features of our products. Attempts to break Microchip’s code protection feature may be a violation of the Digital Millennium Copyright Act. If such acts allow unauthorized access to your software or other copyrighted work, you may have a right to sue for relief under that Act. Microchip received ISO/TS-16949:2002 certification for its worldwide headquarters, design and wafer fabrication facilities in Chandler and Tempe, Arizona; Gresham, Oregon and design centers in California and India. The Company’s quality system processes and procedures are for its PIC® MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs, KEELOQ® code hopping devices, Serial EEPROMs, microperipherals, nonvolatile memory and analog products. In addition, Microchip’s quality system for the design and manufacture of development systems is ISO 9001:2000 certified. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 3 PIC18F/LF1XK50 Universal Serial Bus Features: • USB V2.0 Compliant SIE • Full Speed (12 Mb/s) and Low Speed (1.5 Mb/s) • Supports Control, Interrupt, Isochronous and Bulk Transfers • Supports up to 16 Endpoints (8 bidirectional) • 256-byte Dual Access RAM for USB • Input-change interrupt on D+/D- for detecting physical connection to USB host High Performance RISC CPU: • C Compiler Optimized Architecture: - Optional extended instruction set designed to optimize re-entrant code - 256 bytes, data EEPROM - Up to 16 Kbytes linear program memory addressing - Up to 768 bytes linear data memory addressing • Priority levels for Interrupts • 8 x 8 Single-Cycle Hardware Multiplier Flexible Oscillator Structure: • CPU divider to run the core slower than the USB peripheral • 16 MHz Internal Oscillator Block: - Software selectable frequencies, 31 kHz to 16 MHz - Provides a complete range of clock speeds from 31 kHz to 32 MHz when used with PLL - User tunable to compensate for frequency drift • Four Crystal modes, up to 48 MHz • External Clock modes, up to 48 MHz • 4X Phase Lock Loop (PLL) • Secondary oscillator using Timer1 at 32 kHz • Fail-Safe Clock Monitor: - Allows for safe shutdown if primary or secondary oscillator stops • Two-speed Oscillator Start-up Special Microcontroller Features: • Full 5.5V Operation – PIC18F1XK50 • 1.8V-3.6V Operation – PIC18LF1XK50 • Self-programmable under Software Control • Programmable Brown-out Reset (BOR) - With software enable option • Extended Watchdog Timer (WDT) - Programmable period from 4ms to 131s • Single-supply 3V In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™) via two pins Extreme Low-Power Management PIC18LF1XK50 with nanoWatt XLP: • Sleep mode: 24 nA • Watchdog Timer: 450 nA • Timer1 Oscillator: 790 nA @ 32 kHz Analog Features: • Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) module: - 10-bit resolution, 9 external channels - Auto acquisition capability - Conversion available during Sleep - Internal 1.024V Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR) channel - Independent input multiplexing • Dual Analog Comparators - Rail-to-rail operation - Independent input multiplexing • Voltage Reference module: - Programmable (% of VDD), 16 steps - Two 16-level voltage ranges using VREF pins - Programmable Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR), 3 levels • On-chip 3.2V LDO Regulator – (PIC18F1XK50) Peripheral Highlights: • 14 I/O Pins plus 1 Input-only pin: - High-current sink/source 25 mA/25 mA - 7 Programmable weak pull-ups - 7 Programmable Interrupt-on-change pins - 3 programmable external interrupts - Programmable slew rate • Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM (ECCP) module: - One, two, three, or four PWM outputs - Selectable polarity - Programmable dead time - Auto-shutdown and Auto-restart • Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP) module: - 3-wire SPI (supports all 4 modes) - I2C™ Master and Slave modes (Slave mode address masking) • Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (EUSART) module: - Supports RS-485, RS-232 and LIN 2.0 - RS-232 operation using internal oscillator - Auto-Baud Detect - Auto-Wake-up on Break • SR Latch mode 20-Pin USB Flash Microcontrollers with nanoWatt XLP Technology PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 4 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. - Pin Diagrams Pin Diagrams Device Program Memory Data Memory I/O(1) 10-bit A/D (ch)(2) ECCP (PWM) MSSP EUSART Comp. Timers Flash 8/16-bit USB (bytes) # Single-Word Instructions SRAM (bytes) EEPROM (bytes) SPI Master I2C™ PIC18F13K50/ PIC18LF13K50 8K 4096 512(3) 256 15 11 1 Y Y 1 2 1/3 Y PIC18F14K50/ PIC18LF14K50 16K 8192 768(3) 256 15 11 1 Y Y 1 2 1/3 Y Note 1: One pin is input only. 2: Channel count includes internal Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR) and Programmable Voltage Reference (CVREF) channels. 3: Includes the dual port RAM used by the USB module which is shared with the data memory. 20-pin PDIP, SSOP, SOIC (300 MIL) 10 2 345 6 1 8 7 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 19 20 18 17 VDD RA5/IOCA5/OSC1/CLKIN RA4/AN3/IOCA3/OSC2/CLKOUT RA3/IOCA3/MCLR/VPP RC5/CCP1/P1A/T0CKI RC4/P1B/C12OUT/SRQ RC3/AN7/P1C/C12IN3-/PGM RC6/AN8/SS/T13CKI/T1OSCI RC7/AN9/SDO/T1OSCO RB7/IOCB7/TX/CK VSS RA0/IOCA0/D+/PGD RA1/IOCA1/D-/PGC VUSB RC0/AN4/C12IN+/INT0/VREF+ RC1/AN5/C12IN1-/INT1/VREFRC2/ AN6/P1D/C12IN2-/CVREF/INT2 RB4/AN10/IOCB4/SDI/SDA RB5/AN11/IOCB5/RX/DT RB6/IOCB6/SCK/SCL PIC18F/LF1XK50 20-pin QFN (5x5) 8 9 23 1 14 15 16 10 11 6 12 13 20 19 18 17 7 5 4 PIC18F1XK50/ PIC18LF1XK50 RA3/MCLR/VPP RC5/CCP1/P1A/T0CKI RC4/P1B/C12OUT/SRQ RC3/AN7/P1C/C12IN3-/PGM RC6/AN8/SS/T13CKI/T1OSCI RC7/AN9/SDO/T1OSCO RB7/TX/CK RB4/AN10/SDI/SDA RB5/AN11/RX/DT RB6/SCK/SCL RC2/AN6/P1D/C12IN2-/CVREF/INT2 RC1/AN1/C12IN1-/INT1/VREFRC0/ AN4/C12IN+/INT0/VREF+ VUSB RA1/D-/PGC RA0/D+/PGD Vss VDD RA4/AN3/OSC2/CLKO RA5/OSC1/CLKI 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 5 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TABLE 1: PIC18F/LF1XK50 PIN SUMMARY Pin I/O Analog Comparator Reference ECCP EUSART MSSP Timers Interrupts Pull-up USB Basic 19 RA0 IOCA0 D+ PGD 18 RA1 IOCA1 D- PGC 4 RA3(1) IOCA3 Y MCLR/VPP 3 RA4 AN3 IOCA4 Y OSC2/CLKOUT 2 RA5 IOCA5 Y OSC1/CLKIN 13 RB4 AN10 SDI/SDA IOCB4 Y 12 RB5 AN11 RX/DT IOCB5 Y 11 RB6 SCL/SCK IOCB6 Y 10 RB7 TX/CK IOCB7 Y 16 RC0 AN4 C12IN+ VREF+ INT0 15 RC1 AN5 C12IN1- VREF- INT1 14 RC2 AN6 C12IN2- CVREF P1D INT2 7 RC3 AN7 C12IN3- P1C PGM 6 RC4 C12OUT P1B SRQ 5 RC5 CCP1/P1A T0CKI 8 RC6 AN8 SS T13CKI/T1OSCI 9 RC7 AN9 SDO T1OSCO 17 VUSB 1 VDD 20 VSS Note 1: Input only. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 6 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Table of Contents 1.0 Device Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................... 9 2.0 Oscillator Module (With Fail-Safe Clock Monitor)....................................................................................................................... 15 3.0 Memory Organization ................................................................................................................................................................. 29 4.0 Flash Program Memory.............................................................................................................................................................. 51 5.0 Data EEPROM Memory ............................................................................................................................................................. 61 6.0 8 x 8 Hardware Multiplier............................................................................................................................................................ 65 7.0 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................................................................... 67 8.0 Low Dropout (LDO) Voltage Regulator ...................................................................................................................................... 81 9.0 I/O Ports ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 83 10.0 Timer0 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 101 11.0 Timer1 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 105 12.0 Timer2 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 111 13.0 Timer3 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 113 14.0 Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM (ECCP) Module................................................................................................................ 117 15.0 Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP) Module .................................................................................................................... 139 16.0 Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (EUSART) ............................................................... 181 17.0 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Module .............................................................................................................................. 209 18.0 Comparator Module.................................................................................................................................................................. 223 19.0 Power-Managed Modes ........................................................................................................................................................... 235 20.0 SR Latch................................................................................................................................................................................... 241 21.0 Voltage References.................................................................................................................................................................. 245 22.0 Universal Serial Bus (USB) ...................................................................................................................................................... 251 23.0 Reset ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 277 24.0 Special Features of the CPU.................................................................................................................................................... 291 25.0 Instruction Set Summary .......................................................................................................................................................... 309 26.0 Development Support............................................................................................................................................................... 359 27.0 Electrical Specifications............................................................................................................................................................ 363 28.0 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables....................................................................................................................... 397 29.0 Packaging Information.............................................................................................................................................................. 399 Appendix A: Revision History............................................................................................................................................................. 405 Appendix B: Device Differences......................................................................................................................................................... 406 Index .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 407 The Microchip Web Site ..................................................................................................................................................................... 417 Customer Change Notification Service .............................................................................................................................................. 417 Customer Support .............................................................................................................................................................................. 417 Reader Response .............................................................................................................................................................................. 418 Product Identification System............................................................................................................................................................. 419 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 7 PIC18F/LF1XK50 TO OUR VALUED CUSTOMERS It is our intention to provide our valued customers with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip products. To this end, we will continue to improve our publications to better suit your needs. Our publications will be refined and enhanced as new volumes and updates are introduced. If you have any questions or comments regarding this publication, please contact the Marketing Communications Department via E-mail at docerrors@mail.microchip.com or fax the Reader Response Form in the back of this data sheet to (480) 792-4150. We welcome your feedback. Most Current Data Sheet To obtain the most up-to-date version of this data sheet, please register at our Worldwide Web site at: http://www.microchip.com You can determine the version of a data sheet by examining its literature number found on the bottom outside corner of any page. The last character of the literature number is the version number, (e.g., DS30000A is version A of document DS30000). Errata An errata sheet, describing minor operational differences from the data sheet and recommended workarounds, may exist for current devices. As device/documentation issues become known to us, we will publish an errata sheet. The errata will specify the revision of silicon and revision of document to which it applies. To determine if an errata sheet exists for a particular device, please check with one of the following: • Microchip’s Worldwide Web site; http://www.microchip.com • Your local Microchip sales office (see last page) • The Microchip Corporate Literature Center; U.S. FAX: (480) 792-7277 When contacting a sales office or the literature center, please specify which device, revision of silicon and data sheet (include literature number) you are using. Customer Notification System Register on our web site at www.microchip.com/cn to receive the most current information on all of our products. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 8 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. NOTES: 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 9 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 1.0 DEVICE OVERVIEW This document contains device specific information for the following devices: This family offers the advantages of all PIC18 microcontrollers – namely, high computational performance at an economical price – with the addition of high-endurance, Flash program memory. On top of these features, the PIC18F/LF1XK50 family introduces design enhancements that make these microcontrollers a logical choice for many highperformance, power sensitive applications. 1.1 New Core Features 1.1.1 nanoWatt XLP TECHNOLOGY All of the devices in the PIC18F/LF1XK50 family incorporate a range of features that can significantly reduce power consumption during operation. Key items include: • Alternate Run Modes: By clocking the controller from the Timer1 source or the internal oscillator block, power consumption during code execution can be reduced by as much as 90%. • Multiple Idle Modes: The controller can also run with its CPU core disabled but the peripherals still active. In these states, power consumption can be reduced even further, to as little as 4% of normal operation requirements. • On-the-fly Mode Switching: The powermanaged modes are invoked by user code during operation, allowing the user to incorporate powersaving ideas into their application’s software design. • Low Consumption in Key Modules: The power requirements for both Timer1 and the Watchdog Timer are minimized. See Section 27.0 “Electrical Specifications” for values. 1.1.2 MULTIPLE OSCILLATOR OPTIONS AND FEATURES All of the devices in the PIC18F/LF1XK50 family offer ten different oscillator options, allowing users a wide range of choices in developing application hardware. These include: • Four Crystal modes, using crystals or ceramic resonators • External Clock modes, offering the option of using two pins (oscillator input and a divide-by-4 clock output) or one pin (oscillator input, with the second pin reassigned as general I/O) • External RC Oscillator modes with the same pin options as the External Clock modes • An internal oscillator block which contains a 16 MHz HFINTOSC oscillator and a 31 kHz LFINTOSC oscillator which together provide 8 user selectable clock frequencies, from 31 kHz to 16 MHz. This option frees the two oscillator pins for use as additional general purpose I/O. • A Phase Lock Loop (PLL) frequency multiplier, available to both the high-speed crystal and internal oscillator modes, which allows clock speeds of up to 48 MHz. Used with the internal oscillator, the PLL gives users a complete selection of clock speeds, from 31 kHz to 32 MHz – all without using an external crystal or clock circuit. Besides its availability as a clock source, the internal oscillator block provides a stable reference source that gives the family additional features for robust operation: • Fail-Safe Clock Monitor: This option constantly monitors the main clock source against a reference signal provided by the LFINTOSC. If a clock failure occurs, the controller is switched to the internal oscillator block, allowing for continued operation or a safe application shutdown. • Two-Speed Start-up: This option allows the internal oscillator to serve as the clock source from Power-on Reset, or wake-up from Sleep mode, until the primary clock source is available. • PIC18F13K50 • PIC18F14K50 • PIC18LF13K50 • PIC18LF14K50 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 10 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 1.2 Other Special Features • Memory Endurance: The Flash cells for both program memory and data EEPROM are rated to last for many thousands of erase/write cycles – up to 1K for program memory and 100K for EEPROM. Data retention without refresh is conservatively estimated to be greater than 40 years. • Self-programmability: These devices can write to their own program memory spaces under internal software control. Using a bootloader routine located in the code protected Boot Block, it is possible to create an application that can update itself in the field. • Extended Instruction Set: The PIC18F/ LF1XK50 family introduces an optional extension to the PIC18 instruction set, which adds 8 new instructions and an Indexed Addressing mode. This extension has been specifically designed to optimize re-entrant application code originally developed in high-level languages, such as C. • Enhanced CCP module: In PWM mode, this module provides 1, 2 or 4 modulated outputs for controlling half-bridge and full-bridge drivers. Other features include: - Auto-Shutdown, for disabling PWM outputs on interrupt or other select conditions - Auto-Restart, to reactivate outputs once the condition has cleared - Output steering to selectively enable one or more of 4 outputs to provide the PWM signal. • Enhanced Addressable USART: This serial communication module is capable of standard RS-232 operation and provides support for the LIN bus protocol. Other enhancements include automatic baud rate detection and a 16-bit Baud Rate Generator for improved resolution. • 10-bit A/D Converter: This module incorporates programmable acquisition time, allowing for a channel to be selected and a conversion to be initiated without waiting for a sampling period and thus, reduce code overhead. • Extended Watchdog Timer (WDT): This enhanced version incorporates a 16-bit postscaler, allowing an extended time-out range that is stable across operating voltage and temperature. See Section 27.0 “Electrical Specifications” for time-out periods. 1.3 Details on Individual Family Members Devices in the PIC18F/LF1XK50 family are available in 20-pin packages. Block diagrams for the two groups are shown in Figure 1-1. The devices are differentiated from each other in the following ways: 1. Flash program memory: • 8 Kbytes for PIC18F13K50/PIC18LF13K50 • 16 Kbytes for PIC18F14K50/PIC18LF14K50 2. On-chip 3.2V LDO regulator for PIC18F13K50 and PIC18F14K50. All other features for devices in this family are identical. These are summarized in Table 1-1. The pinouts for all devices are listed in Table 1 and I/O description are in Table 1-2. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 11 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 TABLE 1-1: DEVICE FEATURES FOR THE PIC18F/LF1XK50 (20-PIN DEVICES) Features PIC18F13K50 PIC18LF13K50 PIC18F14K50 PIC18LF14K50 LDO Regulator Yes No Yes No Program Memory (Bytes) 8K 16K Program Memory (Instructions) 4096 8192 Data Memory (Bytes) 512 768 Operating Frequency DC – 48 MHz Interrupt Sources 30 I/O Ports Ports A, B, C Timers 4 Enhanced Capture/ Compare/PWM Modules 1 Serial Communications MSSP, Enhanced USART, USB 10-Bit Analog-to-Digital Module 9 Input Channels Resets (and Delays) POR, BOR, RESET Instruction, Stack Full, Stack Underflow, MCLR, WDT (PWRT, OST) Instruction Set 75 Instructions, 83 with Extended Instruction Set Enabled Packages 20-Pin PDIP, SSOP, SOIC (300 mil) and QFN (5x5) PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 12 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 1-1: PIC18F/LF1XK50 BLOCK DIAGRAM Instruction Decode and Control PORTA PORTB PORTC RA1 RA0 Data Latch Data Memory Address Latch Data Address<12> 12 BSR FSR0 Access FSR1 FSR2 inc/dec logic Address 4 12 4 PCH PCL PCLATH 8 31-Level Stack Program Counter PRODH PRODL 8 x 8 Multiply 8 BITOP 8 8 ALU<8> 20 8 8 Table Pointer<21> inc/dec logic 21 8 Data Bus<8> Table Latch 8 IR 12 3 ROM Latch PCLATU PCU Note 1: RA3 is only available when MCLR functionality is disabled. 2: OSC1/CLKIN and OSC2/CLKOUT are only available in select oscillator modes and when these pins are not being used as digital I/O. Refer to Section 2.0 “Oscillator Module” for additional information. 3: PIC18F13K50/PIC18F14K50 only. Comparator MSSP EUSART 10-bit ADC Timer0 Timer1 Timer2 Timer3 ECCP1 BOR Data EEPROM W Instruction Bus <16> STKPTR Bank 8 State machine control signals Decode 8 8 Power-up Timer Oscillator Start-up Timer Power-on Reset Watchdog Timer OSC1(2) OSC2(2) VDD, Internal Oscillator Fail-Safe Clock Monitor Precision Reference VSS Band Gap MCLR(1) Block LFINTOSC Oscillator 16 MHz Oscillator Single-Supply Programming T1OSO T1OSI FVR FVR FVR CVREF Address Latch Program Memory Data Latch CVREF RA3 RA4 RA5 RB4 RB5 RB6 RB7 RC0 RC1 RC2 RC3 RC4 RC5 RC6 RC7 (512/768 bytes) VUSB USB Module USB LDO(3) Regulator 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 13 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 TABLE 1-2: PIC18F/LF1XK50 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS Pin Name Pin Number Pin Type Buffer Type Description RA0/D+/PGD RA0 D+ PGD 19 I I/O I/O TTL XCVR ST Digital input USB differential plus line (input/output) ICSP™ programming data pin RA1/D-/PGC RA1 DPGC 18 I I/O I/O TTL XCVR ST Digital input USB differential minus line (input/output) ICSP™ programming clock pin RA3/MCLR/VPP RA3 MCLR VPP 4 IIP ST ST — Master Clear (input) or programming voltage (input) Digital input Active-low Master Clear with internal pull-up High voltage programming input RA4/AN3/OSC2/CLKOUT RA4 AN3 OSC2 CLKOUT 3 I/O IO O TTL Analog XTAL CMOS Digital I/O ADC channel 3 Oscillator crystal output. Connect to crystal or resonator in Crystal Oscillator mode In RC mode, OSC2 pin outputs CLKOUT which has 1/4 the frequency of OSC1 and denotes the instruction cycle rate RA5/OSC1/CLKIN RA5 OSC1 CLKIN 2 I/O I I TTL XTAL CMOS Digital I/O Oscillator crystal input or external clock input ST buffer when configured in RC mode; analog other wise External clock source input. Always associated with the pin function OSC1 (See related OSC1/CLKIN, OSC2, CLKOUT pins RB4/AN10/SDI/SDA RB4 AN10 SDI SDA 13 I/O II I/O TTL Analog ST ST Digital I/O ADC channel 10 SPI data in I2C™ data I/O RB5/AN11/RX/DT RB5 AN11 RX DT 12 I/O II I/O TLL Analog ST ST Digital I/O ADC channel 11 EUSART asynchronous receive EUSART synchronous data (see related RX/TX) RB6/SCK/SCI RB6 SCK SCI 11 I/O I/O I/O TLL ST ST Digital I/O Synchronous serial clock input/output for SPI mode Synchronous serial clock input/output for I2C™ mode RB7/TX/CK RB7 TX CK 10 I/O O I/O TLL CMOS ST Digital I/O EUSART asynchronous transmit EUSART synchronous clock (see related RX/DT) Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input I = Input O = Output P = Power XTAL= Crystal Oscillator XCVR = USB Differential Transceiver PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 14 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. RC0/AN4/C12IN+/INT0/VREF+ RC0 AN4 C12IN+ INT0 VREF+ 16 I/O IIII ST Analog Analog ST Analog Digital I/O ADC channel 4 Comparator C1 and C2 non-inverting input External interrupt 0 Comparator reference voltage (high) input RC1/AN5/C12IN-/INT1/VREFRC1 AN5 C12ININT1 VREF- 15 I/O IIII ST Analog Analog ST Analog Digital I/O ADC channel 5 Comparator C1 and C2 non-inverting input External interrupt 0 Comparator reference voltage (low) input RC2/AN6/P1D/C12IN2-/CVREF/INT2 RC2 AN6 P1D C12IN2- CVREF INT2 14 I/O IOIOI ST Analog CMOS Analog Analog ST Digital I/O ADC channel 6 Enhanced CCP1 PWM output Comparator C1 and C2 inverting input Comparator reference voltage output External interrupt 0 RC3/AN7/P1C/C12IN3-/PGM RC3 AN7 P1C C12IN3- PGM 7 I/O IOI I/O ST Analog CMOS Analog ST Digital I/O ADC channel 7 Enhanced CCP1 PWM output Comparator C1 and C2 inverting input Low-Voltage ICSP Programming enable pin RC4/P1B/C12OUT/SRQ RC4 P1B C12OUT SRQ 6 I/O OOO ST CMOS CMOS CMOS Digital I/O Enhanced CCP1 PWM output Comparator C1 and C2 output SR Latch output RC5/CCP1/P1A/T0CKI RC5 CCP1 P1A T0CKI 5 I/O I/O OI ST ST CMOS ST Digital I/O Capture 1 input/Compare 1 output/PWM 1 output Enhanced CCP1 PWM output Timer0 external clock input RC6/AN8/SS/T13CKI/T1OSCI RC6 AN8 SS T13CKI T1OSCI 8 I/O IIII ST Analog TTL ST XTAL Digital I/O ADC channel 8 SPI slave select input Timer0 and Timer3 external clock input Timer1 oscillator input RC7/AN9/SDO/T1OSCO RC7 AN9 SDO T1OSCO 9 I/O IOO ST Analog CMOS XTAL Digital I/O ADC channel 9 SPI data out Timer1 oscillator output VSS 20 P — Ground reference for logic and I/O pins VDD 1 P — Positive supply for logic and I/O pins VUSB 17 P — Positive supply for USB transceiver TABLE 1-2: PIC18F/LF1XK50 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Name Pin Number Pin Type Buffer Type Description Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input I = Input O = Output P = Power XTAL= Crystal Oscillator XCVR = USB Differential Transceiver 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 15 PIC18F/LF1XK50 2.0 OSCILLATOR MODULE 2.1 Overview The oscillator module has a variety of clock sources and features that allow it to be used in a wide range of applications, maximizing performance and minimizing power consumption. Figure 2-1 illustrates a block diagram of the oscillator module. Key features of the oscillator module include: • System Clock Selection - Primary External Oscillator - Secondary External Oscillator - Internal Oscillator • Oscillator Start-up Timer • System Clock Selection • Clock Switching • 4x Phase Lock Loop Frequency Multiplier • CPU Clock Divider • USB Operation - Low Speed - Full Speed • Two-Speed Start-up Mode • Fail-Safe Clock Monitoring 2.2 System Clock Selection The SCS bits of the OSCCON register select between the following clock sources: • Primary External Oscillator • Secondary External Oscillator • Internal Oscillator TABLE 2-1: SYSTEM CLOCK SELECTION The default state of the SCS bits sets the system clock to be the oscillator defined by the FOSC bits of the CONFIG1H Configuration register. The system clock will always be defined by the FOSC bits until the SCS bits are modified in software. When the Internal Oscillator is selected as the system clock, the IRCF bits of the OSCCON register and the INTSRC bit of the OSCTUNE register will select either the LFINTOSC or the HFINTOSC. The LFINTOSC is selected when the IRCF<2:0> = 000 and the INTSRC bit is clear. All other combinations of the IRCF bits and the INTSRC bit will select the HFINTOSC as the system clock. 2.3 Primary External Oscillator The Primary External Oscillator’s mode of operation is selected by setting the FOSC<3:0> bits of the CONFIG1H Configuration register. The oscillator can be set to the following modes: • LP: Low-Power Crystal • XT: Crystal/Ceramic Resonator • HS: High-Speed Crystal Resonator • RC: External RC Oscillator • EC: External Clock Additionally, the Primary External Oscillator may be shut-down under firmware control to save power. Note: The frequency of the system clock will be referred to as FOSC throughout this document. Configuration Selection SCS <1:0> System Clock 1x Internal Oscillator 01 Secondary External Oscillator 00 (Default after Reset) Oscillator defined by FOSC<3:0> PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 16 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 2-1: PIC® MCU CLOCK SOURCE BLOCK DIAGRAM 4 x PLL FOSC<3:0> OSC2 OSC1 Sleep CPU Peripherals IDLEN Postscaler MUX MUX 16 MHz 8 MHz 4 MHz 2 MHz 1 MHz 250 kHz 500 kHz IRCF<2:0> 111 110 101 100 011 010 001 000 31 kHz 31 kHz LFINTOSC Internal Oscillator Block Clock HFINTOSC Control SCS<1:0> 16 MHz 0 1 INTSRC Primary PIC18F/LF1XK50 Sleep Sleep System Secondary T1OSCEN Enable Oscillator T1OSI T1OSO PCLKEN PRI_SD 2 CPU Divider 0 1 1 0 USBDIV FOSC<3:0> Low Speed USB High Speed USB PLLEN SPLLEN Oscillator Watchdog Timer Oscillator Fail-Safe Clock Two-Speed Start-up Clock 00 1x 01 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 17 PIC18F/LF1XK50 2.3.1 PRIMARY EXTERNAL OSCILLATOR SHUT-DOWN The Primary External Oscillator can be enabled or disabled via software. To enable software control of the Primary External Oscillator, the PCLKEN bit of the CONFIG1H Configuration register must be set. With the PCLKEN bit set, the Primary External Oscillator is controlled by the PRI_SD bit of the OSCCON2 register. The Primary External Oscillator will be enabled when the PRI_SD bit is set, and disabled when the PRI_SD bit is clear. 2.3.2 LP, XT AND HS OSCILLATOR MODES The LP, XT and HS modes support the use of quartz crystal resonators or ceramic resonators connected to OSC1 and OSC2 (Figure 2-2). The mode selects a low, medium or high gain setting of the internal inverteramplifier to support various resonator types and speed. LP Oscillator mode selects the lowest gain setting of the internal inverter-amplifier. LP mode current consumption is the least of the three modes. This mode is best suited to drive resonators with a low drive level specification, for example, tuning fork type crystals. XT Oscillator mode selects the intermediate gain setting of the internal inverter-amplifier. XT mode current consumption is the medium of the three modes. This mode is best suited to drive resonators with a medium drive level specification. HS Oscillator mode selects the highest gain setting of the internal inverter-amplifier. HS mode current consumption is the highest of the three modes. This mode is best suited for resonators that require a high drive setting. Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3 show typical circuits for quartz crystal and ceramic resonators, respectively. FIGURE 2-2: QUARTZ CRYSTAL OPERATION (LP, XT OR HS MODE) Note: The Primary External Oscillator cannot be shut down when it is selected as the System Clock. To shut down the oscillator, the system clock source must be either the Secondary Oscillator or the Internal Oscillator. Note 1: Quartz crystal characteristics vary according to type, package and manufacturer. The user should consult the manufacturer data sheets for specifications and recommended application. 2: Always verify oscillator performance over the VDD and temperature range that is expected for the application. 3: For oscillator design assistance, reference the following Microchip Applications Notes: • AN826, “Crystal Oscillator Basics and Crystal Selection for rfPIC® and PIC® Devices” (DS00826) • AN849, “Basic PIC® Oscillator Design” (DS00849) • AN943, “Practical PIC® Oscillator Analysis and Design” (DS00943) • AN949, “Making Your Oscillator Work” (DS00949) Note 1: A series resistor (RS) may be required for quartz crystals with low drive level. 2: The value of RF varies with the Oscillator mode selected (typically between 2 M to 10 M. C1 C2 Quartz RS(1) OSC1/CLKIN RF(2) Sleep To Internal Logic PIC® MCU Crystal OSC2/CLKOUT PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 18 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 2-3: CERAMIC RESONATOR OPERATION (XT OR HS MODE) 2.3.3 EXTERNAL RC The External Resistor-Capacitor (RC) mode supports the use of an external RC circuit. This allows the designer maximum flexibility in frequency choice while keeping costs to a minimum when clock accuracy is not required. In RC mode, the RC circuit connects to OSC1, allowing OSC2 to be configured as an IO or as CLKOUT. The CLKOUT function is selected by the FOSC bits of the CONFIG1H Configuration register. When OSC2 is configured as CLKOUT, the frequency at the pin is the frequency of the RC oscillator divided by 4. Figure 2-4 shows the external RC mode connections. FIGURE 2-4: EXTERNAL RC MODES The RC oscillator frequency is a function of the supply voltage, the resistor REXT, the capacitor CEXT and the operating temperature. Other factors affecting the oscillator frequency are: • Input threshold voltage variation • Component tolerances • Variation in capacitance due to packaging 2.3.4 EXTERNAL CLOCK The External Clock (EC) mode allows an externally generated logic level clock to be used as the system’s clock source. When operating in this mode, the external clock source is connected to the OSC1 allowing OSC2 to be configured as an I/O or as CLKOUT. The CLKOUT function is selected by the FOSC bits of the CONFIG1H Configuration register. When OSC2 is configured as CLKOUT, the frequency at the pin is the frequency of the EC oscillator divided by 4. Three different power settings are available for EC mode. The power settings allow for a reduced IDD of the device, if the EC clock is known to be in a specific range. If there is an expected range of frequencies for the EC clock, select the power mode for the highest frequency. EC Low power 0 – 250 kHz EC Medium power 250 kHz – 4 MHz EC High power 4 – 48 MHz 2.4 Secondary External Oscillator The Secondary External Oscillator is designed to drive an external 32.768 kHz crystal. This oscillator is enabled or disabled by the T1OSCEN bit of the T1CON register. See Section 11.0 “Timer1 Module” for more information. Note 1: A series resistor (RS) may be required for ceramic resonators with low drive level. 2: The value of RF varies with the Oscillator mode selected (typically between 2 M to 10 M. 3: An additional parallel feedback resistor (RP) may be required for proper ceramic resonator operation. C1 C2 Ceramic RS(1) OSC1/CLKIN RF(2) Sleep To Internal Logic PIC® MCU RP(3) Resonator OSC2/CLKOUT OSC2/CLKOUT(1) CEXT REXT PIC® MCU OSC1/CLKIN FOSC/4 or Internal Clock VDD VSS Recommended values: 10 k REXT 100 k CEXT > 20 pF Note 1: Alternate pin functions are listed in Section 1.0 “Device Overview”. 2: Output depends upon RC or RCIO clock mode. I/O(2) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 19 PIC18F/LF1XK50 2.5 Internal Oscillator The internal oscillator module contains two independent oscillators which are: • LFINTOSC: Low-Frequency Internal Oscillator • HFINTOSC: High-Frequency Internal Oscillator When operating with either oscillator, OSC1 will be an I/O and OSC2 will be either an I/O or CLKOUT. The CLKOUT function is selected by the FOSC bits of the CONFIG1H Configuration register. When OSC2 is configured as CLKOUT, the frequency at the pin is the frequency of the Internal Oscillator divided by 4. 2.5.1 LFINTOSC The Low-Frequency Internal Oscillator (LFINTOSC) is a 31 kHz internal clock source. The LFINTOSC oscillator is the clock source for: • Power-up Timer • Watchdog Timer • Fail-Safe Clock Monitor The LFINTOSC is enabled when any of the following conditions are true: • Power-up Timer is enabled (PWRTEN = 0) • Watchdog Timer is enabled (WDTEN = 1) • Watchdog Timer is enabled by software (WDTEN = 0 and SWDTEN = 1) • Fail-Safe Clock Monitor is enabled (FCMEM = 1) • SCS1=1 and IRCF<2:0> = 000 and INTSRC = 0 • FOSC<3:0> selects the internal oscillator as the primary clock and IRCF<2:0> = 000 and INTSRC = 0 • IESO = 1 (Two-Speed Start-up) and IRCF<2:0> = 000 and INTSRC = 0 2.5.2 HFINTOSC The High-Frequency Internal Oscillator (HFINTOSC) is a precision oscillator that is factory-calibrated to operate at 16 MHz. The output of the HFINTOSC connects to a postscaler and a multiplexer (see Figure 2-1). One of eight frequencies can be selected using the IRCF<2:0> bits of the OSCCON register. The following frequencies are available from the HFINTOSC: • 16 MHZ • 8 MHZ • 4 MHZ • 2 MHZ • 1 MHZ (Default after Reset) • 500 kHz • 250 kHz • 31 kHz The HFIOFS bit of the OSCCON register indicates whether the HFINTOSC is stable. The HFINTOSC is enabled if any of the following conditions are true: • SCS1 = 1 and IRCF<2:0> 000 • SCS1 = 1 and IRCF<2:0> = 000 and INTSRC = 1 • FOSC<3:0> selects the internal oscillator as the primary clock and - IRCF<2:0> 000 or - IRCF<2:0> = 000 and INTSRC = 1 • IESO = 1 (Two-Speed Start-up) and - IRCF<2:0> 000 or - IRCF<2:0> = 000 and INTSRC = 1 • FCMEM=1 (Fail Safe Clock Monitoring) and - IRCF<2:0> 000 or - IRCF<2:0> = 000 and INTSRC = 1 Note 1: Selecting 31 kHz from the HFINTOSC oscillator requires IRCF<2:0> = 000 and the INTSRC bit of the OSCTUNE register to be set. If the INTSRC bit is clear, the system clock will come from the LFINTOSC. 2: Additional adjustments to the frequency of the HFINTOSC can made via the OSCTUNE registers. See Register 2-3 for more details PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 20 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 2.6 Oscillator Control The Oscillator Control (OSCCON) (Register 2-1) and the Oscillator Control 2 (OSCCON2) (Register 2-2) registers control the system clock and frequency selection options. REGISTER 2-1: OSCCON: OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R-q R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 IDLEN IRCF2 IRCF1 IRCF0 OSTS(1) HFIOFS SCS1 SCS0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ q = depends on condition -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 IDLEN: Idle Enable bit 1 = Device enters Idle mode on SLEEP instruction 0 = Device enters Sleep mode on SLEEP instruction bit 6-4 IRCF<2:0>: Internal Oscillator Frequency Select bits 111 = 16 MHz 110 = 8 MHz 101 = 4 MHz 100 = 2 MHz 011 = 1 MHz(3) 010 = 500 kHz 001 = 250 kHz 000 = 31 kHz(2) bit 3 OSTS: Oscillator Start-up Time-out Status bit(1) 1 = Device is running from the clock defined by FOSC<2:0> of the CONFIG1 register 0 = Device is running from the internal oscillator (HFINTOSC or LFINTOSC) bit 2 HFIOFS: HFINTOSC Frequency Stable bit 1 = HFINTOSC frequency is stable 0 = HFINTOSC frequency is not stable bit 1-0 SCS<1:0>: System Clock Select bits 1x = Internal oscillator block 01 = Secondary (Timer1) oscillator 00 = Primary clock (determined by CONFIG1H[FOSC<3:0>]). Note 1: Reset state depends on state of the IESO Configuration bit. 2: Source selected by the INTSRC bit of the OSCTUNE register, see text. 3: Default output frequency of HFINTOSC on Reset. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 21 PIC18F/LF1XK50 REGISTER 2-2: OSCCON2: OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER 2 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-0 R-x — — — — — PRI_SD HFIOFL LFIOFS bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ q = depends on condition -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2 PRI_SD: Primary Oscillator Drive Circuit shutdown bit 1 = Oscillator drive circuit on 0 = Oscillator drive circuit off (zero power) bit 1 HFIOFL: HFINTOSC Frequency Locked bit 1 = HFINTOSC is in lock 0 = HFINTOSC has not yet locked bit 0 LFIOFS: LFINTOSC Frequency Stable bit 1 = LFINTOSC is stable 0 = LFINTOSC is not stable PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 22 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 2.6.1 OSCTUNE REGISTER The HFINTOSC is factory calibrated, but can be adjusted in software by writing to the TUN<5:0> bits of the OSCTUNE register (Register 2-3). The default value of the TUN<5:0> is ‘000000’. The value is a 6-bit two’s complement number. When the OSCTUNE register is modified, the HFINTOSC frequency will begin shifting to the new frequency. Code execution continues during this shift, while giving no indication that the shift has occurred. OSCTUNE does not affect the LFINTOSC frequency. The operation of features that depend on the LFINTOSC clock source frequency, such as the Power-up Timer (PWRT), Watchdog Timer (WDT), Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) and peripherals, are not affected by the change in frequency. The OSCTUNE register also implements the INTSRC and SPLLEN bits, which control certain features of the internal oscillator block. The INTSRC bit allows users to select which internal oscillator provides the clock source when the 31 kHz frequency option is selected. This is covered in greater detail in Section 2.5.1 “LFINTOSC”. The SPLLEN bit controls the operation of the frequency multiplier. For more details about the function of the SPLLEN bit see Section 2.9 “4x Phase Lock Loop Frequency Multiplier” REGISTER 2-3: OSCTUNE: OSCILLATOR TUNING REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 INTSRC SPLLEN TUN5 TUN4 TUN3 TUN2 TUN1 TUN0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 INTSRC: Internal Oscillator Low-Frequency Source Select bit 1 = 31.25 kHz device clock derived from 16 MHz HFINTOSC source (divide-by-512 enabled) 0 = 31 kHz device clock derived directly from LFINTOSC internal oscillator bit 6 SPLLEN: Software Controlled Frequency Multiplier PLL bit 1 = PLL enabled (for HFINTOSC 8 MHz only) 0 = PLL disabled bit 5-0 TUN<5:0>: Frequency Tuning bits 011111 = Maximum frequency 011110 = • • • 000001 = 000000 = Oscillator module is running at the factory calibrated frequency. 111111 = • • • 100000 = Minimum frequency 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 23 PIC18F/LF1XK50 2.7 Oscillator Start-up Timer The Primary External Oscillator, when configured for LP, XT or HS modes, incorporates an Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST). The OST ensures that the oscillator starts and provides a stable clock to the oscillator module. The OST times out when 1024 oscillations on OSC1 have occurred. During the OST period, with the system clock set to the Primary External Oscillator, the program counter does not increment suspending program execution. The OST period will occur following: • Power-on Reset (POR) • Brown-out Reset (BOR) • Wake-up from Sleep • Oscillator being enabled • Expiration of Power-up Timer (PWRT) In order to minimize latency between external oscillator start-up and code execution, the Two-Speed Start-up mode can be selected. See Section 2.12 “Two-Speed Start-up Mode” for more information. 2.8 Clock Switching The device contains circuitry to prevent clock “glitches” due to a change of the system clock source. To accomplish this, a short pause in the system clock occurs during the clock switch. If the new clock source is not stable (e.g., OST is active), the device will continue to execute from the old clock source until the new clock source becomes stable. The timing of a clock switch is as follows: 1. SCS<1:0> bits of the OSCCON register are modified. 2. The system clock will continue to operate from the old clock until the new clock is ready. 3. Clock switch circuitry waits for two consecutive rising edges of the old clock after the new clock is ready. 4. The system clock is held low, starting at the next falling edge of the old clock. 5. Clock switch circuitry waits for an additional two rising edges of the new clock. 6. On the next falling edge of the new clock, the low hold on the system clock is release and the new clock is switched in as the system clock. 7. Clock switch is complete. Refer to Figure 2-5 for more details. FIGURE 2-5: CLOCK SWITCH TIMING Old Clock New Clock IRCF <2:0> System Clock Start-up Time(1) Clock Sync Running High Speed Low Speed Select Old Select New New Clk Ready Low Speed High Speed Old Clock New Clock IRCF <2:0> System Clock Start-up Time(1) Clock Sync Running Select Old Select New New Clk Ready Note 1: Start-up time includes TOST (1024 TOSC) for external clocks, plus TPLL (approx. 2 ms) for HSPLL mode. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 24 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 2-2: EXAMPLES OF DELAYS DUE TO CLOCK SWITCHING 2.9 4x Phase Lock Loop Frequency Multiplier A Phase Locked Loop (PLL) circuit is provided as an option for users who wish to use a lower-frequency external oscillator or to operate at 32 MHz with the HFINTOSC. The PLL is designed for an input frequency from 4 MHz to 12 MHz. The PLL multiplies its input frequency by a factor of four when the PLL is enabled. This may be useful for customers who are concerned with EMI, due to high-frequency crystals. Two bits control the PLL: the PLLEN bit of the CONFIG1H Configuration register and the SPLLEN bit of the OSCTUNE register. The PLL is enabled when the PLLEN bit is set and it is under software control when the PLLEN bit is cleared. TABLE 2-3: PLL CONFIGURATION 2.9.1 32 MHZ INTERNAL OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY SELECTION The Internal Oscillator Block can be used with the 4X PLL associated with the External Oscillator Block to produce a 32 MHz internal system clock source. The following settings are required to use the 32 MHz internal clock source: • The FOSC bits in CONFIG1H must be set to use the INTOSC source as the device system clock (FOSC<3:0> = 1000 or 1001). • The SCS bits in the OSCCON register must be cleared to use the clock determined by FOSC<3:0> in CONFIG1H (SCS<1:0> = 00). • The IRCF bits in the OSCCON register must be set to the 8 MHz HFINTOSC set to use (IRCF<2:0> = 110). • The SPLLEN bit in the OSCTUNE register must be set to enable the 4xPLL, or the PLLEN bit of CONFIG1H must be progr mmed to a ‘1’. The 4xPLL is not available for use with the internal oscillator when the SCS bits of the OSCCON register are set to ‘1x’. The SCS bits must be set to ‘00’ to use the 4xPLL with the internal oscillator. 2.10 CPU Clock Divider The CPU Clock Divider allows the system clock to run at a slower speed than the Low/Full Speed USB module clock while sharing the same clock source. Only the oscillator defined by the settings of the FOSC bits of the CONFIG1H Configuration register may be used with the CPU Clock Divider. The CPU Clock Divider is controlled by the CPUDIV bits of the CONFIG1L Configuration register. Setting the CPUDIV bits will set the system clock to: • Equal the clock speed of the USB module • Half the clock speed of the USB module • One third the clock speed of the USB module • One fourth the clock speed of the USB module For more information on the CPU Clock Divider, see Figure 2-1 and Register 24-1 CONFIG1L. Switch From Switch To Oscillator Delay Sleep/POR LFINTOSC HFINTOSC Oscillator Warm-up Delay (TWARM) Sleep/POR LP, XT, HS 1024 clock cycles Sleep/POR EC, RC 8 clock cycles PLLEN SPLLEN PLL Status 1 x PLL enabled 0 1 PLL enabled 0 0 PLL disabled Note: When using the PLLEN bit of CONFIG1H, the 4xPLL cannot be disabled by software and the 8 MHz HFINTOSC option will no longer be available. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 25 PIC18F/LF1XK50 2.11 USB Operation The USB module is designed to operate in two different modes: • Low Speed • Full Speed Because of timing requirements imposed by the USB specifications, the Primary External Oscillator is required for the USB module. The FOSC bits of the CONFIG1H Configuration register must be set to either External Clock (EC) High-power or HS mode with a clock frequency of 6, 12 or 48 MHz. 2.11.1 LOW SPEED OPERATION For Low Speed USB operation, a 6 MHz clock is required for the USB module. To generate the 6 MHz clock, only 2 Oscillator modes are allowed: • EC High-power mode • HS mode Table 2-4 shows the recommended Clock mode for low-speed operation. 2.11.2 FULL-SPEED OPERATION For full-speed USB operation, a 48 MHz clock is required for the USB module. To generate the 48 MHz clock, only 2 Oscillator modes are allowed: • EC High-power mode • HS mode Table 2-5 shows the recommended Clock mode for fullspeed operation. Note: Users must run USB low speed operation using a CPU clock frequency of 24 MHz or slower (64 MHz is optimal). If anything higher than 24 MHz is used, a firmware delay of at least 14 instruction cycles is required. PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 26 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 2-4: LOW SPEED USB CLOCK SETTINGS TABLE 2-5: FULL-SPEED USB CLOCK SETTINGS Clock Mode Clock Frequency USBDIV 4x PLL Enabled CPUDIV<1:0> System Clock Frequency (MHz) EC High/HS 12 MHz 1 Yes 00 48 01 24 10 16 11 12 No 00 12 01 6 10 4 11 3 6 MHz 0 Yes 00 24 01 12 10 8 11 6 No 00 6 01 3 10 2 11 1.5 Note: The system clock frequency in Table 2-4 only applies if the OSCCON register bits SCS<1:0> = 00. By changing these bits, the system clock can operate down to 31 kHz. Clock Mode Clock Frequency 4x PLL Enabled CPUDIV<1:0> System Clock Frequency (MHz) EC High 48 MHz No 00 48 01 24 10 16 11 12 EC High/HS 12 MHz Yes 00 48 01 24 10 16 11 12 Note: The system clock frequency in the above table only applies if the OSCCON register bits SCS<1:0> = 00. By changing these bits, the system clock can operate down to 31 kHz. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 27 PIC18F/LF1XK50 2.12 Two-Speed Start-up Mode Two-Speed Start-up mode provides additional power savings by minimizing the latency between external Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) and code execution. In applications that make heavy use of the Sleep mode, Two-Speed Start-up will remove the OST period, which can reduce the overall power consumption of the device. Two-Speed Start-up mode is enabled by setting the IESO bit of the CONFIG1H Configuration register. With Two-Speed Start-up enabled, the device will execute instructions using the internal oscillator during the Primary External Oscillator OST period. When the system clock is set to the Primary External Oscillator and the oscillator is configured for LP, XT or HS modes, the device will not execute code during the OST period. The OST will suspend program execution until 1024 oscillations are counted. Two-Speed Start-up mode minimizes the delay in code execution by operating from the internal oscillator while the OST is active. The system clock will switch back to the Primary External Oscillator after the OST period has expired. Two-speed Start-up will become active after: • Power-on Reset (POR) • Power-up Timer (PWRT), if enabled • Wake-up from Sleep The OSTS bit of the OSCCON register reports which oscillator the device is currently using for operation. The device is running from the oscillator defined by the FOSC bits of the CONFIG1H Configuration register when the OSTS bit is set. The device is running from the internal oscillator when the OSTS bit is clear. 2.13 Fail-Safe Clock Monitor The Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) allows the device to continue operating should the external oscillator fail. The FSCM can detect oscillator failure any time after the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) has expired. The FSCM is enabled by setting the FCMEN bit in the CONFIG1H Configuration register. The FSCM is applicable to all external oscillator modes (LP, XT, HS, EC and RC). FIGURE 2-6: FSCM BLOCK DIAGRAM 2.13.1 FAIL-SAFE DETECTION The FSCM module detects a failed oscillator by comparing the external oscillator to the FSCM sample clock. The sample clock is generated by dividing the LFINTOSC by 64. See Figure 2-6. Inside the fail detector block is a latch. The external clock sets the latch on each falling edge of the external clock. The sample clock clears the latch on each rising edge of the sample clock. A failure is detected when an entire halfcycle of the sample clock elapses before the primary clock goes low. 2.13.2 FAIL-SAFE OPERATION When the external clock fails, the FSCM switches the device clock to an internal clock source and sets the bit flag OSCFIF of the PIR2 register. The OSCFIF flag will generate an interrupt if the OSCFIE bit of the PIE2 register is also set. The device firmware can then take steps to mitigate the problems that may arise from a failed clock. The system clock will continue to be sourced from the internal clock source until the device firmware successfully restarts the external oscillator and switches back to external operation. An automatic transition back to the failed clock source will not occur. The internal clock source chosen by the FSCM is determined by the IRCF<2:0> bits of the OSCCON register. This allows the internal oscillator to be configured before a failure occurs. External LFINTOSC ÷ 64 S R Q 31 kHz (~32 s) 488 Hz (~2 ms) Clock Monitor Latch Clock Failure Detected Oscillator Clock Q Sample Clock PIC18F/LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 28 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 2.13.3 FAIL-SAFE CONDITION CLEARING The Fail-Safe condition is cleared by either one of the following: • Any Reset • By toggling the SCS1 bit of the OSCCON register Both of these conditions restart the OST. While the OST is running, the device continues to operate from the INTOSC selected in OSCCON. When the OST times out, the Fail-Safe condition is cleared and the device automatically switches over to the external clock source. The Fail-Safe condition need not be cleared before the OSCFIF flag is cleared. 2.13.4 RESET OR WAKE-UP FROM SLEEP The FSCM is designed to detect an oscillator failure after the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) has expired. The OST is used after waking up from Sleep and after any type of Reset. The OST is not used with the EC or RC Clock modes so that the FSCM will be active as soon as the Reset or wake-up has completed. When the FSCM is enabled, the Two-Speed Start-up is also enabled. Therefore, the device will always be executing code while the OST is operating. FIGURE 2-7: FSCM TIMING DIAGRAM TABLE 2-6: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CLOCK SOURCES Note: Due to the wide range of oscillator start-up times, the Fail-Safe circuit is not active during oscillator start-up (i.e., after exiting Reset or Sleep). After an appropriate amount of time, the user should check the OSTS bit of the OSCCON register to verify the oscillator start-up and that the system clock switchover has successfully completed. Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page CONFIG1H IESO FCMEN PCLKEN PLLEN FOSC3 FOSC2 FOSC1 FOSC0 296 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 285 OSCCON IDLEN IRCF2 IRCF1 IRCF0 OSTS HFIOFS SCS1 SCS0 286 OSCTUNE INTSRC SPLLEN TUN5 TUN4 TUN3 TUN2 TUN1 TUN0 288 PIE2 OSCFIE C1IE C2IE EEIE BCLIE USBIE TMR3IE — 288 PIR2 OSCFIF C1IF C2IF EEIF BCLIF USBIF TMR3IF — 288 T1CON RD16 T1RUN T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC TMR1CS TMR1ON 105 Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, – = unimplemented locations read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by oscillators. Note 1: Other (non Power-up) Resets include MCLR Reset and Watchdog Timer Reset during normal operation. OSCFIF System Clock Output Sample Clock Failure Detected Oscillator Failure Note: The system clock is normally at a much higher frequency than the sample clock. The relative frequencies in this example have been chosen for clarity. (Q) Test Test Test Clock Monitor Output 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 29 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 3.0 MEMORY ORGANIZATION There are three types of memory in PIC18 Enhanced microcontroller devices: • Program Memory • Data RAM • Data EEPROM As Harvard architecture devices, the data and program memories use separate busses; this allows for concurrent access of the two memory spaces. The data EEPROM, for practical purposes, can be regarded as a peripheral device, since it is addressed and accessed through a set of control registers. Additional detailed information on the operation of the Flash program memory is provided in Section 4.0 “Flash Program Memory”. Data EEPROM is discussed separately in Section 5.0 “Data EEPROM Memory”. 3.1 Program Memory Organization PIC18 microcontrollers implement a 21-bit program counter, which is capable of addressing a 2-Mbyte program memory space. Accessing a location between the upper boundary of the physically implemented memory and the 2-Mbyte address will return all ‘0’s (a NOP instruction). This family of devices contain the following: • PIC18F13K50: 8 Kbytes of Flash Memory, up to 4,096 single-word instructions • PIC18F14K50: 16 Kbytes of Flash Memory, up to 8,192 single-word instructions PIC18 devices have two interrupt vectors and one Reset vector. The Reset vector address is at 0000h and the interrupt vector addresses are at 0008h and 0018h. The program memory map for PIC18F/LF1XK50 devices is shown in Figure 3-1. Memory block details are shown in Figure 24-2. FIGURE 3-1: PROGRAM MEMORY MAP AND STACK FOR PIC18F/LF1XK50 DEVICES PC<20:0> Stack Level 1 Stack Level 31 Reset Vector Low Priority Interrupt Vector CALL,RCALL,RETURN RETFIE,RETLW 21 0000h 0018h High Priority Interrupt Vector 0008h User Memory Space 1FFFFFh 4000h 3FFFh 200000h On-Chip Program Memory Read ‘0’ 1FFFh 2000h On-Chip Program Memory Read ‘0’ PIC18F14K50 PIC18F13K50 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 30 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 3.1.1 PROGRAM COUNTER The Program Counter (PC) specifies the address of the instruction to fetch for execution. The PC is 21 bits wide and is contained in three separate 8-bit registers. The low byte, known as the PCL register, is both readable and writable. The high byte, or PCH register, contains the PC<15:8> bits; it is not directly readable or writable. Updates to the PCH register are performed through the PCLATH register. The upper byte is called PCU. This register contains the PC<20:16> bits; it is also not directly readable or writable. Updates to the PCU register are performed through the PCLATU register. The contents of PCLATH and PCLATU are transferred to the program counter by any operation that writes PCL. Similarly, the upper two bytes of the program counter are transferred to PCLATH and PCLATU by an operation that reads PCL. This is useful for computed offsets to the PC (see Section 3.1.4.1 “Computed GOTO”). The PC addresses bytes in the program memory. To prevent the PC from becoming misaligned with word instructions, the Least Significant bit (LSb) of PCL is fixed to a value of ‘0’. The PC increments by 2 to address sequential instructions in the program memory. The CALL, RCALL, GOTO and program branch instructions write to the program counter directly. For these instructions, the contents of PCLATH and PCLATU are not transferred to the program counter. 3.1.2 RETURN ADDRESS STACK The return address stack allows any combination of up to 31 program calls and interrupts to occur. The PC is pushed onto the stack when a CALL or RCALL instruction is executed or an interrupt is Acknowledged. The PC value is pulled off the stack on a RETURN, RETLW or a RETFIE instruction. PCLATU and PCLATH are not affected by any of the RETURN or CALL instructions. The stack operates as a 31-word by 21-bit RAM and a 5-bit Stack Pointer, STKPTR. The stack space is not part of either program or data space. The Stack Pointer is readable and writable and the address on the top of the stack is readable and writable through the Top-of- Stack (TOS) Special File Registers. Data can also be pushed to, or popped from the stack, using these registers. A CALL type instruction causes a push onto the stack; the Stack Pointer is first incremented and the location pointed to by the Stack Pointer is written with the contents of the PC (already pointing to the instruction following the CALL). A RETURN type instruction causes a pop from the stack; the contents of the location pointed to by the STKPTR are transferred to the PC and then the Stack Pointer is decremented. The Stack Pointer is initialized to ‘00000’ after all Resets. There is no RAM associated with the location corresponding to a Stack Pointer value of ‘00000’; this is only a Reset value. Status bits indicate if the stack is full or has overflowed or has underflowed. 3.1.2.1 Top-of-Stack Access Only the top of the return address stack (TOS) is readable and writable. A set of three registers, TOSU:TOSH:TOSL, hold the contents of the stack location pointed to by the STKPTR register (Figure 3-2). This allows users to implement a software stack if necessary. After a CALL, RCALL or interrupt, the software can read the pushed value by reading the TOSU:TOSH:TOSL registers. These values can be placed on a user defined software stack. At return time, the software can return these values to TOSU:TOSH:TOSL and do a return. The user must disable the global interrupt enable bits while accessing the stack to prevent inadvertent stack corruption. FIGURE 3-2: RETURN ADDRESS STACK AND ASSOCIATED REGISTERS 00011 001A34h 11111 11110 11101 00010 00001 00000 00010 Return Address Stack <20:0> Top-of-Stack 000D58h TOSU TOSH TOSL 00h 1Ah 34h STKPTR<4:0> Top-of-Stack Registers Stack Pointer 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 31 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 3.1.2.2 Return Stack Pointer (STKPTR) The STKPTR register (Register 3-1) contains the Stack Pointer value, the STKFUL (stack full) bit and the STKUNF (stack underflow) bits. The value of the Stack Pointer can be 0 through 31. The Stack Pointer increments before values are pushed onto the stack and decrements after values are popped off the stack. On Reset, the Stack Pointer value will be zero. The user may read and write the Stack Pointer value. This feature can be used by a Real-Time Operating System (RTOS) for return stack maintenance. After the PC is pushed onto the stack 31 times (without popping any values off the stack), the STKFUL bit is set. The STKFUL bit is cleared by software or by a POR. The action that takes place when the stack becomes full depends on the state of the STVREN (Stack Overflow Reset Enable) Configuration bit. (Refer to Section 24.1 “Configuration Bits” for a description of the device Configuration bits.) If STVREN is set (default), the 31st push will push the (PC + 2) value onto the stack, set the STKFUL bit and reset the device. The STKFUL bit will remain set and the Stack Pointer will be set to zero. If STVREN is cleared, the STKFUL bit will be set on the 31st push and the Stack Pointer will increment to 31. Any additional pushes will not overwrite the 31st push and STKPTR will remain at 31. When the stack has been popped enough times to unload the stack, the next pop will return a value of zero to the PC and sets the STKUNF bit, while the Stack Pointer remains at zero. The STKUNF bit will remain set until cleared by software or until a POR occurs. 3.1.2.3 PUSH and POP Instructions Since the Top-of-Stack is readable and writable, the ability to push values onto the stack and pull values off the stack without disturbing normal program execution is a desirable feature. The PIC18 instruction set includes two instructions, PUSH and POP, that permit the TOS to be manipulated under software control. TOSU, TOSH and TOSL can be modified to place data or a return address on the stack. The PUSH instruction places the current PC value onto the stack. This increments the Stack Pointer and loads the current PC value onto the stack. The POP instruction discards the current TOS by decrementing the Stack Pointer. The previous value pushed onto the stack then becomes the TOS value. Note: Returning a value of zero to the PC on an underflow has the effect of vectoring the program to the Reset vector, where the stack conditions can be verified and appropriate actions can be taken. This is not the same as a Reset, as the contents of the SFRs are not affected. REGISTER 3-1: STKPTR: STACK POINTER REGISTER R/C-0 R/C-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 STKFUL(1) STKUNF(1) — SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented C = Clearable only bit -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 STKFUL: Stack Full Flag bit(1) 1 = Stack became full or overflowed 0 = Stack has not become full or overflowed bit 6 STKUNF: Stack Underflow Flag bit(1) 1 = Stack underflow occurred 0 = Stack underflow did not occur bit 5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 SP<4:0>: Stack Pointer Location bits Note 1: Bit 7 and bit 6 are cleared by user software or by a POR. PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 32 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 3.1.2.4 Stack Full and Underflow Resets Device Resets on stack overflow and stack underflow conditions are enabled by setting the STVREN bit in Configuration Register 4L. When STVREN is set, a full or underflow will set the appropriate STKFUL or STKUNF bit and then cause a device Reset. When STVREN is cleared, a full or underflow condition will set the appropriate STKFUL or STKUNF bit but not cause a device Reset. The STKFUL or STKUNF bits are cleared by the user software or a Power-on Reset. 3.1.3 FAST REGISTER STACK A fast register stack is provided for the Status, WREG and BSR registers, to provide a “fast return” option for interrupts. The stack for each register is only one level deep and is neither readable nor writable. It is loaded with the current value of the corresponding register when the processor vectors for an interrupt. All interrupt sources will push values into the stack registers. The values in the registers are then loaded back into their associated registers if the RETFIE, FAST instruction is used to return from the interrupt. If both low and high priority interrupts are enabled, the stack registers cannot be used reliably to return from low priority interrupts. If a high priority interrupt occurs while servicing a low priority interrupt, the stack register values stored by the low priority interrupt will be overwritten. In these cases, users must save the key registers by software during a low priority interrupt. If interrupt priority is not used, all interrupts may use the fast register stack for returns from interrupt. If no interrupts are used, the fast register stack can be used to restore the Status, WREG and BSR registers at the end of a subroutine call. To use the fast register stack for a subroutine call, a CALL label, FAST instruction must be executed to save the Status, WREG and BSR registers to the fast register stack. A RETURN, FAST instruction is then executed to restore these registers from the fast register stack. Example 3-1 shows a source code example that uses the fast register stack during a subroutine call and return. EXAMPLE 3-1: FAST REGISTER STACK CODE EXAMPLE 3.1.4 LOOK-UP TABLES IN PROGRAM MEMORY There may be programming situations that require the creation of data structures, or look-up tables, in program memory. For PIC18 devices, look-up tables can be implemented in two ways: • Computed GOTO • Table Reads 3.1.4.1 Computed GOTO A computed GOTO is accomplished by adding an offset to the program counter. An example is shown in Example 3-2. A look-up table can be formed with an ADDWF PCL instruction and a group of RETLW nn instructions. The W register is loaded with an offset into the table before executing a call to that table. The first instruction of the called routine is the ADDWF PCL instruction. The next instruction executed will be one of the RETLW nn instructions that returns the value ‘nn’ to the calling function. The offset value (in WREG) specifies the number of bytes that the program counter should advance and should be multiples of 2 (LSb = 0). In this method, only one data byte may be stored in each instruction location and room on the return address stack is required. EXAMPLE 3-2: COMPUTED GOTO USING AN OFFSET VALUE 3.1.4.2 Table Reads and Table Writes A better method of storing data in program memory allows two bytes of data to be stored in each instruction location. Look-up table data may be stored two bytes per program word by using table reads and writes. The Table Pointer (TBLPTR) register specifies the byte address and the Table Latch (TABLAT) register contains the data that is read from or written to program memory. Data is transferred to or from program memory one byte at a time. Table read and table write operations are discussed further in Section 4.1 “Table Reads and Table Writes”. CALL SUB1, FAST ;STATUS, WREG, BSR ;SAVED IN FAST REGISTER ;STACK SUB1 RETURN, FAST ;RESTORE VALUES SAVED ;IN FAST REGISTER STACK MOVF OFFSET, W CALL TABLE ORG nn00h TABLE ADDWF PCL RETLW nnh RETLW nnh RETLW nnh . . . 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 33 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 3.2 PIC18 Instruction Cycle 3.2.1 CLOCKING SCHEME The microcontroller clock input, whether from an internal or external source, is internally divided by four to generate four non-overlapping quadrature clocks (Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4). Internally, the program counter is incremented on every Q1; the instruction is fetched from the program memory and latched into the instruction register during Q4. The instruction is decoded and executed during the following Q1 through Q4. The clocks and instruction execution flow are shown in Figure 3-3. 3.2.2 INSTRUCTION FLOW/PIPELINING An “Instruction Cycle” consists of four Q cycles: Q1 through Q4. The instruction fetch and execute are pipelined in such a manner that a fetch takes one instruction cycle, while the decode and execute take another instruction cycle. However, due to the pipelining, each instruction effectively executes in one cycle. If an instruction causes the program counter to change (e.g., GOTO), then two cycles are required to complete the instruction (Example 3-3). A fetch cycle begins with the Program Counter (PC) incrementing in Q1. In the execution cycle, the fetched instruction is latched into the Instruction Register (IR) in cycle Q1. This instruction is then decoded and executed during the Q2, Q3 and Q4 cycles. Data memory is read during Q2 (operand read) and written during Q4 (destination write). FIGURE 3-3: CLOCK/INSTRUCTION CYCLE EXAMPLE 3-3: INSTRUCTION PIPELINE FLOW Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 OSC1 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PC OSC2/CLKOUT (RC mode) PC PC + 2 PC + 4 Fetch INST (PC) Execute INST (PC – 2) Fetch INST (PC + 2) Execute INST (PC) Fetch INST (PC + 4) Execute INST (PC + 2) Internal Phase Clock All instructions are single cycle, except for any program branches. These take two cycles since the fetch instruction is “flushed” from the pipeline while the new instruction is being fetched and then executed. TCY0 TCY1 TCY2 TCY3 TCY4 TCY5 1. MOVLW 55h Fetch 1 Execute 1 2. MOVWF PORTB Fetch 2 Execute 2 3. BRA SUB_1 Fetch 3 Execute 3 4. BSF PORTA, BIT3 (Forced NOP) Fetch 4 Flush (NOP) 5. Instruction @ address SUB_1 Fetch SUB_1 Execute SUB_1 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 34 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 3.2.3 INSTRUCTIONS IN PROGRAM MEMORY The program memory is addressed in bytes. Instructions are stored as either two bytes or four bytes in program memory. The Least Significant Byte (LSB) of an instruction word is always stored in a program memory location with an even address (LSb = 0). To maintain alignment with instruction boundaries, the PC increments in steps of 2 and the LSb will always read ‘0’ (see Section 3.1.1 “Program Counter”). Figure 3-4 shows an example of how instruction words are stored in the program memory. The CALL and GOTO instructions have the absolute program memory address embedded into the instruction. Since instructions are always stored on word boundaries, the data contained in the instruction is a word address. The word address is written to PC<20:1>, which accesses the desired byte address in program memory. Instruction #2 in Figure 3-4 shows how the instruction GOTO 0006h is encoded in the program memory. Program branch instructions, which encode a relative address offset, operate in the same manner. The offset value stored in a branch instruction represents the number of single-word instructions that the PC will be offset by. Section 25.0 “Instruction Set Summary” provides further details of the instruction set. FIGURE 3-4: INSTRUCTIONS IN PROGRAM MEMORY 3.2.4 TWO-WORD INSTRUCTIONS The standard PIC18 instruction set has four two-word instructions: CALL, MOVFF, GOTO and LSFR. In all cases, the second word of the instruction always has ‘1111’ as its four Most Significant bits (MSb); the other 12 bits are literal data, usually a data memory address. The use of ‘1111’ in the 4 MSbs of an instruction specifies a special form of NOP. If the instruction is executed in proper sequence – immediately after the first word – the data in the second word is accessed and used by the instruction sequence. If the first word is skipped for some reason and the second word is executed by itself, a NOP is executed instead. This is necessary for cases when the two-word instruction is preceded by a conditional instruction that changes the PC. Example 3-4 shows how this works. EXAMPLE 3-4: TWO-WORD INSTRUCTIONS Word Address LSB = 1 LSB = 0 Program Memory Byte Locations 000000h 000002h 000004h 000006h Instruction 1: MOVLW 055h 0Fh 55h 000008h Instruction 2: GOTO 0006h EFh 03h 00000Ah F0h 00h 00000Ch Instruction 3: MOVFF 123h, 456h C1h 23h 00000Eh F4h 56h 000010h 000012h 000014h Note: See Section 3.6 “PIC18 Instruction Execution and the Extended Instruction Set” for information on two-word instructions in the extended instruction set. CASE 1: Object Code Source Code 0110 0110 0000 0000 TSTFSZ REG1 ; is RAM location 0? 1100 0001 0010 0011 MOVFF REG1, REG2 ; No, skip this word 1111 0100 0101 0110 ; Execute this word as a NOP 0010 0100 0000 0000 ADDWF REG3 ; continue code CASE 2: Object Code Source Code 0110 0110 0000 0000 TSTFSZ REG1 ; is RAM location 0? 1100 0001 0010 0011 MOVFF REG1, REG2 ; Yes, execute this word 1111 0100 0101 0110 ; 2nd word of instruction 0010 0100 0000 0000 ADDWF REG3 ; continue code 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 35 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 3.3 Data Memory Organization The data memory in PIC18 devices is implemented as static RAM. Each register in the data memory has a 12-bit address, allowing up to 4096 bytes of data memory. The memory space is divided into as many as 16 banks that contain 256 bytes each. Figure 3-5 and Figure 3-6 show the data memory organization for the PIC18F/LF1XK50 devices. The data memory contains Special Function Registers (SFRs) and General Purpose Registers (GPRs). The SFRs are used for control and status of the controller and peripheral functions, while GPRs are used for data storage and scratchpad operations in the user’s application. Any read of an unimplemented location will read as ‘0’s. The instruction set and architecture allow operations across all banks. The entire data memory may be accessed by Direct, Indirect or Indexed Addressing modes. Addressing modes are discussed later in this subsection. To ensure that commonly used registers (SFRs and select GPRs) can be accessed in a single cycle, PIC18 devices implement an Access Bank. This is a 256-byte memory space that provides fast access to SFRs and the lower portion of GPR Bank 0 without using the Bank Select Register (BSR). Section 3.3.3 “Access Bank” provides a detailed description of the Access RAM. 3.3.1 USB RAM Part of the data memory is actually mapped to a special dual access RAM. When the USB module is disabled, the GPRs in these banks are used like any other GPR in the data memory space. When the USB module is enabled, the memory in these banks is allocated as buffer RAM for USB operation. This area is shared between the microcontroller core and the USB Serial Interface Engine (SIE) and is used to transfer data directly between the two. It is theoretically possible to use the areas of USB RAM that are not allocated as USB buffers for normal scratchpad memory or other variable storage. In practice, the dynamic nature of buffer allocation makes this risky at best. Additional information on USB RAM and buffer operation is provided in Section 22.0 “Universal Serial Bus (USB)” 3.3.2 BANK SELECT REGISTER (BSR) Large areas of data memory require an efficient addressing scheme to make rapid access to any address possible. Ideally, this means that an entire address does not need to be provided for each read or write operation. For PIC18 devices, this is accomplished with a RAM banking scheme. This divides the memory space into 16 contiguous banks of 256 bytes. Depending on the instruction, each location can be addressed directly by its full 12-bit address, or an 8-bit low-order address and a 4-bit Bank Pointer. Most instructions in the PIC18 instruction set make use of the Bank Pointer, known as the Bank Select Register (BSR). This SFR holds the 4 Most Significant bits of a location’s address; the instruction itself includes the 8 Least Significant bits. Only the four lower bits of the BSR are implemented (BSR<3:0>). The upper four bits are unused; they will always read ‘0’ and cannot be written to. The BSR can be loaded directly by using the MOVLB instruction. The value of the BSR indicates the bank in data memory; the 8 bits in the instruction show the location in the bank and can be thought of as an offset from the bank’s lower boundary. The relationship between the BSRs value and the bank division in data memory is shown in Figure 3-5 and Figure 3-6. Since up to 16 registers may share the same low-order address, the user must always be careful to ensure that the proper bank is selected before performing a data read or write. For example, writing what should be program data to an 8-bit address of F9h while the BSR is 0Fh will end up resetting the program counter. While any bank can be selected, only those banks that are actually implemented can be read or written to. Writes to unimplemented banks are ignored, while reads from unimplemented banks will return ‘0’s. Even so, the STATUS register will still be affected as if the operation was successful. The data memory maps in Figure 3-5 and Figure 3-6 indicate which banks are implemented. In the core PIC18 instruction set, only the MOVFF instruction fully specifies the 12-bit address of the source and target registers. This instruction ignores the BSR completely when it executes. All other instructions include only the low-order address as an operand and must use either the BSR or the Access Bank to locate their target registers. Note: The operation of some aspects of data memory are changed when the PIC18 extended instruction set is enabled. See Section 3.5 “Data Memory and the Extended Instruction Set” for more information. PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 36 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 3-5: DATA MEMORY MAP FOR PIC18F13K50/PIC18LF13K50 DEVICES Bank 0 Bank 1 Bank 14 Bank 15 BSR<3:0> Data Memory Map = 0000 = 0001 = 1111 060h 05Fh F60h FFFh 00h 5Fh 60h FFh Access Bank When ‘a’ = 0: The BSR is ignored and the Access Bank is used. The first 96 bytes are general purpose RAM (from Bank 0). The second 160 bytes are Special Function Registers (from Bank 15). When ‘a’ = 1: The BSR specifies the Bank used by the instruction. F5Fh F00h EFFh 1FFh 100h 0FFh Access RAM 000h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h GPR GPR SFR Access RAM High Access RAM Low Bank 2 = 0110 = 0010 (SFRs) 2FFh 200h 3FFh 300h 4FFh 400h 5FFh 500h 6FFh 600h 7FFh 700h 8FFh 800h 9FFh 900h AFFh A00h BFFh B00h CFFh C00h DFFh D00h E00h Bank 3 Bank 4 Bank 5 Bank 6 Bank 7 Bank 8 Bank 9 Bank 10 Bank 11 Bank 12 Bank 13 FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h = 0011 = 0100 = 0101 = 0111 = 1000 = 1001 = 1010 = 1011 = 1100 = 1101 = 1110 Unused Read 00h Unused Unused Read 00h F53h SFR(1) Note 1: SFRs occupying F53h to F5Fh address space are not in the virtual bank (DPRAM) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 37 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 FIGURE 3-6: DATA MEMORY MAP FOR PIC18F14K50/PIC18LF14K50 DEVICES Bank 0 Bank 1 Bank 14 Bank 15 BSR<3:0> Data Memory Map = 0000 = 0001 = 1111 060h 05Fh 00h 5Fh 60h FFh Access Bank When ‘a’ = 0: The BSR is ignored and the Access Bank is used. The first 96 bytes are general purpose RAM (from Bank 0). The second 160 bytes are Special Function Registers (from Bank 15). When ‘a’ = 1: The BSR specifies the Bank used by the instruction. F00h EFFh 1FFh 100h 0FFh Access RAM 000h FFh 00h FFh 00h GPR GPR Access RAM High Access RAM Low Bank 2 = 0110 = 0010 (SFRs) 2FFh 200h 3FFh 300h 4FFh 400h 5FFh 500h 6FFh 600h 7FFh 700h 8FFh 800h 9FFh 900h AFFh A00h BFFh B00h CFFh C00h DFFh D00h E00h Bank 3 Bank 4 Bank 5 Bank 6 Bank 7 Bank 8 Bank 9 Bank 10 Bank 11 Bank 12 Bank 13 FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h GPR FFh 00h = 0011 = 0100 = 0101 = 0111 = 1000 = 1001 = 1010 = 1011 = 1100 = 1101 = 1110 Unused Read 00h Note 1: SFRs occupying F53h to F5Fh address space are not in the virtual bank F60h FFFh F5Fh FFh 00h SFR Unused F53h SFR(1) (DPRAM) PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 38 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 3-7: USE OF THE BANK SELECT REGISTER (DIRECT ADDRESSING) Note 1: The Access RAM bit of the instruction can be used to force an override of the selected bank (BSR<3:0>) to the registers of the Access Bank. 2: The MOVFF instruction embeds the entire 12-bit address in the instruction. Data Memory Bank Select(2) 7 0 From Opcode(2) 0 0 0 0 000h 100h 200h 300h F00h E00h FFFh Bank 0 Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank 14 Bank 15 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh 00h FFh Bank 3 through Bank 13 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 0 BSR(1) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 39 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 3.3.3 ACCESS BANK While the use of the BSR with an embedded 8-bit address allows users to address the entire range of data memory, it also means that the user must always ensure that the correct bank is selected. Otherwise, data may be read from or written to the wrong location. This can be disastrous if a GPR is the intended target of an operation, but an SFR is written to instead. Verifying and/or changing the BSR for each read or write to data memory can become very inefficient. To streamline access for the most commonly used data memory locations, the data memory is configured with an Access Bank, which allows users to access a mapped block of memory without specifying a BSR. The Access Bank consists of the first 96 bytes of memory (00h-5Fh) in Bank 0 and the last 160 bytes of memory (60h-FFh) in Block 15. The lower half is known as the “Access RAM” and is composed of GPRs. This upper half is also where the device’s SFRs are mapped. These two areas are mapped contiguously in the Access Bank and can be addressed in a linear fashion by an 8-bit address (Figure 3-5 and Figure 3- 6). The Access Bank is used by core PIC18 instructions that include the Access RAM bit (the ‘a’ parameter in the instruction). When ‘a’ is equal to ‘1’, the instruction uses the BSR and the 8-bit address included in the opcode for the data memory address. When ‘a’ is ‘0’, however, the instruction is forced to use the Access Bank address map; the current value of the BSR is ignored entirely. Using this “forced” addressing allows the instruction to operate on a data address in a single cycle, without updating the BSR first. For 8-bit addresses of 60h and above, this means that users can evaluate and operate on SFRs more efficiently. The Access RAM below 60h is a good place for data values that the user might need to access rapidly, such as immediate computational results or common program variables. Access RAM also allows for faster and more code efficient context saving and switching of variables. The mapping of the Access Bank is slightly different when the extended instruction set is enabled (XINST Configuration bit = 1). This is discussed in more detail in Section 3.5.3 “Mapping the Access Bank in Indexed Literal Offset Mode”. 3.3.4 GENERAL PURPOSE REGISTER FILE PIC18 devices may have banked memory in the GPR area. This is data RAM, which is available for use by all instructions. GPRs start at the bottom of Bank 0 (address 000h) and grow upwards towards the bottom of the SFR area. GPRs are not initialized by a Power-on Reset and are unchanged on all other Resets. 3.3.5 SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTERS The Special Function Registers (SFRs) are registers used by the CPU and peripheral modules for controlling the desired operation of the device. These registers are implemented as static RAM. SFRs start at the top of data memory (FFFh) and extend downward to occupy the top portion of Bank 15 (F60h to FFFh). A list of these registers is given in Table 3-1 and Table 3-2. The SFRs can be classified into two sets: those associated with the “core” device functionality (ALU, Resets and interrupts) and those related to the peripheral functions. The Reset and interrupt registers are described in their respective chapters, while the ALU’s STATUS register is described later in this section. Registers related to the operation of a peripheral feature are described in the chapter for that peripheral. The SFRs are typically distributed among the peripherals whose functions they control. Unused SFR locations are unimplemented and read as ‘0’s. PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 40 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 3-1: SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER MAP FOR PIC18F/LF1XK50 DEVICES Address Name Address Name Address Name Address Name Address Name FFFh TOSU FD7h TMR0H FAFh SPBRG F87h —(2) F5Fh UEIR FFEh TOSH FD6h TMR0L FAEh RCREG F86h —(2) F5Eh UFRMH FFDh TOSL FD5h T0CON FADh TXREG F85h —(2) F5Dh UFRML FFCh STKPTR FD4h —(2) FACh TXSTA F84h —(2) F5Ch UADDR FFBh PCLATU FD3h OSCCON FABh RCSTA F83h —(2) F5Bh UEIE FFAh PCLATH FD2h OSCCON2 FAAh — F82h PORTC F5Ah UEP7 FF9h PCL FD1h WDTCON FA9h EEADR F81h PORTB F59h UEP6 FF8h TBLPTRU FD0h RCON FA8h EEDATA F80h PORTA F58h UEP5 FF7h TBLPTRH FCFh TMR1H FA7h EECON2(1) F7Fh ANSELH F57h UEP4 FF6h TBLPTRL FCEh TMR1L FA6h EECON1 F7Eh ANSEL F56h UEP3 FF5h TABLAT FCDh T1CON FA5h —(2) F7Dh —(2) F55h UEP2 FF4h PRODH FCCh TMR2 FA4h —(2) F7Ch —(2) F54h UEP1 FF3h PRODL FCBh PR2 FA3h —(2) F7Bh —(2) F53h UEP0 FF2h INTCON FCAh T2CON FA2h IPR2 F7Ah IOCB FF1h INTCON2 FC9h SSPBUF FA1h PIR2 F79h IOCA FF0h INTCON3 FC8h SSPADD FA0h PIE2 F78h WPUB FEFh INDF0(1) FC7h SSPSTAT F9Fh IPR1 F77h WPUA FEEh POSTINC0(1) FC6h SSPCON1 F9Eh PIR1 F76h SLRCON FEDh POSTDEC0(1) FC5h SSPCON2 F9Dh PIE1 F75h —(2) FECh PREINC0(1) FC4h ADRESH F9Ch —(2) F74h —(2) FEBh PLUSW0(1) FC3h ADRESL F9Bh OSCTUNE F73h —(2) FEAh FSR0H FC2h ADCON0 F9Ah —(2) F72h —(2) FE9h FSR0L FC1h ADCON1 F99h —(2) F71h —(2) FE8h WREG FC0h ADCON2 F98h —(2) F70h —(2) FE7h INDF1(1) FBFh CCPR1H F97h —(2) F6Fh SSPMASK FE6h POSTINC1(1) FBEh CCPR1L F96h —(2) F6Eh —(2) FE5h POSTDEC1(1) FBDh CCP1CON F95h —(2) F6Dh CM1CON0 FE4h PREINC1(1) FBCh REFCON2 F94h TRISC F6Ch CM2CON1 FE3h PLUSW1(1) FBBh REFCON1 F93h TRISB F6Bh CM2CON0 FE2h FSR1H FBAh REFCON0 F92h TRISA F6Ah —(2) FE1h FSR1L FB9h PSTRCON F91h —(2) F69h SRCON1 FE0h BSR FB8h BAUDCON F90h —(2) F68h SRCON0 FDFh INDF2(1) FB7h PWM1CON F8Fh —(2) F67h —(2) FDEh POSTINC2(1) FB6h ECCP1AS F8Eh —(2) F66h —(2) FDDh POSTDEC2(1) FB5h —(2) F8Dh —(2) F65h —(2) FDCh PREINC2(1) FB4h —(2) F8Ch —(2) F64h UCON FDBh PLUSW2(1) FB3h TMR3H F8Bh LATC F63h USTAT FDAh FSR2H FB2h TMR3L F8Ah LATB F62h UIR FD9h FSR2L FB1h T3CON F89h LATA F61h UCFG FD8h STATUS FB0h SPBRGH F88h —(2) F60h UIE Note 1: This is not a physical register. 2: Unimplemented registers are read as ‘0’. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 41 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 TABLE 3-2: REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (PIC18F/LF1XK50) File Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on POR, BOR Details on page: TOSU — — — Top-of-Stack Upper Byte (TOS<20:16>) ---0 0000 285, 30 TOSH Top-of-Stack, High Byte (TOS<15:8>) 0000 0000 285, 30 TOSL Top-of-Stack, Low Byte (TOS<7:0>) 0000 0000 285, 30 STKPTR STKFUL STKUNF — SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 00-0 0000 285, 31 PCLATU — — — Holding Register for PC<20:16> ---0 0000 285, 30 PCLATH Holding Register for PC<15:8> 0000 0000 285, 30 PCL PC, Low Byte (PC<7:0>) 0000 0000 285, 30 TBLPTRU — — — Program Memory Table Pointer Upper Byte (TBLPTR<20:16>) ---0 0000 285, 54 TBLPTRH Program Memory Table Pointer, High Byte (TBLPTR<15:8>) 0000 0000 285, 54 TBLPTRL Program Memory Table Pointer, Low Byte (TBLPTR<7:0>) 0000 0000 285, 54 TABLAT Program Memory Table Latch 0000 0000 285, 54 PRODH Product Register, High Byte xxxx xxxx 285, 65 PRODL Product Register, Low Byte xxxx xxxx 285, 65 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RABIE TMR0IF INT0IF RABIF 0000 000x 285, 70 INTCON2 RABPU INTEDG0 INTEDG1 INTEDG2 — TMR0IP — RABIP 1111 -1-1 285, 71 INTCON3 INT2IP INT1IP — INT2IE INT1IE — INT2IF INT1IF 11-0 0-00 285, 72 INDF0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 not changed (not a physical register) N/A 285, 47 POSTINC0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 post-incremented (not a physical register) N/A 285, 47 POSTDEC0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 post-decremented (not a physical register) N/A 285, 47 PREINC0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 pre-incremented (not a physical register) N/A 285, 47 PLUSW0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 pre-incremented (not a physical register) – value of FSR0 offset by W N/A 285, 47 FSR0H — — — — Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 0, High Byte ---- 0000 285, 47 FSR0L Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 0, Low Byte xxxx xxxx 285, 47 WREG Working Register xxxx xxxx 285 INDF1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 not changed (not a physical register) N/A 285, 47 POSTINC1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 post-incremented (not a physical register) N/A 285, 47 POSTDEC1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 post-decremented (not a physical register) N/A 285, 47 PREINC1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 pre-incremented (not a physical register) N/A 285, 47 PLUSW1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 pre-incremented (not a physical register) – value of FSR1 offset by W N/A 285, 47 FSR1H — — — — Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 1, High Byte ---- 0000 286, 47 FSR1L Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 1, Low Byte xxxx xxxx 286, 47 BSR — — — — Bank Select Register ---- 0000 286, 35 INDF2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 not changed (not a physical register) N/A 286, 47 POSTINC2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 post-incremented (not a physical register) N/A 286, 47 POSTDEC2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 post-decremented (not a physical register) N/A 286, 47 PREINC2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 pre-incremented (not a physical register) N/A 286, 47 PLUSW2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 pre-incremented (not a physical register) – value of FSR2 offset by W N/A 286, 47 FSR2H — — — — Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 2, High Byte ---- 0000 286, 47 FSR2L Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 2, Low Byte xxxx xxxx 286, 47 STATUS — — — N OV Z DC C ---x xxxx 286, 45 Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, — = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition Note 1: The SBOREN bit is only available when the BOREN<1:0> Configuration bits = 01; otherwise it is disabled and reads as ‘0’. See Section 23.4 “Brown-out Reset (BOR)”. 2: The RA3 bit is only available when Master Clear Reset is disabled (MCLRE Configuration bit = 0). Otherwise, RA3 reads as ‘0’. This bit is read-only. 3: Bits RA0 and RA1 are available only when USB is disabled. PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 42 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TMR0H Timer0 Register, High Byte 0000 0000 286, 103 TMR0L Timer0 Register, Low Byte xxxx xxxx 286, 103 T0CON TMR0ON T08BIT T0CS T0SE PSA T0PS2 T0PS1 T0PS0 1111 1111 286, 101 OSCCON IDLEN IRCF2 IRCF1 IRCF0 OSTS IOSF SCS1 SCS0 0011 qq00 286, 20 OSCCON2 — — — — — PRI_SD HFIOFL LFIOFS ---- -10x 286, 21 WDTCON — — — — — — — SWDTEN --- ---0 286, 303 RCON IPEN SBOREN(1) — RI TO PD POR BOR 0q-1 11q0 277, 284, 79 TMR1H Timer1 Register, High Byte xxxx xxxx 286, 110 TMR1L Timer1 Register, Low Bytes xxxx xxxx 286, 110 T1CON RD16 T1RUN T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC TMR1CS TMR1ON 0000 0000 286, 105 TMR2 Timer2 Register 0000 0000 286, 112 PR2 Timer2 Period Register 1111 1111 286, 112 T2CON — T2OUTPS3 T2OUTPS2 T2OUTPS1 T2OUTPS0 TMR2ON T2CKPS1 T2CKPS0 -000 0000 286, 111 SSPBUF SSP Receive Buffer/Transmit Register xxxx xxxx 286, 143, 144 SSPADD SSP Address Register in I2C™ Slave Mode. SSP Baud Rate Reload Register in I2C Master Mode. 0000 0000 286, 144 SSPSTAT SMP CKE D/A P S R/W UA BF 0000 0000 286, 137, 146 SSPCON1 WCOL SSPOV SSPEN CKP SSPM3 SSPM2 SSPM1 SSPM0 0000 0000 286, 137, 146 SSPCON2 GCEN ACKSTAT ACKDT ACKEN RCEN PEN RSEN SEN 0000 0000 286, 147 ADRESH A/D Result Register, High Byte xxxx xxxx 287, 221 ADRESL A/D Result Register, Low Byte xxxx xxxx 287, 221 ADCON0 — — CHS3 CHS2 CHS1 CHS0 GO/DONE ADON --00 0000 287, 215 ADCON1 — — — — PVCFG1 PVCFG0 NVCFG1 NVCFG0 ---- 0000 287, 216 ADCON2 ADFM — ACQT2 ACQT1 ACQT0 ADCS2 ADCS1 ADCS0 0-00 0000 287, 217 CCPR1H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1, High Byte xxxx xxxx 287, 138 CCPR1L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1, Low Byte xxxx xxxx 287, 138 CCP1CON P1M1 P1M0 DC1B1 DC1B0 CCP1M3 CCP1M2 CCP1M1 CCP1M0 0000 0000 287, 117 REFCON2 — — — DAC1R4 DAC1R3 DAC1R2 DAC1R1 DAC1R0 ---0 0000 287, 248 REFCON1 D1EN D1LPS DAC1OE --- D1PSS1 D1PSS0 — D1NSS 000- 00-0 287, 248 REFCON0 FVR1EN FVR1ST FVR1S1 FVR1S0 — — — — 0001 00-- 287, 247 PSTRCON — — — STRSYNC STRD STRC STRB STRA ---0 0001 287, 134 BAUDCON ABDOVF RCIDL DTRXP CKTXP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN 0100 0-00 287, 192 PWM1CON PRSEN PDC6 PDC5 PDC4 PDC3 PDC2 PDC1 PDC0 0000 0000 287, 133 ECCP1AS ECCPASE ECCPAS2 ECCPAS1 ECCPAS0 PSSAC1 PSSAC0 PSSBD1 PSSBD0 0000 0000 287, 129 TMR3H Timer3 Register, High Byte xxxx xxxx 287, 115 TMR3L Timer3 Register, Low Byte xxxx xxxx 287, 115 T3CON RD16 — T3CKPS1 T3CKPS0 T3CCP1 T3SYNC TMR3CS TMR3ON 0-00 0000 287, 113 TABLE 3-2: REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (PIC18F/LF1XK50) (CONTINUED) File Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on POR, BOR Details on page: Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, — = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition Note 1: The SBOREN bit is only available when the BOREN<1:0> Configuration bits = 01; otherwise it is disabled and reads as ‘0’. See Section 23.4 “Brown-out Reset (BOR)”. 2: The RA3 bit is only available when Master Clear Reset is disabled (MCLRE Configuration bit = 0). Otherwise, RA3 reads as ‘0’. This bit is read-only. 3: Bits RA0 and RA1 are available only when USB is disabled. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 43 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 SPBRGH EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register, High Byte 0000 0000 287, 181 SPBRG EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register, Low Byte 0000 0000 287, 181 RCREG EUSART Receive Register 0000 0000 287, 182 TXREG EUSART Transmit Register 0000 0000 287, 181 TXSTA CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 0000 0010 287, 190 RCSTA SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D 0000 000x 287, 191 EEADR EEADR7 EEADR6 EEADR5 EEADR4 EEADR3 EEADR2 EEADR1 EEADR0 0000 0000 287, 52, 61 EEDATA EEPROM Data Register 0000 0000 287, 52, 61 EECON2 EEPROM Control Register 2 (not a physical register) 0000 0000 287, 52, 61 EECON1 EEPGD CFGS — FREE WRERR WREN WR RD xx-0 x000 287, 53, 61 IPR2 OSCFIP C1IP C2IP EEIP BCLIP USBIP TMR3IP – 1111 111- 288, 78 PIR2 OSCFIF C1IF C2IF EEIF BCLIF USBIF TMR3IF – 0000 000- 288, 74 PIE2 OSCFIE C1IE C2IE EEIE BCLIE USBIE TMR3IE – 0000 000- 288, 76 IPR1 – ADIP RCIP TXIP SSPIP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP -111 1111 288, 77 PIR1 – ADIF RCIF TXIF SSPIF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF -000 0000 288, 73 PIE1 – ADIE RCIE TXIE SSPIE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE -000 0000 288, 75 OSCTUNE INTSRC SPLLEN TUN5 TUN4 TUN3 TUN2 TUN1 TUN0 0000 0000 22, 288 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 1111 1111 288, 94 TRISB TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 – – – – 1111 ---- 288, 89 TRISA – – TRISA5 TRISA4 – – – – --11 ---- 288, 83 LATC LATC7 LATC6 LATC5 LATC4 LATC3 LATC2 LATC1 LATC0 xxxx xxxx 288, 94 LATB LATB7 LATB6 LATB5 LATB4 – – – – xxxx ---- 288, 89 LATA – – LATA5 LATA4 – – – – --xx ---- 288, 83 PORTC RC7 RC6 RC5 RC4 RC3 RC2 RC1 RC0 xxxx xxxx 288, 94 PORTB RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 – – – – xxxx ---- 288, 89 PORTA – – RA5 RA4 RA3(2) – RA1(3) RA0(3) --xx x-xx 288, 83 ANSELH — — — — ANS11 ANS10 ANS9 ANS8 ---- 1111 288, 99 ANSEL ANS7 ANS6 ANS5 ANS4 ANS3 — — — 1111 1--- 288, 98 IOCB IOCB7 IOCB6 IOCB5 IOCB4 — — — — 0000 ---- 288, 89 IOCA — — IOCA5 IOCA4 IOCA3 — IOCA1 IOCA0 --00 0-00 288, 83 WPUB WPUB7 WPUB6 WPUB5 WPUB4 — — — — 1111 ---- 288, 89 WPUA — — WPUA5 WPUA4 WPUA3 — — — --11 1--- 285, 89 SLRCON — — — — — SLRC SLRB SLRA ---- -111 288, 100 SSPMSK MSK7 MSK6 MSK5 MSK4 MSK3 MSK2 MSK1 MSK0 1111 1111 288, 154 CM1CON0 C1ON C1OUT C1OE C1POL C1SP C1R C1CH1 C1CH0 0000 1000 288, 229 CM2CON1 MC1OUT MC2OUT C1RSEL C2RSEL C1HYS C2HYS C1SYNC C2SYNC 0000 0000 288, 230 CM2CON0 C2ON C2OUT C2OE C2POL C2SP C2R C2CH1 C2CH0 0000 1000 288, 230 SRCON1 SRSPE SRSCKE SRSC2E SRSC1E SRRPE SRRCKE SRRC2E SRRC1E 0000 0000 288, 243 SRCON0 SRLEN SRCLK2 SRCLK1 SRCLK0 SRQEN SRNQEN SRPS SRPR 0000 0000 288, 242 UCON — PPBRST SE0 PKTDIS USBEN RESUME SUSPND — -0x0 000- 288, 252 TABLE 3-2: REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (PIC18F/LF1XK50) (CONTINUED) File Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on POR, BOR Details on page: Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, — = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition Note 1: The SBOREN bit is only available when the BOREN<1:0> Configuration bits = 01; otherwise it is disabled and reads as ‘0’. See Section 23.4 “Brown-out Reset (BOR)”. 2: The RA3 bit is only available when Master Clear Reset is disabled (MCLRE Configuration bit = 0). Otherwise, RA3 reads as ‘0’. This bit is read-only. 3: Bits RA0 and RA1 are available only when USB is disabled. PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 44 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. USTAT — ENDP3 ENDP2 ENDP1 ENDP0 DIR PPBI — -xxx xxx- 289, 256 UIR — SOFIF STALLIF IDLEIF TRNIF ACTVIF UERRIF URSTIF -000 0000 289, 266 UCFG UTEYE — — UPUEN — FSEN PPB1 PPB0 0--0 -000 289, 254 UIE — SOFIE STALLIE IDLEIE TRNIE ACTVIE UERRIE URSTIE -000 0000 289, 268 UEIR BTSEF — — BTOEF DFN8EF CRC16EF CRC5EF PIDEF 0--0 0000 289, 269 UFRMH — — — — — FRM10 FRM9 FRM8 ---- -xxx 289, 252 UFRML FRM7 FRM6 FRM5 FRM4 FRM3 FRM2 FRM1 FRM0 xxxx xxxx 289, 252 UADDR — ADDR6 ADDR5 ADDR4 ADDR3 ADDR2 ADDR1 ADDR0 -000 0000 289, 258 UEIE BTSEE — — BTOEE DFN8EE CRC16EE CRC5EE PIDEE 0--0 0000 289, 270 UEP7 – – – EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL ---0 0000 289, 257 UEP6 – – – EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL ---0 0000 289, 257 UEP5 – – – EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL ---0 0000 289, 257 UEP4 – – – EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL ---0 0000 289, 257 UEP3 – – – EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL ---0 0000 289, 257 UEP2 – – – EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL ---0 0000 289, 257 UEP1 – – – EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL ---0 0000 289, 257 UEP0 – – – EPHSHK EPCONDIS EPOUTEN EPINEN EPSTALL ---0 0000 285, 257 TABLE 3-2: REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (PIC18F/LF1XK50) (CONTINUED) File Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on POR, BOR Details on page: Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, — = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition Note 1: The SBOREN bit is only available when the BOREN<1:0> Configuration bits = 01; otherwise it is disabled and reads as ‘0’. See Section 23.4 “Brown-out Reset (BOR)”. 2: The RA3 bit is only available when Master Clear Reset is disabled (MCLRE Configuration bit = 0). Otherwise, RA3 reads as ‘0’. This bit is read-only. 3: Bits RA0 and RA1 are available only when USB is disabled. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 45 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 3.3.6 STATUS REGISTER The STATUS register, shown in Register 3-2, contains the arithmetic status of the ALU. As with any other SFR, it can be the operand for any instruction. If the STATUS register is the destination for an instruction that affects the Z, DC, C, OV or N bits, the results of the instruction are not written; instead, the STATUS register is updated according to the instruction performed. Therefore, the result of an instruction with the STATUS register as its destination may be different than intended. As an example, CLRF STATUS will set the Z bit and leave the remaining Status bits unchanged (‘000u u1uu’). It is recommended that only BCF, BSF, SWAPF, MOVFF and MOVWF instructions are used to alter the STATUS register, because these instructions do not affect the Z, C, DC, OV or N bits in the STATUS register. For other instructions that do not affect Status bits, see the instruction set summaries in Table 25-2 and Table 25-3. Note: The C and DC bits operate as the borrow and digit borrow bits, respectively, in subtraction. REGISTER 3-2: STATUS: STATUS REGISTER U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x — — — N OV Z DC(1) C(1) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 N: Negative bit This bit is used for signed arithmetic (two’s complement). It indicates whether the result was negative (ALU MSB = 1). 1 = Result was negative 0 = Result was positive bit 3 OV: Overflow bit This bit is used for signed arithmetic (two’s complement). It indicates an overflow of the 7-bit magnitude which causes the sign bit (bit 7 of the result) to change state. 1 = Overflow occurred for signed arithmetic (in this arithmetic operation) 0 = No overflow occurred bit 2 Z: Zero bit 1 = The result of an arithmetic or logic operation is zero 0 = The result of an arithmetic or logic operation is not zero bit 1 DC: Digit Carry/Borrow bit (ADDWF, ADDLW,SUBLW,SUBWF instructions)(1) 1 = A carry-out from the 4th low-order bit of the result occurred 0 = No carry-out from the 4th low-order bit of the result bit 0 C: Carry/Borrow bit (ADDWF, ADDLW, SUBLW, SUBWF instructions)(1) 1 = A carry-out from the Most Significant bit of the result occurred 0 = No carry-out from the Most Significant bit of the result occurred Note 1: For Borrow, the polarity is reversed. A subtraction is executed by adding the two’s complement of the second operand. For rotate (RRF, RLF) instructions, this bit is loaded with either the high-order or low-order bit of the source register. PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 46 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 3.4 Data Addressing Modes While the program memory can be addressed in only one way – through the program counter – information in the data memory space can be addressed in several ways. For most instructions, the addressing mode is fixed. Other instructions may use up to three modes, depending on which operands are used and whether or not the extended instruction set is enabled. The addressing modes are: • Inherent • Literal • Direct • Indirect An additional addressing mode, Indexed Literal Offset, is available when the extended instruction set is enabled (XINST Configuration bit = 1). Its operation is discussed in greater detail in Section 3.5.1 “Indexed Addressing with Literal Offset”. 3.4.1 INHERENT AND LITERAL ADDRESSING Many PIC18 control instructions do not need any argument at all; they either perform an operation that globally affects the device or they operate implicitly on one register. This addressing mode is known as Inherent Addressing. Examples include SLEEP, RESET and DAW. Other instructions work in a similar way but require an additional explicit argument in the opcode. This is known as Literal Addressing mode because they require some literal value as an argument. Examples include ADDLW and MOVLW, which respectively, add or move a literal value to the W register. Other examples include CALL and GOTO, which include a 20-bit program memory address. 3.4.2 DIRECT ADDRESSING Direct addressing specifies all or part of the source and/or destination address of the operation within the opcode itself. The options are specified by the arguments accompanying the instruction. In the core PIC18 instruction set, bit-oriented and byteoriented instructions use some version of direct addressing by default. All of these instructions include some 8-bit literal address as their Least Significant Byte. This address specifies either a register address in one of the banks of data RAM (Section 3.3.4 “General Purpose Register File”) or a location in the Access Bank (Section 3.3.3 “Access Bank”) as the data source for the instruction. The Access RAM bit ‘a’ determines how the address is interpreted. When ‘a’ is ‘1’, the contents of the BSR (Section 3.3.2 “Bank Select Register (BSR)”) are used with the address to determine the complete 12-bit address of the register. When ‘a’ is ‘0’, the address is interpreted as being a register in the Access Bank. Addressing that uses the Access RAM is sometimes also known as Direct Forced Addressing mode. A few instructions, such as MOVFF, include the entire 12-bit address (either source or destination) in their opcodes. In these cases, the BSR is ignored entirely. The destination of the operation’s results is determined by the destination bit ‘d’. When ‘d’ is ‘1’, the results are stored back in the source register, overwriting its original contents. When ‘d’ is ‘0’, the results are stored in the W register. Instructions without the ‘d’ argument have a destination that is implicit in the instruction; their destination is either the target register being operated on or the W register. 3.4.3 INDIRECT ADDRESSING Indirect addressing allows the user to access a location in data memory without giving a fixed address in the instruction. This is done by using File Select Registers (FSRs) as pointers to the locations which are to be read or written. Since the FSRs are themselves located in RAM as Special File Registers, they can also be directly manipulated under program control. This makes FSRs very useful in implementing data structures, such as tables and arrays in data memory. The registers for indirect addressing are also implemented with Indirect File Operands (INDFs) that permit automatic manipulation of the pointer value with auto-incrementing, auto-decrementing or offsetting with another value. This allows for efficient code, using loops, such as the example of clearing an entire RAM bank in Example 3-5. EXAMPLE 3-5: HOW TO CLEAR RAM (BANK 1) USING INDIRECT ADDRESSING Note: The execution of some instructions in the core PIC18 instruction set are changed when the PIC18 extended instruction set is enabled. See Section 3.5 “Data Memory and the Extended Instruction Set” for more information. LFSR FSR0, 100h ; NEXT CLRF POSTINC0 ; Clear INDF ; register then ; inc pointer BTFSS FSR0H, 1 ; All done with ; Bank1? BRA NEXT ; NO, clear next CONTINUE ; YES, continue 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 47 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 3.4.3.1 FSR Registers and the INDF Operand At the core of indirect addressing are three sets of registers: FSR0, FSR1 and FSR2. Each represents a pair of 8-bit registers, FSRnH and FSRnL. Each FSR pair holds a 12-bit value, therefore the four upper bits of the FSRnH register are not used. The 12-bit FSR value can address the entire range of the data memory in a linear fashion. The FSR register pairs, then, serve as pointers to data memory locations. Indirect addressing is accomplished with a set of Indirect File Operands, INDF0 through INDF2. These can be thought of as “virtual” registers: they are mapped in the SFR space but are not physically implemented. Reading or writing to a particular INDF register actually accesses its corresponding FSR register pair. A read from INDF1, for example, reads the data at the address indicated by FSR1H:FSR1L. Instructions that use the INDF registers as operands actually use the contents of their corresponding FSR as a pointer to the instruction’s target. The INDF operand is just a convenient way of using the pointer. Because indirect addressing uses a full 12-bit address, data RAM banking is not necessary. Thus, the current contents of the BSR and the Access RAM bit have no effect on determining the target address. 3.4.3.2 FSR Registers and POSTINC, POSTDEC, PREINC and PLUSW In addition to the INDF operand, each FSR register pair also has four additional indirect operands. Like INDF, these are “virtual” registers which cannot be directly read or written. Accessing these registers actually accesses the location to which the associated FSR register pair points, and also performs a specific action on the FSR value. They are: • POSTDEC: accesses the location to which the FSR points, then automatically decrements the FSR by 1 afterwards • POSTINC: accesses the location to which the FSR points, then automatically increments the FSR by 1 afterwards • PREINC: automatically increments the FSR by 1, then uses the location to which the FSR points in the operation • PLUSW: adds the signed value of the W register (range of -127 to 128) to that of the FSR and uses the location to which the result points in the operation. In this context, accessing an INDF register uses the value in the associated FSR register without changing it. Similarly, accessing a PLUSW register gives the FSR value an offset by that in the W register; however, neither W nor the FSR is actually changed in the operation. Accessing the other virtual registers changes the value of the FSR register. FIGURE 3-8: INDIRECT ADDRESSING FSR1H:FSR1L 7 0 Data Memory 000h 100h 200h 300h F00h E00h FFFh Bank 0 Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank 14 Bank 15 Bank 3 through Bank 13 ADDWF, INDF1, 1 7 0 Using an instruction with one of the indirect addressing registers as the operand.... ...uses the 12-bit address stored in the FSR pair associated with that register.... ...to determine the data memory location to be used in that operation. In this case, the FSR1 pair contains ECCh. This means the contents of location ECCh will be added to that of the W register and stored back in ECCh. x x x x 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 48 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Operations on the FSRs with POSTDEC, POSTINC and PREINC affect the entire register pair; that is, rollovers of the FSRnL register from FFh to 00h carry over to the FSRnH register. On the other hand, results of these operations do not change the value of any flags in the STATUS register (e.g., Z, N, OV, etc.). The PLUSW register can be used to implement a form of indexed addressing in the data memory space. By manipulating the value in the W register, users can reach addresses that are fixed offsets from pointer addresses. In some applications, this can be used to implement some powerful program control structure, such as software stacks, inside of data memory. 3.4.3.3 Operations by FSRs on FSRs Indirect addressing operations that target other FSRs or virtual registers represent special cases. For example, using an FSR to point to one of the virtual registers will not result in successful operations. As a specific case, assume that FSR0H:FSR0L contains FE7h, the address of INDF1. Attempts to read the value of the INDF1 using INDF0 as an operand will return 00h. Attempts to write to INDF1 using INDF0 as the operand will result in a NOP. On the other hand, using the virtual registers to write to an FSR pair may not occur as planned. In these cases, the value will be written to the FSR pair but without any incrementing or decrementing. Thus, writing to either the INDF2 or POSTDEC2 register will write the same value to the FSR2H:FSR2L. Since the FSRs are physical registers mapped in the SFR space, they can be manipulated through all direct operations. Users should proceed cautiously when working on these registers, particularly if their code uses indirect addressing. Similarly, operations by indirect addressing are generally permitted on all other SFRs. Users should exercise the appropriate caution that they do not inadvertently change settings that might affect the operation of the device. 3.5 Data Memory and the Extended Instruction Set Enabling the PIC18 extended instruction set (XINST Configuration bit = 1) significantly changes certain aspects of data memory and its addressing. Specifically, the use of the Access Bank for many of the core PIC18 instructions is different; this is due to the introduction of a new addressing mode for the data memory space. What does not change is just as important. The size of the data memory space is unchanged, as well as its linear addressing. The SFR map remains the same. Core PIC18 instructions can still operate in both Direct and Indirect Addressing mode; inherent and literal instructions do not change at all. Indirect addressing with FSR0 and FSR1 also remain unchanged. 3.5.1 INDEXED ADDRESSING WITH LITERAL OFFSET Enabling the PIC18 extended instruction set changes the behavior of indirect addressing using the FSR2 register pair within Access RAM. Under the proper conditions, instructions that use the Access Bank – that is, most bit-oriented and byte-oriented instructions – can invoke a form of indexed addressing using an offset specified in the instruction. This special addressing mode is known as Indexed Addressing with Literal Offset, or Indexed Literal Offset mode. When using the extended instruction set, this addressing mode requires the following: • The use of the Access Bank is forced (‘a’ = 0) and • The file address argument is less than or equal to 5Fh. Under these conditions, the file address of the instruction is not interpreted as the lower byte of an address (used with the BSR in direct addressing), or as an 8-bit address in the Access Bank. Instead, the value is interpreted as an offset value to an Address Pointer, specified by FSR2. The offset and the contents of FSR2 are added to obtain the target address of the operation. 3.5.2 INSTRUCTIONS AFFECTED BY INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE Any of the core PIC18 instructions that can use direct addressing are potentially affected by the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode. This includes all byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions, or almost one-half of the standard PIC18 instruction set. Instructions that only use Inherent or Literal Addressing modes are unaffected. Additionally, byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions are not affected if they do not use the Access Bank (Access RAM bit is ‘1’), or include a file address of 60h or above. Instructions meeting these criteria will continue to execute as before. A comparison of the different possible addressing modes when the extended instruction set is enabled is shown in Figure 3-9. Those who desire to use byte-oriented or bit-oriented instructions in the Indexed Literal Offset mode should note the changes to assembler syntax for this mode. This is described in more detail in Section 25.2.1 “Extended Instruction Syntax”. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 49 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 FIGURE 3-9: COMPARING ADDRESSING OPTIONS FOR BIT-ORIENTED AND BYTE-ORIENTED INSTRUCTIONS (EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET ENABLED) EXAMPLE INSTRUCTION: ADDWF, f, d, a (Opcode: 0010 01da ffff ffff) When ‘a’ = 0 and f 60h: The instruction executes in Direct Forced mode. ‘f’ is interpreted as a location in the Access RAM between 060h and 0FFh. This is the same as locations F60h to FFFh (Bank 15) of data memory. Locations below 60h are not available in this addressing mode. When ‘a’ = 0 and f5Fh: The instruction executes in Indexed Literal Offset mode. ‘f’ is interpreted as an offset to the address value in FSR2. The two are added together to obtain the address of the target register for the instruction. The address can be anywhere in the data memory space. Note that in this mode, the correct syntax is now: ADDWF [k], d where ‘k’ is the same as ‘f’. When ‘a’ = 1 (all values of f): The instruction executes in Direct mode (also known as Direct Long mode). ‘f’ is interpreted as a location in one of the 16 banks of the data memory space. The bank is designated by the Bank Select Register (BSR). The address can be in any implemented bank in the data memory space. 000h 060h 100h F00h F60h FFFh Valid range 00h 60h FFh Data Memory Access RAM Bank 0 Bank 1 through Bank 14 Bank 15 SFRs 000h 060h 100h F00h F60h FFFh Data Memory Bank 0 Bank 1 through Bank 14 Bank 15 SFRs FSR2H FSR2L 001001da ffffffff 001001da ffffffff 000h 060h 100h F00h F60h FFFh Data Memory Bank 0 Bank 1 through Bank 14 Bank 15 SFRs for ‘f’ BSR 00000000 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 50 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 3.5.3 MAPPING THE ACCESS BANK IN INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE The use of Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode effectively changes how the first 96 locations of Access RAM (00h to 5Fh) are mapped. Rather than containing just the contents of the bottom section of Bank 0, this mode maps the contents from a user defined “window” that can be located anywhere in the data memory space. The value of FSR2 establishes the lower boundary of the addresses mapped into the window, while the upper boundary is defined by FSR2 plus 95 (5Fh). Addresses in the Access RAM above 5Fh are mapped as previously described (see Section 3.3.3 “Access Bank”). An example of Access Bank remapping in this addressing mode is shown in Figure 3-10. Remapping of the Access Bank applies only to operations using the Indexed Literal Offset mode. Operations that use the BSR (Access RAM bit is ‘1’) will continue to use direct addressing as before. 3.6 PIC18 Instruction Execution and the Extended Instruction Set Enabling the extended instruction set adds eight additional commands to the existing PIC18 instruction set. These instructions are executed as described in Section 25.2 “Extended Instruction Set”. FIGURE 3-10: REMAPPING THE ACCESS BANK WITH INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET ADDRESSING Data Memory 000h 100h 200h F60h F00h FFFh Bank 1 Bank 15 Bank 2 through Bank 14 SFRs ADDWF f, d, a FSR2H:FSR2L = 120h Locations in the region from the FSR2 pointer (120h) to the pointer plus 05Fh (17Fh) are mapped to the bottom of the Access RAM (000h-05Fh). Special File Registers at F60h through FFFh are mapped to 60h through FFh, as usual. Bank 0 addresses below 5Fh can still be addressed by using the BSR. Access Bank 00h 60h FFh SFRs Bank 1 “Window” Bank 0 Window Example Situation: 120h 17Fh 5Fh Bank 1 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41350E-page 51 PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 4.0 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY The Flash program memory is readable, writable and erasable during normal operation over the entire VDD range. A read from program memory is executed one byte at a time. A write to program memory is executed on blocks of 16 or 8 bytes at a time depending on the specific device (See Table 4-1). Program memory is erased in blocks of 64 bytes at a time. The difference between the write and erase block sizes requires from 1 to 8 block writes to restore the contents of a single block erase. A bulk erase operation can not be issued from user code. TABLE 4-1: WRITE/ERASE BLOCK SIZES Writing or erasing program memory will cease instruction fetches until the operation is complete. The program memory cannot be accessed during the write or erase, therefore, code cannot execute. An internal programming timer terminates program memory writes and erases. A value written to program memory does not need to be a valid instruction. Executing a program memory location that forms an invalid instruction results in a NOP. 4.1 Table Reads and Table Writes In order to read and write program memory, there are two operations that allow the processor to move bytes between the program memory space and the data RAM: • Table Read (TBLRD) • Table Write (TBLWT) The program memory space is 16 bits wide, while the data RAM space is 8 bits wide. Table reads and table writes move data between these two memory spaces through an 8-bit register (TABLAT). The table read operation retrieves one byte of data directly from program memory and places it into the TABLAT register. Figure 4-1 shows the operation of a table read. The table write operation stores one byte of data from the TABLAT register into a write block holding register. The procedure to write the contents of the holding registers into program memory is detailed in Section 4.5 “Writing to Flash Program Memory”. Figure 4-2 shows the operation of a table write with program memory and data RAM. Table operations work with byte entities. Tables containing data, rather than program instructions, are not required to be word aligned. Therefore, a table can start and end at any byte address. If a table write is being used to write executable code into program memory, program instructions will need to be word aligned. FIGURE 4-1: TABLE READ OPERATION Device Write Block Size (bytes) Erase Block Size (bytes) PIC18F13K50 8 64 PIC18F14K50 16 64 Table Pointer(1) Table Latch (8-bit) Program Memory TBLPTRH TBLPTRL TABLAT TBLPTRU Instruction: TBLRD* Note 1: Table Pointer register points to a byte in program memory. Program Memory (TBLPTR) PIC18F1XK50/PIC18LF1XK50 DS41350E-page 52 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 4-2: TABLE WRITE OPERATION 4.2 Control Registers Several control registers are used in conjunction with the TBLRD and TBLWT instructions. These include the: • EECON1 register • EECON2 register • TABLAT register • TBLPTR registers 4.2.1 EECON1 AND EECON2 REGISTERS The EECON1 register (Register 4-1) is the control register for memory accesses. The EECON2 register is not a physical register; it is used exclusively in the memory write and erase sequences. Reading EECON2 will read all ‘0’s. The EEPGD control bit determines if the access will be a program or data EEPROM memory access. When EEPGD is clear, any subsequent operations will operate on the data EEPROM memory. When EEPGD is set, any subsequent operations will operate on the program memory. The CFGS control bit determines if the access will be to the Configuration/Calibration registers or to program memory/data EEPROM memory. When CFGS is set, subsequent operations will operate on Configuration registers regardless of EEPGD (see Section 24.0 “Special Features of the CPU”). When CFGS is clear, memory selection access is determined by EEPGD. The FREE bit allows the program memory erase operation. When FREE is set, an erase operation is initiated on the next WR command. When FREE is clear, only writes are enabled. The WREN bit, when set, will allow a write operation. The WREN bit is clear on power-up. The WRERR bit is set by hardware when the WR bit is set and cleared when the internal programming timer expires and the write operation is complete. The WR control bit initiates write operations. The WR bit cannot be cleared, only set, by firmware. Then WR bit is cleared by hardware at the completion of the write operation. Table Pointer(1) Table Latch (8-bit) TBLPTRH TBLPTRL TABLAT Program Memory (TBLPTR